LTE - B1 Intermediate

INTERMEDIATE B1
TEACHER’S HANDBOOK
LET’S TALK!
ENGLISH
LET’S TALK! ENGLISH
INTERMEDIATE LEVEL B1
Robotel Corp.
Milwaukee, WI 53224
U.S.A.
© Robotel Corp. 2018
First published in 2018
Printed in Canada
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be

reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means, without the prior written
permission of Robotel Corp., or as expressly permitted by
law, by license or under terms agreed with the appropriate
reprographics rights organization. Inquiries concerning
reproduction outside the scope of the above should be
sent to the Robotel Corp. Marketing Department, at the
above address.
Photocopying
The Publisher grants permission for the photocopying

of those pages marked “photocopiable” according to the
following conditions. Individual purchasers may make
copies for their own use or for use by classes that they
teach. School purchasers may make copies for use by
staff and students, but this permission does not extend
to additional schools or branches.
Under no circumstances may any part of this book be

photocopied for resale.
Acknowledgements
Authors: Lindsey Klein

Danielle Kempf
Co-Authors: Erin Swierczek

Hannah Haase
Chelsea Frazier
Illustrator: Mirella Morrone
Technical Consultant: Gerry Sullivan
Collaborators: Dede Paquette

Elizabeth Henderson
Eva Ennamorato
Mia Allen

Videographer/Editor: Kelsi Gard
Many thanks to the participants that played a role in the

videos for the book. As well, a thank you to our main
characters: Jack, Connor, Skylar, and Grace.
Acknowledgements
Robotel Corp., would like to thank the following for their kind
permission to reproduce photographs and other copyright
material. All-free-downloads.com, pxhere.com, pixabay.com,
pexels.com, adobe.com, freeimages.com, wikipedia.
Although every effort has been made to trace and contact copy-
right holders before publication, this has not been possible in
some cases. We apologize for any apparent infringement of
copyright and, if notified, the publisher will be pleased to rectify
any errors or omissions at the earliest possible opportunity.
ISBN: 978-1-7326616-0-8
SmartClass® and Robotel® are registered trademarks of Robotel Corp.

CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION I - IV
CHAPTER ONE
ALL ABOUT YOU
1-1 TO 1-61
CHAPTER TWO
FREE TIME
2-1 TO 2-63
CHAPTER THREE
FAMILY
3-1 TO 3-56
CHAPTER FOUR
SCHOOL
4-1 TO 4-54
CHAPTER FIVE
5-1 TO 5-66
SHOPPING
CHAPTER SIX
6-1 TO 6-61
ENTERTAINMENT
RUBRIC R-1 TO R-6

Revision 1.0
Copyright © Robotel Corp.
Robotel Inc. (HQ)

Robotel Corporation Laval, QC H7L 5A4
Milwaukee, WI 53224 Canada
USA
+1 (450) 680-1448
+1 (800) 465-0356 +1 (800) 680-1448 (US & Canada)
+1 (450) 680-1928
info@robotel.com
www.robotel.com info@robotel.com
www.robotel.com
Robotel Middle East

Robotel Oceania
Amman, 11953
Melbourne, VIC 3109
Jordan
Australia
+962 795088015
+61 (0) 4 3090 1475
+1 (450) 680-1448
info@robotel.com
info@robotel.com
Robotel South America Robotel China

Salesianos 1400, Santiago Digital Square, Dalian
Chile China
+56 9 6909 3722 +86 41184541414
info@robotel.com info@robotel.com
All materials in this document (except as noted) are ©copyrighted by Robotel Corp. Do not reprint without express written permission.
The LET’S TALK! ENGLISH is partitioned into five (5) different courses, corresponding to levels A1, A2,
B1, B2 and C1 of the Common European Framework of Reference (CEFR) for languages as described
below:
LEVEL DESCRIPTION
 Can understand everyday expressions and very basic phrases
A1 Beginner  Can introduce themselves and answer personal questions
 Can interact in a simple way with others
BASIC
 Can understand sentences and frequently used expressions

A2 Elementary  Can communicate in simple and routine tasks
 Can describe in simple terms aspects of their background
 Can understand topics concerning family, work, school, etc.
INDEPENDENT
B1 Intermediate  Can deal with most situations that arise while traveling
 Can describe experiences, events, dreams, hopes & ambitions
 Can understand main ideas on both concrete & abstract topics
B2 Upper
 Can interact with a degree of fluency and spontaneity
Intermediate  Can produce clear detailed text on a wide array of subjects
 Can understand a wide range of demanding clauses
C1 Advanced  Can express ideas fluently and spontaneously
PROFICIENT
 Can use language effectively, socially & professionally

 Can understand with ease virtually everything heard or read
C2 Proficiency  Can summarize information and reconstruct arguments
 Can express themselves very fluently and precisely
SMARTCLASS+
LET’S TALK! ENGLISH is designed to be used in conjunction with the SmartClass+ language lab platform.
The majority of activities presented herein require the use of the SmartClass+ Live Activities Dashboard
(LAD) for classwork and/or the use of the SmartClass+ Media Activities Dashboard (MAD) for self-study
work. The icons shown below are used to indicate which dashboard should be used with each activity.
I
LET’S TALK ENGLISH
CONTENT VOCABULARY GRAMMAR
CHAPTER 1 - ALL ABOUT YOU
Review Present Simple

1 What is your daily routine? Daily Routine Adverbs and Adverbial Phrases
of Time
Review Questions in the Present

Simple
2 How would you describe a family member? Describe a Person
Modal Verbs of Deduction:
must and can’t
Review Present Continuous

3 How do you use technology? Communication Today
Intensifiers
CHAPTER 2 - FREE TIME
Review Past Simple

1 What is your favorite sport? Playing a Sport
Review Present Perfect
Review Questions in the Past

2 What sports have you played? Expansion of Free Time Simple
Adverbs of Time
Review Past Continuous

3 Let’s talk about your favorite athletes! Competing in Sports
Present Perfect Continuous
CHAPTER 3 - FAMILY
Subordinating Conjunctions:
Holidays and
1 Let’s plan a party!
Celebrations
- Time and Place
- Condition
Expansion of Alternative Comparative Forms

2 What do you like about yourself?
Characteristics Question Tags
Past Modals of Deduction

3 Do you give advice? Relationships and Advice
Making Friendly Suggestions
II OVERVIEW
INTERMEDIATE LEVEL B1
CONTENT VOCABULARY GRAMMAR
CHAPTER 4 - SCHOOL
Using will for Prediction

1 What will you do in the future? Continuing Education
Future Continuous
Modals of Prediction
2 Study hard for finals! In the Classroom Connecting Words:
Cause & Effect
Review 1st Conditional

3 Where will you study next? College Life
2nd Conditional
CHAPTER 5 - SHOPPING
Separable Phrasal Verbs

1 A list of places to go! Running Errands
Nouns Used as Adjectives
Determiners: both, either,

2 Let’s put an outfit together! Clothing and Fashion neither
Another, other(s), the other(s)
Relative Clauses: Subjects

3 What's on sale? Going Shopping Active vs. Passive Voice:
Present Simple
CHAPTER 6 - ENTERTAINMENT
Past Perfect
1 What’s your favorite TV show or movie? Expansion of Film & TV
Adjectives Endings: -ed vs. -ing
Common Verb + Preposition

2 Part of the band! Expansion of Music Combinations
Connecting Words: Contrast
Review of Tense
3 What do you want to see? Entertainment & News Passive Voice: Past, Present,
Future
OVERVIEW III
Welcome to Milwaukee, Wisconsin (USA)!
Throughout this book you will follow 4 students as they discuss topics relevant to each chapter.
These students live in the Milwaukee, Wisconsin area and are excited to be a part of your English
learning experience.
My name is Jack Jones. My name is Jason Schmidt, and

I am 19 years old and come I am 17 years old. I was born in
from Sussex, Wisconsin where Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Next year
I was born and raised. I go to I will be attending Pace University
the University of Wisconsin -
in New York City. I will be studying
Oshkosh where I will study
business. In my free time, I acting. In my free time, I enjoy
enjoy working on cars and watching movies, listening to
being with my friends or family. music, and riding my bike.
Hi! My name is Emily Fields, Hello! My name is Kaitlyn Miles.

and I’m 19 years old. I was born I am 19 years old, and I come
in Dallas, Texas but was raised from and live in Milwaukee,
and currently live in Wisconsin.
Wisconsin. I also go to college
I go to college at Purdue
University, and I am studying at the University of Wisconsin -
German and Marketing. In my Milwaukee. I am studying dance
free time, I enjoy listening to while in college. In my free time,
music, reading, playing tennis, I enjoy spending time with my
and hanging out with friends. friends and family.
IV INTRODUCTION
1 CHAPTER ONE
ALL ABOUT YOU
VOCABULARY
Daily Routine ................................................................ 1-4
Describe a Person ....................................................... 1-19
Communication Today ............................................... 1-31
GRAMMAR
Review Present Simple ............................................... 1-7
Adverbs and Adverbial Phrases of Time ................ 1-9
Review Questions in the Present Simple .............. 1-22
Modal Verbs of Deduction (must and can’t) ......... 1-25
Review Present Continuous ..................................... 1-36
Intensifiers .................................................................... 1-40
CONVERSATION
What’s your daily routine? ......................................... 1-15
Complete the routine! ................................................ 1-15
Describe your family! .................................................. 1-28
A picture is worth a thousand words. .................... 1-28
Technology Today ....................................................... 1-44
Which blog interests you? ......................................... 1-44
READING
Different Types of Morning People ......................... 1-17
Host Family Wanted .................................................... 1-29
Social Media Usage US vs. UK .................................. 1-45
LET’S TALK!
Video - Let’s talk about daily routines! .................... 1-47
LEARNING OBJECTIVES Interviews - Let’s talk about you! .............................. 1-48
I will be able to...
• discuss daily routines. REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

• use adverbs and adverbial phrases of time. Review ............................................................................ 1-51
Projects .......................................................................... 1-56
• use modal verbs of deduction for descriptions. Assessment ................................................................... 1-57
• discuss communication with technology.
• use intensifiers with adjectives.
INTRODUCTION 1-1
1
INTRO SECTION 1 SECTION 2 SECTION 3 LET’S TALK! REVIEW & ASSESSMENT
THE UNITED KINGDOM

CULTURE IN THE UK
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Famous People:
William Shakespeare
Queen Elizabeth II
Diana, Princess of Wales
Charles Darwin
Stephen Hawking
J.K. Rowling
Jane Austen
Name: The United Kingdom of Great Britain Monuments:

and Northern Ireland Buckingham Palace
Nicknames: United Kingdom, UK, Britain Windsor Castle
Capital City: London Tower Bridge
Other Major Cities: Belfast, Birmingham, Cardiff, Stonehenge
Edinburgh, Glasgow, Manchester St. Paul’s Cathedral
Edinburgh Castle
Population: 66.02 million (2017)
Hadrian’s Wall
Area: 93,628 mi² (square miles)
Mount Snowdon
Currency: Pound Sterling
The Palace of Westminster
Languages Spoken: English, Scots, Welsh, Scottish
Gaelic, Cornish
Flag: Known For:
The Beatles, Wimbledon, Pubs, Fish & Chips,
University of Oxford, University of Cambridge,
National Anthem: God Save the Queen Loch Ness, Snowdonia National Park, Cricket,
National Bird: European Robin Football (soccer), the Industrial Revolution
National Flower: Rose
Giant’s Causeway - Northern Ireland Broad Escape of Scotland London Phone Booth Buckingham Palace Entrance London’s Big Ben
INTERNET SEARCH: (in your language)

1. William Shakespeare is known as one of the greatest writers who ever
lived. His plays are still in theaters across the world. Find a play written by
Shakespeare that you would want to see and where you can see it.
2. There are many famous musicians and bands from the United Kingdom. Find
a musical group that plays music that you like. When was their music popular?
Do you ever hear it on the radio? Talk about the music as a class.
1-2 INTRODUCTION
1
VOCABULARY
SECTION 1 VOCABULARY: Daily Routine
Getting Ready Nouns Other Words and Phrases
to brush to go to bed * the alarm clock afterwards
my hair to put on / put / put the brush beforehand
my teeth clothes the comb later
to comb makeup the conditioner
to dry / dried / dried to shave the razor
to fall asleep * to take * the routine
to go to sleep / went / gone a bath the shampoo
to get * a shower the shaving cream
dressed to take off * the toothbrush
ready to wake up / woke / woken the toothpaste
up
SECTION 2 VOCABULARY: Describe a Person

Synonyms Antonyms Other Words and Phrases
angry happy smart happy / unhappy to describe
mad cheerful brilliant nice / mean different
furious glad intelligent polite / rude the opposite
beautiful sad strange positive / negative the same
lovely depressed unique silly / serious to talk about
pretty unhappy unusual smart / stupid What do you think about... ?
friendly scared thin strong / weak
sweet afraid skinny
frightened slim
SECTION 3 VOCABULARY: Communication Today

Using Technology Using a Cell Phone
to blog / blogged / blogged the post the app to install
the blog to record to call back to take a selfie *
the blogger to reply / replied / replied to charge the volume
to comment the social media to connect to turn down
to engage the technology the connection to turn up
to forget / forgot / forgotten to upload to hang up / hung / hung Wi-Fi
the image the username Intensifiers
the password the webcam
the photograph (photo) quite slightly unbelievably
*Go to the Irregular Verb chart to review the conjugations. INTRODUCTION 1-3
1
VOCABULARY
DAILY ROUTINE
ACTIVITY 1.1.1 - SPEAK

MAD Open Recording
Record yourself saying as much as possible about the Section 1 Vocabulary picture. What words or
phrases do you know? What do you see? What is happening in the picture?
TEACHER NOTE: After students complete the activity in the MAD, discuss the image as a class using the
LAD Presentation Mode.
ACTIVITY 1.1.2 - READ, LISTEN, & SPEAK

MAD Pronunication - Flashcards
Section 1 Vocabulary Practice
TEACHER NOTE: Translate the words and phrases in this MAD activity before assigning it.
ACTIVITY 1.1.3 Part 1 and Part 2 - READ

MAD Text Match
Match the correct translation in your language with each Section 1 Vocabulary word or phrase.
ACTIVITY 1.1.4 - WRITE

MAD Open Text
Type each Section 1 Vocabulary word or phrase three times.
1-4 SECTION 1
1
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
Pronounce sentences using Section 1 Vocabulary.
1. My mom wakes up at six o’clock in the morning. 6. Brush your teeth twice a day.
2. What time do you go to bed at night? 7. What time do you get up in the morning?
3. Wash your hands with soap and water. 8. Do you wear makeup?
4. Do you need any toothpaste? 9. My brother uses shaving cream to shave.
5. I like to read before I fall asleep. 10. I need a new alarm clock.
ACTIVITY 1.1.6 - LISTEN & WRITE

MAD Fill-in-the-Blanks
Listen to the vocabulary words or phrases from Section 1. Type each one as you hear it.
1. [the makeup] 9. [the alarm clock]
2. [the toothbrush] 10. [to put on your clothes]
3. [to take a bath] 11. [the brush]
4. [the daily routine] 12. [to use shampoo]
5. [to get dressed] 13. [to go to sleep]
6. [to fall asleep] 14. [the conditioner]
7. [the shaving cream] 15. [to dry my hands]
8. [to take off] 16. [to comb your hair]
LANGUAGE TIP
Oneself
You have now learned the nine English reflexive pronouns: myself, yourself, himself, herself, oneself, itself,
ourselves, yourselves, and themselves. You will see that some of these reflexive pronouns are used much
more often than others. “Oneself” is used in more formal situations, so you might not hear it very often.
It is a gender neutral pronoun that is most often used with the subject “one”. It is much more common to
use the subject “you” with the reflexive pronoun “yourself” instead. You could hear your teacher say,
“To learn the information, one should complete the homework by oneself.” Or, your teacher might say,
“To learn the information, you should complete the homework by yourself.”
ACTIVITY 1.1.7 - READ

MAD Text Match
Match each noun with the correct verb.
1. to shave the razor 5. to comb her hair the comb
2. to dry yourself the towel 6. to take a bath the conditioner
3. to put on clothes 7. to wash his face the soap
4. to brush my teeth the toothbrush 8. to wake up the alarm clock
SECTION 1 1-5
1
VOCABULARY
DAILY ROUTINE
ACTIVITY 1.1.8 - LISTEN
MAD Image Match
Listen to Amber describe her routine. Then, match each routine activity with the correct image.
During the week, I wake up at 6:00. After I wake up, I love to exercise. Then, I take a shower and get ready.
Afterwards, I eat breakfast. Then, I leave for work. I work from 9:00 a.m. until 4:30 p.m. After work, I go grocery
shopping. When I get home, I make and eat dinner. Finally, I get time to rest. I watch a television show and
have a snack. I go to bed around 10:00.
1. 3rd Activity 2. 8th Activity 3. 1st Activity
4. 9th Activity 5. 2nd Activity 6. 5th Activity
7. 7th Activity 8. 4th Activity 9. 6th Activity


MAD Continuous Recording
Describe Erin’s daily routine. As you see the pictures, say what she is doing.
1-6 SECTION 1
1
GRAMMAR
LET’S BREAK IT DOWN!
REVIEW PRESENT SIMPLE
I take a shower every day.
To express actions done daily
She brushes her teeth at the bathroom sink.
The bus leaves at 8 o’clock.

To express facts
The sun warms your face.
She feels happy today.

To express feelings
They want to sleep late this morning.
FORMATION OF THE PRESENT SIMPLE

Regular Verbs - Affirmative: Examples:
(verb + s for 3rd person singular) I shave

He shaves in the morning.
Examples:
Irregular Verbs - Affirmative: I have
He has breakfast in the morning.
If the verb ends with: -o, -s, -ch, -sh, -x, -z, then you add I am
an -es for the 3rd person singular. He is in the shower.
I go
He goes to bed at 10:00.
Regular and Irregular Verbs - Negative: Examples:
Use do not / does not in front of the verb. I do not shave in the morning.
He does not shave in the morning.
*If you need to review the grammar rules from previous levels, go to the Present Simple chart.
SECTION 1 1-7
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct present simple conjugation of each verb.
1. to fall asleep A. I fall asleep B. you fell asleep C. he was falling asleep
2. to wash A. she washs B. I washes C. they wash
3. to brush A. he brushed B. we brush C. I was brushing
4. to be A. they were B. it is C. she has been
5. to want A. he didn’t want B. I don’t want C. they doesn’t want
6. to comb A. he combs B. he combes C. we combed
7. to get up A. she gets up B. they gets up C. I got up
8. to shave A. they didn’t shave B. we were shaving C. he doesn’t shave
9. to have A. they has B. it have C. she has
10. to watch A. they watches B. he watches C. I watches

MAD Word Jumble
Put each statement in the correct word order.
1. I fall asleep ten minutes after I go to bed. 6. I have to get ready for school.
2. It is best to use shampoo and conditioner. 7. Everyone takes off their shoes in my house.
3. Some people use shaving cream. 8. Sean needs a new toothbrush.
4. She washes her hands with soap. 9. My mom prefers to take a bath.
5. You can use that towel.
ACTIVITY 1.1.12 - READ & WRITE

The verb is false in each sentence. Change each verb marked between the two asterisks (*) to make
each sentence true.
1. I *shave* my teeth with toothpaste. [brush]
2. You *wash* your hair with a towel. [dry]
3. They *wake up* sleep at 10 p.m. [go to]
4. She *brushes* a shower in the morning. [takes]
5. I *fall asleep* makeup before I go out. [put on]
6. I *comb* my body with a towel. [dry]
7. My alarm clock *puts* me up. [wakes]
8. We *go* ready to leave at 8 p.m. [get]
9. Please *put on* your shoes in my home. [take off]
10. Derek *washes* his hair with a comb. [combs]
1-8 SECTION 1
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Text
Use the images to write a short story about Paul’s daily routine.

MAD Open Recording
Talk about your daily routine. Use time whenever possible.

ADVERBS AND ADVERBIAL PHRASES OF TIME
Adverbs and adverbial phrases of time modify the action verb in the sentence to show when that action happened
(certain points of time) or how often that action has been happening (frequency).
Placement of Adverbs: They can be placed at the beginning, middle, or end of the sentence depending on the type
of adverb and the most important idea in the sentence.
Adverb Type List of Adverbs Placement

When? beforehand, now, then,
At the beginning or the end of the sentence
(shows certain point of time) afterwards, later
Examples:
I will brush my teeth now. (The idea “I will brush my teeth” is most important.)
Now I will brush my teeth. (The idea that I am brushing my teeth “now” is most important.)
I shower afterwards. (The idea “I shower” is most important.)
Afterwards I shower. (The idea that it happens “afterwards” is most important.)
Note: “Beforehand” is usually placed at the end of the sentence.

I took a shower beforehand.
SECTION 1 1-9
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
ADVERBS AND ADVERBIAL PHRASES OF TIME (CONTINUED)
hourly, daily, monthly, weekly, yearly
How often? once a day Place adverbs that show a specific

(frequency - shows a specific number twice a week
three / four / five times a month time at the end of the sentence.
of times)
all the time
Examples:
I buy shampoo monthly. (Shows you buy it every month.)
I eat breakfast daily. (Shows you eat it every day.)

Place adverbs that show
How often? frequency but not a specific time
always, usually, often
(shows frequency - but not a specific period between the
sometimes, rarely, never
time) subject and the main verb
in the sentence.
Examples:
My alarm clock always wakes me up. (Shows it happens but does not show a specific time.)
I usually wake up at 6 a.m. (Shows it is regular habit to wake up at 6 a.m., but there may be times you don’t.)
I rarely go to bed after 11 p.m. (Shows it is not a regular habit, but there may be times you do.)
Note: “usually,” “sometimes,” and “often” can also be placed at the beginning of a sentence when you want to show
the importance of the frequency.
Usually I go to bed early.
Sometimes I go to bed early.
When using “often” at the beginning of a sentence, it is common to add an adverb of degree.
Very often, I go to bed early. OR Too often, I go to bed early.
1-10 SECTION 1
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Read each question. Then, choose the correct response based on the adverb placement.
1. How often do you brush your teeth? 6. Do you go to bed at 11:00 p.m.?
A. I twice a day brush my teeth. A. Rarely I go to bed at 11:00 p.m.
B. I brush my teeth twice a day. B. I go to bed rarely at 11:00 p.m.
C. I brush my twice a day teeth. C. I rarely go to bed at 11:00 p.m.
2. What time do you usually go to bed? 7. Do you get ready for work before you eat breakfast?
A. Usually I go to bed at 9. A. No, I get ready afterwards.
B. I go usually to bed at 9. B. No, I afterwards get ready.
C. I go to bed usually at 9. C. Yes, I get ready afterwards.
3. Do you use an alarm clock during the weekend? 8. Do you like to take baths?
A. No, I never use one. A. No, always I take a shower.
B. Yes, I use always one. B. No, I always take a shower.
C. No, I use one never. C. No, I take a shower always.
4. How often do you wash your hair? 9. How often do you put on makeup?
A. I three times a week wash it. A. Five times a week I wear makeup.
B. I wash three times a week it. B. I wear makeup five times a week.
C. I wash it three times a week. C. I five times a week wear makeup.
5. Do you use shaving cream? 10. How often do you wake up early?
A. I use sometimes shaving cream. A. I wake up often early.
B. I sometimes use shaving cream. B. I wake up early often.
C. I use shaving sometimes cream. C. Too often, I wake up early.

MAD Sentence Jumble
Put Kristi’s daily routine in the correct order.
1. My daily routine does not change much. Let me tell 5. Afterwards, I brush my teeth.
you about it. 6. Before I leave for school, I wash my face.
2. First of all, I wake up at six o’clock. 7. Then, I put on makeup.
3. Then, I get dressed before I go to the kitchen. 8. Finally, I go to the bus stop.
4. Next, I eat breakfast.

MAD Word Jumble
Put each statement or question in the correct word order.
1. Do you put on makeup daily? 6. Dustin wakes up early three times a week.
2. I rarely dry my hair with a towel. 7. You should brush your teeth twice a day.
3. What time do you usually go to bed? 8. Wash your hands with soap all the time.
4. Liam always uses shaving cream. 9. Afterwards, I take a shower and get ready
5. Please take off your shoes in my home. for the day.
SECTION 1 1-11
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match - Graded Order
Listen as two people describe their daily routines. First, put their routine in order in the “What?” category.
Then, match the daily activity with “How often?” the person does that activity. The order will be graded.
Beth: I wake up at 6:30 a.m., brush my teeth, and hop in the shower. I do this every morning because it helps
me wake up for the day. I wash my face and then wash it again before I go to bed. I comb and dry my hair.
During the week, I put on makeup but not on the weekends. I go to work at 8 a.m. and exercise Mondays,
Wednesdays, and Fridays after work at 4:30. I eat dinner and then curl up on the couch to watch a TV show
or read a book in the evening. I usually go to sleep by 10. I like the same schedule every day.
Jake: I am not a morning person, so I usually wake up as late as possible. Sometimes I wake up at 7:00 a.m.,
but I don’t get out of bed until 7:30 a.m. On Mondays and Fridays, I shave. I rarely am at work before 9 a.m.
I exercise all the time since my job is a fitness trainer. Therefore, I do not shower until I get home from work.
I like to watch TV after I eat dinner. I often lose track of time because I am a night owl. I try to go to bed
before midnight so that I get at least 7 hours of sleep. My days are usually different with no set
schedule.
Beth - What? Beth - How often? Jake - What? Jake - How often?
wakes up 6:30 a.m. always wakes up at 7:00 a.m. sometimes
showers daily shaves twice a week
washes face twice a day at work before 9 a.m. rarely
puts on makeup often exercises all the time
asleep by 10 p.m. usually reads a book never

MAD Open Text
Read Marisel’s daily routine. She is learning English and wrote six very beginner sentences.
Rewrite her routine using adverbs.
I wake up.
I eat breakfast.
I shower and get ready for the day.
I go to school.
I do my homework or watch television.
I go to bed.
1-12 SECTION 1
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.1.20 - LISTEN & SPEAK
MAD Segmented Recording
Listen to each question about Lucas’s daily schedule. Then, respond in the pauses provided using
complete sentences. Use one of the following adverbs in each response: always, usually, often,
sometimes, rarely, never, once, twice, three times, four times, or five times. Click “Done” to move
on to the next question.
Time Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

6:00 a.m. wake up wake up wake up wake up wake up
7:00 shower and shave exercise eat breakfast exercise shower
8:00 eat breakfast shower start work shower eat breakfast
9:00 start work eat breakfast eat breakfast start work
10:00 clean house clean house
11:00
12:00 p.m. eat lunch eat lunch go out to eat eat lunch eat lunch
1:00 go back to work
2:00
3:00
4:00 leave work leave work leave work
5:00 piano lesson
6:00 eat dinner eat dinner leave work eat dinner

hang out with
7:00 eat dinner friends and
eat dinner
8:00
9:00 watch TV read a book watch TV watch TV

brush teeth brush teeth brush teeth brush teeth
10:00 wash face wash face wash face wash face
go to bed go to bed go to bed go to bed
brush teeth
11:00 wash face
go to bed
SECTION 1 1-13
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.1.20 - LISTEN & SPEAK (Continued)
1. How often does Lucas go to bed at 11:00 p.m.?
2. How often does he have piano lessons?
3. How often does he wake up at 6:00 in the morning?
4. How often does he eat lunch at work?
5. How often does he leave work at 4:00 p.m.?
6. How often does he clean the house during the week?
7. How often does he eat dinner at 6:00 p.m.?
8. How often does he start work at 9:00 a.m.?
9. How often does he watch TV at 8:00 p.m.?
10. Lucas exercises twice a week. How often does he shower afterwards?
Possible answers:
1. Lucas rarely goes to bed at 11:00.
2. He has piano lessons once a week.
3. He always wakes up at 6:00 in the morning.
4. He eats lunch at work four times a week.
5. He usually (often) leaves work at 4:00.
6. He cleans the house twice a week.
7. He eats dinner at 6 p.m. three times a week.
8. He sometimes starts work at 8:00 a.m.
9. He never watches TV at 8:00 p.m.
10. He always showers afterwards.
1-14 SECTION 1
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.1.21 - What’s your daily routine?
LAD Pairing Activity
TEACHER NOTE: If you want to be able to listen to these conversations later, launch the recorder at the
beginning of this activity and hit record. Print the worksheet from the B1 Resources Google Doc Folder, or
download the B1StudentWorksheet.pdf.
First, write your daily routine activities. With a partner, discuss your routines. Talk about the start of your
day until the end of your day. Include the time of day, and use adverbs of time when you can. As you
listen to your partner, write his/her activities.
Time Your Daily Routine Your Partner’s Daily Routine
6:00 a.m.
7:00
8:00
9:00
10:00
11:00
12:00 p.m.
1:00
2:00
3:00
4:00
5:00
6:00
7:00
8:00
9:00
10:00
11:00

MAD Open Recording
Compare and contrast your schedule with your partner’s.
ACTIVITY 1.1.23 - Complete the routine!

First, decide who is going to be Partner A and who will be Partner B. Next, ask your partner for the
missing information for Amber’s daily routine. Make sure to use complete sentences when you speak.
Write the missing activities on your sheet.
SECTION 1 1-15
1
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.1.23 - Complete
SPEAK: Complete
the routine!
the routine!
(Continued)
(Continued)
Time PARTNER A Worksheet: Activity Time PARTNER B Worksheet: Activity
6:00 a.m. wake up and brush teeth 6:00 a.m.

6:15 6:15 exercise
6:45 shower and get ready 6:45
7:15 7:15 wake up kids
7:30 eat breakfast and pack lunches 7:30
8:15 8:15 drive kids to school
8:30 arrive at elementary school 8:30
9:00 9:00 start work
12:00 p.m. eat lunch 12:00 p.m.
1:00 1:00 start work again
5:00 leave work 5:00
5:15 5:15 pick up kids from after school care
5:30 arrive home and cook dinner 5:30
6:00
6:00 eat dinner
6:30 clean up and wash dishes
6:30
7:00
kids’ bedtime routine (take baths, brush teeth,
7:00 watch family T.V. show or play a board game
7:30
read books) 7:30
8:00 8:00 read a book or watch T.V.
9:45 get ready for bed (wash face, brush teeth, etc.) 9:45
10:00 10:00 fall asleep

MAD Sentence Jumble
Put Tony’s daily routine in the correct order based on the conversation activity.
1. Tony wakes up and brushes his teeth. 7. He arrives home and cooks dinner.
2. He exercises, showers, and gets ready. 8. He cleans up and washes dishes.
3. Tony eats breakfast. 9. He has a snack and watches T.V.
4. He takes takes his kids to school. 10. He washes his face and brushes his teeth.
5. He starts working. 11. He reads in bed.
6. He goes out for lunch. 12. He falls asleep.
1-16 SECTION 1
1
READING
DIFFERENT TYPES OF MORNING PEOPLE
Do you get up and exercise first thing in the morning? Or do you hit the snooze button 5 more times until you finally
crawl out of bed? Do you like to read the newspaper while you drink your coffee, or do you make yourself a nutritious
breakfast to start the day? Is 6:30 a.m. your ideal wake up time, or would you rather sleep until 7:30 a.m. every day?
There are many ways to start your day. What type of morning person are you?
1. The mindful risers:
Mindful risers like to get up earlier than the rest of their family (if they have one) to meditate or do
yoga in peace in the early morning hours. They take a long, relaxing shower afterward, followed
by a cup of tea while thinking about what they have to do for the day. They keep the mornings
positive, stress-free, and simple.
2. The exercisers:
Exercisers pretty much jump out of bed to go for a run or hit the gym. No matter the sport, it’s all
about waking up through motion and burning calories early on. The exercise is usually followed by
a quick shower, shave, or putting on makeup and then heading out the door with a protein shake or
smoothie in their hands.
3. The parents:
Parents usually get up way before their kids get up, which is, if they are lucky, somewhere between
6-7 a.m. That’s the only way to have a cup of coffee or read the news in peace. Making lunches,
packing backpacks, getting clothes out, unloading the dishwasher, cooking breakfast, and falling
over toys are the daily tasks a parent must go through. That’s all done in a matter of minutes right
before the real morning begins.
4. The snoozers:
The snoozers typically set their alarms at least one hour before they actually have to get up to get to
work/school. Once the alarm wakes them, they hit the snooze button. Then the same happens over
and over again, and again, and again. The super snoozers even set multiple alarms about 5 to 10
minutes apart in case they miss the snooze button the first time. Once they reach their last snooze,
they crawl out of bed like zombies. It’s advised to not talk to snoozers until they have had at least
three cups of coffee.
5. The doers:
The doers wake up ready to tackle whatever problem the day might have in store for them. They
usually write a to-do list right before they go to sleep and are ready to get things done as soon as
they wake up. Taking a shower, getting dressed, and eating a nutritious breakfast while reading the
latest news is usually done efficiently. Some doers also throw in a little exercise like biking to work
while listening to an audio book.
6. The non-schedulers:
The non-schedulers do not have a set routine. They might exercise once or twice a week. They
might take a shower in the morning or in the evening before going to sleep. Sometimes they go all
out and make themselves a nice breakfast with eggs or pancakes. Other days they just grab a coffee
and muffin from the gas station. They usually sleep in on the weekends and skip breakfast com-
pletely to enjoy brunch with friends. They are able to get to work a little early, if needed, but usually
don’t worry too much about anything.
SECTION 1 1-17
1
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Read the blog entry. Then, listen to each sentence, and place it under the correct category.
Sentence 1: They throw in a little exercise like biking to work while listening to an audio book.
Sentence 2: That’s the only way to have a cup of coffee or read the news in peace.
Sentence 3: They might exercise once or twice a week.
Sentence 4: Once the alarm wakes them, they hit the snooze button.
Sentence 5: They keep the mornings positive, stress-free, and simple.
Sentence 6: They take a long, relaxing shower afterward, followed by a cup of tea while thinking about
what they have to do for the day.
Sentence 7: They usually sleep in on the weekends and skip breakfast completely to enjoy brunch with
friends.
Sentence 8: The exercise is usually followed by a quick shower, shave, or putting on makeup and then
heading out the door with a protein shake or smoothie in their hands.
Sentence 9: They usually write a to-do list right before they go to sleep and are ready to get things done as
soon as they wake up.
Sentence 10: Once they reach their last snooze, they crawl out of bed like zombies.
Sentence 11: No matter the sport, it’s all about waking up through motion and burning
calories early on.
Sentence 12: They make breakfasts and lunches, pack backpacks, and get clothes out before the real morning
begins.
The mindful The The The The The non-

risers exercisers parents snoozers doers schedulers
Sentence 5 Sentence 8 Sentence 2 Sentence 4 Sentence 1 Sentence 3
Sentence 6 Sentence 11 Sentence 12 Sentence 10 Sentence 9 Sentence 7
ACTIVITY 1.1.26 - READ & SPEAK

MAD Open Recording
Answer each question about yourself in complete sentences.
1. Are you a morning person? Or more of a night owl?
2. What kind of morning person are you? Select one of the descriptions of morning people and explain
why you are that person.
3. Which type of morning routine is not like yours? What would you never do in the mornings?
4. Would you be open to trying out these different morning routines? Which one would be the most difficult
for you? Which one would be the easiest for you to follow?
1-18 SECTION 1
1
VOCABULARY
DESCRIBE A PERSON

MAD Open Recording
Say as much as possible about the Section 2 Vocabulary pictures.
What is happening in each picture? When have you felt those feelings and emotions?

ACTIVITY 1.2.3 - Part 1 and Part 2 - READ

MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text
SECTION 2 1-19
1
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. What do you think about my sister? 6. What makes you happy?
2. My brother and I are very opposite. 7. Our teacher is brilliant.
3. You are so silly! 8. His dad is really friendly.
4. Don’t be mean to her. 9. Are you sad today?
5. Why are you scared? 10. Your hair looks beautiful!
CULTURAL NOTE
Emojis
Emojis are small faces and images that you can add to a text message, email, blog, or social media post.
There are many categories of emojis such as emotions, food, animals, clothes, weather, and even flags from
countries around the world. Emojis are often used in informal situations between friends and family. You will
not see an emoji in a professional business document or an email from your doctor’s office.
Sometimes, emojis are used to replace a word:
Or to add emphasis to an emotion in a sentence:
Which emotions match these emojis?

Listen to short sentences using vocabulary words from Section 2. Type each one as you hear it.
1. [She is angry.] 9. [He is serious.]
2. [They are lovely.] 10. [They are furious.]
3. [It is unique.] 11. [He is a cheerful boy.]
4. [Are you frightened?] 12. [It is unusual.]
5. [He is skinny.] 13. [She is too thin.]
6. [Is she depressed?] 14. [That is stupid.]
7. [You are clever.] 15. [They are so rude.]
8. [She is sweet.] 16. [She is very friendly.]

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the word that is NOT a synonym for the word given.
1. beautiful A. lovely B. ugly C. pretty
2. scared A. weak B. frightened C. afraid
3. intelligent A. stupid B. clever C. smart
4. glad A. happy B. cheerful C. sad
5. skinny A. thin B. slim C. fat
6. nice A. sweet B. mean C. friendly
7. unique A. unusual B. strange C. happy
8. depressed A. cheerful B. sad C. unhappy
1-20 SECTION 2
1
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.2.8 - LISTEN & READ
MAD Image Match
Match each statement with the correct image.
Statement 6 Statement 3
1. Gabrielle is happy that 6. Olivia was nice to help
it’s her birthday. an older man.
2. Carter doesn’t want to 7. My aunt Nora is really

be so skinny. smart.
Statement 5
Statement 2
8. Nadia is feeling sad
3. Cora is scared of the dark.
today.
4. Miles is mad at his little 9. Stand out and be
sister. unique!
5. It is rude to be on your 10. Lucy loves to act silly.
phone.

Listen for the adjective in each sentence. Then, fill in each blank with the opposite adjective (the antonym).
For example: You hear: He can be so mean. You type: [nice]
1. Your little brother is so rude. [polite]
2. Becky is happy. [unhappy]
3. Samantha is smart. [stupid]
4. What are your negative characteristics? [positive]
5. Don’t be so serious! [silly]
6. Do you think you are weak? [strong]
7. Colton can be very nice. [mean]

MAD Open Recording
Describe your personality and the personalities of one family member and one friend. For each
personality you say, give a reason why you think they have that quality.
For example: You say: My mom is very friendly. She always says “hi” and asks how a person is doing.
SECTION 2 1-21
1
GRAMMAR
REVIEW QUESTIONS IN THE PRESENT SIMPLE
Remember that in English you usually need to add the helping (auxiliary) verb “do” to form a question in
present simple tense, but not with the verb to be.
Closed questions (Yes/No questions) Is she friendly?
Can be answered with a yes or a no. Does he shower every morning?
Open-ended questions (Information questions) How sweet is your grandma?

Cannot be answered with a yes or no. What does your aunt eat for breakfast?
Formation of questions when using to be. No helping verb is needed.

Question word or phrase to be conjugated subject other info + ?
Are they angry?
Why are they angry?
Is Mark unhappy?
Why is Mark unhappy?
Formation of questions when using any verb except to be. A helping verb is needed.
Question word Helping verb to do
subject main verb other info + ?
or phrase conjugated
Does he drive to work?
When does he drive to work?
Do you wear makeup?
How much makeup do you wear?
*If you need to review the grammar rules from previous levels, go to the Present Simple Questions chart.

MAD Word Jumble
Put each question in the correct word order.
1. What do you think about Michael? 6. What is something unique about you?
2. Are you and your brother opposites? 7. Why is Jillian sad today?
3. What makes you happy? 8. Is your dad a serious person?
4. Why is your mom mad? 9. Does she want to talk about it?
5. Could you describe yourself in one word?

Fill in each blank with the correct question word from the word bank.
Whom When Where How many Why

How much Which What How Who
1-22 SECTION 2
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.2.12 - READ & WRITE (Continued)
1. [What] did they do that was so mean? 6. [Who] is the strongest?
2. [How] friendly is she? 7. [Where] is my toothbrush?
3. [Whom] should I call? 8. [Which] toothpaste do you like better?
4. [How many] towels do you need? 9. [Why] are you unhappy?
5. [How much] does that alarm clock cost? 10. [When] are you going to get ready?

MAD Category Match
Listen to the discussion about Shane’s family. Then, place each word or phrase under the correct
family member it describes.
Cindy: Shane, let’s talk about your family. I don’t know much about them.
Shane: Okay, what do you want to know?
Cindy: What are your parents like?
Shane: My mom is a lovely person inside and out. She is always cheerful, intelligent, and afraid of nothing.
My dad is not much different. Some people say opposites attract, but my parents have many of the same
characteristics.
Cindy: They both sound wonderful. Do they really not have a single difference?
Shane: The only difference is that my dad gets angry a little easier than my mom.
Cindy: What makes him angry?
Shane: He really dislikes when we get a bad grade on a test. My mom is sweet about it and just tells us to
study harder next time.
Cindy: Oh, you have siblings?
Shane: Yes, a sister and a brother.
Cindy: Do you like them?
Shane: Of course. They are my family.
Cindy: What are they like?
Shane: My sister is silly and very fun to be around. She is also quite clever. She is usually happy, unlike my
brother.
Cindy: Is your brother unhappy?
Shane: I wouldn’t say unhappy, but definitely unusual. He has a strange kind of negative way of looking at the
world. He thinks most people are mean and rude. He is afraid of leaving the house.
Cindy: Well, there may be some people who are mean, but I like to think there are more good people in this
world than bad.
Shane: That’s a positive way to look at things. I think so, too.
Mom Dad Sister Brother
lovely cheerful silly unusual
cheerful intelligent fun strange
intelligent afraid of nothing clever negative
afraid of nothing angry happy afraid
sweet
SECTION 2 1-23
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
Listen to each question. Then, match it with the correct answer.
1. No, I’m just tired. Question 4: Are you mad?
2. We need three, please. Question 3: How many towels do you need?
3. No, I do not! You are nice. Question 6: Do you think I am mean?
4. Once a day, right before bed. Question 8: How often do you wash your face?
5. My daughter likes to get up at 6 a.m. Question 10: Who wakes up early in your family?
6. It’s my birthday today. Question 2: Why are you so happy?
7. It is next to your bed. Question 9: Where is my alarm clock?
8. They are really beautiful. Question 1: How pretty are the mountains?
9. I prefer to go to sleep at 10:00. Question 7: When do you go to bed?
10. I really like this one. Question 5: Which conditioner do you use?

MAD Open Recording
Say the question that led to the answer. Possible answers:
1. My mom is the silliest person in our family. Who is the silliest person in your family?
2. I think that Hunter is clever and friendly. What do you think about Hunter?
3. I’m scared because it is dark outside. Why are you scared?
4. I get dressed after I eat breakfast. When do you get dressed?
5. No, I did not wash my hands yet. Did you wash your hands?
6. I have two toothbrushes. How many toothbrushes do you have?
7. The towels are in the washing machine. Where are the towels?
8. My best friend is smart and funny. What is your best friend like?
9. Yes, I am happy today. Are you happy today?
10. No, I get dressed after breakfast. Do you get dressed before you eat breakfast?

Listen to each question. Then, use the images to respond in the pauses provided using complete
sentences. Click “Done” to move on to the next question.
Possible answers:
1. What time does Darren wake up in the morning? Darren wakes up at 6 a.m.
2. Is he cheerful when he wakes up? No, Darren is tired.
3. Which tie do you think he should wear to work? I think that he should wear the blue tie.
4. Why does Darren look worried? Darren is worried because he is late.
5. When does Darren start working? Darren starts working at 9 a.m.
6. Does Darren exercise before grocery shopping? No, he exercises afterwards.
7. Does Darren take a shower or a bath? He takes a shower.
8. Who cooks in his family? Darren cooks.
9. What does Darren do after eating dinner? He watches television.
10. What time does he go to sleep? He goes to sleep at 10 p.m.
1-24 SECTION 2
1
GRAMMAR
MODAL VERBS OF DEDUCTION (must and can’t)
Modal verbs are auxiliary verbs that work with the main verb in the sentence to show how sure we are that
something is true.
Modal verbs in the present simple tense:

Subject + modal verb + present tense verb + other info
Modal Verb Examples

He must be smart. He has earned an A in each of
his classes.
must - strong belief something is true
(We are guessing that he is smart because he has
an A in each class.)
She can’t be unhappy. I heard her singing in the shower.

can’t - strong belief that something is not true
(We think that she is happy because unhappy people do not
sing in the shower.)

Fill in each blank with either must or can’t.
1. Jordan [can’t] be very cheerful right now. He just broke his leg.
2. You [must] be furious that your suitcase is lost.
3. Rachel [must] be strong if she exercises every day.
4. The team [can’t] be sad. They won the game!
5. Lily [must] be frustrated. Her teacher hasn’t graded her paper yet.
6. Evan [can’t] be a very polite person. He never says please or thank you.
7. You [can’t] be tired. You slept for 10 hours!
8. Wyatt [must] be a nice person. He is always helping others.
9. They [must] be excited. They are taking a trip to London.
10. You [must] be glad that you are feeling better.

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the statement that does NOT make sense with the deduction statement.
1. The bedroom can’t be clean. 2. She must be thin.
A. There are clothes everywhere. A. She eats well and exercises regularly.
B. The bed is made. B. She never exercises.
C. The floor is not vacuumed. C. She eats a lot of fruits and vegetables.
SECTION 2 1-25
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.2.18 - READ (Continued)
MAD Multiple Choice
3. He can’t be glad. 4. I must go shopping.
A. He just sprained his wrist. A. I have an extra toothbrush in the closet.
B. He got an F on his science exam. B. She used the last of the conditioner today.
C. He is going to a concert tonight. C. He bought the wrong shampoo for me.
5. She must not be ready yet. 6. You can’t be ready for school.
A. Her hair isn’t dried. A. Fix your hair with a brush or comb.
B. She isn’t dressed. B. You are still not dressed.
C. She is walking out the door. C. You got up early today.
7. You must be angry. 8. That must be an unusual couch.
A. She broke your new watch. A. Everyone I know has this couch.
B. Your mom bought you a beautiful new dress. B. No one likes to sit on it.
C. He won’t even talk about the problem. C. No one has bought it yet.

MAD Category Match
Read each scenario. Then, place each letter under the correct scenario.
Scenario #1:
Last night was quite unusual. I went to bed at 9:00p.m. and fell asleep shortly after that. However, I woke up
at 2:00 a.m. and could not go back to sleep. I drank warm milk and tried reading a book on the couch. Nothing
was helping, so I finally went back to bed, closed my eyes, and fell asleep around four in the morning. Then, I
had to wake up at 6:30 to get ready for work. How awful!
Scenario #2:
My parents told my brother and me that we are going on vacation this summer to England. I have never
been on an airplane nor out of the country before. So, I am a little nervous. However, I know that the trip will
be amazing! We are going to stay in a hotel for two weeks. I am really looking forward to going sightseeing
because I love to take pictures.
Scenario #1 Scenario #2
C - You must be tired. B - You must be excited.
H - You can’t be happy to be awake. E - You must be a little afraid.
A - You must want to go to sleep. D - You can’t be unhappy.
F - You must need coffee. G - You must need to order a passport.
1-26 SECTION 2
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Question and Answer
Listen to each statement. Then, type if it is true or false. If the statement is false, you must correct it to
make it true. For example: You hear: Carter has a really bad cold. He must be happy.
You type: False. He can’t be happy. OR False. He must be sad.
Possible answers:
1. There is a fire in Sophia’s kitchen. She can’t be afraid. False. She must be afraid.
2. Patrick only slept for 4 hours last night. He must be tired. True.
3. Will and Sadie got an A on their science tests. They can’t be stupid. True.
4. Your fridge died! You must be glad. False. You can’t be glad.
5. The musician has his first concert tonight. He must be sad. False. He must be excited.
6. Caroline is in a car accident. She must be scared. True.
7. Ben’s grandma is in the hospital. He can’t be worried. False. He must be worried.
8. She came home very late. Her parents must be furious. True.

MAD Open Recording
Use must or can’t to say a deduction statement about each picture. Also, say a reason why you think that.
For example:
You see: Kevin and Leah / can’t
You say: Kevin and Leah can’t be on time for their flight. They are running through the airport.
Possible answers:
1. Henry / can’t Henry can’t be happy. He got a bad grade on his test.
2. Emily / must Emily must be cold. It is snowing outside.
3. Ryan / must Ryan must need a bath. He is dirty.
4. Marie / can’t Marie can’t be sad. It’s her birthday.
5. Kelly and her friends / must Kelly and her friends must be scared.
They are watching a horror movie.
6. The soup / can’t The soup can’t taste good. They need to add more salt.
SECTION 2 1-27
1
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.2.22 - Describe your family!
Describe your family members. Then, find out about your partner’s family members.
Your Partner’s Family Members

Name and Relationship of Family Member Notes About the Family Member
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

MAD Open Recording
Compare your family members with those of your partner.
ACTIVITY 1.2.24 - A picture is worth a thousand words.

The students write four questions about the image they are given. Then, the students ask one partner the
questions and write the answers. Switch partners and do it again.
Partner A Image Partner B Image Partner C Image
1-28 SECTION 2
1
READING
HOST FAMILY WANTED
Dear Students and Families,
LTE High School is proud to announce the first exchange with our partner school in Japan. Their students will be
visiting us this upcoming fall semester for two weeks, and we are looking for host families. If you are an open-minded
family that would love to welcome a student into your home, please contact Miss H. for further information.
Here are the questionnaires the students have filled out.
About you: Grace Emily Connor

• adventurous
• adventurous • sweet
• calm
• unique • cheerful
• funny
• intelligent • adventurous
How would people • serious
• funny • silly
describe you? • smart
• friendly • positive
• friendly
• open-minded • friendly
• open-minded
• open-minded
• quiet • communicative • quiet

How would you describe • serious • funny • family-oriented
your family? • communicative • calm • communicative
• positive • adventurous • funny
• work out at home • soccer • baseball

• English Club • tennis • Frisbee golf
What do you like to do in
• watch baseball and • reading • ultimate Frisbee
your free time?
football • English Club • play Xbox 360
• hanging with my friends • play soccer after school
What subjects do you like • English • English • social studies

in school? • social studies • psychology • history
Favorites
• bread or noodles • pizza • chicken wings
Food and Drink
• water or tea • milk • juice
• Instagram • Twitter
Social Media Site • Instagram
• You Tube • Instagram
• tropical (Mexico,
Vacation • beach • Florida
Florida)
• anything chocolate • gummy bears
Dessert • watermelon gummies
• cupcakes • chocolate ice cream
SECTION 2 1-29
1
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if each statement is true or false based on the reading.
1. Connor and Emily like to go to English Club after school. A. True B. False
2. Connor is a vegetarian and doesn’t eat meat. A. True B. False
3. Grace, Emily, and Connor all enjoy sports. A. True B. False
4. Emily’s dream vacation is climbing mountains in Switzerland. A. True B. False
5. Grace would also describe herself as being smart. A. True B. False
6. Emily and Grace would never be seen eating chocolate ice cream. A. True B. False
7. Everyone’s family communicates well. A. True B. False
8. Connor would also describe himself as being intelligent. A. True B. False
9. None of the students like to try new things. A. True B. False
10. All three students enjoy going on Instagram. A. True B. False

Now fill out a questionnaire about you and your family.
About you: Favorites

How would people describe you? Food and drink
How would you describe your family? Website
What do you like to do in your free time? Vacation
What subjects do you like in school? Dessert

MAD Open Recording
After reading the questionnaires from the students, answer the following questions.
1. If you were a host family, which student would you select and why? (Talk about the similarities
between your family and the student, how he/she would fit in with your family, why you like him/her…)
2. Which one of the students would NOT be a good fit for your family? Explain why.
3. Have you ever participated in an exchange? Did you live with a host family?
Or has your family ever hosted someone? How was it?
1-30 SECTION 2
1
VOCABULARY
COMMUNICATION TODAY

MAD Open Text
With a partner, type a short story about the Section 3 Vocabulary picture. Before you start your story,
type both of your names.
TEACHER NOTE: After students complete the activity in the MAD, you can decide if you want any partner
groups to read their stories to the class aloud or use the LAD Presentation Mode.


MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text
SECTION 3 1-31
1
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. Have you ever written a blog?
2. Could you please turn down the volume?
3. I forgot the Wi-Fi password.
4. I will call you back later.
5. This webcam isn’t working so well.
6. Did you comment on my photo?
7. We have a weak internet connection right now.
8. I need to charge my phone.
9. Don’t hang up yet!
10. What is the name of the app you installed?
LANGUAGE TIP
“My phone is dead”
Smartphones have batteries that need to be charged; however, you do not hear people say, “I have to charge
the battery in my cell phone.” English speakers take a linguistic shortcut and say, “I need to charge my phone”.
Similarly, a person will say, “My phone is dead” when they mean that the battery in their phone is dead or has
no more power left. A phrase such as, “My battery is low,” implies that the speaker is talking about their phone,
even when they don’t say the word “phone”. The context is implied.

Listen to vocabulary words or phrases from Section 3. Type each one as you hear it.
1. [the blogger] 9. [to engage]
2. [to take a selfie] 10. [the username]
3. [to forget the password] 11. [to charge the computer]
4. [to comment] 12. [to reply to the text]
5. [to post a picture] 13. [to call back]
6. [to upload a photo] 14. [the connection]
7. [the group chat] 15. [to turn down the volume]
8. [the photograph] 16. [to hang up the phone]
1-32 SECTION 3
1
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
Talking with Technology
The digital world is where many people like to spend
their free time. TV shows, music, magazines, news articles,
and friendships are now available online. A majority of
young people in the U.S. have personal smartphones,
which allow them to explore the internet whenever they
want. While people still spend their free time talking with
their friends, their conversations are more digital than
they have ever been. They will talk to each other in a
group message on a messaging app, a group text, on
social media, using video chat apps, or by participating in a chatroom on a website. They send each other
links to videos, text with the help of emojis, and share memes or GIFs to better express their emotions
digitally. For many people, talking on the phone is no longer a preferred form of communication.

MAD Image Match
Match each vocabulary word with the correct image.
1. to upload 7. the group chat

2. to turn down the volume 8. the blog

3. the webcam 9. to connect

4. the username 10. to install an app

5. the blogger 11. to turn up the volume

6. to reply 12. the password

SECTION 3 1-33
1
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
Fill in each blank with the correct vocabulary word from the word bank.
blogger selfie post upload connect turn down

record connection call back install username webcam
1. Can I please [connect] to your Wi-Fi?

2. Let’s take a [selfie].
3. You can’t log in? Did you enter the right [username]?
4. You can [upload] a picture from your phone to your computer.
5. I can’t talk right now. Can you [call back] later?
6. It’s too loud. Can you [turn down] the volume?
7. I enjoy being a [blogger].
8. Turn on your [webcam] so we can see you.
9. Is your Wi-Fi [connection] strong?
10. Did you see my comment on your [post]?
11. Let’s [record] this so we can post it later.
12. You need to [install] this app. It is so fun!

MAD Text Match
Listen to each question. Then, match it with the correct answer.
1. It is weak because of the storm. Question 8: How is the Wi-Fi connection?
2. My phone wasn’t charged. Question 6: Why didn’t you call me back?
3. No, I don’t like social media. Question 3: Do you like to blog?
4. Yes, and her password too. Question 7: Did she forget her username?
5. I couldn’t hear him. Question 1: Why did you hang up on him?
6. Yes, he should reply soon. Question 4: Did you text him?
7. No, can you speak louder? Question 2: Can you hear me now?
8. I already sent it yesterday. Question 5: Can you email me the paper?
1-34 SECTION 3
1
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
Mobile Phone vs. Cell Phone
There are many spelling and vocabulary differences between American English and British English that are
important to learn. For example, in American English, it is most common to hear speakers say the cell phone
or the phone, whereas in British English you will hear speakers call it a mobile or a mobile phone. Additionally,
American English speakers will “call someone,” but British English speakers may “call someone,” “phone
someone,” or “give someone a ring.”

Listen to each question. Then, respond in the pauses provided using complete sentences. Click “Done”
to move on to the next question.
1. How do you talk with your family?
2. How do you talk with your friends?
3. What is your favorite app on your cell phone? Why?
4. What is your favorite software to use on a computer? Why?
GAME - CHAPTER 1 VOCABULARY REVIEW

Class Activity
GAMES: Present Simple Tic-Tac-Toe and Marker Wars (The explanation and playing
sheet for these games are located in the B1 Resources Google Doc Folder, or download the
B1StudentWorksheet.pdf.)
SECTION 3 1-35
1
GRAMMAR
REVIEW PRESENT CONTINUOUS
The present continuous tense is used to:
Use Examples Meaning
express an action that is He is writing it at this present

He is writing a blog post.
happening now moment
express an action that is He has planned to write it at a point

He is writing a blog post tomorrow.
happening later in the future.
PRESENT SIMPLE TENSE versus PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE

Use the present simple tense for actions that happen regularly - in the past, present, and future. Use the
present continuous tense for actions that are happening in the present moment.
Present simple: Present continuous:
I get dressed before I go to work. I am getting dressed before I go to work.

(This happens routinely.) (This is happening in the present moment.)
*If you need to review the grammar rules from previous levels, go to the Present Continuous chart.

MAD Multiple Choice
Read each present simple sentence. Then, choose the correct present continuous sentence.
1. She records a video for her website. 4. I blog about food.
A. She is recordeing a video for her website. A. I am bloging about food.
B. She is recording a video for her website. B. I am blog about food.
C. She is recordding a video for her website. C. I am blogging about food.
2. They engage their audience well. 5. Anna and I take a selfie.
A. They are engaging their audience well. A. Anna and I are taking a selfie.
B. They are engageing their audience well. B. Anna and I are takeing a selfie.
C. They are engagging their audience well. C. Anna and I are take a selfie.
3. Jackson turns the volume down. 6. My cell phone connects to Wi-Fi.
A. Jackson are turning the volume down. A. My cell phone is connectting to Wi-Fi.
B. Jackson is turning the volume down. B. My cell phone is connect to Wi-Fi.
C. Jackson am turning the volume down. C. My cell phone is connecting to Wi-Fi.
1-36 SECTION 3
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
7. He buys a new webcam. 9. Stacey and Nolan install the app.
A. He is buying a new webcam. A. Stacey and Nolan am installing the app.
B. He is buyying a new webcam. B. Stacey and Nolan are installing the app.
C. He is buy a new webcam. C. Stacey and Nolan is installing the app.
8. I comment on the post. 10. You save the photograph.
A. I am comentting on the post. A. You are saving the photograph.
B. I am comment on the post. B. You are saveing the photograph.
C. I am commenting on the post. C. You are savving the photograph.

Rewrite each sentence. If the sentence is in the present simple, then rewrite it in the present
continuous. If the sentence is in the present continuous, then rewrite it in the present simple.
Be careful with capitalization and punctuation.
1. She uploads the pictures. [She is uploading the pictures.]
2. He is turning up the volume. [He turns up the volume.]
3. We are connecting to the Wi-Fi. [We connect to the Wi-Fi.]
4. I engage readers with unique information. [I am engaging readers with unique information.]
5. Brian is reading the blog. [Brian reads the blog.]
6. They get ready at 6 p.m. [They are getting ready at 6 p.m.]
7. Dawn is drying her hair. [Dawn dries her hair.]
8. You take a selfie. [You are taking a selfie.]
9. Nicole replies to his message. [Nicole is replying to his message.]
10. I am washing my hands afterwards. [I wash my hands afterwards.]
LANGUAGE TIP - CONTRACTIONS
I amn’t taking a selfie. You aren’t taking a selfie.

He isn’t taking a selfie.
*The verb form am cannot be combined We aren’t taking a selfie.
with not to form a contraction They aren’t taking a selfie.
you’ren’t *The verb to be and not

he’sn’t cannot both be used as I’m not we’re not
we’ren’t contractions at the same you’re not you’re not
SECTION 3 he’s not they’re not
they’ren’t time.
SECTION 3 1-37
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Place each letter under the correct picture.
Picture 1 Picture 2
A. She writes a blog. B. She isn’t working in a cafe.
D. She is posting her blog now. C. She is posting her blog later.
F. She isn’t recording a video for her blog. E. She works from home.
G. She often drinks coffee when she works. H. Her blog is about fashion.
CULTURAL NOTE
Blogs
It is unbelievable how many blogs are on the
internet these days. Anyone can start a blog.
Some blogs are about home and lifestyle,
where bloggers give fashion and makeup
advice, and share parenting stories or their
favorite recipes. There are also “how-to” blogs
where you can learn how to reach the next
level in a video game, how to become a
better photographer, or how to build your
own furniture. Other bloggers talk about
politics, religion, literature, or movies. If a blog
is extremely popular, a company may sponsor
the blogger, or pay them money to advertise
their products in a blog post.
1-38 SECTION 3
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Based on the picture, decide if each statement is true or false. If it is false, type what the
person is not doing, and then type what the person is doing. Use some contractions.
For example: You see: You read: Miles is going to bed.
You type: False. Miles is not going to bed. He is waking up.
1. Tiffany is showering.
False. Tiffany isn’t showering. She is taking a selfie.
2. The file is uploading.

False. The file isn’t uploading. It is downloading.
3. Grace is hanging up the phone.

True.
4. Julie is putting her shoes on.

False. Julie is not putting her shoes on. She is taking them off.
5. They are commenting on a post.

True.
6. I am turning up the volume.

False. I am not turning up the volume. I’m turning it down.
7. Henry is shaving with a razor and shaving cream.

True.
8. My cell phone is recording a video.

False. My cell phone isn’t recording a video. It’s connecting to the Wi-Fi.
9. My mobile phone is fully charged.

False. My mobile phone is not fully charged. I am charging it right now.
10. I am replying to his text message.

True.
SECTION 3 1-39
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Say one to two sentences about each of the five images. Use the present continuous and Section 3
Vocabulary.
1. 3. 5.
2. 4.

INTENSIFIERS
Intensifiers are adverbs that are used to show that an adjective in the sentence is stronger than expected.
Insert an intensifier if you want to express a different degree of meaning with your adjective.
*Here are some commonly used intensifiers in order of frequency.

Most Intense Least Intense
unbelievably extremely really very quite slightly
Example: She is smart → She is extremely smart.
Note: Don’t use “very” with strong adjectives. Strong adjectives already express a higher intensity.
Strong Adjective Meaning

horrible very bad
wonderful very good
brillant very smart
When you want to intensify a strong adjective, use the following intensifiers:
She is quite brilliant. That blog was really horrible!

It was an extremely fascinating blog post. My day was unbelievably wonderful!
1-40 SECTION 3
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Sentence Jumble
Put the sentences in the correct order. Start with the least intense and end with the most intense.
She isn’t polite at all.
She is slightly polite.
She is quite polite.
She is very polite.
She is really polite.
She is extremely polite.
She is unbelievably polite.

MAD Category Match
Place each vocabulary word under the correct category.
Intensifier Positive Adjective Negative Adjective

extremely lovely mean
quite cheerful rude
really sweet depressed
slightly polite furious
unbelievably nice unhappy

Rewrite each sentence with the correct strong adjective from the word bank. Replace the intensifier and
adjective marked between the two asterisks (*). Be careful with capitalization and punctuation.
beautiful fantastic brilliant furious depressed frightened
1. This blogger is *very smart*.

[This blogger is brilliant.]
2. I look *very sad* in this selfie.
[I look depressed in this selfie.]
3. You are *very pretty* in this photograph.
[You are beautiful in this photograph.]
4. Many parents are *very scared* for their children to use social media.
[Many parents are frightened for their children to use social media.]
5. Peter hung up because he was *very mad*.
[Peter hung up because he was furious.]
6. This app is *very good*.
[This app is fantastic.]
SECTION 3 1-41
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
LANGUAGE TIP
Don’t hang up on me!
You have now learned the phrase to hang up the phone. Have you
thought about what this really means? We use the verb to hang up
because when telephones were first invented, you needed to pick up
the receiver to listen and speak to the caller. Then, you needed to
hang up it back up on its hook to end the call. Today, we use the verb
to hang up for all phones, even when there’s nothing to physically
hang up. Though speakers still use the phrase to hang up the phone,
you can also use to end the call if you’d like.

MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to Pamela talk about herself and others. For each pause, choose the adjective that best completes
the sentence.
1. I can’t get onto the Wi-Fi. I need to finish a project and send it to my teacher in an hour. I am so __________.
A. unusual B. mean C. furious
2. I was talking to my friend on the phone when she said something mean. I hung up on her! She said that it
was ___________ of me to hang up.
A. serious B. thin C. rude
3. A friend told a joke. I didn’t find it funny at all. My friends say I am too ___________.
A. serious B. thin C. smart
4. I didn’t have time to study for my test, but I still got an A. My teacher says I am quite ___________.
A. stupid B. intelligent C. silly
5. In choir no one else has a voice like me. My choir director says that my voice is very ___________.
A. friendly B. unique C. weak
6. My jeans don’t fit well anymore. I have become quite ___________ from playing basketball daily.
A. scared B. depressed C. thin
7. My brother gets along with everyone. He is extremely ___________.
A. friendly B. intelligent C. happy
8. Samantha always tries to look on the bright side of things and see the good in every situation. She is a very
___________ person.
A. nice B.sad C. positive
1-42 SECTION 3
1
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Read the following blog. The author did not use intensifiers. Now read the blog out loud and add the
following intensifiers to make the blog more engaging.
slightly quite very really extremely unbelievably
Nov. 30th
Welcome to my first blog post. I am excited! My boring parents finally said I could write my own blog! I’m
worried that they’ll change their minds, but after they bought me an expensive computer for my birthday,
they have to say yes! My mom knows how to use computers well, so I know she understands the importance
of technology. My dad is frightened that someone will steal my information from online. I’ll write more next
week!
Possible answers:
Welcome to my first blog post. I am unbelievably excited! My extremely boring parents finally said I
could write my own blog! I’m slightly worried that they’ll change their minds, but after they bought me a
really expensive computer for my birthday, they have to say yes! My mom knows how to use computers
very well, so I know she understands the importance of technology. My dad is quite frightened that
someone will steal my information from online. I’ll write more next week!

1. What is your preferred way to communicate with your family?
2. What is your preferred way to communicate with your friends?
3. What is your least favorite way to communicate with others? Why?
4. Do you and your family or friends use group chats?
SECTION 3 1-43
1
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 1.3.22 - Technology Today
LAD Presentation Mode
Have a discussion with two different adults about the role of technology. Try to have them be different
ages, like a parent and a grandparent. It is okay if they do not speak English, but you need to write your
answers on this sheet in English. Write one more question to ask them. Discuss the answers as a class.
Worksheet
Your Adult #1 Adult #2
Questions
Answers Answers Answers
What is your main way to communicate with others?
What do you think about cell phones?
What do you think about social media?
How often do you use social media?
What is your favorite technology?
What is your least favorite technology? Why?
Other:

MAD Open Text
Compare and contrast your answers with the answers from the two adults you interviewed.
ACTIVITY 1.3.24 - Which blog interests you?

LAD Pairing Activity (Groups of 3)
First, find a blog that interests you. Answer the following questions about it. Then, discuss your answers in
a group of 3.
Worksheet
Questions Your Answers Partner 1 Partner 2
What is the name of the blog?
What is it about?
What type of audience is the blog trying to engage?
Why does it interest you?
1-44 SECTION 3
1
READING
SOCIAL MEDIA USAGE US vs. UK
% of adults (18+) users of each network (US and UK) based on data by Flint-data.com
Facebook is still dominating social
networks with Snapchat, Twitter,
and Instagram catching up slowly.
When it comes to social media

usage, adults in both the US and
the UK spend much of their free
(and work!) time on social media
sites and apps. Facebook comes
in first place with about about 210
million Americans and 30 million
British using it daily. About half of
those people use Facebook several
times a day. In general, Facebook
is more popular amongst females,
people between 23 and 37 years
of age, and in urban areas. So if
you are a 25-year-old woman from
Central London, it’s highly likely
that you have a Facebook profile
that you check multiple times a day. Since the launch of Facebook Messenger apps for Android and iOS in 2011, it has
become one of the major messaging apps, sometimes even exceeding regular text messaging!
However, there is also a big trend against Facebook as the main social media network. The younger
generation (12 to 24-year-olds) is moving away from it and toward Snapchat and other rival sites.
Only time can tell if Facebook’s influence will remain or if it disappears like Myspace, ICQ or Friendster.
The second largest social network in both countries is YouTube. There are over one billion registered
users on YouTube, which was launched in 2005 to upload your personal/amateur videos. It is hard to get exact statistics
on which video was watched the most because of the number of people who click on videos every second from all over
the world.
More than 61% of all Instagram users are between 18 and 34 years old, and half the time spent on Instagram is by
users between 18 to 24 years of age. Twitter has had a general decline in numbers while their new user numbers
amongst 16 to 22-year-olds are rising fast. Almost 50% of the online users in that age group are using Twitter, and for
most, it has even become the main network.
Snapchat is also most popular amongst the younger generation. About 77% of 18 to 24-year-olds use the social
media network regularly. Because of their advertising features, many businesses are moving over to advertising on
Snapchat instead of movie theaters or digital magazines.
No matter which social media site or app you use, there are plenty of people to connect with. It will be interesting to
see what new social media sites are created in the future.
SECTION 3 1-45
1
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if each statement is true, false, or if the information is not given based on the article.
1. Facebook is the most used social network in the US and UK. A. True B. False C. Not Given
2. More adult males than females use Facebook regularly. A. True B. False C. Not Given
3. All Facebook users also use Facebook Messenger. A. True B. False C. Not Given
4. The older generation is moving away from Facebook to A. True B. False C. Not Given
Snapchat.
5. Social networks like ICQ or Friendster have disappeared. A. True B. False C. Not Given
6. 79% of the US’s adult population and 83% of the UK’s adult A. True B. False C. Not Given
population use YouTube.
7. The average time spent on YouTube is 30 minutes a day. A. True B. False C. Not Given
8. A higher percentage of US adults use Twitter. A. True B. False C. Not Given
9. 37,000 people use Skype in the US. A. True B. False C. Not Given
10. More than 61% of all Instagram users are between A. True B. False C. Not Given
18 and 34 years old.
11. About 70% of 18 to 24-year-olds use Snapchat regularly. A. True B. False C. Not Given
12. 58% of the adult population in the UK use WhatsApp. A. True B. False C. Not Given

MAD Open Recording
1. How many social media accounts do you have? Which network do you use the most?
2. How many minutes per day do you spend on social media websites?
3. For what do you use social media networks? (ex. news, connecting with friends, messaging, gaining
information, recipes, professional purposes…)
4. Have you ever spent time on social media during the school day? Did you feel bad about it?
Or is it a common thing you do?
5. Can you imagine going a week without checking any of your social media accounts?
What would be difficult about that?
1-46 SECTION 3
1
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S TALK ABOUT DAILY ROUTINES!
LT 1.1 - LISTEN (Available with or without captions)
MAD Viewing
Watch the chapter video.
TEACHER NOTE: You can also launch this as a LAD activity and have all your students watch it at the same
time. Meet the B1 video actors in the introduction section.
Jack: “Usually, I wake up around 7:00 o’clock in the morning. I go downstairs, make some breakfast, and
check my phone. After that’s all finished, I’ll go back upstairs to brush my teeth and take a shower. Once I’m
out of the shower, I put a little hair gel in my hair, and then I’m ready for the day. It usually takes me about 20
minutes.”
Jason: “My alarm clock goes off at 6:15 a.m. I go for a jog and it feels good to start the day on the right foot.
I come home for a quick shower and shave - well I didn’t shave today - then I put on my jeans and a nice shirt.
My laptop, phone, and water bottle are packed into my bag, and I’m out the door.”
Kaitlyn: “My morning routine always starts with dance. I dance every Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
Then I work out with a personal trainer on Tuesdays and Thursdays. After that, I feel ready to take on the day.
I go home, shower, dry my hair, put on some makeup, and then take a quick selfie for social media.”
Emily: “I am not a morning person, so I always need a cup of coffee and something to eat before I do
anything. I scroll through the headlines of the news, and I read which ones that interest me. I brush my hair
and I brush my teeth. And I text my friend that I am going to pick her up in five minutes because we always
carpool to school. And it doesn’t take me long to get ready. Maybe 30 minutes tops.”
LT 1.2 - LISTEN & READ

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the best answer for each question based on the chapter video.
1. Who wakes up at 6:15 a.m?
A. Kaitlyn B. Emily C. Jason
2. What does Jack do after he takes a shower?
A. dries his hair B. puts hair gel in his hair C. checks his phone
3. When does Kaitlyn work out with a personal trainer?
A. Tuesdays and Thursdays B. Tuesdays and Wednesdays C. every morning
4. Which of these does Jason not pack in his bag?
A. a wallet B. a phone C. a water bottle
5. What news does Emily read in the morning?
A. headlines only B. the ones that interest her C. politics
6. Who does not talk about eating breakfast in the morning?
A. Jack and Emily B. Jack and Jason C. Kaitlyn and Jason
7. Who starts their day with exercise?
A. Kaitlyn, Emily, and Jack B. Jason and Kaitlyn C. Jack
LET’S TALK! 1-47

1
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
LT 1.3 - LISTEN
MAD Category Match
Place each phrase under the correct person who said it.
Jack Jason Kaitlyn Emily

back upstairs didn’t shave take on the day not a morning person
20 minutes off at 6:15 a.m. starts with dance cup of coffee
nice shirt I go home the headlines
LT 1.4 - READ & SPEAK

MAD Open Recording
1. Whose morning routine is most like yours? Why?
2. Compare and contrast your routine with one of the student’s routines.
INTERVIEWS - LET’S TALK ABOUT YOU!

LT 1.5 - LISTEN
MAD Viewing
Listen to the following students talk about themselves.
TEACHER NOTE: The interview answers are unscripted responses to a question. You may notice some gram-
matical errors, so please keep in mind that these are authentic responses.
Rutvik Connor Borna
LT 1.6 - LISTEN, READ, & WRITE

Listen to the students talk about themselves. Fill in each blank with the correct missing words.
Use capitalization when needed. If the student says a number, type the number and don’t write it as a word. (For
example: type “3”, not “three”)
Rutvik: My daily routine is pretty simple. In the morning, I wake up, I eat breakfast, [then I take a shower].
And then if I have classes, I go to class. [I come back from classes], I do as much homework as I can, and then
I make some time for entertainment, so I can watch some videos or a movie. And then I read a book, and then
I like to [go to sleep as early as I can] because I don’t like staying up at night. I do work out frequently.
1-48 LET’S TALK!

1
LET’S TALK!
LT 1.6 - LISTEN, READ, & WRITE (Continued)
I work out probably [4 days of the week]. And I like to give myself some days of rest. I do not have a job
because I’m more focused on school at the moment. [I do go on social media often] because that’s where I
read the news the most. I do not follow any blogs; however, I do read a lot of news and articles. Social media:
I use Twitter, Instagram, and Reddit. My favorite slang words are bro, lol, and dude. I would describe myself
as a very sarcastic person and not very outgoing and a pretty friendly and responsible person.
Connor: My daily routines are pretty simple. I wake up early in the morning, and I go to work or I go to
school, depending on [which time of the year it is]. I usually don’t work during the school year unless I
have to. So, I wake up in the morning, [eat a nice breakfast], get ready for work, do whatever I need to do.
I try to find something to do, whether it be like working out or playing sports with friends, just to unwind and
[have some free time and hang out], like pick-up basketball games are a big thing for me lately. And then
go to bed at a decent time, wake up ready for work the next day. I work out on a lake, which is kinda nice.
I get to spend [most of my days driving a boat], driving a barge, and getting a good suntan, I guess. How
often am I on social media? Not that often at all. I do have like Facebook accounts, or just to stay in the
loop of things, but [I don’t really use it much] more than news. I don’t follow any blogs. I would say I’m an
outgoing person, I’m also pretty laid-back. I’m more of a go-with-the-flow type of person. And I like being that
way. So, I don’t know if I’d rather be super energetic or high-strung. So, I like it. Like, I guess I like the way I am.
Borna: [When I wake up], I first go to the gym, and then when I get back I usually eat my first meal. Then,
I shower. Then, I start getting ready for my classes, and I go to all my classes. After that, I go to the library,
study, [finish as much homework as I can]. Finally, I’ll usually if I have rehearsal for my acapella group I’ll go
to that. If not, I’ll just go home. Maybe do some more studying, relax, and then go to bed, and repeat. I work
out every day. [I try to take a rest day once a week]. Sometimes that doesn’t happen. I do not have a job;
however, I’m going to school, and I’m focusing all my time on doing the best that I can in my classes, so that
ends up being good. I go on social media probably 3 times a day, if not 4. I don’t actually go on as often as
other people just because I’m very very busy, but I’ll look at it maybe in the morning when I wake up, once
throughout the day, and at night. [I don’t follow any blogs]. I use Instagram, and Snapchat, and Facebook.
And I don’t use Twitter, although a lot of people use that. My favorite slang words are bro and dude just
‘cause I feel pretty close to everybody I meet and instead of just calling them their name I can relate to them
more personally by referring to them as a brother. [My friends would describe me] as very energetic. In
high school I was voted most outgoing. I also am very funny. I like to crack a joke, and my behavior is just a
little wild. I don’t like to fit with the normal people because I like to stand out. I like attention.
LET’S TALK! 1-49

1
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the best answer for each question based on the student interviews.
1. Who says, “I usually don’t work during the school year?” A. Borna B. Connor C. Rutvik
2. Who uses Instagram, Twitter, and Reddit? A. Borna B. Connor C. Rutvik
3. Whose morning routine includes breakfast? A. Borna B. Connor C. all three
4. Who sings in an acapella group? A. Borna B. Connor C. Rutvik
5. Who doesn’t work out (exercise) frequently? A. Borna B. Connor C. Rutvik & Connor
6. Who doesn’t have a job? A. Borna & Rutvik B. Connor C. Rutvik & Connor
7. Whose favorite slang words are “bro” and “dude”?
A. Borna & Rutvik B. Connor & Rutvik C. Borna & Connor

MAD Sentence Jumble
Listen to Rutvik, and put the sentences in the order in which he says them.
1. I wake up and eat breakfast. 6. I like to have some days of rest.
2. Then, I take a shower and go to class. 7. I do not have a job.
3. I do homework. 8. I go on social media to read the news.
4. I watch a movie or read a book. 9. My favorite slang words are bro and dude.
5. I go to sleep as early as I can. 10. I am a pretty friendly person.

MAD Open Recording
1. Do you work out (exercise) frequently? If yes, what kind of workout do you do? (Jog, gym, swim,
play sports?) If no, why don’t you work out?
2. If you are still in school, do you have a job? If yes, where do you work? If no, why not?
3. If you are done with school, did you have a job while you were going to school? If yes, where did you
work? If no, why didn’t you work?
4. How would your friends describe you?
1-50 LET’S TALK!

1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW: SELF-EVALUATION
How well do I
understand the topic?
Additional
Refer to...
I CAN... Practice
(Page = P.)
Review (R)
1. discuss daily routines. R. 2, 3, 6, 7 Section 1
2. use adverbs and adverbial phrases

R. 2, 3, 6 P. 1-9
of time.
3. use modal verbs of deduction for

R. 2, 3, 4 P. 1-25
descriptions.
4. discuss communication with

R. 2, 4, 5, 8 Section 3
technology.
5. use intensifiers with adjectives. R. 1, 2 P. 1-40
R1 - LISTENING 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the best answer for each scenario. Be careful with the rules of intensifiers.
1. Your friend tells you she got an A on her test. 4. You see a funny video on social media and post it.
You would tell her… Your friend comments… (*hilarious = very funny)
A. You are extremely smart! A. Stop being so serious.
B. You are very brilliant. B. That was very hilarious.
C. You are really stupid. C. That was hilarious.
2. Your brother was in a car accident. 5. Your friend tells you her pants don’t fit anymore
You would say... and she isn’t as thin as she was last year.
A. That is slightly furious! The polite thing to say is…
B. That is horrible! A. That is horrible! You are quite large.
C. That is so wonderful! B. I think you look beautiful the way you are.
3. Your friend posted a picture of herself C. Good. You were too skinny last year.
and her mother on social media. A nice 6. Your friend calls and tells you he got a new phone.
comment would be... You tell him…
A. Your mother looks rude! A. I have the opposite one.
B. What a sweet picture of you two! B. I have a different one. You’ll love it!
C. That picture frightens me! C. I have the same one. It’s the best!
CHAPTER 1 1-51
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R2 - LISTENING 2
Listen to each sentence, and type what you hear. Be careful with capitalization and punctuation.
1. [I need a new razor.]
2. [She takes off her jacket beforehand.]
3. [What do you think about her?]
4. [You must be glad that it is summer vacation.]
5. [Are you blogging every day?]
6. [He turns up the music unbelievably loud.]
R3 - GRAMMAR 1
Use Ashley’s school schedule to answer the questions in complete sentences. In each answer, include
a different adverb or adverbial phrase of time. For numbers 7 & 8, you see a reason. Write a must/can’t
deduction statement about the person based on the schedule and the reason. Teachers, answers may vary.
6:00 a.m. wake up and exercise wake up and exercise
7:00 shower and get ready shower and get ready
8:00 eat breakfast wake up and get ready eat breakfast wake up and exercise wake up and exercise
9:00 math class dance class math class dance class shower and get ready
10:00
study group in
11:00 lunch Science class lunch Science class
the library
12:30 p.m. English class lunch English class lunch lunch with study group
1:00
get help get help
2:30 Science lab Science lab
from professor from professor
3:00 take a shower
4:00 study/do homework
5:00 take a shower

cook and eat dinner
5:30 go out to eat dinner go out to eat dinner go out to eat dinner
with friends
study/do study with study/do play games dinner with
7:00
homework friends homework with friends friends
9:00 watch TV watch TV watch TV
go to a club
11:00 go to bed go to bed go to bed go to bed
with friends
12:00 go to bed
1-52 CHAPTER 1
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R3 - GRAMMAR 1 (Continued)
1. How often does Ashley get together with friends? She often studies or hangs out with friends.
2. How often does she study in the library? She studies in the library once a week.
3. How often does Ashley cook dinner? She rarely cooks dinner.
4. How often does Ashley shower? She showers daily.
5. How many times a week does Ashley study? She studies five times a week.
6. How often does Ashley go to bed at 11:00 p.m.? She usually goes to bed at 11:00 p.m.
7. She is studying science and does her homework daily. She can’t be stupid.
8. She eats dinner at a restaurant or cafeteria almost daily. She must not like to cook.
R4 - GRAMMAR 2
Read each sentence. At the end of each one you will see how many errors there are.
Fill in each blank by typing the correct sentence.
For example: You read: I posting today my blog. (2) You type: [I am posting my blog today.]
Explanation: The verb “am” goes 2nd and “today” is time and goes at the end.
1. She has the best job. She must be unhappy. (1) [She has the best job. She can’t be unhappy.]
2. Do want you to make a selfie? (2) [Do you want to take a selfie?]
3. He is uploading now the software. (1) [He is uploading the software now.]
4. How much friends you have on social media? (2) [How many friends do you have on social media?]
5. Are connecting she to the Wi-Fi? (2) [Is she connecting to the Wi-Fi?]
6. You can’t be tired. You have’nt slept in 38 hours. (2) [You must be tired. You haven’t slept in 38 hours.]
R5 - READING
Read Jack Hill’s profile. Something is false about each statement. Change the word(s) marked between the
two asterisks (*) to make each sentence true based on his profile.
1. Jack’s birthday is January *25th* 1997. [24th]
2. His favorite quote is by *Oskar* Welles. [Orson]
3. Jack describes himself as “fearless, friendly, *goofy*, outgoing, smart, romantic”. [silly]
4. He dislikes “birds and *fish*.” [laundry]
5. “If you are looking for a fun thing to do this weekend, go to the *Grand Avenue* Food Festival!” [Main Street]
6. “Polish pierogies (*pork* filled noodles), a carb heaven!” [potato]
7. “Come meet me there *this* afternoon!” [tomorrow]
8. “I enjoy *singing* for my friends and family and going to new restaurants to try new dishes.” [cooking]
9. “I am going to school for *culinary cuisine* right now.” [journalism]
10. “I like *climbing* and hiking outdoors.” [jogging]
CHAPTER 1 1-53
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R5 - READING (Continued)
1-54 CHAPTER 1
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R6 - WRITING
MAD Open Text
Write about the daily routine of one of your family members. Start with the time he/she wakes up and
end with the time he/she goes to bed. Include time, adverbs, and adverbial phrases of time.
R7 - SPEAKING 1
As you watch the video, describe what Gerry is doing in each image. Use the present continuous.
R8 - SPEAKING 2
Listen to each question about the images. Then, respond in the pauses provided using complete
1. In which picture is someone scared?
2. What emotions do you see in picture A?
3. In which pictures do you see technology?
4. What season do you think it is in picture C?
5. What do you think his text message says in picture B?
A B C D
CHAPTER 1 1-55
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
PROJECT 1 (NOT IN LAB) (Optional: Refer to the Rubric Section.)
SOCIAL MEDIA PROFILE
Make a poster out of your social media profile. This is a great opportunity for your teacher and classmates
to get to know more about you. Fill in each aspect of the profile and add or draw pictures.

SHE RECEIVED A TEXT MESSAGE...
Choose one of the four pictures of the woman. She received a text message that made her show emotion
on her face. Make up a story with a partner about the text message she received. Be creative and make
sure to answer the following questions: Who texted her? What did the person write? How is she feeling?
1 2 3 4
1-56 CHAPTER 1
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
LISTENING 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the best answer for each scenario. Be careful with the rules of intensifiers.
1. Your friend tells you he got an F on the geography test. The rude thing to say is...
A. That is very bad. You must not be as brilliant as I thought.
B. That is not very good. You must study more next time.
C. That is unusual for you. You are unbelievably intelligent.
2. Your brother can’t find his wallet. He must have left it at the store. You would say...
A. That was really clever of you.
B. You are very brilliant.
C. That was not smart of you.
3. Your partner in math class has been really sick for 5 days. You text him...
A. How very horrible that you are not sick.
B. You must feel better because you were not at school today.
C. You must stay home and rest until you feel better.
4. You have to charge your phone because it is about to die, but your friend wants to talk about her difficult
day. You say….
A. I have to call you back. I must charge my phone.
B. I must not talk to you anymore. I don’t have Wi-Fi.
C. I can’t talk. My phone is charged.
5. You and a friend are watching a horror movie. You say….
A. I love comedies. This is such a funny movie.
B. This movie has a lot of romance. I am frightened.
C. You are closing your eyes. You must be scared.
6. Your friend is furious with you. When you ask her why, she says...
A. You posted an extremely mean comment on her social media page.
B. Your comment on her social media page was mean really.
C. Your message on her page was unbelievably wonderful.
LISTENING 2
1. [Do you use a comb or a brush?] 4. [My son usually takes a bath every day.]
2. [He is slightly strange.] 5. [She must be extremely intelligent.]
3. [I am calling my mom back later.] 6. [What are you afraid of most?]
CHAPTER 1 1-57
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
GRAMMAR 1
Use Travis’s work schedule to answer the questions in complete sentences. In each answer, include a
different adverb or adverbial phrase of time. For numbers 7 & 8, you see a reason. Write a must/can’t
deduction statement about the person based on the schedule and the reason. Teachers, answers may vary.

wake up wake up wake up wake up
7:00 a.m.
and exercise and exercise and exercise and exercise
shower and
7:30 shower shower shower
shave
8:00 eat breakfast eat breakfast eat breakfast wake up and exercise eat breakfast
9:00 start work start work start work shower start work
9:30 eat breakfast

do chores around
10:00 work meeting
the house
11:00 eat lunch
12:00 p.m. eat lunch eat lunch eat lunch eat lunch
1:00
4:00 leave work go grocery shopping
5:00 leave work leave work leave work
6:00 cook and eat dinner cook and eat dinner cook and eat dinner cook and eat dinner cook and eat dinner
7:00 hang out with friends
9:00 watch TV read a book watch TV read a book

brush teeth, wash face, brush teeth, wash face, brush teeth, wash face,
10:00
go to bed go to bed go to bed
brush teeth, wash face, brush teeth, wash face,
11:00
go to bed go to bed
1. How often does Travis work? 5. How often does he hang out with friends?
He works four days a week. He rarely hangs out with friends.
2. How many times a week does he go out to eat? 6. How often does Travis eat lunch at work?
He never goes out to eat. He always eats lunch at work.
3. How often does Travis go to bed at 10:00 p.m.? 7. He exercises daily and cooks his own meals.
He usually goes to bed at 10:00 p.m. He can’t be fat.
4. How many times a week does Travis read a book? 8. He only shaves once a week.
Travis reads a book twice a week. He must have a beard at the end of the week.
1-58 CHAPTER 1
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
GRAMMAR 2
Read each sentence. At the end of each one you will see how many errors there are. Fill in each blank by
typing the correct sentence.
1. How often is you posting on social media? (1)
[How often are you posting on social media?]
2. Are he charge his phone? (2)
[Is he charging his phone?]
3. I records my podcast once a weekly. (2)
[I record my podcast once a week.]
4. Who many time are you on social media? (2)
[How much time are you on social media?]
5. There are too many replys in a group chat. (1)
[There are too many replies in a group chat.]
6. She must is unhappy. She post only sad videos. (2)
[She must be unhappy. She posts only sad videos.]
READING
Read Daniel Graham’s profile. Something is false about each statement. Change the word(s) marked be-
tween the two asterisks (*) to make each sentence true based on his profile.
1. “I enjoy *biking* my bike whenever possible.” [riding]
2. “Be the change you wish to see in *your city*.” [the world]
3. “Last year I decided to cross one more thing off my *to-do* list: cycling across America in under *2*
months.” [bucket] [3]
4. “It took me *a year* to prepare for this, but yesterday, I finally started my journey.” [half a year]
5. “My end goal: Portland, *Oregon*, on the other side of the country.” [Maine]
6. “...while I make the *3,000* mile journey across the United States.” [4,000]
7. “I am looking forward to *greeting* you and sharing this amazing experience.” [meeting]
8. “I love singing in my band, performing for others, and *playing guitar*.” [writing songs]
9. “*Singing* and working with kids are *hobby* of mine.” [Teaching] [passions]
CHAPTER 1 1-59
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
READING (Continued)
1-60 CHAPTER 1
1
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
WRITING
MAD Open Text
Write about your daily routine. Start with the time you wake up and end with the time you go to bed.
Include time, adverbs, and adverbial phrases of time.
SPEAKING 1
As you watch the video, describe what Tom is doing in each image. Use the present continuous.
SPEAKING 2
Listen to each question about the image. Then, respond in the pauses provided using complete
1. What date and time is the party? (look at the calendar)
2. Why is there a party?
3. How is the Wi-Fi connection?
4. Someone is about to end a phone call. With whom is she speaking?
CHAPTER 1 1-61
VOCABULARY
Playing a Sport ............................................................. 2-4
Expansion of Free Time ............................................ 2-20
Competing in Sports ................................................... 2-37
GRAMMAR
Review Past Simple ..................................................... 2-8
Review Questions in the Past Simple ..................... 2-11
Review Present Perfect .............................................. 2-24
Adverbs of Time ........................................................... 2-28
Review Past Continuous ............................................ 2-40
Present Perfect Continuous ..................................... 2-43
CONVERSATION
Guess the word! .......................................................... 2-16
What’s your favorite sport? ....................................... 2-17
Who plays which sport? ............................................. 2-33
Have you ever...? .......................................................... 2-34
American NFL Super Bowl Bracket ......................... 2-47
British Soccer Player ................................................... 2-47
READING
Exchange Students Talk About Sports ................... 2-18
Robotel Hotel & Spa ................................................... 2-35
Professional Athlete: Pros & Cons .......................... 2-48
LET’S TALK!
Video - Let’s go rock climbing! .................................. 2-50
LEARNING OBJECTIVES Interviews - Let’s talk about free time activities! .. 2-52
• discuss sports and activities.

REVIEW & ASSESSMENT
• use previously learned past tenses.
Review ............................................................................ 2-54
• use time phrases with since and for. Projects .......................................................................... 2-59
Assessment ................................................................... 2-59
• use adverbs of time.
• use the present perfect continuous tense.
INTRODUCTION 2-1
21
THE UNITED KINGDOM

CULTURE IN THE UK
LONDON, ENGLAND
Known For:
Buckingham Palace
Big Ben
Tower Bridge
LONDON Westminster Abbey
Globe Theatre London
London Eye
British Museum
Tate Modern Art Gallery
Wimbledon Tennis Championships
Fashion
London is the capital city of England and the
Music
United Kingdom.
Fish & Chips
Double Decker Buses
Population: 8.7 million
Famous People:
Area: 607 mi² (square miles)
Queen Elizabeth II
Flag:
David Beckham
David Bowie
Charlie Chaplin
Alan Turing
Number of London Boroughs (towns): 32 Amy Winehouse
Languages Spoken: English, French, German, Robbie Williams
Spanish, Scots, Welsh, Polish, Panjabi, Bengali, Daniel Day Lewis
Urdu, and Arabic Emily Blunt
Big Ben Fish & Chips Tower Bridge Queen Elizabeth II Double Decker Buses Charlie Chaplin

1. Many museums in London are free to visitors, including the British Museum,
National Gallery, Science Museum, Tate Modern, and the National Portrait
Gallery. Research one of the museums in London and find a few exhibits,
paintings, or items you would like to see. Why does this museum interest you?
Does the museum have any upcoming events?
2. Sports are a big part of the British way of life. Research a stadium of your choice.
Find the answers to the following questions: Where is it located? What sports
team plays there? When was it built? How did it get its name? If you find any fun
facts about the stadium, include those as well.
2-2 INTRODUCTION
1
2
VOCABULARY
SECTION 1 VOCABULARY: Playing a Sport
Sports Equipment Verbs Other Words and Phrases
to catch / caught / caught
the ball the goal the goalkeeper
to hit / hit / hit
the basket the helmet the locker room
to kick
the bat the jersey the sports facility
to miss
the court the net the stadium
to pass
the equipment the racket up / down
to score
the field the track
to shoot / shot / shot
to throw / threw / thrown
SECTION 2 VOCABULARY: Expansion of Free Time

Activities Sports
to race auto racing
to bike; to go cycling
the race boxing
to go on *
to rock climb horseback riding
a bike ride
to sail
a jog
to skate
a run
to ice skate
a walk Adverbs of Time
to inline skate
to jump already
to skateboard
to photograph just
to snowboard
photography yet
to surf
to water ski
SECTION 3 VOCABULARY: Competing in Sports

Nouns Verbs Other Words and Phrases
the championship to be a fan (of) * to train against

the match the fan to tie first place
the point to cheer (on) the tie game second place
the prize to compete to try out / tried / tried third place
the referee to join the tryout Good luck!
the score to lose / lost / lost to win / won / won versus (vs.)
to participate
to quit / quit / quit
*Go to the Irregular Verb chart to review the conjugations.
INTRODUCTION 2-3
1
2
VOCABULARY
PLAYING A SPORT

MAD Open Recording
Record yourself saying as much as possible about the Section 1 Vocabulary picture.
What words or phrases do you know? What do you see? What is happening in the picture?

MAD Pronunciation - Flashcards

MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text
2-4 SECTION 1
1
2
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. Are you able to be the goalkeeper? 6. Let’s go to the basketball court.
2. The new sports facility is downtown. 7. This track is quite big.
3. Shoot the ball into the basket! 8. You need a glove to catch the ball.
4. What kind of equipment do you need? 9. She wants a new tennis racket.
5. He kicked the ball into the net. 10. Throw him the ball!

1. [to hit the ball] 9. [the locker room]
2. [the stadium] 10. [to run on the track]
3. [to use a racket] 11. [the equipment]
4. [the goalkeeper] 12. [to kick a soccer ball]
5. [to catch with a glove] 13. [to score a goal]
6. [to wear a helmet] 14. [the basket]
7. [the sports facility] 15. [the racket]
8. [I am able] 16. [to throw a baseball]

MAD Image Match
Listen to each sentence. Then, match each one with the correct image.
1. The team changes their clothes in the locker room. 7. Chad scored a goal to win the game.
2. Do you need a new tennis racket? 8. Each sport uses different equipment.
3. I’m going to run around the track. 9. We need a new net so we can play on this field.
4. Addison made a basket! 10. This net is perfect for beach volleyball!
5. There is a great tennis court in the park. 11. In baseball, you use a bat to hit the ball.
6. The new stadium is absolutely beautiful! 12. It is necessary to wear a helmet when playing
football.
1. 4 2. 8 3. 1 4. 6 5. 10 6. 2
7. 12 8. 11 9. 7 10. 3 11. 9 12. 5
SECTION 1 2-5
1
2
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
Listen as the people describe the sport that they play. Place each vocabulary word or phrase under the
sport it matches based on what you hear. The order will be graded.
Sport
Played on?
Equipment?
Ball?
Actions?
Points?
Speaker 1: Baseball is my favorite sport. After school, you will find me at the school baseball diamond or the
field by my house. I always have my bat, hat, and glove with me in case someone is ready to play or practice. A
baseball is one of the smaller sport balls. It is a hard, white ball with red stitching. To play baseball, you must
be good at catching and throwing. The hardest part is hitting this small ball with a bat. Pitchers throw the ball
on average 90 miles per hour. You have to have a good eye to hit well. When you hit the ball, you then run
around the bases to score a run. A run is worth 1 point.
Speaker 2: Basketball is the best sport of all. This sport is usually played on an indoor court although lots of
parks have courts outdoors to enjoy in the nice weather. At both ends of the court, there is a basket with a
net. As a basketball player, your goal is to pass the big, orange ball to your teammates and shoot it into the
basket. Each basket is worth 2 points, but if you shoot from far away, it’s called a "3-pointer" and you get 3
points instead. It’s a fast-paced game with lots of points being scored. Basketball is fun to play and to watch!
Speaker 3: Which sport has over four billion fans around the world? Soccer! It’s also my favorite sport. You
have to be good at running because this game is played on a big 110-yard field where you will run back and
forth many times. There is a big goal with a net on both ends of the field that is protected by a goalkeeper.
When your team kicks a goal, you get 1 point. Often there aren’t a lot of points scored because it is hard to
pass and kick the black and white ball into the goal. It takes a lot of hard work and skill.
Speaker 4: Don’t confuse my favorite sport with soccer. Football, or as many people call it, American football,
is not actually played with your feet. It is played on a 100-yard field, and the players have to get the ball into the
end zone where they can score a 6-point touchdown. The kicker can also score points for the team with field
goals. The players need to throw and catch the brown ball while trying not to be hit by the other team. This is
why it is important to wear a helmet. This sport can get a little rough, so protective equipment is needed!
Baseball Basketball Soccer Football

field or diamond court 110-yard field 100-yard field
bat, hat, glove basket and net goal helmet
white ball orange ball black/white ball brown ball
hit, catch, throw pass and shoot kick and pass throw, catch, kick
run = 1 point basket = 2 or 3 points goal = 1 point touchdown = 6 points
2-6 SECTION 1
1
2
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
High School Sports Seasons
This list reflects which sports are played in which seasons in the United States. Sports seasons can be
different in each state, and this list does not include all sports teams organized by American high schools.
FALL SPORTS WINTER SPORTS SPRING SPORTS
August through November November through February February through May
cheerleading / dance team basketball boys baseball
cross country cheerleading / dance team boys golf
football wrestling lacrosse
girls golf bowling girls soccer
boys soccer hockey girls softball
tennis swimming
girls volleyball boys tennis
track & field
boys volleyball
1. Which sports does your school have?

2. Do you have sports that are played in certain seasons?

MAD Open Recording
Use the image to answer each question about Adrian’s favorite sport.
1. What is Adrian’s favorite sport?

2. What does he need in order to play this sport?
3. What type of uniform does he wear?
4. What does he do in this sport?
5. What jersey numbers do you see?
SECTION 1 2-7
1
2
GRAMMAR
REVIEW PAST SIMPLE
The past simple tense is used to express actions that were completed in the past. Use a time word with the past
tense verb to help show when in the past the action was completed.
Time Word Examples
last ______ last week, last month, last year

______ ago two weeks ago, two months ago, two years ago
every ______ every day, every week, every year
Use past simple to express: Examples

Yesterday, we played games.
Actions done once in the past
I biked to work last Tuesday.
We played games every Monday last year.
Actions done several times in the past
I biked to work every Tuesday last month.
Compare the Affirmative vs. the Negative
Remember that to form the negative past simple, you add the helping verb (auxiliary verb) phrase “did not (didn’t)”
followed by the base form of the main verb.
Affirmative past simple tense: Negative past simple tense:
He threw the ball down the field. He did not throw the ball down the field.
I played chess last week. I didn't play chess last week.
*If you need to review the grammar rules from previous levels, go to the Present Simple chart.

Conjugate each verb in the past simple tense. Use contractions in the negative.
1. I [wasn’t] able to play in the game last night because I was sick. (not be able)
2. He [threw] the ball down the court. (throw)
3. It's a good thing that he was wearing a helmet because the ball [hit] him in the head. (hit)
4. She [didn’t have] to buy a new tennis racket. (not have)
5. With one minute left in the game, I [kicked] the ball into the goal! (kick)
6. The goalkeeper [caught] the ball before it went in the net. (catch)
7. My friends and I [walked] to the basketball court to play for fun. (walk)
8. Last night, they [didn’t score] enough goals to win the game! (not score)
9. After the game, he [took] a shower in the locker room. (take)
10. Yesterday, Emma [ran] around the track for exercise. (run)
11. He [didn’t miss] a shot all night. (not miss)
12. At the last second of the game, he [shot] the ball from half court. (shoot)
2-8 SECTION 1
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
For 1-5 you are given a negative past simple sentence. Choose the correct affirmative past simple
sentence. For 6-10 you are given an affirmative past simple sentence. Choose the correct negative past
simple sentence.
1. I did not catch the ball. 6. We missed the shot.
A. I caught the ball. A. We did not miss the shot.
B. I catched the ball. B. We missed not the shot.
C. I catch the ball. C. We didn’t missed the shot.
2. He did not throw well. 7. She hit the ball far.
A. He throwed well. A. She didn’t hit the ball not far.
B. He threw well. B. She hitted the ball far.
C. He thrown well. C. She did not hit the ball far.
3. She did not swim fast. 8. Did he pass it to you?
A. She swam fast. A. Did he passed it to you?
B. She swams fast. B. Didn’t he pass it to you?
C. She swimmed fast. C. Did he not passed it to you?
4. Didn't they score a goal? 9. I shot at the goal.
A. Did they score a goal? A. I shooted not at the goal.
B. Scored they a goal? B. I didn’t shot at the goal.
C. Did they not score a goal? C. I did not shoot at the goal.
5. It did not go in the net. 10. The keeper saved the ball.
A. It goed in the net. A. The keeper saved not the ball.
B. It got in the net. B. The keeper did not save the ball.
C. It went in the net. C. The keeper safed the ball not.
ACTIVITY 2.1.12 - LISTEN, READ, & WRITE

Listen to the descriptions about different sporting events. Fill in each blank with the correct past simple
verb you hear.
Description 1: It was the final quarter of the championship game. The Foxes [were] down by only two
points, and they had the ball. Matthews [ran] down the court. Davids threw the ball to him. He [shot] a
three-point basket and scored! The Foxes won the game!
Description 2: It [was] a close game last night as Sanchez kicked the ball toward the goal. The goalkeeper
was ready to stop the ball. Sanchez [kicked], and the ball [went] flying. The goalkeeper put her hands out
and [caught] the ball before it went in the goal.
Description 3: It was the final inning of the championship. The last batter stepped up to the plate. The
pitcher [threw] the ball, and the batter swung the bat and [missed] the ball. The pitcher threw the ball
again, and this time the batter [hit] the ball hard and long. The runner on third base ran home to score
the winning run.
SECTION 1 2-9
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 2.1.12 - LISTEN & WRITE (Continued)
Description 4: It was the final match between Edmund and Murray. The score was tied at 30 to 30. Murray
[hit] the ball over the net, and Edmund [missed] it with his racket. The score was then 40 to 30. Everyone on
the court was quiet. Murray [scored] again and won the match!

Description 5: The kicker [ran] onto the field. His team had just scored a touchdown, and he [had] to kick a
field goal for the extra point. He [kicked] the ball, and it was good! The score was then 21 to 14.

MAD Text Match
Listen to the people describe the sports again. Then, match each sport name with the correct description
you hear. Teacher, see the scripts in Activity 2.1.12.
1. Description 1 basketball 4. Description 4 tennis
2. Description 2 soccer 5. Description 5 football
3. Description 3 baseball

Listen to each present simple sentence. Then, say each sentence using the past simple in the pauses
provided. Click "Done" to move on to the next sentence.
For example: You hear: The teams play in the new stadium.
You say: The teams played in the new stadium.
Possible answers:
1. The team runs up and down the court. The team ran up and down the court.
2. I have to buy a new bat. I had to buy a new bat.
3. Where is your helmet? Where was your helmet?
4. The players are in the locker room. The players were in the locker room.
5. Does he pass the ball a lot? Did he pass the ball a lot?
6. Who shoots the ball the most? Who shot the ball the most?
7. She kicks the ball past the goalkeeper. She kicked the ball past the goalkeeper.
8. He catches the football with one hand. He caught the football with one hand.

Watch this short video clip of a soccer game. Tell what happened in the clip using the past simple.
2-10 SECTION 1
1
2
GRAMMAR
REVIEW QUESTIONS IN THE PAST SIMPLE
Forming questions in the past simple is almost the same as the present simple. Just make sure the helping verb to
do is in the past simple: did.
When using the verb to be in the past simple, no helping verb is needed.
Form the question like this:
Question word or phrase To be conjugated subject other + ?
Was she the coach?
Who was the coach?
Were they at the sports facility?
When were they at the sports facility?
When using any verb except to be in the past simple, a helping verb is needed.
Form the question like this:
Question word or phrase helping verb did subject main verb (base form) other + ?
Did he catch the ball?
What did he catch?
Did they go to the locker room?
Where did they go to get dressed?
*If you need to review the grammar rules from previous levels, go to the Questions in the Past Simple chart.
LANGUAGE TIP
“Swing and a miss!” or “Strike three!”
Some sports phrases are used in daily speech. In baseball, if you hear someone say, “a swing and a
miss,” that means a player swings a bat at the ball but missed the ball. In everyday speech, it means that
someone tries to do something, but it doesn’t work.
A baseball player has 3 chances to hit the ball that is thrown, and each time he misses, it is called a strike.
After 3 strikes, that player’s turn is over, and he needs to sit down. A phrase you might hear is, “that’s strike
three”, which means there are no more chances left. This phrase is often used by parents if their children are
complaining or misbehaving and the parents give the child two chances to stop before they are punished. On
the 3rd strike, that child is “out” and in trouble. Keep your ears open to these popular sports-based phrases!
SECTION 1 2-11
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Word Jumble
Read each answer. Then, put the question that led to the answer in the correct word order.
1. Yes, he caught it. Did Hunter catch the ball?
2. I made five baskets in the game. How many baskets did you make?
3. No, they are on the soccer field. Are they in the locker room?
4. It’s in the garage. Mom, where is my football helmet?
5. I think it will be Steve. Who is going to be the goalkeeper next season?
6. Yes, they are in my dad’s car. Did you forget to bring your bat and ball?
7. Yes, you will get them next week. Are we going to get new jerseys this year?
8. No, it just missed him. Did the ball hit Tyler in the arm?

Read the interview. Then, fill in each blank with the correct question word or phrase from the word bank.
Use capitalization when needed.
when why how many where
which how what how often
Interviewer: Good evening, everyone. I am here with professional basketball player Tyler Jacobs. Tyler, [how]
are you doing this evening?
Tyler: I’m doing really well. Thank you for asking.
Interviewer: First of all, thank you so much for agreeing to this interview. Your fans will be excited to learn
more about you. So, [how many] years have you played basketball?
Tyler: I have played since I was ten years old, so thirteen years.
Interviewer: Wow! [Which] professional basketball team did you like when you were a kid?
Tyler: My favorite team was the Orlando Magic. I hope to play for them someday.
Interviewer: [Why] do you enjoy playing basketball so much?
Tyler: I really enjoy playing on a team. I also like shooting and passing the ball and that the game moves quickly.
Interviewer: [How often] do you practice?
Tyler: Our team practices together five days a week. I will also practice on the weekends besides exercising six
days a week.
Interviewer: [Where] do you practice on the weekends?
Tyler: Well, if the weather is nice, there is a great court at a park near my house. Some of my friends join me
there as well.
Interviewer: When you are not playing basketball, [what] do you enjoy doing in your free time?
Tyler: I enjoy going fishing or hiking. I love being outdoors!
Interviewer: Well, thank you so much for speaking with me this evening. I look forward to watching you play
next. [When] is your next game?
Tyler: We play tomorrow night at 7:00 in the evening.
Interviewer: I wish you and your team luck!
2-12 SECTION 1
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Read each short description of a famous professional athlete. Then, answer each question in
a complete sentence based on the readings.
Michael Jordan was born on February 17, 1963 in New York. However, he grew up in North Carolina.
He is one of the best basketball players of all time in the United States. He played professional basketball for
fourteen years for the Chicago Bulls and baseball for the Chicago White Sox for one season. Michael is known
for his amazing basketball shots and his jersey number, 23.
Joe Montana was born on June 11, 1956 in Pennsylvania. When he was young, he enjoyed playing basketball
and football, but he went on to play professional football for the San Francisco 49ers for much of his career.
He was a quarterback with an amazing arm who could pass the ball well to his teammates. He won many
championships and is one of the best football players of all time.
Mariel Margaret Hamm (Mia) was born on March 17, 1972 in Alabama. She played on the U.S. women’s
national soccer team for 17 years. She was also an Olympic athlete. She scored the most international goals
until Abby Wambach broke her record in June 2013. She was also “Female Athlete of the Year” five years in a
row.
Serena Williams was born on September 26, 1981 in Michigan. She has played tennis since she was three
years old. She has an older sister, Venus Williams, who also plays tennis. In 2017, the sisters played against
each other in the Australian Open. Serena won, and as of 2017, she has won 23 Grand Slam singles titles.
Possible answers:
1. Which two sports did Michael Jordan play? He played basketball and baseball.
2. When was Mia Hamm born? She was born on March 17, 1972.
3. For which football team did Joe Montana play? He played for the San Francisco 49ers.
4. Where was Serena Williams born? She was born in Michigan.
5. What was Michael Jordan’s jersey number? His jersey number was 23.
6. How many titles has Serena Williams won? She has won 23 Grand Slam singles titles.
7. For which basketball team did Michael Jordan play? He played for the Chicago Bulls.
8. What other sport did Joe Montana enjoy as a child? He enjoyed basketball.
9. How many years did Mia Hamm play professional soccer? She played soccer for 17 years.
10. At what age did Serena Williams start playing tennis? She started playing tennis when she was
three years old.
SECTION 1 2-13
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
Cheerleaders, Dance Teams, Halftime Shows
Sports are one of the most popular forms of entertainment in American culture. Not only is the game itself
entertaining, but everything involved in a sports game is considered entertainment as well. This includes light
shows, music, cheerleaders, and dance teams. Cheerleading and dancing at games is so common in the U.S.
that they are actually considered sports themselves. Cheer and dance teams attend competitions and
compete against other teams from around the country. You can see them perform during a halftime show,
which is a performance many people look forward to as the players take a break from their game.

MAD Category Match
Listen to the conversation between two friends discussing sports. Then, place each phrase under the
correct person.
Alex: Hi, Dave! How are you doing?
Dave: Hey, Alex! I am doing really well. How about you?
Alex: I’m really nervous because I just tried out for the soccer team.
Dave: That’s awesome! Which position did you try out for?
Alex: I tried out for goalkeeper. Have you ever been on a soccer team?
Dave: No, I don’t like playing soccer. I really enjoy playing basketball.
Alex: Those are two very different sports. What do you like about basketball?
Dave: I like being able to catch and pass the ball with my hands.
Alex: And I love kicking the ball instead of using my hands!
Dave: I am not very good at kicking a soccer ball, but I love shooting a basketball.
Alex: Yes, we are opposite in what we enjoy doing. Is scoring a basket your favorite part?
Dave: Yes, I love when I make a basket! There is nothing better than the swish sound when it hits the net.
What is your favorite part about soccer?
Alex: In soccer scoring goals is important, but I love when I stop someone from scoring a goal. That’s my job as
the goalkeeper, of course.
Dave: Well, let me know when you find out if you made the team. Good luck!
Alex: Thanks! See ya!
Dave: Bye.
Dave Alex
doesn't play soccer plays soccer
plays basketball is a goalkeeper
loves passing a ball loves kicking a ball
enjoys scoring a basket enjoys stopping a goal
2-14 SECTION 1
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Each person plays on a sports team. Listen to and answer questions about the images in the pauses
provided.
Hannah Possible answers:
1. What did Hannah do in her game? Mia She missed the volleyball.
2. What did Mia do? She hit the volleyball over the net.
3. What did Justin do in his game? He kicked the soccer ball.
4. What did Sam do in his game? He made a basket.
5. What did Nick do in his game? He caught the football.
6. What did Pam do in her game? She scored a goal.
SECTION 1 2-15
1
2
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 2.1.21 - Guess the word!
LAD Pairing Activity (Groups of 4)
When learning a foreign language, you will not know every word that you want to say. It is an art to talk
around words that you do not know. Your goal is to get your partners to guess the word by describing the
word to them without saying the word itself.
Your teacher will hand you one Partner A Worksheet and one Partner B Worksheet. Two of you work with
the Partner A worksheet and two with the Partner B worksheet. The A Partners and B Partners need to
move away from each other to work first. When you are done, you will come back together and read your
descriptions to the other partners so they can guess the vocabulary words you are describing.
Step 1: Look at the words on your worksheet. Come up with a way to describe the vocabulary word
without saying the word itself. Write down the description.
Word Description
the goalkeeper This person stops a ball from going in the goal.
Step 2: The A Partners will read what they wrote to the B Partners. The B Partners try to guess the word.
Write down their guess.
Step 3: The B Partners will read what they wrote to the A Partners. The A Partners try to guess the word.
Write down their guess.
Step 4: Add up how many words the other Partners guessed correctly. Talk about the words they did not
guess and come up with descriptions together that may have helped them guess the word.
Step 5: Turn in the two worksheets to your teacher.

(If you have more time, describe other words to each other and write down what words you described.
This is great practice to talk around words you do not know.)
Partner A Words Descriptions Partner B Guesses
to catch
the helmet
to hit
the goal
the basket
CORRECT ANSWERS: ______
Partner B Words Descriptions Partner A Guesses
to pass
the jersey
the locker room
to miss
the equipment
CORRECT ANSWERS: ______
2-16 SECTION 1
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 2.1.22 - What’s your favorite sport?
2
beginning of this activity and hit record.
First, complete the answers to the questions about your favorite sport. Then, ask two partners the same
questions to learn about their favorite sports.
Questions Your Answers Partner 1 Partner 2

What is your favorite sport to play or watch?
Why do you like it?
What type of equipment do you need for it?
What type of uniform do you wear for it?
How do you play this sport?
(Do you use a ball and hit or kick the ball?)
Is it an individual or team sport?

MAD Open Recording
Tell about the favorite sport of one of your partners. In your description, include all of the answers to
the questions you asked.
CULTURAL NOTE
Other Sports in the English-Speaking World
Badminton is a competitive sport that can be found at the Summer Olympics. Badminton is similar to tennis,
where it can be played as singles or doubles, each player has a racket, and there is a net in the middle of the
court. Rather than using a tennis ball, players need to hit a shuttlecock over the net with their rackets, and a
team scores points when the shuttlecock hits the ground in-bounds on the opponents’ side.
Cricket is a team sport similar to baseball that is also popular around the world. It is played in many English-
speaking countries such as England, Australia, Ireland, Scotland, New Zealand, and South Africa. Players need
a field, a cricket ball and bat, 2 wickets, 6 stumps, 4 bails, a helmet, and gloves. Don’t be confused by the term
“bowlers” - nobody is actually bowling a ball toward pins, but rather a bowler is the person who throws the
ball for the batter to hit!
Rugby is a sport with 15 players from each team on the field at once. Players pass, kick, and throw the ball to
score points. Players often join together to form a group, or a “scrum”, to get possession of the ball. Similar to
American football, players score when the ball crosses the end zone of the field.
SECTION 1 2-17
1
2
READING
EXCHANGE STUDENTS TALK ABOUT SPORTS
Thomas, Lotte, Sebastian, and Rosa are spending a year abroad in four different English-speaking countries:
Thomas went to the USA, Lotte to the UK, Sebastian to Canada, and Rosa to Australia. All four are big sports fans
and very involved in sports in their home countries. Here are their journal entries about the cultural sports they
experienced during their year abroad.
2-18 SECTION 1
1
2
READING
ACTIVITIES
Look at Rosa’s journal entry. Something is false about each statement. Change the word marked be-
tween the two asterisks (*) to make each sentence true.
1. Rosa's experience in *Canada* [Australia]
2. For some reason, I didn’t picture anyone in Australia playing *cricket*. [sports]
3. In *winter*, Australians enjoy cricket, and in *summer*, Australian football and rugby are their favorite
sports. [summer] [winter]
4. As most Australians live in *smaller* cities on the outskirts of the islands, they have access to beaches
and *sand*. [bigger] [water]
5. So, two other big sports here are swimming and *snorkeling*. [surfing]
6. Something else I now enjoy is *volleyball*. [netball]
7. It’s a very famous sport here for *men*. [women]
8. It’s similar to basketball, but you *can* run or dribble with the ball, and each player has a specific
position. [can’t]
9. You also can’t make contact with another player in netball, and there is no backboard *by*
the basket. [behind]
10. Definitely worth *playing*! [trying]

MAD Open Recording
Answer each question in complete sentences based on the reading.
1. In your own words, summarize what either Thomas or Sebastian learned about the cultural sports where
he was studying abroad.
2. If you had to choose a country to visit just based on the sports they play and enjoy there, where would you
go: USA, Canada, UK, or Australia? Why?
SECTION 1 2-19
1
2
VOCABULARY
EXPANSION OF FREE TIME

MAD Open Recording
Record yourself saying as much as possible about the Section 2 Vocabulary pictures.
Which of these activities looks like the most fun? Which one would you not want to try?


MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text
2-20 SECTION 2
1
2
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
Pronounce phrases and sentences using Section 2 Vocabulary.
1. Do you prefer to surf or water ski? 6. Boxing is a dangerous sport.
2. I love to ice skate in the winter. 7. Have you ever been rock climbing?
3. The family goes on a bike ride. 8. Auto racing can be scary.
4. Do you go off jumps when you snowboard? 9. It is a beautiful day to sail.
5. Let’s race to the corner. 10. He photographs different sports.

9. [the new skateboard]
1. [to go cycling]
2. [to snowboard] 10. [a bike ride]
3. [boxing] 11. [horseback riding]
4. [to go on a jog] 12. [to inline skate]
5. [auto racing] 13. [to water ski]
6. [the race track] 14. [the extreme sport]
7. [photography] 15. [to rock climb]
8. [to go surfing] 16. [the horse jumps]
CULTURAL NOTE
Extreme Sports
Some traditional sports such as football or hockey may seem extreme because they are contact sports where
people can be injured while playing these sports. However, there are certain sports that are actually called
“extreme sports.” Extreme sports sometimes require special equipment, involve speed or heights, and are
perceived as dangerous activities. Sports in this category include rock climbing, surfing, racing, mountain
biking, whitewater rafting, skydiving, BMX, parkour, and many more.
Which of these sports have you tried? Which other ones would you like to try, if any?
SECTION 2 2-21
1
2
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Listen to what each person enjoys doing. Then, decide which free time activities would be best for each of
them.
Amy: I love being outdoors! The mountains are so beautiful. I enjoy taking pictures while I
am out in nature. I don’t mind climbing up high, but I also love to simply go biking or riding on the trails
through the woods.
Connor: My favorite season is winter. Not many people say that because most people enjoy warm weather.
However, I absolutely love the snow and cold temperatures. There are so many fun things you can do in the
winter.
Hailey: I love that I live in a state that has warm temperatures all year long because I don’t like
the cold. I also live near water, which means I am able to be at the beach almost every day.
Austin: I really enjoy getting to where I am going fast. Anything with wheels is the mode of
transportation for me! Therefore, I really enjoy being outdoors and in warmer temperatures
to be able to do what I love.
Amy Connor Hailey Austin

rock climbing snowboarding sailing inline skating
horseback riding skiing surfing skateboarding
cycling ice skating water skiing auto racing

You are trying to make plans for the weekend. Listen as Betsy describes what she likes to do
using a verb of preference + gerund. Make a recommendation using a “Let’s” command and the noun
form of the gerund you hear.
For example: You hear: I like driving. You type: [Let’s go for a drive.]
Use “for a…” with Numbers 1-3
1. I like jogging. [Let’s go for a jog.]
2. I like walking. [Let’s go for a walk.]
3. I like swimming. [Let’s go for a swim.]
Use “on a…” with Numbers 4-6.
4. I like hiking. [Let’s go on a hike.]
5. I like running. [Let’s go on a run.]
6. I like biking. [Let’s go on a bike ride.]
2-22 SECTION 2
1
2
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
sentences. Click "Done" to move on to the next question.
Possible answers:
1. Who enjoys surfing? Maya enjoys surfing.
2. What does Dominic do in his free time? He water skis in his free time.
3. Who goes sailing? Jake’s family goes sailing.
4. What do Nora and Leo like to do? They like to go for a bike ride.
5. Who enjoys rock climbing? Lucy and Jeff enjoy rock climbing.
6. What does Kaitlyn do on the weekends? She goes horseback riding.
7. Which activity would you enjoy doing? Why? Answers vary
8. Which activity would you not like to do? Why not? Answers vary
SECTION 2 2-23
1
2
GRAMMAR
REVIEW PRESENT PERFECT
We use the present perfect to express a situation that started in the past and continues in the present.
I have played basketball since 2010.

How long have you played basketball? (I started playing basketball in 2010. I still play
basketball today.)
He has been a goalie for 2 months.

How long has he been a goalkeeper?
(He became a goalie 2 months ago. He is still a goalie.)
*If you need to review the grammar rules from previous levels, go to the Present Perfect chart.
TIME PHRASES
For and since are both used to answer the question “how long” (duration of time).
“For” phrases show a length of time “Since” phrases show a specific point of time
How long have you played basketball? How long have you played basketball?
2 weeks. 2013.
I have played basketball for a few years. I have played basketball since December.
8 months. last week.
Have you played basketball for a long time? Have you played basketball for a long time?
Yes, I have played basketball for 7 years. Yes, I have played basketball *since I was 12.
*Since can also be used with a clause in the past simple.
Note: Use ago only with the past simple, not the present perfect.
I have played basketball since 10 years ago. I started playing basketball 10 years ago.
SECTION 3
2-24 SECTION 2
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose since or for to best complete each sentence describing how long each person has done each
activity.
1. Allison has surfed __________ she was eight years old. A. since B. for
2. Have you played basketball together __________ a while? A. since B. for
3. Caleb has ice skated every winter __________ he learned from his brother. A. since B. for
4. I have been rock climbing every Thursday __________ two months and love it! A. since B. for
5. Gavin has water skied __________ three years. A. since B. for
6. Have you sailed __________ you were little? A. since B. for
7. __________ I was a baby, my family and I have sailed every summer. A. Since B. For
8. Jessica has been horseback riding __________ she was nine years old. A. since B. for
9. Have you been a goalkeeper __________ more than two years? A. since B. for
10. __________ the last few weeks, we have practiced on the new field. A. Since B. For

MAD Sentence Jumble
William and Elizabeth are having a conversation. Put their conversation in the correct order.
G. I would like to try some extreme sports, but I’m not sure where to start. Have you
ever done any extreme sports?
D. Yes! I’ve gone skydiving, mountain biking, and auto racing.
J. Wow, that’s amazing! Can you tell me more about skydiving?
A. I went in California 5 years ago. It was terrifying at first, but then it was beautiful!
Are you interested in going skydiving?
L. I’m not sure. It might be too extreme for me. I’ve never been in a plane.
E. All right, how about mountain biking?
I. Hmm...I’ve biked over lots of hills, so that’s a possibility, though there aren’t any
mountains near me. I’ll think about it. Where did you go auto racing?
B. At the Daytona International Speedway!
K. How fast did you drive?
H. I only drove 180 miles an hour. That was fast enough for me.
C. That sounds scary, but out of all the extreme sports, this one I could do.
F. Great! You don’t have to go extremely fast your first time. Take it slow.

Type a present perfect sentence using the subject, verb, and time phrase provided. Include since or for
in each sentence.
For example: You read: We / to sail / every Saturday / 2017
You type: We have sailed every Saturday since 2017.
1. I / to go on a run / every morning / three years I have gone on a run every morning for three years.
2. Josh / to water ski / 2016 Josh has water skied since 2016.
SECTION 2 2-25
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
3. Max and I / to play soccer / seven years Max and I have played soccer for seven years.
4. Stacey and Zoe / to race horses / 2009 Stacey and Zoe have raced horses since 2009.
5. I / to be a goalkeeper / fourteen years old I have been a goalkeeper since I was fourteen years old.
6. Noah / to skateboard / every day / two weeks Noah has skateboarded every day for two weeks.
7. Kylie / to water ski / two years Kylie has water skied for two years.
8. Molly / to surf / every weekend / ten years old Molly has surfed every weekend since she was ten
years old.

Complete each sentence with the past simple or present perfect. Use key words to help you decide
which tense to use. Use capitalization when needed and a contraction when possible.
For example: You see: [ _____ ] you [ _____ ] on a walk yesterday? (go)
You type: [Did] you [go] on a walk yesterday? (go)
1. [Has] Chloe [snowboarded] for long? (to snowboard)
2. I [have been] interested in photography since I [was] in the sixth grade. (be; be)
3. [Have] you ever [watched] boxing? (watch)
4. [Did] you and your friends [ice skate] a lot last winter? (ice skate)
5. Stephen and Elena [went] water skiing last weekend. (go)
6. [Did] Ethan [photograph] during the game last night? (photograph)
7. Jeremy [left] on a bike ride ten minutes ago. (leave)
8. Bonnie [has been] rock climbing for 16 years. She goes rock climbing almost every weekend. (be)
9. I [haven’t bought] a new board since 2012. (not buy)
10. Caroline [was] the team’s goalkeeper for three years, but last week she [broke] her ankle
and can’t play anymore. (be; break)
11. [Have] you [tried out] for the sailing team yet? (try out)
12. [Did] she [pass] the ball to you? (pass)
13. He [made] the winning basket! Nice shot! (make)
14. She [has lost] every match since September. (lose)
15. My family and I [went] on a long bike ride yesterday. (go)
16. Damon [hasn’t scored] a goal since last summer. (not score)
17. [Did] you [ice skate] at all last winter? (ice skate)
18. We [took] third place in last week’s competition. (take)
19. Tyler [saw] a boxing match in 2017. (see)
20. [Did] my new skateboard [arrive] this morning? (arrive)
2-26 SECTION 2
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to each sentence. Then, decide if it is right or wrong.
For example: You hear: I snowboarded since 2010. You choose: A. Right B. Wrong
1. I went for a jog with my dog this morning. A. Right B. wrong
2. They have run in this race last summer. A. Right B. Wrong
3. My parents gave me this surfboard for my last birthday. A. Right B. Wrong
4. Avery has water skied every summer since she was 10. A. Right B. Wrong
5. Have you gone rock climbing last weekend? A. Right B. Wrong
6. He has made 5 baskets last night. A. Right B. Wrong
7. My friends and I ice skated on the lake since we were 5. A. Right B. Wrong
8. Have you ever surfed at this beach? A. Right B. Wrong
9. I photographed a great game since yesterday. A. Right B. Wrong
10. Has the horse ever jumped this high? A. Right B. Wrong

MAD Open Recording
Change each present simple sentence into the present perfect. Say each answer using since or for
and the given time.
For example: You read: Trevor skateboards in his free time. (he was 8)
You say: Trevor has skateboarded in his free time since he was 8.
1. My friend water skis every weekend. (5 years)
My friend has water skied every weekend for 5 years.
2. Sandy goes surfing when it’s sunny. (2015)
Sandy has gone surfing when it’s sunny since 2015.
3. Ryan snowboards every winter. (he was 12)
Ryan has snowboarded every winter since he was 12.
4. Marissa goes horseback riding. (last year)
Marissa has gone horseback riding since last year.
5. The Cohens watch extreme sports on Sundays. (May 15, 2016)
The Cohens have watched extreme sports on Sundays since May 15, 2016.
6. Seth goes jogging after work. (9 months)
Seth has gone jogging after work for 9 months.
7. Kirsten goes cycling at sunrise. (she turned 40)
Kirsten has gone cycling at sunrise since she turned 40.
8. Julie inline skates to work every day. (6 weeks)
Julie has inline skated to work every day for 6 weeks.
9. Jimmy hikes on vacation. (25 years)
Jimmy has hiked on vacation for 25 years.
10. Gina is able to hit a baseball. (she was a kid)
Gina has been able to hit a baseball since she was a kid.
SECTION 2 2-27
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 2.2.16 - LISTEN, READ, & SPEAK
MAD Open Recording
Look at each picture, and listen to its description. Then, read each question, and answer using complete
sentences.
Brittany has gone rock climbing Drew has loved auto racing Parker started snowboarding
every week for five years. She since he was a kid. He learned when he was seven years old.
started because she enjoys to drive when he was 16 years So, he has snowboarded for 13
being in nature. She has old and has auto raced since years. He loves going off jumps!
already climbed six mountains he was 18 years old. He is 25 He has practiced with Olympic
in different states. Next years old. He has raced in the athletes in the hopes
summer she wants to climb Indy 500 twice, but he has not of joining the Olympic team
Red River Gorge in Kentucky. won yet. someday.
Possible answers:
1. How long has Brittany been rock climbing? She has been rock climbing for five years.
2. How many mountains has she climbed? She has climbed six mountains.
3. Has Drew won the Indy 500 yet? No, he hasn’t won yet.
4. For how long has Derek raced? He has raced for seven years.
5. Has Parker snowboarded since he was young? Yes, he has.

ADVERBS OF TIME
Adverb Placement Use Examples
At the end of the To ask if an action has Has the game started already?
question or right after the been done
subject Has the game already started?
already
At the end of the sentence In an affimative
Yes, the game has started already.
or between the helping verb response
(auxiliary verb) and the main Yes, the game has already started.
verb
2-28 SECTION 2
1
2
GRAMMAR
ADVERBS OF TIME
Adverb Placement Use Examples
In questions to find out Have you ever been rock climbing?

ever After the subject if someone has done Have you ever gone horseback
something before riding?
We have just finished playing soccer,
After the helping verb (auxiliary
so we are too tired to go for a run
verb) For actions that have
now.
just happened in the very
near past
Have you just finished playing your
After the subject in a question
game?
In closed questions Has the game started yet?
to ask if an action has
happened Why hasn’t the game started yet?
yet At the end of the sentence
Use in a negative It hasn’t started yet because the

question or response other team is late.
I have never gone surfing.

In affirmative
After the helping verb (auxiliary
never sentences, but the
verb) He has tried many sports, but
meaning is negative
he has never snowboarded.

MAD Multiple Choice
An adverb of time has been added to each sentence. Choose the correct position of each one.
1. Have you gone rock climbing?
A. Have you ever gone rock climbing?
B. Ever have you gone rock climbing?
C. Have you gone rock climbing ever?
2. No, I have not been rock climbing.
A. No, I never have been rock climbing.
B. No, I have never been rock climbing.
C. No, I have been rock climbing never.
3. Have you been to the new sports facility?
A. Have already you been to the new sports facility?
B. Have you been to the new sports facility already?
C. Have you been already to the new sports facility?
4. No, I have not been there.
A. No, I haven’t yet been there.
B. No, yet I haven’t yet been there.
C. No, I haven’t been there yet.
SECTION 2 2-29
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
5. You look tired. What did you do this afternoon?
A. What have you just done this afternoon?
B. What did just you do this afternoon?
C. What did you doing just this afternoon?
6. I am tired! I have run a race.
A. I just have run a race.
B. I have run in a race just.
C. I have just run in a race.
7. Have you jumped while horseback riding?
A. Have ever you jumped while horseback riding?
B. Have you ever jumped while horseback riding?
C. Have you jumped while horseback riding ever?
8. No, I have not jumped. It is too scary.
A. No, I have never jumped. It is too scary.
B. No, never I have jumped. It is too scary.
C. No, I have jumped never. It is too scary.

Use the words given to form a present perfect statement or question with an adverb of time.
The question mark tells you that you need to form a question.
For example: You read: ever / you / to go horseback riding / ?
You type: Have you ever gone horseback riding?
1. already / Gabriella / to climb / this mountain
2. just / you / to run / in a race / ?
3. never / I / to inline skate
4. ever / Jack / to study / photography / ?
5. yet / you all / to water ski / ?
6. just / we / to go on a bike ride
7. already / the race / to start / ?
8. never / Rick / to sail
Possible answers:
1. Gabriella has already climbed this mountain. OR Gabriella has climbed this mountain already.
2. Have you just run in a race?
3. I have never inline skated.
4. Has Jack ever studied photography?
5. Have you all water skied yet?
6. We have just gone on a bike ride.
7. Has the race started already? OR Has the race already started?
8. Rick has never sailed.
2-30 SECTION 2
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
Fun Runs
Many people love to play sports and be active in their freetime. Being active together can be a fun social
activity, and one popular activity is to participate in a public 5K* or 10K* run. You can find these “fun run”
events in any big city at almost any time of the year. Signing up for a fun run has a registration fee. They
are often organized as fundraisers by charities to find a cure for a disease such as cancer or heart disease.
It is common for there to be a theme for a run, and oftentimes you’ll see groups of friends dressed up in
costumes to run together. You usually get a fun run T-shirt, as well as food and drinks at the end of the race.
K* = Kilometer

Listen to the people talk about free time activities that they have or have not done. Place each phrase
under the correct person based on what you heard. Each person will have one phrase not used. Use the
X - Name in the chart for that purpose. The order will be graded.
Nicole: Hi, Amanda! How are you?
Amanda: I’m great! I’ve just played in my first soccer game, and I’ve already scored 2 goals!
Nicole: Wow, congratulations!
Jeff: That’s fantastic, Amanda! I’ve played soccer for five years, and I haven’t scored a goal yet.
Nicole: That’s because you play defense, Jeff. I’ve played baseball for 2 years, and I’ve never caught a ball! I
think it’s time to try something new. Like surfing!
Jeff: Surfing?
Nicole: Yup. I have just bought a new surfboard.
Amanda: Awesome, Nicole! But...have you ever surfed before?
Nicole: Well...no. I haven’t surfed yet. But I’m excited to learn!
Jeff: I’ve never surfed.
Amanda: Really, Jeff? You should definitely try surfing since you have already snowboarded many times. I am
sure you would be good at surfing, too.
Amanda Jeff Nicole

has just played soccer X - Jeff bought a surfboard
hasn’t yet taught Jeff to surf scored a goal surfed
has already scored 2 goals snowboarded X - Nicole
has never X - Amanda surfed caught a baseball
SECTION 2 2-31
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
The current time is 12:32 p.m. Listen to each sentence. Then, decide if each statement is true or false
based on the time and Summer’s schedule.
Summer’s Saturday Schedule
8:00 a.m. to 9:00 a.m. Run on the track at the sports facility
10:00 a.m. to 11:00 a.m. Photography class at El Camino College
12:00 p.m. to 12:30 p.m. Play baseball with Seth at home
12:30 p.m. to 1:00 p.m. Have lunch
1:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. Go to the race track for the auto racing championship
1. Summer has already had photography class. A. True B. False

2. She has just finished her run about 5 minutes ago. A. True B. False
3. Summer is driving to the race track right now. A. True B. False
4. She has just finished playing baseball with Seth. A. True B. False
5. Summer hasn’t gone to the race track yet. A. True B. False
6. She has already finished lunch. A. True B. False
7. She hasn’t gone to the sports facility yet. A. True B. False
8. Summer has just started eating lunch. A. True B. False

MAD Open Recording
Right now it is 11:02 a.m. Use Summer’s Monday schedule to say sentences in the present perfect tense
using the given activities and adverbs of time.
Summer’s Monday Schedule

7:00 a.m. to 8:00 a.m. Run on the track at the sports facility
9:00 a.m. to 10:00 a.m. Go to Black and White Photography class at El Camino College
11:00 p.m to 12:00 p.m. Edit and send photographs to coaches and newspapers
12:15 p.m. to 1:00 p.m. Eat lunch in the cafeteria
1:10 p.m. to 3:10 p.m. Go to Introduction to Journalism class at El Camino College
5:00 p.m. to 9:30 p.m. Photograph at sporting events
Possible answers:
1. go to the sports facility / already Summer has already gone to the sports facility.
2. finish her photography class / just She has just finished her photography class.
3. photograph at the sporting event / yet She hasn’t photographed at the sporting event yet.
4. start sending photographs / already She has already started sending photographs.
5. eat lunch at home / never She has never eaten lunch at home.
6. go to her journalism class / yet She hasn’t gone to her journalism class yet.
2-32 SECTION 2
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 2.2.22 - Who plays which sport?
2
beginning of this activity and hit record. If students have never done a logic puzzle, explain how or have them
watch a video.
Answer Key: Hockey Football Soccer Golf Tennis Running

Monica X X O X X X
Rachel X X X X O X
Phoebe O X X X X X
Joey X O X X X X
Chandler X X X X X O
Ross X X X O X X
Partner A Worksheet:
This group of friends all have one sport that they each play. You and your partner are each given a set of
clues to help you match each friend to the sport that he/she plays. Partner A, read your clues out loud
first. Based on the clue, put an X in the box for any sport that does not go with the person. Partner B,
now read your clues out loud. Put an X in the boxes for any sport that does not go with the person. Put
an O in the box for the person and the sport he/she plays.
For example:
Partner A reads: “Tom likes to play all sports where he has to run.”
You would put an X in the boxes for hockey and golf because you don’t have to run in those sports.
Partner B reads: “Tom likes to shoot lots of goals by kicking the ball as hard as he can.”
You would put an X in the boxes for football, tennis and running. Put an O in the soccer box because that is
the only sport choice where you kick the ball into a goal.
Hockey Football Soccer Golf Tennis Running
Tom X X O X X X
Partner A Clues:
1. Rachel played this sport when she was younger. In this sport, she used something to hit the ball to score
points.
3. Ross and Joey like to play a sport without a net.
5. Monica and Chandler love to run. They are both very fast.
7. Joey and Phoebe both play a sport where the players wear helmets.
Partner B Clues:
2. Chandler does not play a sport with any equipment.
4. Phoebe prefers to play the sport where players do not use a ball.
6. Ross has to try to hit a small ball into a hole far away. There is no running nor goals to be scored.
8. Rachel hits a ball over the net to score points. Monica kicks a ball into the net.
SECTION 2 2-33
1
2
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Place each sport under the correct person based on the conversation activity "Who plays which sport?"
Monica Rachel Phoebe Joey Chandler Ross

Soccer Tennis Hockey Football Running Golf
ACTIVITY 2.2.24 - Have you ever...?

TEACHER NOTE: If you want to be able to listen to these conversations later, launch the
recorder at the beginning of this activity and hit record.
Below are questions using the present perfect. Find someone in the class who has done the following
activities. Write the name of the person in the box. Then, ask your partner another question about the
that freetime activity.
For example: You ask: How long have you Have you done that
played baseball? more than once?
I have played baseball I have done that at

You write: for 6 years and I hit 2 least ten times.
home runs per game.
Have you ever been

Have you ever played Have you ever been Have you ever been
skiing?
basketball? _______boarding? horseback riding?
(water or snow)
Have you
Have you ever watched
Have you ever hit a ball Have you ever been ice ever jumped off
auto racing on T.V. or
with a baseball bat? skating? something high into
in person?
the water?
Have you ever done an Have you ever tried Have you ever been in Have you ever gone on
extreme sport? surfing or sailing? a race? a long run or bike ride?

MAD Open Recording
Choose five answers from the “Have you ever...?” conversation activity. Share those answers and the extra
information you learned about those classmates.
2-34 SECTION 2
1
2
READING
ROBOTEL HOTEL & SPA
SECTION 2 2-35
1
2
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if each statement is true or false based on the reading.
1. You can book a free personal trainer. A. True B. False
2. They do not have any restaurants at the hotel. A. True B. False
3. Equipment rental for ball sports is $5 per day. A. True B. False
4. The resort has its own private beach. A. True B. False
5. Every Saturday, they offer free salsa classes. A. True B. False
6. You can also go on a sailing boat cruise on the ocean. A. True B. False
7. There are trails for hiking, jogging, and roller skating nearby. A. True B. False
8. If you don’t find what you are looking for, they will help you. A. True B. False

MAD Open Text
After reading the “Robotel Hotel & Spa” webpage, write a review as if you stayed there and did some of the
activities. Give your opinion and tell how many stars you give it.
2-36 SECTION 2
1
2
VOCABULARY
COMPETING IN SPORTS

MAD Open Text

TEACHER NOTE: Translate the section vocabulary list in the MAD before assigning this activity.

MAD Text Match
TEACHER NOTE: Translate the section vocabulary list in the MAD before assigning this activity.

MAD Open Text
SECTION 3 2-37
1
2
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
Pronounce phrases and sentences using Section 3 Vocabulary.
1. Are you going to try out for the soccer team? 6. It ended as a tie game.
2. I’m not a fan of auto racing. 7. Who is the referee for tonight’s game?
3. Our team took second place last night. 8. The fans cheer loudly at the championship.
4. How often do you train in a week? 9. She needs one more point to win the match.
5. It is our team versus your team. 10. Who are they playing against?

1. [Good luck!] 9. [to compete against]
2. [the championship] 10. [the first place prize]
3. [second place] 11. [to join the team]
4. [to participate] 12. [the winning point]
5. [the referee] 13. [the score of the game]
6. [I’m a fan of surfing.] 14. [to lose]
7. [to win the match] 15. [to cheer for the team]
8. [to train hard] 16. [to try out]

Complete the short story about a championship football game using the word bank.
points to quit the referees lost

the field championship second place to win
to tie won scored the fans
against tie game to cheer to score
Last night my family and I went to watch our high school’s [championship] football game. It was a very exciting
game! We played [against] a team that had only [lost] one game. So, our football players were nervous. The
game began, and we [scored] the first [points]. It didn’t take long for the other team [to tie] us. You could tell
that our team really wanted [to win] because they never seemed [to quit]. At half time, it was a [tie game],
and as the players took a break, [the fans] continued [to cheer] loudly. During the second half of the game,
[the referees] ran up and down [the field] as each team tried [to score] points. The teams competed really
well, but in the end, the other team [won]. However, our team was really happy to take [second place].
2-38 SECTION 3
1
2
VOCABULARY
COMPETING IN SPORTS
CULTURAL NOTE
How to cheer for your team in English
Fans often like to get involved in the sport they are watching. One way they do this is by cheering on their
favorite teams and yelling at the players and referees. You may hear fans say, “Nice shot!” or “Nice try!” if
a player shoots the ball at the goal or basket. Even if the player misses, fans can be heard encouraging
the players to “Keep it up!”, or “Try again!”. If a foul is committed, like one player being pushed down to the
ground, and the referee does NOT stop the game to penalize the pushy player, fans may yell “Bad call, Ref!”
or “Come on, Ref!”. Alternatively, if fans agree with the referee’s call, they would say “Good call!” or “Good
eye!”. As the opposing team tries to score against your favorite team, you might want to yell “Defense!” and
clap along with other fans. Chanting “Let’s go (team name)!” is another popular cheer you will hear at almost
any competition.

MAD Open Recording
Tell about an important game that you either played in or watched. Was it a championship game? Who
was playing? What was the score? Who won? Who lost?

Class Activity
GAMES: Past Simple Puzzle, Present Perfect Tic-Tac-Toe, and Marker Wars
(The explanation and playing sheet for these games are located in the B1 Resources
Google Doc Folder, or download the B1StudentWorksheet.pdf.)
SECTION 3 2-39
1
2
GRAMMAR
LET’S BREAK IT DOWN
REVIEW PAST CONTINUOUS
The past continuous is used to express actions that happened many times in the past or to express
a past action that was in progress at a specific time when something else happened.
Form the past continuous by using the past tense verb “was” or “were” and the present participle form of the main
verb.
Example Meaning
She was always ice skating. She ice skated many times in the past.
I was ice skating when I broke my ankle last year. Ice skating was unfinished at the time I broke my ankle.
Past Present Future
Note: The unfinished action (ice skating) is in the past

continuous tense. The finished action (broke ankle) is in
started broke finished
ice skating ankle ice skating the past simple tense.
*If you need to review the grammar rules from previous levels, go to the Past Continuous chart.

MAD Sentence Jumble
Put the sentences in the correct order.
I was playing in the basketball championship game.
It was the fourth quarter when I was passed the ball.
I was running with it down the court.
A player from the other team came up to me.
She tried to get the ball away.
I was going around her to the right when I tripped.
I fell down on the court because I injured my ankle.
The referee called a timeout because I was hurt.
A teammate of mine helped me off the court.
I was sad because I couldn’t finish the game.
Today I have to go to the doctor to get it checked out.
2-40 SECTION 3
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Use the subject and infinitive verb given to complete each sentence with the present continuous or the
past continuous.
1. [We were winning] when they scored a goal to tie the game. (we / win)
2. [The fans were cheering] so loudly because we were winning! (the fans / cheer)
3. [Are they competing] for a prize tonight? (they / compete)
4. [I am participating] in track and soccer this year. (I / participate)
5. [Was the referee calling] a good game last night? (the referee / call)
6. [The coach is quitting] because he is going to live in a different state. (the coach / quit)
7. [The team is playing] the championship game in the new stadium next week. (the team / play)
8. [The horse was jumping] when he fell. (the horse / jump)
9. [We were losing] by fifteen points but never gave up. (we / lose)
10. When the storm came in, [my family was sailing] on our boat. (my family / sail)

Look at the pictures, and be creative with your answers.
For numbers 1-4, write what the person was doing using the past continuous.
For numbers 5-8, complete the interruption using the past simple to explain what happened.
1-4 For example:
You read: ...but I didn't have any money You see: You type: I was going to buy tennis balls,
5-8 For example:
You read: I was going to play soccer, You see: You type: but it started to rain.
1. ..., but the referee made a bad call 5. I was trying to win first place, but...
and said, “No goal.”
2. …, but our coach said, “Not yet!” 6. The cyclist was winning the race,
but...
3. …, but it was not dry yet. 7. He was shooting a basket, but...
4. …, but it was too wet and muddy. 8. I was going to score a goal, but...
SECTION 3 2-41
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Text
Write a short story about a sports championship. You can choose which sport was being played. In your
story, use the past simple, the past continuous, and the following vocabulary words: the point, the
referee, to cheer, to win, to lose, to tie, to train, versus. You may use more vocabulary words if you like.
CULTURAL NOTE
Mascots
Mascots are people dressed up as characters or animals that represent a sports team. In order to be a
mascot, you have to try out. Not just anyone can be a mascot either. It is a hard job to get the fans excited
and keep them entertained! The mascot of the Minnesota Vikings professional football team is called “Viktor
the Viking”. Viktor energizes the crowd by running around and encouraging people to clap and cheer. One of
the most well-known university mascots is Bucky the Badger at University of Wisconsin - Madison.
Viktor the Viking Bucky the Badger

Watch this short video of a basketball game. Tell what happened using the past simple, what was
happening using the past continuous, and what you think will happen using the future tense.
2-42 SECTION 3
1
2
GRAMMAR
PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS
Use the present perfect continuous tense when you want to express an action that began in the past and
continues now. This tense emphasizes how long the action has been going on and what is happening as a result.
Uses for the present perfect continuous Examples
Expressing an action that started in the past but actively I have been competing in horseback riding all
continues now. year.
She has been practicing basketball a lot, so she
Expressing a result of an action from the past.
made the team.
Present perfect continuous combines present perfect with present continuous.
Present perfect = have + past participle
Present continuous = be + present participle
Present perfect continuous = have + been + present participle
Affirmative:
I have been playing basketball for 5 years.
Subject + have + been + present participle
Negative:
I have not been playing basketball this winter.
Subject + have + not + been + present participle
Interrogative:
Have they been playing basketball for 5 years?
Have + subject + been + present participle
Interrogative:
How long has he been playing basketball?
“How long” + have + subject + been + present participle
COMPARING TENSES: Present Perfect Continuous & Present Perfect

Both tenses express an action that is continuing from the past up to the present moment.
The difference is in the overall length of the time and whether or not the action will continue.
Present perfect continuous Present perfect
Used to express shorter periods of time and points Used to express an overall time period. The idea of the
out that the activity is continuing. activity continuing is not as important.
I have been working since 8 this morning.
I have worked at my job for 20 years.
(Shows how long I worked and means I will
(Shows the time period I have worked up to this moment.)
continue to work after this moment.)
They have been waiting almost 5 hours.
They have waited for 6 months for their package to arrive.
(Shows how long they waited and means they are
(Shows the overall time of the wait up to this moment.)
continuing to wait.)
Note: Some verbs are non-action (stative) verbs and cannot be used with the present perfect continuous tense.
These include state of being, need, opinion, sense, or preference: to be, to feel, to like, to prefer, to need, to want.
I have been knowing how to play football I have known how to play football for six
for six months. months.
We have been being happy on our new golf team. We have been happy on our new golf team.
SECTION 3 2-43
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Complete each sentence with the present perfect continuous of each verb given.
1. I [have been competing] in gymnastics. (compete)
2. We [have been playing] soccer. (play)
3. [Have] you [been hitting] well lately? (hit)
4. He [has been jumping] really high with his bike. (jump)
5. Our team [has been losing] a lot of games this season. (lose)
6. How long [have] they [been training] for the competition? (train)
7. We [have been going] cycling every day. (go)
8. She [has been cheering] loudly for her son. (cheering)
9. Sam and I [have been trying out] for basketball this week. (try out)
10. This team [has been winning] every game and is unstoppable. (win)
11. How [has] he [been racing] since the car accident two months ago? (race)
12. I [have been scoring] at least one goal every game. (score)
ACTIVITY - READ
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the present perfect or the present perfect continuous to complete each sentence.
1. We __________ a long time! We are tired.
A. have trained B. have been training
2. __________ the team?
A. Has he quit B. Has he been quitting
3. I __________ in ice skating for many years. I absolutely love it!
A. have competed B. have been competing
4. How long __________ in horseback riding?
A. have you particpated B. have you been participating
5. Our team __________ a championship.
A. has never won B. has never been winning
6. __________ a point yet?
A. Have they scored B. Have they been scoring
7. Players __________ all day for the basketball team.
A. have tried out B. have been trying out
8. __________ against this team yet this season?
A. Have you played B. Have you been playing
9. The fans __________ loudly all night. It is quite the game!
A. have cheered B. have been cheering
10. How long __________ a fan of surfing?
A. has she been B. has she been being
2-44 SECTION 3
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Word Jumble
Put each statement in the correct word order. Each sentence is written in a different tense.
1. The team often shoots baskets.
2. The team is shooting baskets today.
3. The team shot baskets at practice.
4. The team was shooting baskets last week.
5. The team has shot baskets before.
6. The team has been shooting baskets lately.

MAD Text Match
Listen to each sentence. Then, match each tense with the correct sentence.
Sentence 1: He was playing soccer. Past Continuous
Sentence 2: He played soccer. Past Simple
Sentence 3: He has played soccer. Present Perfect
Sentence 4: He has been playing soccer. Present Perfect Continuous
Sentence 5: He plays soccer. Present Simple
Sentence 6: He is playing soccer. Present Continuous

MAD Open Recording
Look at Olivia’s description of her upcoming championship basketball game. Change all the present
perfect verbs to the present perfect continuous.
I have played basketball since I was ten years old. In two weeks, we are playing in the championship game.
So, our team has trained a lot lately. We have practiced almost every night for at least two hours. We have
competed against many good teams and have won many of the games. It has been fun to see all the fans
who attend our games. They have cheered loudly for us each game! I hope we win, but if we lose and get
second place, I will still be happy. Wish us luck!
I have been playing basketball since I was ten years old. In two weeks, we are playing in the
championship game. So, our team has been training a lot lately. We have been practicing almost
every night for at least two hours. We have been competing against many good teams and have been
winning many of the games. It has been fun to see all the fans who attend our games. They have
been cheering loudly for us each game! I hope we win, but if we lose and get second place, I will still
be happy. Wish us luck!
SECTION 3 2-45
1
2
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Read this announcer’s report on the World Skateboard Championship. Then, place each sentence number
under the correct tense.
1. We are having a beautiful day here in London, England.
2. This is Spike Samson, live at the World Skateboard Championship.
3. I have become a big fan of skateboarding.
4. Right now we have a tie for the lead.
5. They just finished their last skate of the day.
6. The crowd was cheering for their favorite skater.
7. We have been waiting quietly for the ref to tell us the results.
8. Each competitor had two minutes to show us his best tricks.
9. Who is going to win first place?
10. The defending champion, Riley Hawk, has jumped the highest.
11. The runner up, Evan Smith, has been doing the most dangerous tricks.
12. Both skaters were going extremely fast.
13. The referee is going to the middle of the court.
14. Riley Hawk has done it again! He has won the championship.
Present
Present Present Past Past Present
Perfect
Simple Continuous Simple Continuous Perfect
Continuous
2 1 5 6 3 7
4 9 8 12 10 11
13 14
CULTURAL NOTE
Tailgating
Tailgating takes place in the parking lot of a stadium before a game starts.
People listen to music, play games, grill food, eat snacks, and enjoy drinks.
Tailgating is extremely popular before many sports games in the United
States, especially football and baseball. When the weather is nice, a tailgate
could last for several hours before the event begins. Other countries around
the world have their own traditions before a game, such as ordering food
and drinks at a local restaurant or pub. Do you have your own tradition in
your country?

sentences. Click "Done" to move on to the next question.
1. What have the fans been doing?
2. Which team has been winning this period?
3. Which team has been losing?
4. What has Zach been doing most of the game?
5. Who do you think is going to win?
2-46 SECTION 3
1
2
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 2.3.21 - American NFL Super Bowl Bracket
With your partner, fill in the missing information for the American NFL Super Bowl bracket.
ACTIVITY 2.3.22 - British Soccer Player

Arsenal F.C. and Chelsea F.C. are two professional football (soccer) teams from England.
Go to https://www.arsenal.com/ or https://www.chelseafc.com/en, click on the category “TEAMS”, and
scroll through the players. Click to view a player’s profile.
Fill in your chart the night before the conversation activity so that you and your partner can talk about
your answers. Compare your player with your partner’s player, and discuss who you think is the better
player.

MAD Open Recording
Record yourself as if you are the player that you researched. You are being interviewed after a game.
Say your player’s information that you researched for the conversation activity. Then, tell information
about the game based on the information given and say your opinion about the game.
Played against: Bayern Munich
Who won? Bayern Munich
What was the final score? 2 - 3
Did you score? Yes, once
Your opinion about the game?
SECTION 3 2-47
1
2
READING
PROFESSIONAL ATHLETE: PROS & CONS
2-48 SECTION 3
1
2
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Place each phrase under the correct category based on the reading.
Pros Cons
successful travel very far
best friends couldn’t go out
life lessons gone a lot
major league practice 4x week
won championships few friends

MAD Sentence Jumble
Look at the following sentences. Some are questions from the reporter; some are answers from an
athlete. Put the conversation in the correct order.
When did you first start playing basketball?
I started playing when I was 10 years old.
And when did you start playing professionally?
After I graduated from high school.
What's the biggest change from high school to professional ball?
The amount of work. I had practice every day for many hours.
That's a lot of work. For how many teams have you played?
If you count my school’s basketball team, then four in total.
In closing, do you have any advice for young athletes?
If you really love the sport, don't give up!

MAD Open Recording
Read the interview. Then, imagine that you are a teenager and got the chance to become a professional
athlete:
1. What are some benefits of following that dream? (pros)
2. What are the challenges of following that dream? (cons)
3. After thinking about the pros and cons, would you be for or against becoming a professional
athlete? Why?
SECTION 3 2-49
1
2
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S GO ROCK CLIMBING!
MAD Viewing
Teachers, you can also launch this as a LAD activity and have all your students watch it at the same time.
Meet the B1 video actors in the introduction section.
Emily: I am happy to see you all. I’m glad we were all free for brunch today. How was your guys’ weekend?
Kaitlyn: Mine was great! I went to my friend’s lake house up north. We went swimming, we sailed, we
sunbathed.
Jack: Yeah, I can really tell. You look really tan.
Kaitlyn: Haha, Jack! So funny. You’re just jealous!
Jack: I wish I had time to go boating. Yesterday I worked, the day before that I worked, and the day before that
I worked. I’m working 30 hours a week. This internship is driving me crazy. And I go to school!
Jason: That’s too bad. It was perfect weather to be outside. I had soccer practice. Speaking of soccer, Jack, did
you at least watch the Brazil versus Sweden World Cup game when you got home from work?
Jack: I did! The goal at the end of the game was insane!
Jason: I know! Too bad the referee made a stupid call and Brazil lost the game. I was cheering for them.
Kaitlyn: Okay, enough about sports. Emily, where were you this weekend? I texted you, but you never
responded.
Emily: Yeah, sorry about that. I was camping this weekend, and I didn’t have my phone with me.
I actually went rock climbing for the first time, and I really liked it. I want to do it again.
Jack: Really? I love rock climbing. I’m actually going tomorrow. Do you guys want to come with?
Emily: I’m in.
Kaitlyn: Do we have to bring equipment? I don’t have any.
Jack: Well actually, the rock wall is inside, so I think we will be able to rent all of our equipment.
Kaitlyn: Okay, cool! I’ll meet you guys there.
Jason: Tomorrow doesn’t work for me. My team made it to the state championship. We leave tomorrow and
are staying in a hotel overnight.
Jack: Oh, sorry you can’t come with. We’re your biggest fans. You guys are definitely gonna win!
Kaitlyn: Yeah, it’s too bad the game is so far away. We’re your number one fans!
Jason: Thanks. That’s okay, there will be more games next year.
Emily: What do you get if you win?
Jason: First, second, and third place all get a prize. Maybe a trophy or medal. Not sure. It’s not about the prize
though.
Jack: Yeah, come on, ladies. It’s for the love of the game!
Kaitlyn: Why are we talking about sports again?
Jack: All right, all right. Back to climbing. How about 10 o’clock. Does that work for you?
Emily: Works for me.
Kaitlyn: I’ll see ya there!
Jack: Great.
2-50 LET’S TALK!

1
2
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
1. Where did Kaitlyn spend her weekend?
A. in the city B. up north C. down south
2. Why is Jack jealous of Kaitlyn?
A. He wants to go boating, too. B. He likes her phone. C. He likes her tan.
3. How many hours does Jack work during his internship?
A. 30 hours B. 20 hours C. 40 hours
4. Which soccer game are Jason and Jack talking about?
A. Brazil vs. Germany B. Sweden vs. England C. Brazil vs. Sweden
5. Which team won the game?
A. Brazil B. Sweden C. It was tied.
6. What did Emily enjoy doing?
A. surfing B. rock climbing C. reading
7. Jason can’t go rock climbing because...
A. he has an appointment. B. he has to study. C. he has a soccer game.
8. When do Jack, Kaitlyn, and Emily want to meet up?
A. 10 o’clock B. 11 o’clock C. 3 o’clock

MAD Category Match
Place each phrase under the correct person based on the chapter video.
Kaitlyn Jack Emily Jason

mine was great driving me crazy yeah, sorry soccer practice
just jealous back to climbing do it again I was cheering
meet you guys your biggest fans what do you get in a hotel
number one fans works for me a trophy

MAD Open Recording
1. Have you ever gone rock climbing? Did you like it? If you haven’t, would you like to try it? Why/Why not?
2. When was the last time you had a weekend without a phone? Or has that never happened?
What would you miss the most if you didn’t have your phone?
3. Which activities do you enjoy doing with your friends? Do you have a hobby you share?
Do you regularly meet up to have a game night, go on hike, or go out (ie: dinner, a movie, a concert…)?
LET’S TALK! 2-51

1
2
LET’S TALK!
MAD Viewing
TEACHER NOTE: The interview answers are unscripted responses to a question. You may notice some
grammatical errors, so please keep in mind that these are authentic responses.
Ann Marie Rutvik Connor

Ann Marie: [I like to play soccer] because I’m an athlete, and I go out and play with my brother. And then
sometimes in the summer [I am a coach] because I work with little kids at camps. So that’s [really fun].
And then I like working out, so sometimes I go jogging in the morning and [then if it’s really hot], I like
to go swimming in the afternoon to cool off. Sometimes, my family goes on vacation and we go hiking,
[so we go rock climbing] in Colorado. But [I don’t really like horses], so horseback riding is not my thing.
But [I do like photography]. So, that’s pretty fun, if you go and take pictures with your friends in the woods,
or at a beach, or a park, that’s always something to do in the afternoon.
Rutvik: In my free time, [I like to swim and jog] because I am a very active person. And I love swimming;
[I’ve always loved it] since I was a little kid. What I [don’t like to do in my free time] is painting because I
have no patience and painting requires a lot of patience. What I don’t like to do in my free time [is also
horseback riding] because I don’t trust horses at all.
Connor: All right I do consider myself a very active person, so [I love playing sports]. I love playing baseball;
[I play a lot of basketball and ice hockey]. And I really love to do wakeboarding and kneeboarding out on
the lake. I love to spend as much time out on the water as possible, whether it be just driving boats, fishing, or
wakeboarding and kneeboarding. So, that’s how I spend [most of my free time] if I have any.
2-52 LET’S TALK!

1
2
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
Listen to Ann Marie’s interview. Something is false about each statement. Rewrite the whole sentence in
the blank so that the sentence is correct based on her interview. The incorrect information is between
the asterisks. Be careful with capitalization and punctuation.
1. I work with *big teenagers* at camps. [I work with little kids at camps.]
2. *Hiking* is always something fun to do in the [Taking pictures is always something fun
afternoon. to do in the afternoon.]
3. I like to go swimming in the afternoon when [I like to go swimming in the afternoon
*it snows*. when it’s hot.]
4. I *like* horses, so horseback riding *is* my [I do not like horses, so horseback riding
thing. is not my thing.]
5. Sometimes my family goes on vacation, and [Sometimes my family goes on vacation,
we go *camping* in CO. and we go hiking or rock climbing in CO.]
6. I like to play soccer because I'm *a runner*. [I like to play soccer because I’m an athlete.]
7. I like photography, especially taking pictures [I like photography, especially taking
*in the mountains*. pictures in the woods.]
8. I play soccer with *my friends*. [I play soccer with my brother.]

MAD Open Recording
1. What do you like to do in your free time?
2. What are your hobbies?
3. Are there any activities you don’t like to do? Which ones? Why don’t you like doing them?
4. Do you have a bucket list for free time activities you have always wanted to try?
5. If yes, what is on that list? If not, why not? (ex: climb a certain mountain, try an extreme sport, etc.)
LET’S TALK! 2-53

1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIE: SELF-EVALUATION How well do I
Additional Practice Refer to...

I CAN...
Review (R) (Page = P.)
Sections
1. discuss sports and activities. R. 4, 5, 7, 8
1, 2, 3
P. 2-8, 2-11,
2. use previously learned past tenses. R. 2, 3, 6, 7, 8
2-24, 2-40
3. use time phrases with since and for. R. 1, 3, 7 P. 2-24
4. use adverbs of time. R. 1, 2, 3, 4, 7 P. 2-28
5. use the present perfect continuous tense. R. 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8 P. 2-43
R1 - LISTENING 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen as a football coach talks to two players before a game. Choose the best answer for each question
based on what you hear.
Coach: Okay, Tim and Keith. You have been playing really well in games lately. But Tim, at practice yesterday you
weren’t throwing the ball as accurately as normal. What was going on?
Tim: I hurt my finger at practice a few days ago. I have not been able to hold the ball well.
Coach: You should have told me sooner. How is your finger feeling today?
Tim: It is a little better. I have been going to the trainer the past couple of days. I was icing it all week, and I have
been trying not to use it much during the day today. I just needed to rest it.
Coach: Here is a ball. Try throwing it to Keith a few times and tell me how you feel.
Tim: It feels good. I think that I am ready to play. I just need to warm up a little more.
Coach: Great. Okay, Keith, you were running a little slower than normal at practice yesterday. Is everything okay
with you?
Keith: Yes, I had a headache that hurt more when I ran. Since I got hit last week in that game against the Lions,
my head has been hurting. I never got headaches before. Sorry, Coach.
Coach: Is your headache gone today?
Keith: Yup. All good for the game. I went to the doctor this morning, and he said I am okay to play.
Coach: Great. I need you to run your fastest today. You have been catching a lot of Tim’s passes, so I need you
to get open for Tim to throw to you. Tim, if Keith isn’t open, look for Vince.
Tim: Sounds good, Coach. Vince was catching well at practice, so I agree. If Keith isn’t open, Vince is my number 2.
Coach: We have yet to beat the Eagles. Let’s win this game! Go play your hardest! Let’s go, Bears!
2-54 CHAPTER 2
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R1 - LISTENING 1 (Continued)
MAD Multiple Choice
1. Since when has Keith’s head been hurting?
A. since yesterday B. since playing the Lions C. since playing the Eagles
2. They have yet to beat which team?
A. the Bears B. the Lions C. the Eagles
3. How long has Tim’s finger been hurting?
A. since a few days B. for a few days C. since playing the Lions
4. Who went to the doctor this morning?
A. Keith B. Vince C. Tim
5. Keith ___________ got headaches before.
A. always B. never C. just
6. Tim ___________ needed to rest his finger.
A. always B. never C. just
7. The coach has asked Keith to ___________.
A. run his fastest today B. miss the ball C. catch Vince’s throws
8. Tim ___________ to the trainer since he hurt his finger.
A. has been going B. is going C. went
R2 - LISTENING 2
If the answer is a number, spell it out. For example, type [ten] not [10].
1. [He threw the ball down the court.]
2. [Did they bring all the equipment?]
3. [Have you ever watched a boxing championship?]
4. [We have just finished the final race.]
5. [Which referee was calling the game?]
6. [The team has been training five days a week.]
R3 - GRAMMAR 1
Complete each sentence with the present perfect, present perfect continuous, since, or for.
Use a contraction whenever possible and short answers.
1. How long [have] you [been] on the football team? (be) [Since] last year.
2. [Have] you [been playing] soccer for a long time? (play) Yes, [for] five years.
3. How many new players [have] [joined] this year? (join) There are four new players.
4. [Has] Adam [bought] a new bat yet? (buy) Yes, he has had it [since] last week.
5. [Have] you ever [tried] skateboarding? (try) No, I [haven’t].
6. Who [has] just [won] a prize? (win) Lila won first prize for first place.
7. How long [has] Elizabeth [been ice skating]? (ice skate) [For] ten years!
8. [Has] the team [been losing] a lot this season? (lose) Yes, they [have]. They are not doing well so far.
CHAPTER 2 2-55
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R4 - GRAMMAR 2
The current time is 12:02 p.m. Use Jackie’s Saturday schedule to type present perfect sentences using the
given activities. For each sentence, use an adverb of time.
Jackie’s Saturday Schedule
8:00 a.m. - 9:00 a.m. Arrive at the soccer stadium and jog with team
10:00 a.m. - 11:20 a.m. Compete in soccer game
12:00 p.m. - 1:00 p.m. Have lunch with family

2:00 p.m. - 5:00 p.m. Meet friends and go see a movie
6:00 p.m. - 8:00 p.m. Watch soccer game on TV with family

Possible answers:
1. to jog at the stadium Jackie has already jogged at the stadium.
2. to compete in a soccer game She has just competed in a soccer game.
3. to watch baseball on TV She has never watched baseball on TV.
4. to start to eat lunch She has already started eating lunch.
5. to go see a movie She hasn’t gone to see a movie yet.
R5 - READING
MAD Multiple Choice
First, read Some of the Most Unusual Sports in the World. Then, decide if each statement is a fact, the
author’s opinion, or both (fact and opinion) based on the article.
Some of the Most Unusual Sports in the World
Have you ever heard of “cardboard sword fighting,” “mountain unicycling,” or “egg throwing?" These are
some of the world’s most unusual sports that people have come up with. Other uncommon sports include
“Cycleball” (which is a combination of bicycling, soccer, basketball, and polo), “Zorbing” (rolling down a hill in
a giant plastic orb/ball) or “Man vs. Horse” (a 22 mile marathon between men and horses). But if you think
those are crazy, you haven’t seen our top 10 list of the world’s most unusual sports. Here are numbers
6 through 10. You will get to read about the top five for the assessment. Enjoy!
10. Sepak Takraw

This sport is where soccer meets volleyball and is popular in Southeast Asia. It’s played on a court with
a ball and net. The players can use their chest, feet, knees, and head to get the ball over the net without
having the ball touch the floor. It can be played in teams of two to four players.
9. Egg Throwing
Egg throwing or “egg tossing” is a popular sport in Europe. There are a few variations of the game, but it
originated in Britain in the Middle Ages as a game during Easter. The rules are that two players stand a few
meters (yards) apart and throw a raw or fresh egg from one person to the other. If the egg stays unbroken,
they step another step apart and throw the egg to one another again. This is repeated until the egg breaks.
As of March 11, 2018, the world record is 85.96 meters (282 feet) between the teammates!
2-56 CHAPTER 2
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
8. Belly Flopping
Yes, it’s just what you imagine: a competition about belly flops. Every participant falls flat forward into
a swimming pool. In Norway, they even have a competition for who can do the best belly flop. That has
to hurt. Ouch!
7. Toe Wrestling
Another one of our favorites: toe wrestling! The rules are pretty simple. You sit across from your
opponent, you lock your big toes together, and you try to take the other foot/toe down. You can win
medals, trophies, and year-long bragging rights until the next competition!
6. Bo-taoshi
It’s a traditional sport in Japanese schools. Bo-taoshi means "pole pull down." Two teams of 75 members
play against each other. The defending team tries to defend their pole with their bodies by forming a
circle around it. The offense tries to pull the pole down or lower it to at least a 30 degree angle towards
the ground. Personally, I’d love to try that with my soccer team sometime!
1. Another one of our favorites: toe wrestling!

A. Fact B. Opinion C. Both
2. Two teams of 75 members play against each other.
3. Egg throwing or “egg tossing” is a popular sport in Europe.
4. The players can use their chest, feet, knees, and head to get the ball over the net.
5. In Norway, they even have a competition for who can do the best belly flop. That has to hurt. Ouch!
6. Personally, I’d love to try that with my soccer team sometime!
R6 - WRITING
Rewrite the present simple sentence in each of the tenses given. Be careful with capiltalization and
punctuation.
She throws the ball well.
1. Present Continuous - [She is throwing the ball well.]
2. Past Simple - [She threw the ball well.]
3. Present Perfect - [She has thrown the ball well.]
4. Past Continuous - [She was throwing the ball well.]
5. Present Perfect Continuous - [She has been throwing the ball well.]
CHAPTER 2 2-57
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R7 - SPEAKING 1
The current date is March 15th, 2018. Listen to each question about the timeline. Then, respond in the
pauses provided using complete sentences. Click "Done" to move on to the next question.
Brandon’s Sailing Timeline
OCTOBER 2013 MAY 2014 JUNE 2014 JULY 2014 AUGUST 2014 SEPTEMBER 2014 OCTOBER 2014
Buy boat
Learn how Try out for Join Train for Compete in Second race
to sail sailing team Team first race first race

Possible answers:
1. What was Brandon doing in May 2014? He was learning how to sail.
2. How long has he been on the sailing team? He has been on the sailing team for 3 months.
3. Has he competed in his second race yet? No, he hasn’t competed yet.
4. In which month did he buy his boat? He bought his boat in October 2013.
5. When did he try out for the sailing team? He tried out in June 2014.
6. Have you ever gone sailing? Answers will vary.
R8 - SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Tell a story about what was happening and/or what happened in the image of this soccer game.
Use Chapter 2 Vocabulary, past simple, and past continuous. Think about these questions as you tell
your story: What sport were they playing? What was the score? What was happening in the game when
something else happened?
2-58 CHAPTER 2
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
INTERVIEW WITH A PROFESSIONAL ATHLETE
Work with a partner. One of you will be a famous athlete, the other one a reporter. Come up with some
important questions about the start of the athlete's career, some important life events, and also future
plans. Research the athlete so that you are using real facts about his/her life. Present to the class.

MAKE UP A SPORT
Work with a partner or group. After reading about the unusual sports in the review, come up with a sport
of your own.
Answer the following questions:
1. What is the name of the sport?
2. How many people do you need to play?
3. What are the rules?
4. How does someone win?
TEACHER NOTE: You could offer extra credit if the group tries to play the sport and documents it with
pictures or videos.
LISTENING 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen as a basketball coach talks to her players before a game. Choose the best answer for each
question based on what you hear.
Coach: Nora! Pass the ball to Lauren. She is open. Lauren, run up the right side of the court. Pass it back to
Nora! Shoot the ball! YES! Score!
Buzzer Sounds
Coach: Overtime! All right, everyone in the locker room. Let’s go! We have 10 minutes to talk.
Coach: Okay, team! We are tied! We just have to get our heads in the game. Everyone is already playing really
well. Let’s hear from our captains. Lauren, what do you think we can do out there to win this game?
Lauren: Well, Nora has been shooting well. She hasn't missed a 3-point shot today. She has made five
3-pointers already. We need her to shoot more baskets!
Coach: Good idea. Nora, do you have any ideas?
Nora: Lauren has been passing the ball well. She needs to run the ball up the court. I will get open at the
3-point line and wait for her pass. I will try to make the basket.
Coach: You won’t TRY to make the basket!
Nora: No, coach. I WILL make the basket!
Coach: That’s the spirit. Okay, team. We have 5 minutes to win this game. Get the ball to Nora! Let’s go!
CHAPTER 2 2-59
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
LISTENING 1 (Continued)
MAD Multiple Choice
1. Where are the coach and team at the beginning of the conversation?
A. on the court B. in the locker room C. at practice
2. Where did the team and coach have their talk?
A. on the court B. in the locker room C. at practice
3. What has Lauren been doing well?
A. shooting the ball B. passing the ball C. running the ball
4. What does Lauren need to do?
A. run the ball up the court B. run the ball down the court C. shoot the ball
5. How many points has Nora scored already with 3-point shots?
A. 3 B. 5 C. 15
6. How many more minutes do they get to play?
A. 3 B. 5 C. 15
7. Coach said, “ You won’t try to make another basket!” “Won’t” is a contraction for….
A. won not B. will not C. would not
8. Nora has been _________ well.
A. shoot B. shot C. shooting
LISTENING 2
1. [The goalkeeper stopped the ball from going in the goal.]
2. [How many points did you score last night?]
3. [My family has sailed every summer for years.]
4. [They have yet to try surfing.]
5. [We were competing against a talented team.]
6. [I have never been skateboarding.]
GRAMMAR 1
Complete each sentence with the present perfect, present perfect continuous, since, or for.
Use a contraction whenever possible and short answers.
1. How long [has] the game [been] tied? (be) [Since] the third quarter.
2. [Have] you ever [participated] in a championship game? (participate) Yes, I [have]!
3. For how long [have] you [been inline skating]? (inline skate) [For] three hours.
4. [Has] she [gone] for a walk? (go) No, she [hasn’t].
5. How many times [has] the team [shot] at the goal? (shoot) They [have] already [shot] ten times.
6. How long [have] you [had] this jersey number? (have) [For] three years.
7. Who [has] [thrown] the ball most during the game? (throw) I think Luke [has].
8. [Have] the kids [been wearing] their bike helmets while Yes, they [have].
cycling today? (wear)
2-60 CHAPTER 2
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
GRAMMAR 2
The current time is 1:32 p.m. Use Jenny’s Friday schedule to type present perfect sentences using the
given activities. For each sentence, use an adverb of time.
Jenny’s Friday Schedule
7:00 a.m. - 8:00 a.m. Go for a run
9:00 a.m. - 10:00 a.m. Sports Medicine course
11:00 a.m. - 1:00 p.m. Work at restaurant
1:00 p.m. - 1:30 p.m. Lunch break at restaurant
1:30 p.m. - 4:00 p.m. Work again
5:00 p.m. - 7:00 p.m. Coach basketball game
7:30 p.m. - 9:00 p.m. Dinner with friends
Possible answers:
1. to coach a volleyball game Jenny has never coached a volleyball game.
2. to finish lunch She has just finished lunch.
3. to go for a run She has already gone for a run.
4. to have dinner with friends She hasn’t had dinner with friends yet.
5. to work for two hours She has already worked for two hours.
6. to start working again She has just started working again.
READING
MAD Multiple Choice
First, read The Top 5 Most Unusual Sports in the World. Then, decide if each statement is a fact, the
author’s opinion, or both (fact and opinion) based on the article.
The Top 5 Most Unusual Sports in the World
If you thought the unusual sports in the review reading were silly, wait until you read our top five
choices. Call them strange, unique, or just plain crazy, but we find each one to be more hilarious than the
next. Enjoy!
5. Chess Boxing
Chess boxing takes both chess and boxing to a whole new level. Most people say that chess players
aren’t strong and boxers aren’t smart but not in this game. You surely need to be both strong and smart!
Opponents sit across from one another for a round of chess, then do a traditional round of boxing, then
continue the chess game, then boxing, and so on. You can win by knocking out (K.O.) your opponent,
checkmating during the chess game, or your opponent going over the time limit for a chess move.
4. Zorbing
If you like fast rides and a funny feeling in your stomach, I think this is THE sport for you. “Zorbing” is
basically rolling downhill in a giant inflatable plastic orb (ball). In areas where there is no hill to roll down,
people have made little ramps and hills to roll down If it is closed correctly, you can also roll on top of
water in your orb. It’s possible to ride with up to three people in one orb! Watch out for all those arms
and legs though!
CHAPTER 2 2-61
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
READING (Continued)
MAD Multiple Choice
3. Wife Carrying
Don’t worry, men! You don’t have to get married to be able to participate in this sport. Wife carrying is
where a man and woman participate in a race together. The woman doesn’t run though; the man runs
with her on his back. To win, the man and woman must cross the finish line with the fastest time. This
entertaining sport was first played in Finland. Don’t believe that it is entertaining? Go look at the pictures
online!
2. Ferret Legging
Have you seen those little furry animals called ferrets? They are so cute, right? Well, not in this competi-
tion! The goal is to keep two ferrets down your pant legs for as long as possible. I can only imagine how
hard the ferrets are trying to get out of your pants and how they bite, fight, and scratch. The record is just
over 5 hours! I don’t know for whom I feel worse: the person or the ferrets? Definitely the ferrets!
1. Extreme Ironing
Whoever invented this sport must have been bored with his/her chores. Or maybe it was a woman who
wanted to get her husband to iron his own shirts? Either way, extreme ironing combines dangerous
location with the fun of ironing. It can be “played” in groups or solo. You basically just select an extreme
location and bring your ironing board, shirt, and iron. People have done extreme ironing on top of a
mountain, under water, in the middle of a street, in a forest, in a canoe, while parachuting...the options
are endless. How far are you willing to go for an ironed shirt?
1. If it is closed correctly, you can also walk on water.

2. They are so cute, right?
3. To win, you must cross the finish line with the fastest time.
4. Extreme ironing combines dangerous location with the fun of ironing.
5. If you like fast rides and a funny feeling in your stomach, I think this is THE sport for you.
6. Most people say that chess players aren’t strong and boxers aren’t smart.
7. This entertaining sport was first played in Finland.
8. The woman doesn’t run though; the man runs with her on his back.
2-62 CHAPTER 2
1
2
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
WRITING
Rewrite the present simple sentence in each of the tenses given. Be careful with capiltalization and
punctuation.
Your team wins a lot of games.
1. Present Perfect Continuous - [Your team has been winning a lot of games.]
2. Past Simple - [Your team won a lot of games.]
3. Present Continuous - [Your team is winning a lot of games.]
4. Past Continuous - [Your team was winning a lot of games.]
5. Present Perfect - [Your team has won a lot of games.]
SPEAKING 1
The current date is March 15th, 2018. Listen to each question about the timeline, and respond in the
pauses provided using complete sentences.
Rose’s Snowboarding Timeline

NOVEMBER 2017 DECEMBER 2017 JANUARY 2018 FEBRUARY 2018 APRIL 2018 JANUARY 2019
Practice at Break arm with

Join snowboard
Parents give Learn how to snowboard hill a bad fall at the Arm feels better
team
snowboard snowboard twice a week hill
Possible answers:
1. Who bought Rose a snowboard? 1. Her parents bought it for her.
2. How did she break her arm? 2. She fell at the snowboard hill.
3. How long has she been practicing at the hill? 3. She has been practicing for three months.
4. Does her arm feel better yet? 4. No, not yet.
5. Is she already on the snowboard team? 5. No, she will join next year.
6. Have you ever snowboarded? 6. Answers will vary
SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Tell a story about one of the four images. Tell what was happening and/or what happened in the image.
Use Chapter 2 Vocabulary and different tenses (present perfect, present perfect continuous, past simple,
past continuous). Think about these questions as you tell your story: What was happening in the picture?
What happened during the activity? How long has the person been doing the activity?
CHAPTER 2 2-63
1
3 CHAPTER THREE
FAMILY
VOCABULARY
Holidays and Celebrations ........................................ 3-4
Expansion of Characteristics ................................... 3-17
Relationships and Advice .......................................... 3-30
GRAMMAR
Subordinating Conjunctions: Time and Place ...... 3-7
Subordinating Conjunctions: Condition ................. 3-10
Alternative Comparative Forms ............................... 3-20
Question Tags .............................................................. 3-23
Past Modals of Deduction ......................................... 3-34
Making Friendly Suggestions .................................... 3-37
CONVERSATION
Plan a party! .................................................................. 3-14
I Start...You Finish ........................................................ 3-14
What’s my trait? ............................................................ 3-27
Which person would be your friend? ..................... 3-27
What should I do? ....................................................... 3-40
LAD LIBS ........................................................................ 3-40
READING
Birthday Traditions ...................................................... 3-15
Teamwork makes the dream work! ........................ 3-28
Traditional vs. Non-Traditional Weddings ............. 3-41
LET’S TALK!
Video - Let’s throw Skylar a party! ........................... 3-43
LEARNING OBJECTIVES Interviews - Let’s get to know your family! ............ 3-45
• discuss holidays and celebrations using conjunctions.

REVIEW & ASSESSMENT
• compare and contrast using alternative comparative forms.
Review ............................................................................ 3-47
• use question tags. Projects .......................................................................... 3-52
Assessment ................................................................... 3-53
• give advice and suggestions about relationships.
INTRODUCTION 3-1
31
THE UNITED KINGDOM

CULTURE IN THE UK
ENGLAND
Known For:
St. Paul’s Cathedral
Buckingham Palace
Westminster Abbey
Trafalgar Square
Cotswolds
Stonehenge
ENGLAND Windsor Castle
Warwick Castle
White Cliffs of Dover
Hadrian’s Wall
Capital: London Famous People:

Other Major Cities: Birmingham, Diana, Princess of Wales
Leeds, Liverpool, Manchester William Shakespeare
Population: 54.79 million (2015) Winston Churchill
Area: 50,538 mi² (square miles) Charles Darwin
Jane Austen
J.K. Rowling
Flag: Sir Isaac Newton
The Beatles
Andrew Lloyd Webber
Buckingham Palace Windsor Castle Diana, Princess of Wales Trafalgar Square Winston Churchill

1. The flag of the United Kingdom is a combination of three different crosses from the flags
of different countries. Search the internet to find out which flags/crosses make up the flag
of the UK, and which nations reference the flag of the UK on their own national flags.
2. England is home to many UNESCO World Heritage sites, which are places,
buildings, or natural landscapes that are important for cultural or historical reasons. Find
one UNESCO World Heritage site in England that you would want to visit. What is it? Why
does it interest you?
3-2 INTRODUCTION
3
1
VOCABULARY
SECTION 1 VOCABULARY: Holidays and Celebrations
Holidays and Celebrations Celebrating Other Words and Phrases
the anniversary Thanksgiving the balloon the gift; the present the age
the birthday Valentine’s Day to blow out/blew/blown the guest to get married / got / gotten
Father’s Day the wedding the candle to invite to graduate
Halloween the card the invitation the graduation
the holiday to celebrate the parade the idea
Independence Day the celebration the pumpkin to remember
(Fourth of July) the costume the tradition to reply / replied / replied
Mother’s Day to decorate RSVP
New Year’s Day the decoration
New Year’s Eve the fireworks
SECTION 2 VOCABULARY: Expansion of Characteristics

Characteristics Other Words and Phrases
bossy handsome old-fashioned the characteristic
confident healthy outgoing to laugh
crazy unhealthy patient the personality
creative jealous pleasant to smile
cute to be jealous (of) similar to tell a joke / told / told
dependent kind sweet What type of person are you?
independent laid-back talkative
generous lazy
SECTION 3 VOCABULARY: Relationships and Advice

Describe People Verbs Other Words and Phrases
the adult to agree annoying

the babysitter to disagree embarrassing
the couple to apologize; to say sorry / said / said good listener
the friendship to be in love reliable
the neighbor to cry / cried / cried Tell the truth.
the relationship to fight / fought / fought That hurt my feelings.
the spouse to forgive / forgave / forgiven
the teenager (teen) to get along with
to give advice / gave / given
to look up to someone
to miss someone

INTRODUCTION 3-3
1
3
VOCABULARY
HOLIDAYS AND CELEBRATIONS

MAD Open Recording


MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text
LANGUAGE TIP
Verbs ending in “-ate” become nouns ending in “-tion”
Verbs that end in “-ate” in the base form (celebrate, graduate, participate, decorate) can easily be turned into
nouns. To do this, take off the last “-e” and add “-ion.” The verbs in the previous sentence become celebration,
graduation, participation, decoration.
Now it’s your turn to practice. Change the following nouns into verbs: communication, creation, education.
You may find verbs that end in consonants except -l, -n, or -r also take the “-tion” ending. There are many
exceptions to this rule, however, so many of those endings have to be memorized.
3-4 SECTION 1
1
3
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. What are your family traditions? 6. When is your anniversary?
2. Did you remember to blow up the balloons? 7. We will go to his graduation party.
3. Don’t forget to reply to the invitation. 8. I remember when you got married.
4. For whom did you buy that present? 9. You are the same age as my sister.
5. I can help her decorate the cake. 10. Where are the candles?

Listen to the phrases using Section 1 Vocabulary. Type each one as you hear it.
1. [to wrap a gift] 9. [Thanksgiving dinner]
2. [Valentine’s Day] 10. [New Year’s Eve]
3. [the decorations for the party] 11. [Fourth of July parade]
4. [to remember the present] 12. [the birthday celebration]
5. [holiday traditions] 13. [the fireworks in the sky]
6. [reply to the invitation soon] 14. [Mother’s Day and Father’s Day]
7. [to plan a wedding] 15. [to graduate high school]
8. [Independence Day] 16. [to make a Halloween costume]
CULTURAL NOTE
Halloween
Though Halloween is an extremely popular holiday in the U.S., its roots began in Scotland and Ireland many
years ago. It started as a festival in honor of the harvest season and the beginning of winter. You would
have seen turnips with scary faces carved into them. These faces were said to protect the town from evil
spirits. Other traditions included dressing up in costumes, trading food with neighbors, singing songs, and
leaving food or cake outside in case spirits visited the towns at night. These traditions inspired today’s classic
Halloween activity of “trick-or-treating” and pumpkin carving.
Today, Halloween is all about entertainment. People decorate their houses with carved pumpkins and
spiderwebs, watch horror movies, throw Halloween parties, visit haunted houses, and may even dress
their pets up in Halloween-themed outfits. Children go “trick-or-treating”, where they walk around their
neighborhoods in costumes and collect bags full of candy.
Does your culture have a similar holiday?

What traditions of yours are similar, and what do you do that is different?
SECTION 1 3-5
1
3
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Listen as four of the most celebrated holidays in the United States are described. Then, place each phrase
under the correct holiday based on the descriptions you hear.
New Year’s Eve is always a fun time to celebrate the end of a year with family and friends. It happens on the
night before the New Year, December 31st. Some people throw parties in their homes with appetizers, drinks,
and desserts. Many people will get dressed up in nice clothes and go out instead. The biggest celebration
happens in New York City at Times Square. At 11:59 p.m., a very large ball starts to drop. When the time gets
down to only ten seconds before midnight, everyone starts counting down from ten to one. Then, at midnight
everyone kisses, hugs, and shouts “Happy New Year!”
Thanksgiving is a day to give thanks for all the good in one’s life. It is celebrated on the fourth Thursday of
November. This is one of the busiest holidays for travel as many people travel far to spend the holiday with
their families. The traditional Thanksgiving meal includes turkey, bread, stuffing, cranberries, and potatoes. For
dessert, pumpkin pie is the most common. There is a large parade that takes place each year in New York, and
a football game is always on TV.
Halloween is celebrated on the 31st of October. It is one of the more creative and fun holidays celebrated
by young and old alike. Some Halloween traditions include carving a pumpkin, wearing costumes, and going
trick or treating for candy. Carving a pumpkin is a messy tradition, but great fun for any age. People pick out
a pumpkin and then carve a fun face or image on the pumpkin. People love to have Halloween parties where
guests come dressed up in a costume. Often they have a costume contest where someone gets 1st place for
the best costume and may win a prize.
February 14th is Valentine’s Day, the celebration of love. Traditional colors for this holiday are red, pink, and
white. Many people give cards that have hearts on them, flowers, or small gifts to their spouse or partner.
Some people buy expensive jewelry for their spouse. To celebrate, they will go out for a romantic dinner or fun
date night. Many weddings take place on Valentine’s Day.
New Year’s Eve Thanksgiving Halloween Valentine’s Day

December 31st 4th Thurs. of November October 31st February 14th
parties at home people travel wear costumes red, pink, white
New York City turkey & potatoes carve pumpkins celebrate love
big ball drops pumpkin pie get candy cards & flowers
countdown from 10 watch football win a prize romantic dinner

Listen to each question. Then, respond in the pauses provided using complete sentences. Click “Done” to
move on to the next question.
1. What are some of the most important holidays in your country?
2. Which holiday is your favorite and why?
3. What do you and your family do for that holiday?
3-6 SECTION 1
1
3
GRAMMAR
SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS: TIME AND PLACE
Subordinating conjunctions are words that connect the main clause to a second, less important clause in a
sentence. The subordinating conjunction will show the relationship between those two clauses.
Notice in the examples below that the two clauses can be stated in either order.
No punctuation needed if the main clause is first.

Main Clause
Ø Subordinate Clause
Example: I will send out invitations once I know the date of the party.
A comma is needed if the subordinate clause comes first.
Subordinate Clause
, Main Clause
Example: Once I know the date of the party, I will send out the invitations.
Subordinating conjunctions can be used to show many different relationships.
For this section, we will focus on conjunctions that show time and place.
TIME: Shows the time when the action in the main clause will happen
Subordinating Conjunctions of TIME Examples
After they graduate from high school, some teenagers go to college.
after
Some teenagers go to college after they graduate from high school.
Before we watch the fireworks, we are going to the parade.
before
We are going to the parade before we watch the fireworks.
Once I find the right person, I will get married.
once
I will get married once I find the right person.
Until I find the right person, I will not get married.
until
I will not get married until I find the right person.
When you cook the turkey, make sure to set a timer.
when
Make sure to set a timer when you cook the turkey.
While the turkey is cooking, we can play a game.
while
We can play a game while the turkey is cooking.
PLACE: Shows where the action of the main clause will happen
Subordinating Conjunctions of PLACE Examples
where The couple went to the restaurant where they celebrated their anniversary.
wherever We take our mother out wherever she wants to go for Mother’s Day dinner.
Note: Subordinating conjunctions of place are not used before the main clause in a sentence.
* For a complete list, go to the Grammar Resources section and view the Subordinating Conjunctions chart.
SECTION 1 3-7
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Fill in each blank with the correct subordinating conjunction from the word bank.
until before where wherever once

until when while after once
1. [Until] I get everyone’s RSVP, I won’t know the number of people coming to the party.
2. I have to blow up the balloons [before] you use them to decorate for their anniversary.
3. [Once] I know who is coming for Thanksgiving dinner, I will plan the food to be made.
4. [When] the guests leave our house, we will have a lot of cleaning to do.
5. I do not remember the park [where] you had your last birthday.
6. He will put the decorations [wherever] you want them.
7. I can buy him a present [once] I have a gift idea for him.
8. You can blow out the candles [after] we are done singing to you.
9. [While] you are setting the table for our guests, I will be putting up the decorations.
10. I will not know if she invited me [until] the invitation arrives.
ACTIVITY 3.1.10 Part 1 and Part 2 - READ & WRITE

MAD Word Jumble
Put each statement in the correct word order.
1. I will put the gifts wherever you tell me.
2. After graduation, I will have my party at a park.
3. When Halloween night comes, the kids will wear their costumes.
4. They went to the wedding where they danced all night.
5. Before I watch the fireworks, I will go to a parade.
6. Once these presents are wrapped, we can leave for her party.
7. Until some guests arrive, the celebration can’t begin.
8. While they’re on vacation, they will be celebrating their anniversary.
9. Before he can blow out the candles, everyone has to sing.
10. The balloons can go wherever you like.
11. When all invitations are finished, I’ll bring them to the post office.
12. After Thanksgiving dinner, I am always full.

MAD Text Match
Listen to each sentence starter. Then, match two parts to form the correct sentence.
1. You can set the pumpkins F. wherever you like.
2. The guests will dance A. until the wedding ends.
3. Before I graduate, J. I need to pass the final exams.
4. After the holidays are over, H. the students will start back at school.
5. I will give him the present C. once I have it wrapped.
3-8 SECTION 1
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 3.1.11 - LISTEN & READ (Continued)
MAD Text Match
6. Let’s put the blanket here B. where we can see the fireworks really well.
7. Until everyone replies, D. we won’t know how much food to make.
8. While the guests are arriving, E. the musician will play the piano.
9. When it is Halloween, G. we will wear scary costumes.
10. We are going to eat cake I. before the birthday boy opens his presents.

Look at the recipe for a traditional American pumpkin pie. Fill in each blank with the correct
subordinating conjunction of time from the word bank.
once after once
before when after
after while before
1. [Before] combining the ingredients, you have to

preheat the oven.
2. [While] the oven is preheating, start mixing the
ingredients together.
3. [After] combining the pumpkin puree and eggs,
add the sweetened condensed milk.
4. [After] you add that, add pumpkin pie spice to the mix.
5. [When] all ingredients are mixed well, you can pour the mixture into the crust.
6. [Before] you pour the mixture into the crust though, put the crust into a pie dish.
7. [Once] the pie crust and mixture are in the pie dish, put the dish in the oven and bake the pie.
8. [After] you have baked the pie for 15 minutes, reduce the heat to 350 degrees F.
9. [Once] the pie is browned, you can take the pie out of the oven and eat it.

MAD Open Recording
While you are watching the video, say what is happening using subordinating conjunctions as much as
possible.
SECTION 1 3-9
1
3
GRAMMAR
SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS: CONDITION
Subordinating conjunctions are words that connect the main clause to a second, less important clause in a
sentence. The subordinating conjunction will show the relationship between those two clauses.
Subordinating Conjunctions Examples Meanings

We don’t care about the weather. Rain or
We will have the party even if it rains.
shine the party must go on. The condition
even if
of rain will not change the action of the
Even if it rains, we will have the party.
main clause.
We are not certain of the rain. We will
We will have the Fourth of July party
if have the party inside only on the
inside if it rains.
condition of rain.
If it rains, then we will have the Fourth Note: When using this subordinating
if... then... conjunction pair, the “if” clause needs to
of July party inside.
be first.
We will have the Fourth of July party

outside unless it rains.
The party will be outside except under
unless
the condition of rain.
Unless it rains, we will have the Fourth
of July party outside.
*For a complete list, go to the Grammar Resources section and view the Subordinating Conjunctions chart.
TEACHER NOTE: Here is a complete list of subordinating conjunctions for your reference.
SUBORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS
after once until
although provided that when
as rather than whenever
because since where
before so that whereas
even if than wherever
even though that whether
if though while
in order that unless why
3-10 SECTION 1
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the subordinating conjunction that best completes each sentence.
1. __________ it rains, then the parade will not happen.
A. Even if B. So C. If D. Unless
2. The pumpkins are so old __________ we can’t use them to make the pie.
A. that B. if C. unless D. even if
3. I will make a costume for the party __________ I can find one I like.
A. if B. unless C. so D. then
4. __________ the weather is cold, we will get married outside.
A. That B. So C. Even if D. If
5. If he is sick, __________ he can’t go out for dinner on Valentine’s Day.
A. unless B. even if C. if D. then
6. We won’t bring snacks for the New Year’s Day party __________ you ask us to.
A. if B. then C. so D. unless
7. If you are in the Fourth of July parade, __________ I will come watch.
A. unless B. then C. if D. even if
8. You all should still go to the birthday party __________ I can’t.
A. so B. even if C. that D. if
9. __________ I have to work, I will go to the graduation.
A. So B. Then C. Unless D. If
10. __________ you aren’t busy this weekend, then you should come to the fireworks with me.
A. If B. Unless C. So D. Even if
LANGUAGE TIP
Holiday vs. Vacation
In the U.S., the word holiday is only used as a noun meaning a religious or public day off to celebrate
something. A vacation is time off of work or school for a fun or relaxing trip that was planned. In American
English, one would say, “I am on vacation,” or “Monday is a holiday.” Holiday and vacation have two separate
meanings.
In British English, the word holiday means a religious or public day off to celebrate something, but it also has
the same definition as the American vacation: “We are going on holiday next week,” OR as a public day off:
“Monday is a holiday.”
I am on vacation. (American English)

I have vacation tomorrow. I am on holiday. (British English)
I have holiday tomorrow. It’s a holiday tomorrow. (national holiday)
I am on holidays. I am going on vacation.
I am taking a vacation.
SECTION 1 3-11
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Read the two scenarios. Then, rewrite each sentence, and complete it.
(Questions 1-4) Harriet loves Thanksgiving. What won’t stop her from doing the following activities?
For example: You read: She will stay awake to watch the Thanksgiving football game even if ___________.
You type: She will stay awake to watch the Thanksgiving football game even if she is tired.
1. She will talk with her grandparents even if _________________________________.
2. She will eat everything on her plate even if _________________________________.
3. She will eat pumpkin pie even if _________________________________.
4. She will watch the parade even if _________________________________.
(Questions 5-8)
Jackson is now a teenager and dislikes joining in the fun of Halloween. What does his family need to do to
get him to do the following activities?
5. He won’t carve a pumpkin unless _________________________________.
6. He won’t wear a costume unless _________________________________.
7. He won’t give out candy to the kids unless _________________________________.
8. He won’t go trick or treating unless _________________________________.

Read the conversation between a father and his two children. They are planning a Mother’s Day
celebration. Fill in each blank with the correct subordinating conjunction from the word bank.
where if then once unless
then after while even if if
Dad: Okay, kids. Mother’s Day is coming up next week! Have you guys thought about what you would like to
do for her?
Mariah: I have! How about we surprise Mom with breakfast in bed [unless] you don’t think she will like that.
If the weather is nice, [then] we can take a nice walk along the beach. We could also get her flowers and make
dinner reservations at her favorite Italian restaurant!
Dominic: But what do we do [if] it rains?
Mariah: [Even if] it rains, we can still make her breakfast. [After] we eat, maybe we could play a game instead.
Or do you have a different idea, Dominic?
Dominic: How about [if] it rains, [then] we can go to the art museum [where] Mom’s favorite painting is. She
loves it there, and we haven’t been there in years.
Mariah: That’s a great idea, Dominic. [Once] we see what the weather is going to be like, we will
decide if we go for a walk or to the museum.
Dad: [While] I order the flowers, Mariah, you make the reservation at the restaurant. Dominic, you
look for recipes to make her breakfast in bed.
Mariah: Sounds good to me.
Dominic: Great! Let’s make this a perfect day for Mom!
3-12 SECTION 1
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
For each picture, type a complete sentence using one of the following subordinating conjunctions: after,
before, even if, if...then, once, unless, until, when, where, wherever, while.
1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
LANGUAGE TIP
Everyday Abbreviations
English speakers use abbreviations in everyday speech. They are words that are represented by letters. Do
you already know the meaning of any of these common abbreviations: FYI, ASAP, RSVP, and AKA? You might
even find it interesting that one abbreviation represents a French phrase but is used daily in English.
FYI = For your information (pronounce the letters F-Y-I).

For example: “FYI, I am going on vacation tomorrow, so I can’t come to your party.”
ASAP = As soon as possible (pronounce the letters A-S-A-P or say, “A-sap”).
For example: “Mom’s birthday is tomorrow. I need to bake a cake ASAP!”
RSVP = Répondez s’il vous plaît, French for “please respond” (pronounce the letters R-S-V-P).
For example: “You’re invited to my graduation party on June 12th! RSVP by June 1st.”
AKA = Also known as (pronounce the letters A-K-A).
For example: “Dwayne Johnson, AKA “The Rock,” is known by many as a famous Hollywood actor;
however, his career began as a professional wrestler.”
Try filling these in with the correct acronym:
Can you ___________ to my party invitation? I will respond to your invitation ___________.
___________, the party will be inside instead of outside. John, ___________ the funny guy, will be there.

Listen to each sentence starter. Then, say it and add an ending using one of the following subordinating
conjunctions: after, before, even if, once, then, unless, where, wherever, while. Click “Done” to move
on to the next question. Possible answers:
1. He can come to your graduation party unless he has to go to work.
2. If you invite me to your family Thanksgiving dinner, then I will be there.
3. Will their anniversary brunch be at the park even if it rains?
4. We are going to my parents’ house for Thanksgiving dinner where we will eat a lot of food.
5. Are we going to eat the cake after you open your presents?
6. Can we have a Fourth of July family picnic before we watch the fireworks?
7. I will RSVP for your New Year’s Eve party once I look at my calendar.
8. The kids were decorating the cake while the parents decorated the house.
SECTION 1 3-13
1
3
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 3.1.19 - SPEAK: Plan a Party!
LAD Pairing or Grouping Activity
With your partner(s), plan a party for an important person or couple in your life. Discuss the different
party planning topics, and then write the party plans.
Questions to discuss: Final plans:
For whom is the party?
When is the party?
Where is the party?
What decorations will you have?
What food and drinks will you have?
What games or traditions will you have?
Whom are you inviting?

MAD Open Recording
Tell about the plans you made for the party.
ACTIVITY 3.1.21 - SPEAK: I Start...You Finish

LAD Grouping Activity (Groups of 4)
Write four interesting sentence starters that include one of the following conjunctions: after, before,
once, until, when, while, here, wherever, if, even if, unless, that. Then, say each sentence starter to
three different partners, and write down their sentence endings.
Sentence Starter 1: ___________________________________________________________________________________________
Partner 1 Sentence Ending:________________________________________________________________________________________

MAD Open Recording
Say each sentence starter with the ending you like best from the I Start...You Finish conversation activity.
3-14 SECTION 1
1
3
READING
BIRTHDAY TRADITIONS
When you were a child, you probably LOVED your birthday, right? But what was it that made your day so special?
The attention? A birthday song? A cake with candles? Presents? A party? Or was there a special tradition in your
family that made the day so special? Personally, I loved the way my family made me feel special all day long. We’d
have breakfast together, and I’d get to eat cake and unwrap presents. Then my mom usually threw me a fantastic
birthday party with all my friends attending. The weekend after my birthday, my entire family, aunts, uncles,
grandmas, grandpas, and cousins, would come over for cake and coffee in the afternoon. Up until I moved to the US,
I never really thought about “other” ways to celebrate my birthday. It seemed like this is what everyone does. Even
though every country may think of their own birthday traditions as the only ones, there are, in fact, a lot of different
ways to celebrate a birthday. Take a look at how people in the US, England, Australia, and Canada celebrate their
birthdays.
If you live in England, then you may have sliced into a fortune-telling cake on your birthday. During the baking process,
someone will put an object or two inside the cake. The object then tells your future. For instance, if you cut into the
cake and find a coin, then you will become rich in your future. There is also a tradition called “bumping,” where others
will lift the birthday girl or birthday boy off her or his feet and into the air one time for every year that the person has
been alive.
If you live in Australia, then you know all about the “Fairy Bread,” buttered bread slathered with sprinkles, which
everyone calls “hundreds and thousands.” Barbecues are the most common type of party for birthdays in the country
and because the weather is usually warm in Australia, this applies year round.
If you live in the United States of America, then you celebrate your birthday by eating a cake decorated with the same
number of candles as your age. After your guests sing “Happy Birthday,” you silently make a wish and blow out those
candles with a single breath. If you blow them all out at once, then the wish that you just made will come true! The
birthday girl or boy always gets the first piece of cake, too. There is also a tradition to wear a pointy hat
on your head throughout your birthday party. Lastly, balloons and streamers are common birthday party decorations.

If you live in Canada, then your birthday traditions are a mixture of
those in the U.S. and England. In Canada, you get a cake, certainly with
candles but maybe with some sort of symbolic object inside like a
coin for future riches. There is also a tradition of “crackers,” which are
paper tubes that you pull on each end to reveal a small gift.
So, it’s true. As much as holiday traditions may differ between

English-speaking countries, birthday traditions differ too.
SECTION 1 3-15
1
3
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Place each word or phrase under the correct country based on the reading.
England Australia United States Canada
object in cake Fairy Bread candles on cake object in cake
tells the future barbecue make a wish crackers
bumping sprinkles balloons small gift

MAD Open Text
Write about birthday traditions in your family or your country. How do your traditions compare and
contrast to the ones you just read about? Which traditions seem strange to you from the reading, and
which ones do you like?

1. Do you like to celebrate your birthday?
2. What did you do for your last birthday?
3. What presents did you receive?
4. What was the best gift that you have given? To whom did you give the gift?
3-16 SECTION 1
1
3
VOCABULARY
EXPANSION OF CHARACTERISTICS

MAD Open Recording
Say as much as possible about the Section 2 Vocabulary pictures. What types of personalities do you see?
At which place would you prefer to work? What is happening in each picture?


MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text
SECTION 2 3-17
1
3
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. What type of person are you? 6. I think they are really creative.
2. She has a great personality. 7. We are very similar.
3. That young man is quite handsome. 8. Who has the best smile?
4. Why are you acting so crazy? 9. Don’t be jealous and unkind.
5. You are talkative today. 10. Is he dependent on his parents?

Listen to the vocabulary words and phrases using Section 2 Vocabulary. Type each one as you hear it.
1. [old-fashioned] 9. [confident and independent]
2. [type of person] 10. [to tell a joke]
3. [patient and sweet] 11. [generous and kind]
4. [the characteristic] 12. [a little bossy]
5. [to laugh and smile] 13. [to be jealous]
6. [healthy or unhealthy] 14. [laid-back]
7. [embarrassing] 15. [the personality]
8. [a handsome man] 16. [talkative]
LANGUAGE TIP
Prefixes
A prefix is a combination of letters at the beginning of a word that gives it a different meaning. For example,
you have learned the word “happy” and know what it means. Now read this sentence:
Kayla was happy to be home, but unhappy that her vacation was over.
From this sentence, you see that the prefix “un-” means “not,” so “unhappy” means “not happy” (or “sad”).
Other common prefixes that mean “not” include “dis-” and “in-.” Knowing this should help you define the
following words: unlucky, unusual, unable, disagree, dislike, disconnect, inexpensive, independent,
incorrect.
Practice using prefixes: (use dis-, in-, un-)

1. I was not able to do that. = I was _____able to do that.
2. I do not like it. = I _____like it.
3. That is not expensive. = That is _____expensive.
4. Your answer was not correct. = Your answer was _____correct.
5. I do not agree with you. = I _____agree with you.
3-18 SECTION 2
1
3
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
These are words describing the personality of a 30-year-old person. Are these characteristics positive
or negative at this age? Place each vocabulary word under the correct category.
Positive Characteristics Negative Characteristics

independent dependent
pleasant lazy
confident unkind
generous crazy
patient jealous

MAD Text Match
Listen to each description. Then, match each trait with the person it best describes.
1. Alexandra loves to tell people what to do. bossy
2. Charlie is nice to everyone. kind
3. Dylan always has something to say. He never stops. talkative
4. Violet likes to do things without the help of others. independent
5. Oliver always wants what someone else has. jealous
6. Robby is able to wait for someone or something. patient
7. Sara does not like to work hard nor do her homework. lazy
8. Mark is extremely artistic. His artwork is very unique. creative
9. Natalie eats lots of fruits and vegetables. healthy
10. Kira is not shy, and she is able to talk to anyone. outgoing
11. Harrison always gives things to others who need them. generous
12. Gloria enjoys living without technology. old-fashioned

MAD Open Recording
Describe what these words mean without saying the word.
For example: You read: generous
You say: Someone who is always giving things to others who need them.
1. dependent
2. jealous
3. confident
4. old-fashioned
5. unhealthy
SECTION 2 3-19
1
3
GRAMMAR
ALTERNATIVE COMPARATIVE FORMS
There are many different ways to use “as” to show a comparison.
Show that two things are the same or nearly the same
...the same (noun) as… Can be used with quantifiers: just, exactly, almost, and nearly.
She is the same age as me. She is exactly the same age as me.
Show that two things are the same or nearly the same
...as (adjective/adverb) as… Can be used with quantifiers: just, almost, and nearly.
Her cousin is as sweet as mine. Her cousin is almost as sweet as mine.
Show that two things are different from each other
...different from… Can be used with quantifiers: slightly, a bit, and a little.
His birthday party was different from mine. His birthday party was a little different from mine.
...not as (adjective) as… Can be used with quantifiers: quite, half, and nearly.
Her personality is not as laid-back as his. Her personality is not nearly as laid-back as his.
...(negative verb) as (adverb) as… Can be used with quantifiers: quite, half, and nearly.
John doesn’t smile as pleasantly as Maria. John doesn’t smile half as pleasantly as Maria.
*If you need to review the grammar rules from previous levels, go to the Comparative Adjectives chart.

Look at each adjective. Fill in the blanks with the correct comparative and superlative adjective forms.
For numbers 1-6, use the -er and -est forms. For numbers 7-12, use more and most.
Example for 1-6: You read: friendly You type: [friendlier] [friendliest]
Example for 7-12: You read: fun You type: [more fun] [most fun]
1. pretty [prettier] [prettiest] 7. pleasant [more pleasant] [most pleasant]

2. crazy [crazier] [craziest] 8. patient [more patient] [most patient]
3. kind [kinder] [kindest] 9. jealous [more jealous] [most jealous]
4. sweet [sweeter] [sweetest] 10. dependent [more dependent] [most dependent]
5. unhealthy [unhealthier] [unhealthiest] 11. handsome [more handsome] [most handsome]
6. bossy [bossier] [bossiest] 12. similar [more similar] [most similar]
3-20 SECTION 2
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Read the following descriptions of the people. Choose the alternative comparative form that best
completes each sentence.
Name: Hannah Nadia
Birthdate: 12/29/1987 4/26/1988
Hair Color: dark brown brown
talkative around people she knows, talks to anyone,
Personality:
kind and has a unique laugh loud laugh and creative
Graduated High School: 2006 2006
Graduated College: 2014 2010
Profession: veterinarian chef
1. Hannah is a __________ than Nadia.

A. little older B. little younger C. not as old as
2. Hannah is __________ as creative as Nadia.
A. not as quite B. not nearly C. a bit
3. Hannah is ______ as ______ as Nadia when she doesn’t know someone.
A. not ... talkative B. not ... intelligent C. not ... shy
4. Nadia’s graduation year is ______ the ______ year as Hannah’s.
A. different ... than B. exactly ... age C. exactly ... same
5. Hannah’s laugh is __________ Nadia’s.
A. louder than B. more quiet C. quieter than
6. Nadia went to school ______ as ______ as Hannah.
A. quite ... short B. half ... long C. exact ... time

Read the conversation between three students. Isabella is new to the school. Martin and Nathan
are telling her a little bit about the other girls in class. Fill in each blank with the correct alternative
comparative from the word bank.
nearly as ... as exact same bit different from exact same ... as
a bit more sweetest as ... as almost as ... as
slightly different from almost as ... as nearly as ... as slightly ... than
Isabella: Hi, guys. Thanks for helping me get to know the other kids in class a little. It’s hard to start over and
not know anyone.
Martin: No problem, Isabella! So, let’s start with the girls in the class. Amber and Rebecca are super nice!
Nathan: Yes! They are [slightly different from] one another but both great! Amber is [almost as] sweet
[as] Rebecca, but Rebecca is definitely the [sweetest] girl in class! Amber just doesn’t smile quite as often as
Rebecca.
Martin: Oh, and Rebecca is also a little shy. Amber is [a bit more] talkative and confident.
Isabella: That helps, thanks. Which one is Rebecca, and which one is Amber? They both have blonde hair.
SECTION 2 3-21
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Martin: Yes, they do. Amber’s hair is a little darker though, and she is smaller.
Nathan: Right, Amber is [almost as] tall [as] Rebecca, but her hair is not [nearly as] blonde [as] Rebecca’s.
Rebecca’s hair is so light that it is almost white.
Isabella: So, what about the other two girls over there?
Martin: Oh, stay away from them. They aren’t [nearly as] kind [as] Amber and Rebecca. They both have the
[exact same] mean personality.
Nathan: Yes and no. They are super bossy and lazy, but I think there are some differences between them, too.
Layla is definitely the meaner one. She is a [bit different from] Eleanor because she is more jealous. I think
Eleanor isn’t quite [as] crazy [as] Layla.
Isabella: Oh. They don’t sound too nice. Which one is which?
Martin: It’s hard to tell them apart because they are twins. Eleanor has the [exact same] hair and eyes [as]
Layla, but Eleanor is [slightly] shorter [than] Layla. That’s the only way I can tell the difference.
Isabella: Well, maybe I’ll just stay away from both. Then I don’t really need to know who is who.
Nathan: That’s a very good idea!
Isabella: Tell me about the boys tomorrow. I’m going to go talk to Amber and Rebecca.

MAD Open Text
Write six complete comparative sentences. In each sentence, use one of the adjectives from List A and one
of the quantifiers from List B. Use each word once.
List A List B
young not nearly
generous a bit
jealous just
healthy almost
creative half
cute slightly

MAD Open Recording
Look at the similar images. Say as many comparative sentences as you can about them. Then, move on to
the next set of images and do the same thing.
Family A Teacher A Relationship A Automobile A
Family B Teacher B Relationship B Automobile B
3-22 SECTION 2
1
3
GRAMMAR
QUESTION TAGS
Question tags are short questions tagged onto the end of a sentence. They are used in conversation when you
want to check with another person to see if something is true.
Question Tag Formation:

The verb of the main part of the sentence is changed into the opposite form for a question tag using a contraction.
Positive Question Tags Negative Question Tags
If the main part of the sentence contains a negative If the main part of the sentence contains a positive
form of the verb, use a positive form of that same form of the verb, use a negative form of that same
verb to form the question tag. verb to form the question tag.
She isn’t bossy, is she? She is bossy, isn’t she?

They didn’t invite her, did they? They invited her, didn’t they?
He hasn’t graduated yet, has he? He has graduated already, hasn’t he?
Question tags with different types of verbs Examples
With auxiliary verbs: My neighbor is easy to get along with, isn’t he?
the question tag uses the same form of the verb as
in the main part of the sentence. My neighbor isn’t easy to get along with, is he?
Note: When using the positive form of first person

singular,“I am”, in the main part of the sentence, I am easy to get along with, aren’t I?
form the question tag using “aren’t” instead.
When using the negative form of “I am” (I am not), form I am not easy to get along with, am I?
the question tag using “am.”
Your boyfriend eats birthday cake, doesn’t he?

Without auxiliary verbs:
the question tag uses a form of “do.” Your boyfriend doesn’t eat birthday cake, does he?
Your spouse could go to the party, couldn’t he?
With modal verbs:
the question tag uses the same modal verb. Your spouse couldn’t go to the party, could he?
How to show you agree with the question How to show you disagree with the question
If you agree with the main clause, you always use the If you disagree with the main clause, you negate the
auxillary verb. Remember to be in simple present and auxillary verb or to be in your answer. Often you back
past doesn’t use an auxillary verb. up your opinion with extra information.
Sarah is easy to get along with, isn’t she? Sarah is easy to get along with, isn’t she?
Yes, she is. No, she isn’t. She is really bossy.
Sarah isn’t easy to get along with, is she? Sarah isn’t easy to get along with, is she?
No, she isn’t. Yes, she is. She is very laid-back.
SECTION 2 3-23
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct question tag that best completes each sentence.
1. His jokes were really funny, ______? A. isn’t he B. don’t they C. weren’t they
2. This dress doesn’t look old-fashioned, ______? A. doesn’t it B. does it C. is it
3. Our parents are so bossy, ______? A. don’t they B. isn’t they C. aren’t they
4. Your birthday wasn’t yesterday, ______? A. was it B. isn’t it C. wasn’t it
5. They have been such good kids today, ______? A. aren’t they B. doesn’t they C. haven’t they
6. There wasn’t anything to be jealous of, ______? A. there was B. was there C. wasn’t there
7. You smile a lot, ______? A. don’t you B. isn’t you C. haven’t you
8. I’m not very patient, _______? A. amn’t I B. arn’t I C. am I
9. He looked very handsome last night, ______? A. doesn’t he B. didn’t he C. hasn’t he
10. She’s been independent since she was little,______? A. hasn’t she B. doesn’t she C. isn’t she

Fill in each blank with the correct question tag.
1. He isn’t going to graduate early, [is he]?
2. Wow! The students sure are talkative today, [aren’t they]?
3. You have made some healthy snacks for the party, [haven’t you]?
4. I am not lazy, [am I]?
5. That is very generous of her, [isn’t it]?
6. The kids didn’t get a lot of candy for Halloween, [did they]?
7. It will be a beautiful wedding, [won’t it]?
8. He tells the funniest jokes, [doesn’t he]?
9. She is the cutest baby, [isn’t she]?
10. You weren’t always so outgoing, [were you]?
11. They look very similar, [don’t they]?
12. You aren’t jealous of her, [are you]?

MAD Text Match
Listen to each sentence starter. Then, match each question tag with the correct starter.
1. That wasn’t the healthiest dinner you can cook, was it?
2. You guys weren’t having a good time at the party, were you?
3. They were the nicest people, weren’t they?
4. She isn’t that old-fashioned, is she?
5. He is always such a patient teacher, isn’t he?
6. They had very similar interests, didn’t they?
7. I am an independent person, aren’t I?
8. He sure was acting crazy tonight, wasn’t he?
9. That won’t be a fun party, will it?
10. They have given a very generous gift, haven’t they?
3-24 SECTION 2
ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
Knock-Knock Jokes
Knock-knock jokes are silly jokes that involve a play on words. They require two people and usually have
easy humor to understand so kids as well as adults can enjoy them. The “knock-knock” part is the joke teller
pretending to knock on a door. If you were at home and someone knocks on your door, wouldn’t you want
to know who it is? And if the person knocking only tells you their first name, wouldn’t you want to know their
last name too or more information about them? At this level of English, you should be able to understand
many knock-knock jokes. Look them up and bring your favorite jokes to class! Here are a few examples:
Joke 1 Joke 2
Knock knock. Knock knock.

Who’s there? Who’s there?
To. Boo!
To who? Boo who?
No! It’s to whom. Don’t cry. I’m a friendly ghost!
Did you understand the jokes?

Joke 1: This is an English grammar joke. Remember that you cannot use who after the prepositions “to” or
“for.” You can only use whom.
Joke 2: “Boo!” is a word that you see around Halloween because ghosts say “Boo!” to scare people. “Boohoo”
is the sound of someone crying.

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the best answer for each question.
1. She is so sweet, isn’t she? A. Yes, she is. B. Yes, she isn’t.
2. He told a really funny joke, didn’t he? A. No, he didn’t. B. Yes, he didn’t.
3. You haven’t replied to the invitation yet, have you? A. Yes, I haven’t. B. No, I haven’t.
4. That’s a great idea, isn’t it? A. Yes, it is. B. Yes, it isn’t.
5. They haven’t started decorating without me, have they? A. Yes, they haven’t. B. Yes, they have.
6. You didn’t see the fireworks last night, did you? A. Yes, I didn’t. B. No, I didn’t.
7. You have bought a costume for the party, haven’t you? A. No, I have. B. Yes, I have.
8. I am very creative, aren’t I? A. No, you aren’t. B. No, I amn’t.
9. Your parents made you a cake, didn’t they? A. Yes, they didn’t. B. Yes, they did.
10. She isn’t opening presents yet, is she? A. No, she isn’t. B. Yes, she isn’t.

SECTION 2 3-25
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Fill in each blank with a yes or no response to the question. Type the yes response in the first blank and
then the no response. For numbers 5 & 8, use I as the subject.
For example: You read: They weren’t invited, were they?
You type: [Yes, they were.] [No, they weren’t.]
1. He graduated this year, didn’t he? [Yes, he did.] [No, he didn’t.]
2. We haven’t been there already, have we? [Yes, we have.] [No, we haven’t.]
3. She isn’t jealous of them, is she? [Yes, she is.] [No, she isn’t.]
4. They went to the parade already, didn’t they? [Yes, they did.] [No, they didn’t.]
5. You have bought the food for the party, haven’t you? [Yes, I have.] [No, I haven’t.]
6. They aren’t going to the wedding, are they? [Yes, they are.] [No, they aren’t.]
7. That was a fun party, wasn’t it? [Yes, it was.] [No, it wasn’t.]
8. You weren’t feeling well, were you? [Yes, I was.] [No, I wasn’t.]

Listen to each question. Then, respond in the pauses provided using complete sentences. Answer five to
show you agree and five to show you disagree. When you disagree, make up a reason to show why. Click
“Done” to move on to the next question.
For example: You hear: Alyse eats very healthy, doesn’t she?
You say: No, she doesn’t. She eats ice cream twice a day.
Possible answers:
1. Those are the cutest dogs, aren’t they? No, I don’t think those dogs are cute.
2. That was such a fun party, wasn’t it? Yes, that was.
3. They were the nicest people, weren’t they? Yes, they are the nicest people.
4. She isn’t that old-fashioned, is she? No, she isn’t that old-fashioned.
5. He is always such a patient teacher, isn’t he? Yes, he is always really patient with his students.
6. I am an independent person, aren’t I? No, you are quite dependent on you mother.
7. He sure was acting crazy tonight, wasn’t he? Yes, he was acting crazy.
8. It wasn’t the healthiest dinner you can cook, was it? No, it was just a fast meal I cooked tonight.
9. They have given a very generous gift, haven’t they? Yes, they have.
10. They had very similar interests, didn’t they? No, they weren’t similar at all. He liked sports and
she didn’t.
3-26 SECTION 2
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 3.2.21 - What’s my trait?
3
LAD Pairing Activity or Presentation Mode
TEACHER NOTE: First decide if you want to play this in smaller groups or as a class. Groups of 4 would
work well or as a class in two or three teams. If you do this as a pairing activity and want to listen to these
conversations later, launch the recorder at the beginning of this activity and hit record.
A group member chooses one of the characteristics from the chart and acts it out using words, facial
expressions, or hand movements to get their partners to guess the characteristic. The partner who guesses
the word correctly is awarded one point. That person can then try to use the word in an alternative
comparative form to receive another point.
Example: Partner A chooses “bossy” and says, “Buy me a coffee. Bring me the laptop. Drive me to the store.”
Partner B guesses the word correctly and then says, “My little sister is just as bossy as my older sister.”
For fun, see who has the most points at the end.
angry excited intelligent outgoing silly
beautiful famous jealous patient strong
bored fast laid-back romantic surprised
brave friendly lazy rude sweet
busy frustrated loud scared tired
depressed generous lucky serious unhappy
dramatic happy mean shy worried
ACTIVITY 3.2.22 - Which person would be your friend?

Many friendships start because people have things in common. For this activity, one member of the group
will question the others about their traits, likes, dislikes, and interesting facts. Assign a group member to
“play” Person1, Person 2, and Person 3 from the chart below. They should use the information given to
answer questions asked by the fourth member of the group. At the end of the activity, the questioner will
choose the person who would be the best friend based on the answers. For fun, each person should act like
the traits given in the chart.
Person 1 Person 2 Person 3
Personality outgoing, laid-back, brave, shy but talkative with friends and family,
quiet, independent, smart
Traits energetic kind, generous
cooking, going out to restaurants,
the outdoors, going camping, helping others, reading, spending time
Likes going to see movies, different cultures
hiking in the mountains with friends and family, animals
and languages
watching TV, sitting around
Dislikes running, playing sports speaking in front of others, extreme sports
indoors
Interesting gave gifts to children who were in the
hiked Mount Fuji lived in Canada, France, and Britain
Facts hospital during the holidays
1. What makes a good friend? 3. What interests do they have?
2. What personality traits do you look for in a friend? 4. What type of friend are you?
SECTION 2 3-27
1
3
READING
TEAMWORK MAKES THE DREAM WORK!
You can’t get through life without having to work in a team at some point. Even the most introverted people need help
sometimes or have to rely on someone else to do something for them. Teamwork sure can be very rewarding and
fun, especially when you have the “right” kind of people on your team.
We have asked business managers, psychologists, and career coaches these two questions: “What characteristics
should someone have to join your team?” and “What kind of person do you not want on your team?” Here is what they
answered:
People you want on your team:

1. The Enthusiast is the motivator of the team. They are always cheerful, kind, and like to encourage you to do your
best. Someone like this will lift you up when you are down and patiently motivate you to keep going when you feel
tired.
2. The Brilliant is the intelligent and smart person on a team. He or she is usually very creative and has clever ideas.
Many of their sentences start with “What if…” or “Why don’t we try…”. They get the entire team thinking about how to
make things better.
3. The Go-To Person connects you with whomever you need. They either know someone who can help or can connect
you with someone else who can help. They are very important in making sure goals are reached and that questions are
answered.
4. The Boss is usually the team leader. He or she is brave, confident, and strict, yet still friendly. The Boss is often
detail-oriented, keeps an eye on the goal, and focuses on results. This type of person likes to get things done but also
listens to the team members. They are also often the one to deal with challenges, and the one who doesn’t give up.
5. The Chameleon is pleasant and confident but also very driven and flexible. He or she can be the leader, the
listener, the thinker, the motivator, or the connector. This person adapts to the role that is needed the most at a certain
point. It’s very important to have a Chameleon on your team.

People you don’t want on your team:
1. The Yes-Sayer is someone who will agree with you but not really support you. He or she is very unhealthy for the
team spirit because they are lazy. They just say “yes” so that they don’t have to listen to you or think of a real solution.
2. The Gossiper is the one who talks to you about everyone else on the team. He or she shares people’s stories or
creates new (false) ones. Once you turn around, they have no problem making up a story about you. The Gossiper is
rude and not very confident, so they try to cover that up by talking about others.
3. The Pessimist is someone who will always find something negative to say. The Pessimist seems angry and bitter
and maybe even jealous of your ideas. He or she is afraid to suggest ideas and will try to instill those feelings into you
as well. Their negativity is very unhealthy for the entire team.
4. The Complainer is similar to the Pessimist and can’t find joy in any situation. He or she always complains about
everything and likes feeling sorry for him or herself. Nothing you say will ever change a Complainer’s negative feelings.
This person is not actually looking for help or advice; they are just looking for attention.
Now the only question is: Which type of person are you?
3-28 SECTION 2
1
3
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct definition for each pink word in the reading.
1. encourage A. laid-back B. helps others C. says negative things
2. confident A. sure of oneself B. hardworking C. angry and negative
3. driven A. helps others B. hardworking C. laid-back
4. flexible A. laid-back B. sure of oneself C. says negative things
5. bitter A. helps others B. laid-back C. angry and negative
6. complains A. sure of oneself B. hardworking C. says negative things

MAD Text Match
Listen to the following notes a business manager took during job interviews. Then, match each
personality type with the correct candidate.
1. Lindsey has leadership experience, is confident, and never gives up. The Boss
2. Julie shares stories about everyone and doesn’t seem confident. The Gossiper
3. Erin is flexible, has experience in many fields, and is smart. The Chameleon
4. Patrick doesn’t say anything positive, seems afraid, and is unhealthy. The Pessimist
5. Ben agrees with everything, doesn’t have his own opinion, and is lazy. The Yes-Sayer
6. Danie has many good ideas and is smart and creative. The Brilliant
7. Hannah has lots of connections, is goal-oriented, and knows a lot. The Go-To Person

MAD Open Recording
1. What kind of person are you? Or are you a combination of two or three?
2. What about your friends or colleagues?
3. What type of people are they, and why do you think so?
SECTION 2 3-29
1
3
VOCABULARY
RELATIONSHIPS AND ADVICE

MAD Open Text
With a partner, type a short story about the Section 3 Vocabulary pictures. Before you start your story,


MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text

MAD Pronunciation
TEACHER NOTE: *This sentence is used in speech. The correct written sentence is “To whom do you look up?”
1. We get along really well. 6. Are you a good listener?

2. Who do you look up to?* 7. Be an adult and make up with him.
3. That really hurt my feelings. 8. Can you give me some advice?
4. You should apologize and forgive her. 9. They don’t like when you fight.
5. Do you have a spouse? 10. I miss her when she travels for work.
3-30 SECTION 3
1
3
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
1. [agree to disagree] 9. [to make up with]
2. [in a relationship] 10. [hurt someone’s feelings]
3. [his friend’s wife] 11. [a reliable friend]
4. [to look up to] 12. [to miss someone]
5. [to get along with] 13. [the babysitter]
6. [adults and teenagers] 14. [embarrassing and annoying]
7. [my neighbor across the street] 15. [to fight with a sibling]
8. [an important friendship] 16. [a nice couple]
CULTURAL NOTE
Family Reunions
Large families with many relatives who do not live close to each other often plan family reunions. This is
an event where family members meet and spend time together. Families choose the date that works best
for most people. They also choose a location where everyone meets. This could be a central location like a
park or someone’s home. Sometimes families choose a fun vacation spot instead. Food, drinks, games, and
pictures are always part of a family reunion. Some families may have reunions every year, and other families
may meet every two, three, or five years. A reunion may last for one day, a couple days, or even a week. The
point is for relatives to get together who don’t see each other as often as they would like.

MAD Sentence Jumble
Put the conversation in the correct order.
Wife: The Fourth of July is coming up. Should we have a party?
Husband: Yes! That sounds like a great idea!
Wife: What do you think about having the party inside?
Husband: Well, I was thinking we could have it outside.
Wife: The weather is going to be too hot on Saturday to be outside.
Husband: I disagree. I think it’s going to be perfect for grilling.
Wife: I agree that a cookout would be perfect.
Husband: What if the guests can come inside or stay outside?
Wife: That way they can choose. Any other great ideas?
Husband: Yeah! What about fireworks when it gets dark?
Wife: That would be fun! This is going to be a great party.
SECTION 3 3-31
1
3
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
Listen as Cindy describes three friends. Then, place each phrase under the correct friend and next to the
correct question. The order will be graded.
Ella, Alyssa, and Joy are three friends that I am so thankful to have.
Alyssa is a friend that doesn’t go to my school. We actually met on our soccer team 8 years ago. I don’t see her
much during the week, but I do see her every weekend at our club soccer games. I look up to her a lot
because she is quiet, yet very confident. No one bosses her around on the team. She works hard to win a
game, and I really like that she is always kind to the players on the other team. She tells them, “Awesome shot!”
or “Great game!” Good sportsmanship is a must when playing on a team.
Ella is my best friend. We have gone to school together for 12 years. I don’t know what I would do without
her. She is always there for me whenever I need her, day or night. She is always the life of the party as she is
talkative and outgoing. No matter what type of day I am having, she makes it brighter with jokes. I am always
smiling or laughing when we are together. I really enjoy being around her.
Joy is actually my mom’s best friend’s daughter. We grew up together and have known each other since we
were babies. We have become good friends. Although we don’t go to school with each other, we are very
close. I always call her or go to her if I have a fight with my mom or a friend. She just listens! I can tell her what
happened or how I am feeling, and she gives me great advice. When we are together, we love to talk while we
draw or paint. We always do creative things together.
Best Friend Good Friend Friend

Name of friend? Ella Joy Alyssa
Friends from where? a school friend a childhood friend a soccer friend
How long? friends longer time friends longest time friends a long time
Her characteristics? reliable & outgoing good listener confident & kind

Listen to the discussion between Callie and Scarlett. Then, answer each question in complete sentences
based on what you heard.
Callie: Hi, Scarlett! How are you doing?
Scarlett: Hi, Callie! I’m okay.
Callie: Just okay?
Scarlett: Yeah. My younger sister and I have been fighting a lot lately.
Callie: I’m sorry to hear that. Sometimes my older brother and I fight, too.
Scarlett: Do you think you could give me some advice?
Callie: I can try. What have you been fighting about?
3-32 SECTION 3
1
3
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
Scarlett: Well, she is always taking my clothes without asking me.

Callie: That is annoying! Do you think she just looks up to you and wants to be like you?
Scarlett: I don’t know. Maybe.
Callie: Well, if she asked to wear your clothes, would you let her?
Scarlett: Yes, I think that I would.
Callie: Well, there you go. Tell her that she can’t wear your clothes unless she asks you first.
Scarlett: That’s a great idea. Thanks for being such a great listener.
Callie: No problem. I hope you and your sister can make up and get along better.
Scarlett: Thanks. I think we can work it out!
Possible answers:
1. What is the fight about? Scarlett’s younger sister takes her clothes without asking.
2. Who is giving the advice? Callie is giving the advice.
3. What is the advice that she gives? She tells Scarlett to have her sister ask her first before she can
wear her clothes.
4. Why does Callie thank Scarlett? She thanks her for being a good listener.
5. Have you ever fought with a family member? Answers will vary.
6. If so, what have you fought about? Answers will vary.

MAD Open Recording
1. Who is your best friend? Why?
2. What do you look for in a friend?
3. Who do you look up to? Why?
4. Do you get along with your neighbors? Why or why not?
5. Who was your favorite babysitter when you were little? Why?

Class Activity
GAMES: Pictionary and Marker Wars (The explanation and playing sheet for these games
are located in the B1 Resources Google Doc Folder, or download the
SECTION 3 3-33
1
3
GRAMMAR
PAST MODAL VERBS OF DEDUCTION (must, may, might, could, should)
Modal verbs in the past tense: Subject + modal verb + “have” + past participle + other info
Modal Verb Examples Meaning
must have - (necessity) strong We are guessing he was there and are
He must have been at the wedding
belief something is true because very sure. Our evidence is he replied
because he replied “yes” to the invitation.
there is evidence to prove it. “yes” to the invitation.
}
may have, might have, could
have - (possibility) uncertain about He may have
whether something is true or not. been at the It is possible he was at the wedding.
He might have wedding. I saw his We are guessing because we saw his
These words mean the same thing girlfriend there. girlfriend there.
but “may” is the most formal of He could have
the three.
should have - (expectation)

He should have been at the wedding. We expected him to be at the wedding
something was supposed to
He told me he was going. because he said he would be there.
happen.
He shouldn’t have fallen asleep at the We expected him to be awake at the

should have - (advice)
wedding. It’s not polite. wedding because it is rude to sleep at
something is the right thing to do.
a party or celebration.

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the past modal verb of deduction that best completes each sentence.
1. Alex’s dad was gone on a work trip for 6 days. Alex ___________ missed him.
A. couldn’t have B. must have C. might have
2. Denise said some mean things to Eva. Denise ___________ done that.
A. shouldn’t have B. may have C. could have
3. Dan and Ian were fighting a lot last week. I haven’t heard them fighting this week at all. They _______ made up.
A. shouldn’t have B. couldn’t have C. might have
4. We had so much fun at the wedding. You ___________ come.
A. may have B. should have C. might have
5. Ivy didn’t say sorry to Melanie for a week. Wow! She ___________ apologized sooner.
A. could have B. may have C. must have
6. My brothers are still not talking to one another. They ___________ forgiven each other.
A. couldn’t have B. must have C. shouldn’t have
3-34 SECTION 3
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
7. I haven’t seen our neighbors at all this week. They ___________ gone on vacation.
A. should have B. couldn’t have C. must have
8. Our babysitter needs to check her schedule. She ___________ scheduled a different babysitting job for the
night we need her to babysit.
A. must have B. shouldn’t have C. may have
9. We have very little Halloween candy left for the neighborhood kids. We ___________ bought more.
A. should have B. couldn’t have C. might have
10. You are laughing really hard. He ___________ told a really funny joke.
A. should have B. must have C. couldn’t have
11. My sister said sorry for breaking my brush and not telling me about it. She ___________ told me the truth
when it happened.
A. shouldn’t have B. must have C. should have
12. Scott was spending a lot of time with Jessica. He ___________ been in love with her.
A. might have B. shouldn’t have C. couldn’t have

MAD Image Match
Listen to each past modal of deduction statement. Then, match it with the correct image.
Sentence 1: Mike couldn’t have been unhappy to win.
Sentence 2: We shouldn’t have made so much food!
Sentence 3: Fiona may have needed her mother’s advice.
Sentence 4: Lily must have broken her wrist playing tennis.
Sentence 5: The comedian must have told a funny joke.
Sentence 6: Aidan couldn’t have been happy with his kids fighting.
Sentence 7: Patty shouldn’t have eaten that cupcake.
Sentence 8: An adult might have lost some balloons.
Sentence 9: Lee must have missed the school bus.
Sentence 10: Grayson should have gone to bed earlier.
1. 6 2. 3 3. 10 4. 5 5. 8
6. 7 7. 9 8. 1 9. 4 10. 2
SECTION 3 3-35
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
The Fraziers live together in one house. Read the information about each person, and then choose the
best answer for each statement.
Debra Frazier Chris Frazier Ashley Frazier
• College sophomore
• Corporate Lawyer • High school junior
• Daughter of Debra, sister of
• Mother of Chris and Ashley • Son of Debra, brother of Ashley
Chris
• Enjoys drinking coffee, going • Enjoys running outside, driving
• Enjoys running on a treadmill
for walks outside, and singing fast cars, and playing computer
inside, using social media, and
karaoke games
all animals
• Dislikes tea and computers • Dislikes dogs and sweets
• Dislikes the outdoors and music
• Works Wednesday through • Is at school Monday through
• Has classes Monday through
Sunday 7:00-6:30 p.m. Friday 8:45-2:45 p.m.
Wednesday 11:00 a.m.-4:30 p.m.
1. On Monday at 9:00 a.m., someone bought a drink at the neighborhood café.
It could have been ___________. A. Debra or Chris B. Ashley C. Ashley or Debra
2. On Thursday at 3:30 p.m., someone threw ten chocolate chip cookies in the garbage.
It must have been ___________. A. Debra B. Chris C. Ashley
3. On Saturday, someone did not close the house door when he/she went outside to exercise.
It couldn’t have been ___________. A. Debra B. Chris C. Ashley
4. On Sunday at 6:00 p.m., someone started a campfire in the forest behind the house.
5. On Tuesday at 10:00 a.m., the neighbors heard someone singing terribly in the shower.
6. On Saturday at 2:00 p.m., someone accidentally broke the computer.
It might have been ___________. A. Debra or Ashley B. Chris C. Ashley or Chris
7. On Friday at 1:45 p.m., someone went into the neighbors’ backyard to play with the dog.
8. On Wednesday at 5:00 p.m., someone drove way too fast down the street.
It couldn’t have been ___________. A. Debra B. Chris C. Ashley

Read each scenario. Then, type three different statements of deduction for each one. Use the words you
are given.
1. The babysitter let the kids eat too much dessert.
(might have, could have, shouldn’t have)
2. It’s Father’s Day, and he forgot to buy his dad a present.
(should have, may have, couldn’t have)
3. My friend and I were talking on the phone when she hung up on me.
(must have, couldn’t have, should have)
4. Susie had a fight with her spouse and said some mean things to him.
(shouldn’t have, may have, could have)
3-36 SECTION 3
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Look at each image, and say a statement using a past modal of deduction.
1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6.

MAKING FRIENDLY SUGGESTIONS
There are many common phrases you can use to offer a suggestion.
Common Phrases in Questions Examples

How about + subject + simple verb form How about you apologize?
How about + gerund How about apologizing?
What about + gerund What about apologizing?
Why don’t + subject + simple verb form Why don’t you apologize? (Why doesn’t he apologize?)
Common Phrases in Statements with the
Examples
Modal Verb should
I think + subject + should + other info I think you should apologize.
I don’t think + subject + should + other info I don’t think you should apologize.
Maybe + subject + should+ other info Maybe you should apologize.

MAD Text Match
Match two parts to form the correct sentence.
1. How about you tell him how you are feeling? 5. You shouldn’t have said that to her.
2. Why don’t you say you are sorry? 6. Maybe you should think before you speak.
3. If I were you I would apologize. 7. I don’t think you should apologize for that.
4. I think you should tell him how you are feeling. 8. What about saying you are sorry?
SECTION 3 3-37
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
LANGUAGE TIP
Relationships
The word “relationship” refers to the connection between people. It can be applied to family members, friends,
couples who are romantically involved, or even coworkers who have a working relationship. When you hear
the phrase “they are in a relationship,” this implies two people are dating and have a romantic relationship.
However, if you say, “I have a good relationship with her,” this can be a general statement made about any type
of relationship and does not necessarily mean romance.
When talking about people who are a couple and are dating, you say, “He is my boyfriend.” or “She is my
girlfriend.” If you want to talk about someone who is just a friend and want to include their gender, you would
use “boy friend” and “girl friend.” If you do this, make sure to leave a pause or space between the words so that
there isn’t any confusion. However, even leaving a space between the words may lead to confusion. Therefore,
you may want to say, “a male friend,” “a guy friend,” or “a friend that’s a guy.” Similarly, you would say, “a female
friend” or “a friend that’s a girl.”

MAD Multiple Choice
Read each scenario. Then, choose the correct suggestion.
1. He got in a small accident with his mom’s car. 5. Matt told me I don’t make time for our friendship.
A. He shouldn’t pay for it. A. You should try to be a more reliable friend.
B. Why doesn’t he drive it to school? B. How about trying to be annoying?
C. I think he should tell her. C. Why don’t you give him advice?
2. I never called my friend back when I said I would. 6. I heard my friend say something mean about me.
A. Why don’t you call her now and apologize? A. Why don’t you say you are sorry?
B. I don’t think you should apologize. B. How about telling her a joke?
C. Maybe he should call you back. C. How about you tell her it hurt your feelings?
3. He laughed when his girlfriend told him why she 7. She made her sister cry because of something
was crying. she said.
A. I think he should cry. A. I think she should forgive her sister for crying.
B. Maybe he should be a better listener. B. Why doesn’t she try to get along with her sister?
C. He shouldn’t be so embarrassing. C. How about she misses her sister?
4. I didn’t get a good grade in math class, so I 8. I will miss my friend a lot when she is gone
can’t play in next week’s big game. all summer.
A. I think you should call your coach. A. I think you should look up to her.
B. You shouldn’t study so much next time. B. Why don’t you video call her once a week?
C. Why don’t you act like a teenager? C. You shouldn’t be so bossy.

MAD Sentence Jumble
Listen to each scenario. Then, put the suggestions in the correct order based on the scenarios.
1. My boyfriend was texting another girl. I am worried he likes her more than just a friend.
2. I was not nice to my little sister earlier today. I needed to shower, and she was in there for 30 minutes
already. I said some mean things to her.
3. My one friend told my other friend that I was talking about her. I didn’t mean to hurt her feelings.
She was just being very negative, and I don’t like it.
4. Our group project is due tomorrow, and I didn’t get my part done yet. My partners are going to be very
mad at me, but they don’t know that I have been at the hospital the past two nights visiting my grandpa.
3-38 SECTION 3
1
3
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Sentence Jumble
5. I didn’t get to study for the test today because I was sick the past two days.
6. I went swimming in a lake and lost the bracelet that my dad gave me for my graduation.
7. I love my friend, but I am not in love with him.
8. My dad got a new job and doesn’t have as much time to be with me.
9. My parents just bought me a new phone last month, and my friend asked to use it and dropped it.
The glass broke on the screen. They are going to be so mad.
10. I really like my friends, but they are bringing too much teenage drama into my life. It’s annoying and
sometimes even embarrassing the way they act toward other people.
Why don’t you ask him about it?
How about apologizing to her?
You should tell her how you feel and apologize.
Why don’t you talk to your group?
Maybe you should talk to your teacher.
I think you should tell him what happened.
How about telling him how you feel?
You should tell him that you miss him.
How about you tell them the truth?
I think you should tell them how you feel.

Change each command into a friendly suggestion.
For example: You read: Say you are sorry! (Maybe...) You type: Maybe you should say you are sorry.
Possible answers:
1. Send her a card. (Why don’t...) Why don’t you send her a card?
2. Give him a gift. (I think...) I think you should give him a gift.
3. Go to their house. (How about you...) How about you go to their house?
4. Don’t cry. (I don’t think...) I don’t think you should cry.
5. Write an apology letter. (What about...) What about writing an apology letter?
6. Forgive and forget. (How about...) How about forgiving and forgetting?
7. Do it for your friendship. (Maybe….) Maybe you should do it for your friendship.
8. Tell her the truth. (I think…) I think you should tell her the truth.

Listen to the problems Amy is having. Then, give advice about each problem. Click “Done” to move on to
the next problem. Use friendly suggestions: How about, What about, Why don’t, I think, Maybe.
1. I had a fight with my best friend.
2. I forgot to bring the pie for Thanksgiving dinner.
3. My parents say that I am on my phone too much.
4. My brother is mad at me because I forgot his birthday.
5. My teacher thinks I didn’t work hard enough on my project.
6. I didn’t do my chores this weekend, so my mom had to do them.
7. I put my sister’s favorite sweater in the dryer, and now it is too small.
8. I hung up on my friend, and now she won’t answer my call.
SECTION 3 3-39
1
3
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 3.3.21 - What should I do?
Often in America, people call in to a radio station to talk about a problem and then listeners can call in to give
them advice. First, write a problem you have or had, real or made up. For example, write about a fight with a
friend, a disagreement with a parent, etc.
Next, tell Partner 1 your problem. He/she will give you advice. Write down the advice he/she gives you. Then,
Partner 1 will tell you his/her problem and you have to give the advice. When you both have given advice,
switch partners. You will talk with three different people.

MAD Open Recording
First, read your problem. Then, tell the one piece of advice that was most helpful to you from the
listeners who called in to the radio show. Explain why it was helpful to you.
ACTIVITY 3.3.23 - LAB LIBS
LAD Grouping Activity (Groups of 4) or Class Presentation Mode
Working in groups: Pick two partners to write the answers and two partners to give the answers.
Halfway through, switch roles. The two people writing the answers will now give the answers and the two
people giving the answers will write the answers. When you are done, read the story out loud. The point is to
make a funny story. You do not have to only use vocabulary from this chapter!
Working as a class: Teacher, write the answers in the blanks. Call on students to give you the answers for
the words you need. Read the story to the class when complete.
Last weekend, my family celebrated my grandparents’ 1. [ordinal number] wedding anniversary. Friends,
neighbors, and 2. [profession plural] were invited, and all of our relatives came into town for the party. I
hadn’t seen my aunt 3. [name] in a few years because she lives in 4. [place], but she flew in just for the
celebration. She is my 5. [adjective] aunt, so I was extremely 6. [adjective] to see her! My grandparents’ pet
7. [animal] named 8. [female pet’s name] was also at the party because she is considered part of the family.
There were 9. [adjective] decorations, such as balloons, 10. [plural noun], 11. [another plural noun], and
pictures of the couple hung up around the room. For 12. [meal time], we ordered 13. [type of food] from a
local 14. [type of business]. (Switch)
We ordered a large cake as well as 15. [type of food] for dessert. Even though it wasn’t a birthday party,
there were candles on top of the 16. [same food as 15] that my grandma and grandpa had to blow out.
After the candles were blown out, everyone clapped and cheered. This noise scared 17. [pet’s name from
8] and she began 18. [verb in -ing form] and acting crazy. My uncle 19. [male name] tried to grab 20. [pet’s
name from 8] to calm her down, but instead he tripped over her and fell right into the cake. When he stood
up, his 21. [body part] was completely covered in 22. [color] frosting! It was so 23. [adjective], and everyone
laughed so hard they 24. [verb in simple past tense]. From then on, everyone called Uncle 25. [same male
name as 19] “Uncle Frosting- 26. [same body part as 21]“. It was such a fun weekend!
3-40 SECTION 3
1
3
READING
TRADITIONAL vs. NON-TRADITIONAL WEDDINGS
SECTION 3 3-41
1
3
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the best answer for each sentence based on the reading.
1. The average cost of a traditional wedding 6. What is usually the same at both non-traditional
is _____. and traditional weddings?
A. $39,329 A. the location of the ceremony
B. $35,932 B. how the couple leaves the party
C. $35,329 C. the type of music
2. A traditional wedding dress is _____. 7. During the traditional party, you will often
A. white see _____.
B. ivory A. a buffet-style dinner
C. white or ivory B. the groom breakdancing
3. The wedding cake for a traditional wedding is _____. C. the bride and groom cutting their cake
A. 2-3 tiers with white frosting 8. A non-traditional wedding dress can be _____.
B. cupcakes only A. white or ivory
C. whatever you want it to be B. colorful
4. A _____ usually plays music during a traditional C. both A and B
wedding. 9. What does the wedding planner try to do?
A. DJ A. plan only traditional weddings
B. live band B. make sure each wedding is perfect
C. stereo system C. ensure the mother of the bride is always happy
5. The average cost of a non-traditional destination 10. The wedding party in a traditional wedding
wedding is _____. consists of bridesmaids, groomsmen, and _____.
A. more expensive A. a flower girl and ring bearer
B. dependent on the destination B. the groom’s parents
C. both A and B C. decorations
After reading about the differences in wedding styles, answer each question using complete sentences.
1. What are the pros of a traditional wedding? 3. What are the cons of a traditional wedding?
2. What are the pros of a non-traditional wedding? 4. What are the cons of a non-traditional wedding?

Now that you know a few pros to having a non-traditional wedding you will debate this topic:
You want to convince your friend that a non-traditional wedding is better, but she thinks a traditional
wedding is better. Listen to her statements, and then disagree with the things your friend is saying.
Disagree with that one point only, and click “Done” to move onto the next comment she will make. Use
polite comments when debating. It’s okay to say what you don’t like, but keep the comments friendly and
respectful. Remember: your opinion is just ONE opinion, not THE correct one.
1. When I get married, I want a traditional wedding because it doesn’t cost as much money.
2. Well, that may be true, but I always pictured myself wearing a long white dress and a veil, and my husband
wearing a tuxedo. I don’t want any crazy colors.
3. I hear you. I just don’t want a DJ at my wedding. I like a small band that plays quiet music.
3-42 SECTION 3
1
3
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S THROW SKYLAR A PARTY!
MAD Viewing
time.
Jack: So, I was thinking we should throw Skylar a surprise birthday party. She’s turning 18 and going off to
college soon. I was wondering if I can get your help on it.
Emily: I think that’s a fantastic idea! Have you started any of the details yet?
Jack: Not yet.
Emily: Well, first we have to pick a date. When should we have the party?
Jack: Why don’t we have the party on her actual birthday, August 6th. What day of the week is that?
Emily: Let me look… It’s on Friday! Perfect.
Jack: Well, what should we do?
Emily: We should have a pool and pizza party at her house that evening. She gets off of work at 6:00. She
would never expect us to surprise her at her house.
Jack: Okay. So if she gets home at 6 o’clock, why don’t we all show up at 5:45. That way when she’s arrived,
we’re all sitting and hiding, and ready to surprise her.
Emily: Perfect. We also have to make and send the invitations. And day of the party, we have to get the food
and drinks ready, and set up for the party.
Jack: Okay, boss. Just tell me what to do. That’s why I asked for your help.
Emily: I’ll make the invitations online. And I was thinking, why don’t we ask everyone to bring a gift for Skylar
and some food to share.
Jack: Oh, like a potluck.
Emily: Exactly. So much easier when you divide and conquer.
Jack: Teamwork makes the dream work!
The day of the party….
Emily: Okay, napkins, plates, utensils.

Jack: Check.
Emily: Food?
Jack: Check.
Emily: Cake, brownies, cookies.
Jack: Check.
Emily: And guests!
Jack: Perfect. Wait, I think she’s coming! Guys, hide, quick!
Everyone: SURPRISE!
Skylar: Hi, guys!
Jack: Happy birthday!
Skylar: Thank you. This is awesome!
LET’S TALK! 3-43

1
3
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
LT 3.2 - LISTEN
MAD Category Match
Place each word, phrase, or sentence under the correct category based on the chapter video.
Jack Emily Emily & Jack

She’s turning 18. fantastic idea surprise
on her actual birthday pool and pizza party 6:00
5:45 It’s on Friday. perfect
Tell me what to do. I’ll make invitations.

MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if each statement is true or false based on the chapter video.
1. Jack wants to throw Skylar a surprise party. A. True B. False
2. It’s Skylar’s 19th birthday. A. True B. False
3. Jack has many ideas and has started planning already. A. True B. False
4. Emily doesn’t like Skylar. A. True B. False
5. They are planning the party for August 6th. A. True B. False
6. Emily suggests a pool and pizza party at Jack’s house. A. True B. False
7. Jack is happy that Emily has so many good ideas. A. True B. False
8. Emily wants to send out invitations via mail. A. True B. False
9. Both want to ask their other friends to bring food to the party as well. A. True B. False
10. Skylar doesn’t like the surprise party. A. True B. False

MAD Open Recording
Answer each question about your favorite birthday party. Use complete sentences.
1. How old did you turn?
2. Was it a surprise party, or did you help plan it?
3. Who was at the party?
4. What did you drink and eat?
5. Did you get any presents? If so, what was special about them?
6. What would you do differently next time?
3-44 LET’S TALK!

1
3
LET’S TALK!
INTERVIEWS - LET’S GET TO KNOW YOUR FAMILY!
MAD Viewing
Skylar Rutvik Connor

Skylar: I am a big [family person]. I have an older sister who is two years older. She and I get along very well.
[I have a younger brother], and then I have my mom and dad, and then a cat and dog. Bobby and I, that’s
my sister, we used to [not get along] all the time, but now that we’re older, we get along very well. [I look up
to my mom a lot]. She’s the strongest person I know. [She’s so sweet]. She’s so caring about everyone. So,
I definitely want to be like her when I’m older. We have a lot of extended family that lives very close to where
we are, so we have almost monthly [family birthday parties], which I love. And then the rest of our family
lives out in Washington, which is where my sister’s going to college, so we have a lot of family out there, and
we like to see them [as often as we can].
Rutvik: I do have an older sibling. He’s [an older brother]. He is 21 years old. He’s two years older than me.
[We get along very well]. He’s like my best friend because a lot of our interests are [very similar]. And
when we do have fights, it is mostly [because we don’t agree] on something when it’s related to sports or
current events. I look up to a lot of people, mostly my dad, because his life story is very inspiring. His work
ethic is very contagious, and when I see him work hard, I want [to work even harder]. My extended
family lives mostly in India, so that’s pretty far away. Mostly they live in the northern part of India, so having
family reunions is kind of hard because that would be a lot of miles to fly and very hard to coordinate.
Connor: Do I have siblings? Yes, I have an older brother. He’s 24. We [get along really well]. Both of us have
been super close our whole lives. Yeah [we’re just good friends]. We have a lot in common. So I would say
[I look up to him], and my parents as well. I look up to them just because they’re good people and I guess I
try to be like them and as successful and as happy as they are. Yes, I have plenty of extended family in other
states. [A lot of my family] lives out in Montana, but I also have cousins and aunts and uncles out in Alaska.
So they’re really fun to visit. I get to travel the country to go see them. And I’ve only had one family reunion
with my whole [family once in my life].
LET’S TALK! 3-45
1
3
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if you are sure or unsure about each statement based on the interviews.
For example: You read: Skylar has family that lives in Washington. You choose: A. Sure
Explanation: Skylar said she has family in Washington.
1. Rutvik’s extended family lives mostly in India. A. Sure B. Unsure
2. Skylar thinks her mom is very kind. A. Sure B. Unsure
3. Connor has 24 cousins. A. Sure B. Unsure
4. Rutvik’s dad has a very contagious work ethic. A. Sure B. Unsure
5. Connor has a good relationship with his brother. A. Sure B. Unsure
6. Skylar has grandparents who live in Washington. A. Sure B. Unsure
7. Connor has relatives who live in Wisconsin. A. Sure B. Unsure
8. Skylar loves being with her family. A. Sure B. Unsure
9. Rutvik has a younger brother. A. Sure B. Unsure
10. Connor travels by train to visit his family in Montana. A. Sure B. Unsure
11. Rutvik really looks up to his cousin. A. Sure B. Unsure
12. Skylar’s sister is pretty dramatic. A. Sure B. Unsure
LT 3.8 - LISTEN & WRITE

MAD Open Text
Listen to Rutvik again. Now write about Rutvik’s family, but change at least five positive things he says
about them into something negative. Here is an example from Skylar:
She says: “I am a big family person.”
You type: She doesn’t like her family at all. OR She is not a big family person.
She says: “I have a younger brother.”
You type: She doesn’t have a younger brother.
LT 3.9 - LISTEN & SPEAK

1. How many siblings do you have?
2. Who do you look up to in your family?
3. Where does your extended family live?
4. Do you have relatives in a different country?
5. How often do you see your family?
6. Do you get together for birthday parties, holidays, or family reunions?
3-46 LET’S TALK!

1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

How well do I
Additional
Refer to...
I CAN... Practice
(Page = P.)
Review (R)
1. discuss holidays and celebrations using Section 1

R. 1, 2, 3, 8
conjunctions. P. 3-7, 3-10
2. compare and contrast using alternative

R. 2, 7 P. 3-20
comparative forms.
3. use question tags. R. 2, 4 P. 3-23
4. give advice and suggestions about Section 3

R. 2, 5, 6
relationships. P. 3-34, 3-37
R1 - LISTENING 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen as a husband and wife plan a party. Choose the best answer for each question based on what
you hear.
Wife: Independence Day is coming up in three weeks. Should we have a party?
Husband: That sounds like a great idea!
Wife: We can invite friends and neighbors.
Husband: No family? My brother will not be happy to not be invited.
Wife: We are with our family for every other holiday. Let’s make this about our other relationships. Besides,
our house isn’t big enough to invite family, too.
Husband: I disagree. We can see how many people RSVP and invite family if the number of people isn’t too
high.
Wife: Okay. That’s fine. How about having the party inside?
Husband: Well, I was thinking we could have the party outside.
Wife: Our weather in July is too hot to eat outside.
Husband: I disagree. I think it’s going to be perfect weather for grilling some hamburgers and hotdogs.
Wife: I do agree that a cookout with burgers and sausages would be easiest.
Husband: What if the guests can come inside or go outside? That way they can choose where they want to be.
Wife: Works for me. All the other food can be inside and when you are done grilling, just bring it in. That way
the food won’t get too hot out in the sun.
Husband: Okay, let’s have fireworks when it gets dark out. Wouldn’t that be fun for the kids?
Wife: Haven’t you listened to news reports around the Fourth of July? Fireworks and teenage boys do not mix.
Look it up online. It’s a fact.
Husband: Oh, just teenage boys, huh? I bet teenage girls have accidents, too.
Wife: You are right. But boys had about 6,000 more accidents than girls. I am not making this up.
Husband: Wow! I had no idea. What if we told the kids we will have fireworks but that only the adults will be
lighting them?
Wife: I would maybe agree to fireworks if you promise that only you and a couple other adults will touch them.
No kids. We don’t want our party to end with someone having to go to the hospital.
Husband: Good idea. This is going to be an awesome party!
CHAPTER 3 3-47
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
1. The husband and wife disagree about three 5. What does the husband say to get the wife to
things when planning this party. Which one did agree to having fireworks?
they not disagree about? A. no kids will do fireworks
A. inviting family B. no teens will do fireworks
B. the food C. no adults will do fireworks
C. the weather D. both A and B
D. the fireworks 6. What are we sure about?
2. Whom are they going to invite to the party first? That ______ have the most firework accidents.
A. family A. teenage boys
B. friends and neighbors B. teenage girls
C. neighbors C. adult men
D. both A and C D. adult women
3. Where do they agree to have the party? 7. Whom is the husband most worried about
A. inside not inviting?
B. at the park A. the neighbors
C. outside B. his brother
D. both A and C C. his family
4. Why doesn’t the wife think that having fireworks D. his children
at the party is a good idea? 8. Why are they having a party?
A. They are too loud. A. for the Fourth of July
B. They are no fun. B. for their wedding
C. They are dangerous. C. for a birthday
D. They are expensive. D. for a graduation
R2 - LISTENING 2
1. [Do you know where we are watching fireworks for Independence Day?]
2. [Even if it is late, I am sending you a birthday card.]
3. [She eats just as healthy as he does.]
4. [They are very dependent on their parents, aren’t they?]
5. [I might have laughed at his joke if it was funny.]
6. [Why don’t you apologize for being jealous of her new gift?]
3-48 CHAPTER 3
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R3 - GRAMMAR 1
Complete each sentence starter by writing a sentence using one of the conjunctions given. Rewrite the
complete sentence. Do not use a conjunction more than once: after, before, even if, once, until, while.
For example: You read: I cannot play basketball with my neighbor __________________________.
You type: I cannot play basketball with my neighbor until my homework is done.
1. Some teenagers go off to college __________________________.
2. We are going to watch the fireworks __________________________.
3. I won’t get married __________________________.
4. You can open your presents __________________________.
5. We can play games __________________________.
R4 - GRAMMAR 2
MAD Multiple Choice
Read each sentence with a question tag. Then, choose the answer that is NOT a correct response.
1. That was such a fun party, wasn’t it? 6. I forgot to give you your present, didn’t I?
A. Yes, I agree. A. No, you didn’t. You gave it to me yesterday.
B. No, I don’t think it was fun. B. Yes, but it’s okay. My real birthday is tomorrow.
C. Yes, it was very boring. C. Yes, you remembered.
2. He just graduated, didn’t he? 7. You will invite me to your party, won’t you?
A. Yes, it was his birthday. A. Yes, of course I won’t.
B. No, he graduated last year. B. Yes, I will.
C. Yes, they just had a celebration for him. C. No, I can’t. I’m only inviting family.
3. Your parents were embarrassing you, weren’t they? 8. He didn’t make you cry, did he?
A. No, they weren’t. They never do. A. No, I never cry.
B. Yes, they didn’t. B. Yes, he didn’t.
C. Yes, a little bit. C. Yes, a little.
4. We haven’t been there before, have we? 9. That hurt your feelings, didn’t it?
A. No, we haven’t. A. No, I never cry.
B. Yes, we were there 2 years ago. B. Yes, a lot.
C. Yes, it will be our first time going there. C. Yes, but they said sorry.
5. They never disagree, do they? 10. I am not annoying, am I?
A. That’s not true. They do sometimes. A. No, I don’t think so.
B. No, they don’t. Ever. B. Yes, a lot.
C. Yes, they never agree. C. Yes, very.
CHAPTER 3 3-49
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R5 - READING
Read the conversation between Justin and Carlos. Write five things that he shouldn’t have done and give a
suggestion for each. Use different modals of past deduction when possible.
For example:
You read: I took Laura to dinner Friday night, but I don’t think she had a good time.
You type: You shouldn’t have taken her to dinner Friday night if you were so tired. You could have
asked her to go to brunch on Saturday.
Carlos: Hey, Justin! What’s wrong? You look sad.
Justin: Hi, Carlos. I think I made a mistake. I took Laura to dinner Friday night, but I don’t think she had a good
time.
Carlos: Why not? What happened?
Justin: I thought everything was great, but I’m afraid she felt differently. First, I took a nap because I had
swimming practice very early that morning, and I was extremely tired after school. However, I slept a little
too long and didn’t have time to take a shower. I was late picking her up. She seemed annoyed, but she’s
really patient, so she still wanted to go to the restaurant. Then, when she got in my car, she complained
about the garbage on the floor. I moved it to one side, but I don’t think she liked it. Next, when we arrived at
the restaurant, she looked really surprised. Maybe she doesn’t like fast food hamburgers? Anyway, I saw my
neighbor inside, so I talked to him for a few minutes while Laura waited in line. When we ordered our food,
I got her a medium order of french fries instead of just a small. I thought she’d be happy to have more food,
but she told me it was unhealthy to eat this kind of food. While we ate, I told her all about the time I got in a
fight with my little brother. It’s a hilarious story! She didn’t seem to enjoy it though. After eating, Laura asked to
go home. I drove her back to her house, and she jumped out of the car without saying goodbye! I don’t know
what I did wrong!
Carlos: Oh boy. I think I see some problems. Can I give you some advice?
Justin: Sure, you’re a reliable friend. I know you will tell me the truth.
R6 - WRITING
MAD Open Text
Read the magazine advice article “Ask Andy.” Bobby is asking for advice about his neighbors. Based on
what you read, type a response letter giving him advice on what he should do about this problem. Use the
common phrases you learned to offer friendly suggestions.
3-50 CHAPTER 3
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R7 - SPEAKING 1
MAD Open Recording
Say sentences that compare and contrast the two people. Use the alternative comparative forms given
and the information in the chart.
Name: Michelle Evelyn
Birthdate: 7/10/1982 8/13/1985
Hair Color: light brown light brown
Height: 5 feet 7 inches 5 feet 3 inches
Weight: 140 pounds 135 pounds
outgoing, friendly, kind, gave shy, creative, dramatic, gave
Personality:
$2,000 to schools in need $1,000 to schools in need
Profession: businesswoman photographer
1. nearly 2. just 3. half 4. exactly 5. a little
R8 - SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Look at the vocabulary images from Section 3. Answer the questions about these images.
1. What do you think they are disagreeing about?

2. How are they feeling?
3. What are they saying?
4. What happened in the end?
CHAPTER 3 3-51
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
ENGLISH SPEAKING HOLIDAYS
TEACHER NOTE: Decide if you want the students to do this alone or with a partner. Assign the holidays or
allow students to choose which holiday they want to research.
Research an English-speaking holiday. Give a presentation about the holiday, how the different countries
celebrate it, and anything interesting that you learned. Make sure to answer the following questions:
1. What is the holiday and country you researched?
2. On which day is the holiday celebrated?
3. Why is it celebrated, or why is it important enough to be a holiday?
4. When did it first become a holiday?
5. What do people do in this country to celebrate?
6. What is one interesting or unusual fact about this holiday?
7. Does your family or your culture have anything similar to this holiday?
Holidays in the United States Holidays in Australia Holidays in the United Kingdom Holidays in Canada
New Year’s Day New Year’s Day New Year’s Day New Year’s Day
Inauguration Day Australia Day Early May Victoria Day
Martin Luther King Jr. Day Canberra Day Spring Bank Holiday Canada Day
President’s Day Anzac Day Summer Bank Holiday Boxing Day
Memorial Day Reconciliation Day Boxing Day Labour Day
Independence Day Queen’s Birthday Thanksgiving
Labor Day Labour Day Remembrance Day
Halloween Boxing Day
Veteran’s Day
Thanksgiving Day

ONLINE INVITATION
TEACHER NOTE: Have the students write their email addresses down on five small sheets of paper. They can
hand them out to each other in order to be invited to the other celebrations.
With a partner, go online to an electronic invitation website (for example: evite.com) and create an
invitation for a celebration. Fill out all of the information and then “invite” people from your class. Don’t
forget to send it to your teacher as well. When you receive an invitation, RSVP if you can go to the party
and leave a comment as well.
3-52 CHAPTER 3
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
LISTENING 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen as two neighbors plan a neighborhood Halloween party. Choose the best answer for each
question based on what you hear.
Neighbor 1: It’s time to talk about our Neighborhood Halloween Block Party! Because Halloween falls on a
Sunday, I’d say we have the block party the Saturday before.
Neighbor 2: I don’t know. It’s always fun to do it on the exact day! What’s wrong with having it on Sunday?
Neighbor 1: Well, most of us have to work the next day. So, that makes cleaning up almost impossible. If we
do it on Saturday, we can actually enjoy the party and do the clean up together on Sunday.
Neighbor 2: I see your point. I guess I wasn’t thinking about that. Okay, let’s do it on Saturday then. I was
thinking we could have a theme this year, like zombies.
Neighbor 1: A theme? So, everyone has to dress up as a zombie? That’s no fun.
Neighbor 2: I disagree. We could have a prize for the Best Zombie Costume and Best Decorated House.
Neighbor 1: Oh, I like that idea! But, how about we just award the best costume and decorated house
without the theme? Think about all the little kids in the neighborhood. They might be super scared if
everyone is walking around like zombies!
Neighbor 2: Okay, so a prize but no theme. What about music? Should we have one loudspeaker in the
middle of the street that plays music all night?
Neighbor 1: That’s a great idea. But maybe not all night. Again, think about all the kids that go to bed at
some point. How about we play music until 9 p.m.?
Neighbor 2: Fine, I can live with that.
Neighbor 1: We should definitely have a spooky buffet with weird and scary looking food.
Neighbor 2: I disagree. Food should always look nice and delicious, not gross and nasty!
Neighbor 1: But it’s Halloween! Everything should be kind of weird and scary!
Neighbor 2: How about everything EXCEPT the food is scary? Or how about we have the dessert table
as the weird and scary food table, but the main buffet is all normal? I want people to actually eat the food!
Neighbor 1: Okay, let’s do that then. This is going to be great! I can’t wait!
1. The neighbors disagree often when planning 3. What do they agree about in regards
the Halloween party. What do they not argue about? to costumes?
A. the music A. prize for the best costume
B. the food B. all zombies
C. the location C. no zombies
D. the costumes D. no costumes
2. When are they going to have the party? 4. Why does the female neighbor not want music
A. Sunday evening all night?
B. Saturday evening A. too loud
C. Friday evening B. kids are sleeping
D. Sunday morning C. doesn’t like music
D. barking dogs
CHAPTER 3 3-53
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
MAD Multiple Choice
5. Why does the male neighbor not want a spooky 7. The male neighbor wants to have the party on
buffet? Sunday because he wants to have ___________.
A. too gross A. time to prepare
B. too expensive B. it on Halloween Day
C. too nasty C. off of work
D. both A and C D. both A and C
6. What do the neighbors never agree upon? 8. What kind of prize do they want to reward?
A. a zombie theme A. best costume
B. time B. best candy
C. day C. best house decoration
D. buffet D. both A and C
LISTENING 2
1. [After Father’s Day, there isn’t another holiday until Independence Day.]
2. [If it snows on New Year’s Day, we will go skiing.]
3. [They are the exact same age as my grandmother.]
4. [You sent her a birthday card, didn’t you?]
5. [They couldn’t have been in love if they fought so often.]
6. [How about you try eating healthier?]
GRAMMAR 1
Complete each sentence starter by writing a sentence using one of the conjunctions given. Rewrite the
complete sentence. Do not use a conjunction more than once: after, before, even if, once, until, while.
1. I will buy your present ______________________.
2. You can blow out the candles ______________________.
3. We need to make our costumes ______________________.
4. He won’t be able to come to the party ______________________.
5. The party will be outside ______________________.
GRAMMAR 2
MAD Multiple Choice
Read each sentence with a question tag. Then, choose the answer that is NOT a correct response.
1. You should invite your teachers to your graduation 2. They have not been married that long,
party, shouldn’t you? have they?
A. Yes, I should. A. No, they haven’t.
B. No, I shouldn’t invite them. B. Yes, they have.
C. Yes, the teachers will be at graduation. C. Yes, they haven’t.
3-54 CHAPTER 3
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
GRAMMAR 2 (Continued)
MAD Multiple Choice
3. You aren’t old enough to drive, are you? 7. We didn’t remember your anniversary last year, did we?
A. Yes, I am actually. A. No, you remembered, but they didn’t.
B. Yes, you are. B. Yes, you did remember.
C. No, I will be old enough next year. C. Yes, I forgot.
4. They are in love, aren’t they? 8. You will apologize to her, won’t you?
A. Yes, they are. A. Yes, I won’t apologize.
B. Yes, I believe they are. B. No, I didn’t do anything wrong.
C. Yes, they aren’t. C. Yes, I will say sorry as soon as I see her.
5. You don’t disagree with me, do you? 9. She isn’t a reliable friend, is she?
A. No, I disagree with you. A. No, she is never there when I need her.
B. Yes, I do disagree with you. B. No, we have a great friendship.
C. No, I don’t disagree with you. C. Yes, she is. She is always there for me.
6. I forgot to send a card for your birthday, didn’t I? 10. He didn’t say he was in love with you, did he?
A. Yes, you did forget. No worries. A. Yes, he didn’t.
B. No, you did forget. B. No, he didn’t.
C. No, you didn’t forget. C. Yes, he did.
READING
Read the conversation between Grayson and his dad. Write five things that he shouldn’t have done and
give a suggestion for each. Use different modals of past deduction when possible.
Grayson: Hi, Dad. Can I talk to you for a minute?
Dad: Sure, Son! What’s going on? Is this about your mother?
Grayson: It is. How did you know?
Dad: Well, I saw she was really upset earlier and thought maybe you two had a disagreement.
Grayson: Yes! I don’t even know what I did to upset her!
Dad: Why don’t you tell me what happened, and we’ll figure it out together.
Grayson: So, it all started this morning when mom asked me to help her with the laundry. She asked me to
take it to the basement. And I did! I threw it down the stairs for her. Then, I sat down for breakfast, but Mom
didn’t make waffles like she usually does. When I asked why she didn’t make me waffles, she said that she
had a busy morning, and I could make them myself.
Dad: Well, to be honest, Son, you are 17 years old. I also think you could actually make your own waffles.
Grayson: But why? That’s Mom’s job! I also told her that it was annoying to pack my lunches for school every
day. I never have enough time in the morning to shower and finish my homework. Well, anyway, I thought
everything would be better when I got home from school, but it just continued. I guess she got a phone call
from my teacher that I didn’t do my science homework again. Mom was really mad and told me I couldn’t go
anywhere until I finished all of my missing science work.
Dad: Your mom was right to tell you that. Homework and school are important.
Grayson: But, Dad! I had basketball practice, so after Mom left to go to the store, I drove to practice. I
thought she would be happy that I exercise and take my team seriously, but wow, she yelled at me when I
got home. She said she was worried because she didn’t know where I was. Then, she got mad all over again
about the late science work because I didn’t work on that.
Dad: Oh, Grayson. I see why your mother is furious with you and, in truth, she should be. Let me tell you why
and what you could have done better.
CHAPTER 3 3-55
1
3
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
WRITING
MAD Open Text
Read the magazine advice article “Ask Andy.” Mara is asking for advice about her best friend. Based on
what you read, type a response letter giving her advice on what she should do about this problem. Use
the common phrases you learned to offer friendly suggestions.
SPEAKING 1
MAD Open Recording
Say sentences that compare and contrast the two people. Use the alternative comparative forms given and
the information in the chart.
Name: Brad Peter
Birthdate: 2/18/1992 2/20/1993
Hair Color: blonde black
Height: 6 feet 4 inches 5 feet 10 inches
Weight: 210 pounds 190 pounds
confident, generous, outgoing, outgoing and confident, creative
Personality:
kind of patient with children and smart
Profession: teacher carpenter
1. almost 2. slightly 3. same 4. quite 5. a bit
SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Look at the vocabulary images from Section 2. Answer the questions about one of the images.
1. At which office would you prefer to work?
2. Why would you prefer to work there?
3. What is happening in that picture?
4. How are the people feeling?
5. What are some of their personality traits?
3-56 CHAPTER 3
4
1 CHAPTER FOUR
SCHOOL
VOCABULARY
Continuing Education ................................................. 4-4
In the Classroom ......................................................... 4-17
College Life ................................................................... 4-29
GRAMMAR
Using will for Prediction ........................................... 4-8
Future Continuous ...................................................... 4-11
Modals of Prediction .................................................. 4-21
Connecting Words: Cause & Effect ......................... 4-23
Review 1st Conditional ............................................... 4-32
2nd Conditional ........................................................... 4-35
CONVERSATION
Will you be free? .......................................................... 4-14
25 years from now... .................................................. 4-14
Cause and Effect .......................................................... 4-26
My first year in college ............................................... 4-26
If I... I would ................................................................... 4-38
Who studied what and where? ................................ 4-38
READING
Helpful Tips for College Applications ...................... 4-15
Online vs. Face-to-Face Learning ............................ 4-27
Letter of Intent ............................................................. 4-40
LET’S TALK!
Video - Let’s talk about college and classes! ......... 4-42
LEARNING OBJECTIVES Interviews - Let’s talk about college life! ................. 4-44
• discuss future education plans.

REVIEW & ASSESSMENT
• make predictions about future events.
Review ............................................................................ 4-46
• use cause and effect connecting words. Projects .......................................................................... 4-50
Assessment ................................................................... 4-51
• understand differences of 1st & 2nd conditional.
INTRODUCTION 4-1
41
THE UNITED KINGDOM

CULTURE IN THE UK
WALES Known For:
Celtic and Welsh culture
Welsh language
Conwy Castle
Cardiff Castle
Pembroke Castle
Snowdonia National Park
St. David’s Cathedral
Wales Coast Path
WALES Pontcysyllte Aqueduct
Millennium Stadium
Cathedrals
Rugby
Golf
Capital: Cardiff Famous People:
Other Major Cities: Swansea, Newport Roald Dahl
Population: 3.099 million (2015) Anthony Hopkins
Area: 8,023 mi² (square miles) Catherine Zeta-Jones
Aneurin Bevan
John Rhys-Davies
Flag: Dylan Thomas
Bertrand Russell
Cardiff Castle Millenium Stadium Anthony Hopkins Conwy Castle Rugby St. Davids Cathedral

1. Wales is known for foods such as Glamorgan sausage, Welsh cakes, laverbread,
Welsh crempog, and Welsh rarebit. Have you heard of any of these foods? Look
up two traditional Welsh dishes and read how to make them. Do you make some
thing similar in your culture? Would you like to try any of these foods? Discuss
what you learn as a class.
2. Roald Dahl is a famous writer and poet whose works include Charlie and the
Chocolate Factory, James and the Giant Peach, The BFG, Fantastic Mr. Fox,
Matilda, and many more. Search the web for a story written by Roald Dahl and
read a description about it. What type of story is it? Have you read that story
yourself, or have you seen a movie about that story?
4-2 INTRODUCTION
1
4
VOCABULARY
SECTION 1 VOCABULARY: Continuing Education
Applying to College Picking Classes
to apply / applied / applied the instructions to be interested in * the placement exam
the application the personal information the course the program
to be accepted; to get into * to pick the degree to require
the college to volunteer the elective to sign up
the technical college the internship
the university to major (in)
to complete; to fill out the major
to decide
SECTION 2 VOCABULARY: In the Classroom

Professors and the Classroom Students and the Classroom Other Words and Phrases
to assign to drop / dropped / dropped to be due * the paper

the assignment to fail the due date the semester
to cancel the highlighter challenging
to expect to pass the essay
the expectation the pencil case the final exam (finals)
the lesson to take notes * the laboratory (lab)
the professor the level
the instructor beginner
the teaching assistant (TA) intermediate
to teach / taught / taught advanced
SECTION 3 VOCABULARY: College Life

Living on Campus Learning a Foreign Language Other Words and Phrases
the campus to communicate confused
the dormitory (dorm) the dictionary confusing
the roommate fluent curious
Studying Abroad foreign disappointed

to mean / meant / meant disappointing
the document
the meaning nervous
the embassy
to pronounce
the exchange student
the pronunciation
to study abroad / studied / studied
to translate
the visa
the tutor
to understand / understood / understood
to misunderstand *
INTRODUCTION 4-3
1
4
VOCABULARY
CONTINUING EDUCATION

MAD Open Recording


MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text
LANGUAGE TIP
The many uses of “to fill”
The verb “to fill” is used in a few different ways. If you are asked to fill something in or fill something out,
this means to write or type information. If you are asked to fill something up, that means you should make
something full. It is easy to make a mistake using these words, so look at the following uses:
fill in: forms, applications, documents, worksheets, information, details, blanks
fill out: forms, applications, documents, worksheets, information
fill up: tank of gas, water bottle
4-4 SECTION 1
1
4
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. Have you started writing your college essay yet?
2. I will probably sign up for some business courses.
3. That university is known for their engineering program.
4. She might be volunteering at the hospital this weekend.
5. Which electives are you interested in taking?
6. The placement test will tell you which English class to take.
7. Is he going to college with anyone he knows?
8. Don’t forget to read all of the instructions.
9. Did you fill in all of your personal information?
10. Where did you decide to apply?
Listen to the sentences using Section 1 Vocabulary. Type each one as you hear it.
1. [In which major are you interested?]
2. [Are you signing up for any electives?]
3. [I will apply for an internship before I graduate.]
4. [Remember to read the instructions carefully.]
5. [She needs to fill out the applications by Friday.]
6. [Have you registered for classes yet?]
7. [They require a lot of volunteer hours.]
8. [When do you have to pick your college?]
9. [Did you decide when you will take the placement test?]
10. [He will go to a technical college first.]

Sharon will be applying to colleges soon. Read her story, and fill in each blank with the correct vocabulary
word from the word bank.
an essay electives college worried placement exam
degree required personal information technical course
interested application decided accepted to major
I can’t believe that it is time for me to start thinking about applying to [college]. I have [decided] to apply
to a university instead of a [technical] college because I want [to major] in education. I am [interested]
in getting a teaching [degree]. I would love to teach in an elementary school. The first part of the college
[application] I need to complete is all my [personal information]. Then, I have to write [an essay]. I’m not
sure what the topic is going to be, but I am not [worried] about it. I love to write! Once I am [accepted] to a
college, then I have to take a [placement exam] so I can be put into the right [course] levels. Finally, I will be
able to register for the [required] courses as well as some fun [electives]. I am so excited to see where I will
be going!
SECTION 1 4-5
1
4
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Listen to two friends discussing their plans after high school. Place each phrase under the correct person.
Whitney: Hi, Sasha. How are you?

Sasha: Hi, Whitney. I’m good. A little nervous. I think I need to start applying to colleges soon, but I don’t even
know what I really want to do after high school. Do you know what you want to do?
Whitney: I do, actually. I read online about a lot of colleges and even took tours of some already in the area.
I think a technical college is the best fit for me. It is much cheaper than the 4-year colleges I looked at.
Sasha: Oh, interesting. I thought you wanted to be a veterinarian? Wouldn’t only a regular college offer that?
Whitney: Yeah, I did. It’s too many years of school for me. I decided I’d rather be a vet technician. The courses
at the technical college are more career focused. Plus, I can be part time, and they have a lot of flexible times
for courses. I like my dog-walking job a lot, and I want to still do that while I take classes.
Sasha: And then that will help pay for college, too. Good idea! I will be visiting five colleges and universities
these next two months. Maybe that will help me decide. Most are not close to home though.
Whitney: Well, you have amazing grades. All your test scores are great, too! You will probably be accepted into
any program at any college. I bet if you apply to multiple colleges and universities, you could pick where you
want to go and then see which majors they have there. You should fill out applications for any school you think
you would like and decide later, depending on where you get accepted.
Sasha: Hmm, that’s a good idea. I have an internship at my uncle’s company to see if I am interested in
becoming a lawyer. If I like it, maybe I will go to a college with a good law program.
Sasha Whitney
college or university technical college
will be touring has toured
undecided vet technician
good test scores worried about money
has an internship has a job
CULTURAL NOTE
GPA
A GPA is the Grade Point Average of a student throughout school. If a college, university, or trade school
requires a specific GPA, they are referring to the average grade from all classes you took in high school.
A 4.0 (pronounced “four point oh”) means a student had an A average, also called “straight A’s.” A 3.0 means
a student received all B’s, a 2.0 means a student received all C’s, and a 1.0 means a student received all D’s as
letter grades. Students receive GPAs in middle school, high school, and college.
Common GPA scale in the U.S.A. Common GPA scale in Britain.
Letter Grade GPA % Letter Grade GPA % UK CLASS UK %
A+ 4.3 100+ C+ 2.3 77-79 First 70-100
A 4.0 94-100 C 2.0 73-76 Upper Second 60-69
A- 3.7 90-93 C- 1.7 70-72 Lower Second 54-59
B+ 3.3 87-89 D+ 1.3 67-69 Third 42-53
B 3.0 83-86 D 1.0 63-66 Pass 38-41
B- 2.7 80-82 D- 0.7 60-62 Fail 0-37
% = percentage F 0.0 0-59
4-6 SECTION 1
1
4
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Answer each question based on Erin’s university application.
Possible answers:
1. When does Erin graduate? June 8th, 2019
2. In which major is she interested? Nursing
3. Which grade point average (GPA) is better:
her overall or her semester GPA? her overall GPA
4. What is her total SAT score of Math and Writing together? 1390
5. Is she finished with her application? No, she is not finished.
6. Look at one of her volunteer activities.
How long did she volunteer there? since 2015 or for 2 years
SECTION 1 4-7
1
4
GRAMMAR
USING “WILL” FOR PREDICTION
The future tense is used to talk about facts or things you are certain will happen in the future, but it can also be
used to make predictions.
Here are some common phrases that are often used to make predictions:
think + will I think I will receive my degree in four years.
not think + will She does not think she’ll major in education.
bet + will / won’t I bet you will be accepted.
be sure + will / won’t He’s sure she won’t go to a technical college.
doubt that + will I doubt that I’ll volunteer this Saturday.
*If you need to review the grammar rules from previous levels, go to the Future Tense chart.

MAD Sentence Jumble
Two friends are trying to predict which university their friend Lindsay will attend. Put the conversation in the
correct order.
B. Tyler: Lindsay is having a really hard time deciding on a university to go to.
F. Brynn: I know. She likes both of them, but one is in state and the other is out of state.
E. Tyler: Yeah, if she decides to go out of state, I bet she will miss her family.
I. Brynn: Oh, I’m sure she will miss them a lot. So, what do you think?
H. Tyler: I doubt that she will go out of state because of that.
C. Brynn: I disagree. I’m sure she’ll go out of state because she loves that university.
G. Tyler: How can you be so sure?
D. Brynn: Well, I think she’ll want to learn how to become more independent.
J. Tyler: That’s true. If she lives out of state, she won’t be able to be so dependent.
A. Brynn: It will be interesting to see what she decides.
CULTURAL NOTE
College/University vs. Trade School
A trade school is also known as a vocational school or a technical college, and these institutions offer programs
to prepare you for a specific career. Some classes unrelated to the field you are pursuing may be required;
however, classes are usually focused on the job you are learning to do. These programs are often 2-year
degrees, so it usually costs less money to graduate from a trade school. Some career paths to pursue after
graduating from a trade school include plumber, technician, electrician, web developer, construction manager,
computer programmer, or mechanic.
Going to a 4-year college or university without a scholarship is much more expensive than a shorter program,
so many students graduate with little to no money or with loans they had to take out to pay for school. These
programs require that you take some classes unrelated to your field to give you a more well-rounded or
complete education. There are many professions that prefer that you have a bachelor’s degree from a 4-year
college or university in order to apply for the job.
4-8 SECTION 1
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Fill in each blank with the correct prediction phrase from the word bank.
bet sure doesn’t think doubts sure
doubt don’t think bet sure bet
1. Claire is a senior in high school, and I’m [sure] she’ll be applying to many schools.
2. Brian has bad grades in school. I [doubt] that he will go to one of the country’s best colleges.
3. Grace wants to be a dental assistant. I [bet] she’ll go to a technical college.
4. He [doesn’t think] he’ll get the internship, does he?
5. She studied really hard for the placement exam. She’s [sure] she will do well.
6. I [bet] it will take a long time to fill out a college application.
7. Are you [sure] you want to major in business?
8. I [don’t think] I’m going to a university out of state because it is too far away from home.
9. I [bet] you’ll be accepted to your favorite college. You’re so smart!
10. He [doubts] that he’ll be able to decide which volunteer program to join. They are all so interesting!

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the best prediction for each situation.
1. Chelsea just graduated from high school.
A. I bet she’ll apply for college. B. I doubt she’ll graduate high school.
2. Jeff wants to major in physics.
A. I don’t think he’ll like science. B. I’m sure he’ll enroll in math classes.
3. Lucy scored 100% on her placement test.
A. I think she’ll take high level classes. B. I bet she’ll take a few electives.
4. Claudia wants to be an electrician.
A. I doubt she’ll go to a technical college. B. I bet she’ll go to a technical college.
5. Hugo works 40 hours/week and wants to go to a university.
A. I doubt he’ll take fewer than 6 courses. B. I bet he’ll only take two courses.
6. Jake wants to become a mechanic.
A. I bet he’ll go to a university. B. I think he’ll apply to a technical college.
7. Maggie is going to a college in a different state.
A. I think her parents will miss her. B. I’m sure she will live at home.
8. Stacey is interested in going to a university.
A. I bet she will fill out applications. B. I doubt she will take the placement test.
SECTION 1 4-9
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Listen to the person describe problems he has. Make a prediction about what he will do using one of these
phrases: think, not think, bet, doubt that, be sure. Teachers, answers may vary.
For example: You hear: This weekend is Halloween, and I don’t have a costume yet.
You type: I’m sure he’ll find one in a store.
Problem 1: I’m so tired! I was working on my science project all night.
Problem 2: My placement exam is today, and I didn’t study a lot.
Problem 3: I was cycling around in the sun all morning. I’m so thirsty!
Problem 4: I’m having a hard time deciding on a major.
Problem 5: Oh no! My phone died, and I need to call my mom.
Problem 6: I didn’t eat lunch because I had to finish my history exam.
Problem 7: After listening to the teacher talk for three hours, I’ve got a headache!
Problem 8: I need to apply for an internship, but I don’t know how.

MAD Open Recording
Read each situation. For each one, say one positive and one negative prediction using the given phrases.
Here are the phrases for prediction that you should use: think, not think, bet, be sure, doubt that.
1. It’s 4 a.m., and Johnny is still studying for his 8 a.m. final.
A. stay up all night B. pass his exam
2. Raquel loves her hometown. She was accepted by two colleges: Vermilion College (10 miles from home) and
Edgewood College (300 miles from home).
A. go to Vermilion College B. go to Edgewood College
3. Jess has to sign up for an elective course. Rock climbing is once a week, Mondays at 4 p.m. Advanced algebra
is five times a week at 6 a.m.
A. pick rock climbing B. pick advanced algebra
4. Kate needs to decide on a volunteer program. She is interested in music.
A. volunteer at a radio station B. volunteer at a park
5. Matt goes to a technical college, but he doesn’t like it very much.
A. stay at the technical college B. go to a university
6. Nick needs to write a personal essay for his college application.
A. write about planes B. discuss his interests and future plans
4-10 SECTION 1
1
4
GRAMMAR
FUTURE CONTINUOUS
Use the future continuous tense to talk about an unfinished action that will be taking place in the future.
Use future continuous to: Examples
imagine continuing an action in the future. By September, I will be studying at the university.
express continuing action you are certain will

I will be taking final exams at the end of the month.
happen in the future.
He will be volunteering at the community center next year,
guess continuing events in the future.
won’t he?
Formation of the future continuous tense
Affirmative
Subject + will be + present participle + other info
The professor will be lecturing on that topic tomorrow.
Negative
Subject + will not (won’t) be + present participle + other info
The professor will not be lecturing on that topic tomorrow.
The professor won’t be lecturing on that topic tomorrow.
Interrogative
Will + subject + be + present participle + other info
Will the professor be lecturing on that topic tomorrow?
Won’t the professor be lecturing on that topic tomorrow?
Using the adverb still with the future continuous: Examples
to show that an action has already started and you I will still be writing this paper at midnight tonight!
expect it to continue in the future.
The professor will still be lecturing on this same topic next
week.
Note: Do not use future continuous tense with time clauses beginning with subordinating conjunctions such as
after, before, once, when, while, until. Use present continuous instead.
While I will be writing my paper, he will be While I am writing mySECTION 3 be

paper, he will
making dinner. making dinner.
SECTION 1 4-11
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if each statement is in the present continuous, past continuous, or future continuous.
1. When I was in college, I was volunteering on campus often.
A. past continuous B. present continuous C. future continuous
2. Is your favorite professor teaching that course?
3. Next fall, I will still be doing an internship at the art studio.
4. Last year at this time, my friends and I were filling out our college applications.
5. Where will you be going to college next year?
6. I am deciding on which courses I want to sign up for this coming semester.
7. In five months, we will be graduating from college!
8. Which electives were you taking last semester?
9. My friends and I will be traveling to Costa Rica for winter break.
10. Are you thinking you want to go to a college near or far from your home?

Change each future tense sentence to one that uses the future continuous. Be careful with capitalization and
punctuation.
1. I will take my placement test this Thursday. [I will be taking my placement test this Thursday.]
2. She will major in art history. [She will be majoring in art history.]
3. He will get a degree in engineering. [He will be getting a degree in engineering.]
4. What will you do after you graduate? [What will you be doing after you graduate?]
5. We’ll study for five hours tonight. [We’ll be studying for five hours tonight.]
6. I will volunteer at a hospital in my free time. [I will be volunteering at a hospital in my free time.]
7. Will you apply for an internship? [Will you be applying for an internship?]
8. Which way will you take to the university? [Which way will you be taking to the university?]
9. She’ll complete her applications by Monday. [She’ll be completing her applications by Monday.]
10. How many electives will you sign up for in the fall? [How many electives will you be signing up for in
the fall?]

4-12 SECTION 1
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
Volunteering
High school students will often participate in clubs, sports, and volunteer organizations that they think can
help them get accepted into college. There are even clubs that require students to volunteer a certain
number of hours throughout the year to be able to remain in the club. In college application essays,
students write about experiences and activities that have helped them become the people they are today.
Volunteering is a good way to show that someone is kind, reliable, helpful, and passionate. However, not
everyone who volunteers does so to help their chances of getting into college. Volunteering can be a great
way to make new friends, help others, and learn more about problems or issues in your community.

MAD Multiple Choice
Look at the chart that shows what each person will be doing next year. Then, listen to each statement,
and decide if each one is true or false.
Going to Doing an Graduating from Playing a
Getting married Volunteering
technical college internship college sport
Jenny x x x
Paul x x x
Megan x x x
1. Jenny will be going to a technical college. A. True B. False
2. Megan and Jenny will be getting married. A. True B. False
3. Paul and Jenny will be graduating from college. A. True B. False
4. Paul will be getting married. A. True B. False
5. Megan will not be doing an internship. A. True B. False
6. Jenny and Megan will be volunteering. A. True B. False
7. Megan will be playing a sport and getting married. A. True B. False
8. Paul will not be doing an internship. A. True B. False
9. Megan will be graduating from college. A. True B. False
10. Jenny will not be graduating. A. True B. False

MAD Open Recording
Look at each image, and say what the person/people will be doing based on what you see.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
SECTION 1 4-13
1
4
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 4.1.19 - Will you be free?
1. Choose five of the following activities, and put them anywhere on your schedule for next week.
Go to sleep Complete internship application Watch championship baseball game
Take a shower Celebrate parents’ anniversary Volunteer with animals
Rock climb Attend a wedding March in a parade
Bike ride Watch fireworks Practice piano
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

9:00 a.m.
3:00 p.m.
9:00 p.m.
2. You and a partner need to work on an essay, go to the movies, study for your final exam, and play
soccer together next week. Ask questions in the future tense to find out when your partner will be free.
If you’re busy when your partner want to meet, tell him/her what you’ll be doing at that time using
the future continuous tense. When you find a time that’s free for both of you, add the activity to your
schedule.
For example:
Partner 1: Will you be free on Thursday at 3:00 to work on our essay?
Partner 2: No, sorry, I’ll be marching in the parade. How about Monday at 9:00 a.m.?
Partner 1: I’ll be rock climbing. Will you be busy at 3:00 on Monday?
Partner 2: No, I’ll be free to work on our essay then.
ACTIVITY 4.1.20 - 25 years from now...

Write three predictions about the life of each partner in your group 25 years from now in the given
categories. Without telling the group who your prediction is for, read all three of your predictions for each
student out loud. Let the other students in your group guess who your predictions describe.
For example: You read: Family: You write: I bet this person will be married and have 4 kids.
***Don’t say the name when you read your answers!
Partner 1: ________________________ Partner 2: ________________________ Partner 3: ________________________
Career: Appearance: Home:
Hobbies: Family: Travel:
Pets: Money: Friends:
4-14 SECTION 1
1
4
READING
HELPFUL TIPS FOR COLLEGE APPLICATIONS
SECTION 1 4-15
1
4
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct meaning for each pink word in the reading.
1. challenging
A. difficult or hard to do B. surprising
2. consider
A. opposite of prosider B. think carefully about something
3. impressed
A. to be annoyed or bored B. to think someone did a fantastic job
4. on time
A. to do something when it should be done B. doing something one time
5. necessary
A. important; needs to be done B. to be ready to do something
6. attach
A. to include or add to something B. to forget to do something
7. double check
A. check something again; check a second time B. write something twice; make a copy

Fill in each blank with the correct missing information from the graph in the reading. Type the number;
don’t spell it out. Capitalize words in the blanks if they are capitalized in the graph.
1. [92] people want to go to college to get a good job.
2. Only 12 people checked “[Make a difference]”.
3. Less than 10 people feel like their [parents] make them go to college.
4. The second highest ranking was ”[Improve job opportunities]”.
5. “Learn more about a subject” was checked [51] times.
6. There are [4] categories that were checked less than 20 times.
7. [4] categories got checked more than 70 times each.

MAD Open Recording
Answer the questions about yourself in complete sentences.
1. Are you planning on going to college? Have you gone to college?
2. If yes, what are some reasons you chose to go to college? If no, why not?
3. Are those reasons similar or different from the ones mentioned in the graph?
4. Share any tips you think would be helpful to someone filling out a college application.
4-16 SECTION 1
1
4
VOCABULARY
IN THE CLASSROOM

MAD Open Recording
Say as much as possible about the Section 2 Vocabulary picture. Who do you think is in the picture? What
do you think they are doing? What do you see on the table?


MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text
SECTION 2 4-17
1
4
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. I signed up for the beginner level English course. 6. Is our paper due before semester break?
2. Can I use your highlighter? 7. He needs to drop the course or he may fail.
3. The professor usually teaches most of his classes. 8. Does that course have a laboratory hour, too?
4. Sometimes a teaching assistant will teach a few 9. Even though I studied, I did not pass the class.
of the easier lessons. 10. Can she use your notes from the class she
5. Because it was too challenging, she dropped the missed?
advanced course.
1. [Don’t forget the new project due date.] 6. [You need to take better notes.]
2. [When will we take our final exam?] 7. [My art professor has high expectations.]
3. [She lost her pencil case yesterday.] 8. [Will he ever cancel a class?]
4. [Do you have the challenging professor?] 9. [I can’t wait for semester break.]
5. [I can’t fail this class or I won’t graduate.] 10. [She always assigns a paper over break.]
Type a question that could lead to the answer given.
Possible answers:
1. Question: In which level English is she?
Answer: She is in beginner English.
2. Question: How was the assignment?
Answer: It was a really challenging assignment.
3. Question: Why did he cancel class?
Answer: He was too sick to teach.
4. Question: When are you taking intermediate English?
Answer: I’m taking intermediate English second semester.
5. Question: Did you pass your finals?
Answer: Yes, I passed my finals.
6. Question: What do I need to bring to class tomorrow?
Answer: You need to bring a highlighter and a notebook tomorrow.
7. Question: How often do you have to take notes in his class?
Answer: I have to take notes a lot in his class.
8. Question: Does she have high expectations?
Answer: Yes, she has really high expectations.
9. Question: When is the project due?
Answer: The project due date is next Wednesday.
10. Question: Where do you put your pencils?
Answer: I put my pencils in a pencil case.
4-18 SECTION 2
1
4
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match - Fill-in-the-Chart
Listen to the conversation. Then, fill in each blank in the chart based on what you hear. The answers will
be only one word. Capitalize the professors’ names but nothing else.
James: Hi, Nicole. Can you believe that we are in our second year of college already?
Nicole: Hi, James. No, I can’t believe it. The time seems to be flying by.
James: I know. Did you decide on your major yet?
Nicole: I am thinking I’ll major in business, but I’m not sure. What about you?
James: I’m going to major in music because I want to be a music teacher. I absolutely love working with kids!
Are you taking another English course this semester?
Nicole: Yes, I’m in the advanced level with Professor Brown. What about you?
James: I am taking an English class, too. However, I am in the intermediate level with Professor Rivers. What
do you think of Professor Brown’s class?
Nicole: I think the class is really challenging, but he makes it so interesting. How is Professor Rivers’ class?
James: Well, she is really nice, but the class itself is boring.
Nicole: That’s too bad. Are you taking an elective that you find interesting?
James: Yes, I am taking a painting class, and it is my absolute favorite part of my schedule. You?
Nicole: I’m also taking an elective that I really enjoy- photography. It is such a nice break from my challenging
classes.
James: I’m sure it is. Well, it was so nice talking with you, but I can’t be late for class.
Nicole: I have to get to class as well. We will have to get together soon!
James: Definitely. I’ll call you next week.
Nicole: Great! Bye.
James: See you later!
James Nicole
Major music business
English level intermediate advanced
Characteristic of teacher nice interesting
Opinion about the class boring challenging
Favorite elective painting photography
CULTURAL NOTE
English in the Classroom
Teachers have a lot of material they need to teach, so they will often use commands or requests to get their
students back on task. If a few students are talking to each other when they should be listening, the teacher
might say, “Pay attention!” Before giving a test, the teacher might tell his or her students, “Raise your hand if
you have a question,” and “Eyes on your own paper.” If a student fills out a worksheet incorrectly, the teacher
may say, “Cross it out and do it over.” As the class plays a game, the teacher may tell students to play fairly and
say, “No cheating!”
Can you think of other commands your teacher might give to keep you focused in class?
SECTION 2 4-19
1
4
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
Look at Rob’s class schedule for his first semester at college. Listen to each question. Then, respond in the
pauses provided using complete sentences. Click “Done” to move on to the next question.
FALL SEMESTER
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday
Science -
8:00 a.m.- Science - Chemistry Science - Chemistry Science - Chemistry
Chemistry Lab
8:50 a.m. Professor Davis Professor Davis Professor Davis
Professor Davis
Intermediate - Intermediate - Intermediate -
9:00 a.m.-
French French French
9:50 a.m.
Madame Wilson Madame Wilson Madame Wilson
11:00 a.m.- Math - Algebra Math - Algebra

11:50 a.m. Professor Martin Professor Martin
European History European History European History

1:00 p.m.-
Professor Gray Professor Gray Professor Gray
1:50 p.m.
TA - Austin Powell TA - Austin Powell TA - Austin Powell
Beginner Beginner
3:00 p.m.-
Snowboarding Snowboarding
3:50 p.m.
Mr. Clark Mr. Clark
Possible answers:
1. How many classes does Rob have on Thursdays? Rob has two classes.
2. What time does Beginner Snowboarding end? It ends at 3:50 p.m.
3. On which day does he have a Chemistry lab? He has a lab on Fridays.
4. For which class is there a teaching assistant? There is a TA for European History.
5. In which semester is he taking these classes? These classes are in his fall semester.
6. Which language is he studying? He is studying French.
7. Who is his professor for Chemistry? Professor Davis is the professor.
8. What time does Math start? It starts at 11 in the morning.
CULTURAL NOTE
The Rising Price of College
The price of college around the world differs greatly. Some countries charge students thousands of dollars
each semester to enroll in classes. In other countries, it may only cost a few hundred dollars each semester.
And there are even countries that don’t require students to pay anything at all.
Most English speaking countries have seen an increase in the price of college, which is often difficult for
families to pay. In the U.S., students who study in their home states usually receive a discounted price for
college. Plus, students who are able to live at home and study nearby will save money by not having to pay for
on-campus housing. Living on campus is often required for the first one or two years of college.
Earning scholarships is an extremely helpful way for students to pay for college; however, not everyone is able
to earn a scholarship. Having a lot of volunteer hours, good grades, and involvement in clubs are all necessary
to receive a scholarship or two.
4-20 SECTION 2
1
4
GRAMMAR
MODALS OF PREDICTION
May and might are modal verbs that express possibility. They can refer to the present or the future. May and
might can be used interchangeably in most situations. Might is more informal and used more commonly in
conversation.
Use may and might to: Examples
express a present or future possibility She may volunteer at the university next week.
Subject + may/might + verb + other She might volunteer at the university next week.
The professor may have required an essay last year.

talk about things that were possible in the past
The professor might have required an essay last year.
Subject + may/might + have + past participle + other
ask for permission (Question) May I pick two electives in this program?
May/Might + subject + verb + other Might I pick two electives in this program?
Note: Might can be used to request permission, but it is considered an old-fashioned usage.
Conjugate modal verbs: Examples
I may apply next year.

May and might are modal verbs, so they do not change She may apply next year.
form in the 3rd person. I might apply next year.
She might apply next year.
Will and Probably

Use the auxiliary verb “will” together with the adverb “probably” to show that something in the future is not
certain. Place the adverb after the auxiliary verb for positive statements.
Examples Meanings
I will apply next year. You are certain that you will apply.
I will not apply next year. You are certain that you will not apply.
I will probably apply next year. You are more likely to apply.
I will probably not apply next year. You are more likely not to apply.
CULTURAL NOTE
Professor vs. TA
As a student in college, university, or trade school, you may learn from a professor or a teaching assistant.
A professor can be someone with a master’s degree (MA), which is earned after a bachelor’s degree (B.A.),
or a doctoral degree (PhD), which is the highest degree one can earn. Professors sometimes have their own
projects to work on, such as research in a lab for academic papers that they write. Therefore, they are very
busy and often receive help from teaching assistants, also known as TAs. TAs are students who are pursuing
a master’s or doctoral degree but have not yet completed their degrees. They work closely with professors to
assist them with their research, help them teach their classes, lead tutoring sessions or labs, and are available
to help students who have questions outside of class.
SECTION 2 4-21
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Word Jumble
1. Cory and I might take advanced English this semester.
2. You may apply to a challenging university.
3. Will they probably not go to the same college as you?
4. The professor will probably have high expectations.
5. Why might your parents help you pay for college?
6. I might not finish my paper by the due date.
7. May she drop one of her courses?
8. Our professor may cancel class because he is sick.
9. Might our TA take us to the language lab today?

MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to each scenario. Then, choose the correct prediction based on what you hear.
1. Molly just graduated from college. 5. Our professor, Dr. Massa, is sick with a cold.
A. She might go to high school. A. She may cancel class.
B. She might apply for a job. B. She may register for classes.
C. She might sign up for courses. C. Both A and B
2. I signed up for the beginner level 101 English 6. There is a snowstorm and really bad weather.
course at a large university. No one should be on the roads. Class is canceled.
A. You will probably teach English. A. We might have a paper to do at home.
B. You will probably learn French. B. We might pass the class.
C. A TA will probably help teach your course. C. We might take notes in class.
3. Joe signed up for an intermediate Japanese course. 7. This is Craig’s last year of college.
A. He may need a calculator. A. He might get a job.
B. He may take advanced Japanese next. B. He might apply for an internship.
C. He may be interested in China. C. Both A and B
4. The language lab instructor gave us an assignment 8. Alicia is interested in science and medicine.
at the beginning of class. A. She will probably major in programming.
A. I may drop the class. B. She will probably use a language lab.
B. I may fail the class. C. She will probably volunteer at a veterinarian
C. It may be due at the end of class. clinic.

For each word, type a sentence explaining why you may/might need or will probably need to bring it to
class. For example: You read: eraser You type: I may have to erase an answer.
1. pencil case 2. highlighter 3. helmet 4. jersey 5. laptop
6. cell phone 7. water 8. essay 9. notebook 10. calculator
4-22 SECTION 2
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Read each sentence, and say what each person might, may, and will probably do next.
1. Shane just graduated from college.
2. Bella applied to many colleges and doesn’t know where she is going yet.
3. Thomas couldn’t get into all of his required courses.
4. Karen has a basketball game in an hour.
5. Eddie is studying abroad in Spain and leaves in two days.
6. Amanda needs to write her personal essay and doesn’t know where to start.

CONNECTING WORDS: CAUSE & EFFECT
A cause and effect relationship expresses that one situation caused another situation to happen. To show this
relationship, you will have two ideas in your sentence: one to express the cause and one to express the effect.
Formation of Cause and Effect Relationships
Showing cause using “because of”

Put the connecting word before the idea that shows the cause.
Idea 1 (effect) + because/because of + Idea 2 (cause) *No punctuation needed
Use “because” before clauses Example
Effect - I couldn’t finish my assignment.
I couldn’t finish the assignment because I didn’t have my notes.
Cause - I didn’t have my notes.
Use “because of” before nouns Example
Effect - The student passed the class. The student passed the class because of his great final exam
Cause - his great final exam grade grade.
Showing effect using “so” or “therefore”
Put the connecting word before the idea that shows the effect.
Idea 1 (cause) + so/therefore + Idea 2 (effect) *Include punctuation
Use “therefore/so” before clauses Examples
Cause - I didn’t have my notes.
I didn’t have my notes, so I couldn’t finish the assignment.
Effect - I couldn’t finish the assignment.
Cause - He had a great final exam grade. He had a great final exam grade. Therefore, he passed the class.
Effect - He passed the class. He had a great final exam grade; therefore, he passed the class.
SECTION 2 4-23
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if the words marked between the two asterisks (*) are the cause or the effect.
1. Jesse isn’t taking notes because *he forgot his pencil*.
A. cause B. effect
2. *Brad is in the advanced class* because of his high test score.
A. cause B. effect
3. *Jennifer dropped her math class*; therefore, she can’t graduate this year.
A. cause B. effect
4. *The professor doesn’t like giving final exams*, so he assigns his students a paper.
A. cause B. effect
5. Because the professor has the flu, *the TA will be teaching this week*.
A. cause B. effect
6. It snowed a lot last night, so *class has been canceled*.
A. cause B. effect
7. *I failed every exam;* therefore, I didn’t pass the course.
A. cause B. effect
8. *We are getting together to work this weekend* because the project due date is Monday.
A. cause B. effect
9. Because of my love of writing, *I’m going to major in journalism*.
A. cause B. effect
10. *The professor has high expectations*, so his class is very challenging.
A. cause B. effect

MAD Text Match
1. I’m only passing the class F. because of my helpful TA.
2. I missed the due date of my paper; D. therefore, I’m going to get a low grade.
3. I’m going to drop this class, J. so I need to sign up for a new one.
4. I’m going to stay home G. because I don’t feel well.
5. I passed the beginner level, I. so I’m going to take intermediate next semester.
6. I’m going on vacation now; B. therefore, we can talk when I come home.
7. My friend took notes for me E. because I missed class when I was sick.
8. I’m in Advanced Chinese H. because of my high placement exam score.
9. I’m interested in becoming a pilot; A. therefore, I’m going to do an internship.
10. My finals are next week, C. so I’m going to be studying a lot.
4-24 SECTION 2
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
For 1-5, complete each sentence with a statement to show an effect.
For 6-10, complete each sentence with a statement to show a cause.
For example:
You read: I’d like to learn more before I get a job; therefore,…
You type: I’d like to learn more before I get a job; therefore, I’m going to apply for an internship.
1. Our partner project is due on Monday, so...
2. My math professor has high expectations; therefore,...
3. … because class was canceled.
4. I am interested in languages; therefore,...
5. ...because of my placement test score.
6. …therefore, I’m going to major in nursing.

7. I failed my final exam because...
8. ...so I am going to apply to a technical college.
9. I am going to drop that course because of...
10. ...therefore, I know that I will get into my favorite university.

MAD Open Recording
For each image, say a cause/effect statement using one of the following connecting words: because,
because of, so, therefore.
1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8.
SECTION 2 4-25
1
4
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 4.2.18 - Cause and Effect
First, write four causes in your chart. With your first partner, take turns reading the causes that you each
wrote down and then coming up with an effect for each cause. Fill in the answers as he/she says the
effects to your causes. When you both have said your four causes and told your partner four effects for
their causes, you will switch partners. Repeat the activity with your second partner.
ACTIVITY 4.2.19 - My first year in college

Look at Peter Fox’s transcript from his first

year in college. You and your partner each
have half of the information. Ask your
partner questions to fill in the missing
information.
ACTIVITY 4.2.20 - READ, LISTEN, & WRITE

Listen to the questions about Peter Fox’s transcript. Fill in each blank with the correct answer. The answers
are either one or two words. Capitalize the first letter for each blank.
1. What was Peter’s GPA for first semester? [3.06]
2. In which semester did he have a higher GPA? [Spring]
3. What profession do you think Peter wants to do? [Computer programmer]
4. Which foreign language did Peter take? [French]
5. Which class was challenging for Peter? [Calculus 1]
6. Which class did he drop? [Calculus 2]
7. What is the name of the TA for his Beginner Computer Programming Lab? [Herriges]
8. At what time did his Communication class end? [12:30]
9. What grade did he get the second time he took Calculus 1? [C]
10. Who was his teacher for Calculus 1 the first time he took it? [Jensen]
4-26 SECTION 2
1
4
READING
ONLINE vs. FACE-TO-FACE LEARNING
SECTION 2 4-27
1
4
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to each statement. Then, decide if it is true or false based on the reading.
1. Charlotte is an advocate for face-to-face learning. A. True B. False
2. According to the interview, online learning is the best method for everyone. A. True B. False
3. Charlotte describes the typical student as 18 to 21-year-olds enrolled in A. True B. False
school full time.
4. Online classes are designed to easily fit into students’ schedules. A. True B. False
5. Online classes can only be accessed from the university’s campus. A. True B. False
6. The phrase “holds them accountable” has the same meaning as “requires A. True B. False
them to.”
7. The word “procrastinate” also means “to have a delayed start.” A. True B. False
8. Caden’s university has many scholarships and discounts for students. A. True B. False
9. Listeners can call in to give their opinion. A. True B. False
10. Face-to-face learning allows for students to communicate in person. A. True B. False
11. You need to be an independent and reliable student to do well in online A. True B. False
classes.
12. The host disagrees with Caden, and she strongly believes that online A. True B. False
classes are better.

Answer each question using complete sentences based on the reading.
1. What are the pros for face-to-face learning?
2. What are the cons for face-to-face learning?
3. What are the pros for online learning?
4. What are the cons for online learning?
5. Which way of learning do you think is best and why?

With your partner, debate like the two professors on the talk show. One of you is in favor of online learning;
the other one prefers in class (face-to-face) learning. Use the ideas you collected in the previous activity.
Here are some guiding questions to help you:
1. Why would someone want to do online/in-class (face-to-face) learning?
2. Who would not be a good fit for online/in-class (face-to-face) learning?
4-28 SECTION 2
1
4
VOCABULARY
COLLEGE LIFE

MAD Open Text


MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text
SECTION 3 4-29
1
4
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. What kind of documents do you need to apply for a visa?
2. The college application is long and confusing.
3. Look up the meaning of the word in a dictionary.
4. I do not understand what you are trying to say.
5. Are you nervous about the final exam?
6. Why were you disappointed with your grade?
7. Can you translate this word for me?
8. It is not easy to communicate in another language.
9. Does your college have an exchange program?
10. I went to the embassy because I lost my passport.

1. [How many roommates do you have?] 6. [How do you pronounce this word?]
2. [I need to get a visa before August.] 7. [Do you know of any science tutors?]
3. [Do you have a dictionary?] 8. [She is nervous to speak a foreign language.]
4. [He misunderstood what I said.] 9. [Should I exchange some money here?]
5. [I will live in a dorm on campus.] 10. [I am extremely excited to study abroad.]
LANGUAGE TIP
Suffixes: Verbs to Nouns
A suffix is a combination of letters added to the end of a word to give it a different meaning. Here we are
focusing on verbs changing to nouns. The first part of a noun can help you determine the meaning of the word
if you know the base verb. You already know the meanings of the verbs or nouns below:
1. She made the difficult decision to attend the Georgia Institute of Technology.
2. He asked his professor for more information about his final project.
3. The college’s enrollment this year was larger than it was last year.
The noun “decision” comes from the verb “to decide”. → drop “-de” ending, add “s”, then add “-ion” suffix
The noun “information” comes from the verb “to inform”. → add “a”, then add “-tion” suffix
The noun “enrollment” comes from the verb “to enroll”. → add “-ment” suffix
Note: You will have to memorize if any extra letters between the base verb and the suffix ending are needed,
but you will see that sometimes there are patterns. Some verbs drop the last letters before taking the suffix,
and other verbs add or change a few letters before adding the suffix.
However, sometimes there is no extra ending to a verb to change it into a noun. For example, the noun
“the practice” comes from the verb “to practice”. These forms have to be memorized.
4-30 SECTION 3
1
4
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Using a dictionary, look up the verbs. Place each verb under the correct suffix to make the noun form.
For example: You read: to practice You place:
-tion -ment Spelling change + -ation no change
to practice
-tion -ment Spelling change + -ation no change

to translate to require to pronounce to major
to instruct to assign to apply to volunteer
to communicate

As you are watching this short video, tell what is happening using Chapter 4 Vocabulary.

1. What is the hardest part about learning English for you?
2. What could you do to get better at English?
3. Would you like to study abroad? If yes, where? If no, why not?
4. What is a pro of studying abroad?
5. What is a con of studying abroad?

Class Activity
GAMES: Chutes & Ladders and Marker Wars (The explanation and playing sheet for
these games are located in the B1 Resources Google Doc Folder, or download the
SECTION 3 4-31
1
4
GRAMMAR
REVIEW 1ST CONDITIONAL
Use the 1st conditional to state the consequences of a possible or realistic situation in the future. You have already
learned to use will with the 1st Conditional. You can also use going to or should for this as well.
Examples Meanings
I’m not doing well in class. It is possible that I will fail. If that
If I fail my test this week, I will hire a tutor.
happens, I will hire a tutor to help me improve my grade.
If I don’t understand the project instructions, I am We’re doing a new project in class. It is possible that I won’t
going to ask the teacher to explain. understand. If so, I am going to ask the teacher.
If I have a final exam in my English course, I should I am taking an English course. It is possible that I will have a
study my notes. final exam. If so, I should study my notes.
Formation of the 1st Conditional:
If clause: present tense Main clause: future tense

If you live in another country, you will need a visa.
The clauses in conditional sentences can be rearranged.

If the if clause is at the beginning of the sentence, put a comma after it.
If my visa isn’t approved, I’ll be disappointed.
If the if clause is at the end of the sentence, no comma is needed.
I’ll be disappointed if my visa isn’t approved.
Note: Do not use future tense verbs in the if clause. Use the present tense.
If you will live in another country, you will If you live in another country, you will
need a visa. need a visa.
*If you need to review the grammar rules from previous levels, go to the 1st Conditional chart.
4-32 SECTION 3
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose in which blank the if should be placed to form the correct ‘if clause’ in each sentence.
No commas are used so that the answer isn’t given away.
1. ___________ the advanced course next semester is too challenging ___________ you should drop it and move
to the intermediate level.
A. first blank B. second blank
2. ___________ I will study more next time ___________ I fail this test.
3. ___________ I can’t find my passport ___________ I won’t be able to get on the plane.
4. ___________ the professor changes the due date ___________ I will be so happy.
5. ___________ a student should use a dictionary ___________ they don’t know the meaning of a word.
6. ___________ I’ll be in the advanced class next semester ___________ I pass the intermediate level.
7. ___________ she will work in a lab ___________ she majors in science.
8. ___________ I’m going to graduate next semester ___________ I pass all of my courses.
9. ___________ I lose my visa ___________ I’ll have to go back to the embassy for another one.
10. ___________ I do an internship ___________ it will be at a veterinary office.

Complete each sentence with either the present simple or the future tense of each verb given. Do not
use contractions.
1. If I [wake] up late tomorrow, I [will take] the bus to class. (wake; take)
2. The professor [will not accept] a late paper if I [miss] the due date on Thursday. (not accept; miss)
3. If I [visit] in a different country, I [will need] to apply for a visa. (visit; need)
4. If my exam grades [do not get] better, I [will find] a tutor. (not get; find)
5. If Janie [fails] the test next week, she [will cry]. (fail; cry)
6. Mark [will get] good grades if he [studies] hard. (get; study)
7. If my roommate and I [disagree] a lot, I [will ask] to go to a different dorm. (disagree; ask)
8. I [will use] a dictionary if I [do not know] the meaning of a word. (use; not know)
9. If I [pick] this university, I [will have to] live on campus because it is out of state. (pick; have to)
10. If you [translate] every word you don’t understand, it [will take] you hours to read one page. (translate;
take)
SECTION 3 4-33
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
1. I’m going to be sad B. if I go to college far from home.
2. I will be confused H. if they speak too fast.
3. I am going to be happy F. if I am accepted into the best college.
4. I will be extremely disappointed K. if I don’t get into my favorite college.
5. I will apply for a visa J. if I travel to another country.
6. I’ll take good notes A. if you aren’t in class.
7. I should study abroad E. if I want to become fluent in a language.
8. I will go to the embassy D. if I lose my passport.
9. I’m going to live on campus G. if I want to live in a dormitory.
10. I will be misunderstood I. if I do not pronounce things well.
11. I should use a dictionary C. if I do not know the meaning of a word.

Read each question. Then, answer each one using complete sentences in the 1st conditional.
For example: You read: If you are sick and there is a test, what will you do?
You type: If I am sick and there is a test, I will email the professor to tell him
that I will not be in class.
1. What are you going to do if you disagree with your roommate?
2. If you feel nervous about a test, what will you do?
3. What should you do if you meet a foreign exchange student who doesn’t understand you?
4. If you are studying abroad and can’t understand someone, what should you do?
5. What will you say if your professor calls you the wrong name?
6. What will you do if you lose your passport while you are in another country?

As you see each picture, tell what Sophia will do using a complete sentence in the 1st conditional.
For example:
You see: You say: If Sophia wants to go to college, she will

need to pick a profession.
4-34 SECTION 3
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 4.3.14 - SPEAK (Continued)
1. 4. 7.
2. 5. 8.
3. 6.

2ND CONDITIONAL
Use the 2nd conditional to state the consequences of an unlikely or unrealistic situation in the present or
future.
I do not have a million dollars. It is unlikely that I will ever
If I had a million dollars, I would buy a huge house.
have a million dollars.
If our finals were canceled, we would celebrate! It is unlikely that our finals will be canceled.
If he didn’t have a pen, he would take notes with a

He does have a pen, so he doesn’t need to use the pencil.
pencil instead.
Formation of the 2nd Conditional:
if clause: past simple Main clause: would + base form
If Susan taught this course, every student would pass.
Note:
When to be is the verb in the if clause, always use were.
If she was my professor, I would enjoy the If she were my professor, I would enjoy
class more. the class more.
SECTION 3 4-35
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Word Jumble
1. If I were fluent in German, I’d be able to translate this.
2. I’d apply for your visa now if I were you.
3. It wouldn’t be so confusing if a professor taught the class.
4. If I didn’t have a tutor, I’d be failing this course.
5. If I brought another highlighter, I’d give it to you.
6. If it weren’t so late in the semester, she’d drop this class.
7. I’d apply to that college if it weren’t so far from home.
8. He’d volunteer more if he didn’t have to study so much.
9. If there weren’t a misunderstanding, we wouldn’t be fighting.

Complete each sentence with either the past simple or would + base form of each verb given. Use a
contraction when possible.
1. If Victoria [studied] harder, she [would score] higher on her final exam. (study; score)
2. My professor [would be] easier to understand if he [practiced] his pronunciation more often in the MAD.
(be; practice)
3. I [would sign up] to be a teaching assistant if Professor Astor [taught] the beginner level English class.
(sign up; teach)
4. If he [told] us the due date, I [would know] when to start my project. (tell; know)
5. If we [had] a more challenging instructor, we [would expect] a lot of essays. (have; expect)
6. You [wouldn’t need] my notes if you [were] paying attention during the lessons. (not need; be)
7. If you [meant] what you said, I [wouldn’t be] so disappointed in you. (mean; not be)
8. She [would save] money if she [lived] in a dormitory on campus. (save; live)
9. If I [understood] what you said, I [wouldn’t be] so confused right now. (understand; not be)
10. Communicating in a foreign language [would be] easy if she [weren’t] so nervous. (be; not be)

Read the story about Edward. Then, type a second conditional sentence for each number about how his
life would be different. Use the correct verb forms.
Edward is a student. 1. He used to translate songs into foreign languages in his free time, but now he doesn’t
have enough time. 2. He lives in a dormitory with his roommate Gerald, but he doesn’t like Gerald very much.
His friend Kevin is much more fun. 3. Lately, Edward has noticed a pretty French girl on campus, but he’s too
nervous to talk to her because he doesn’t pronounce French words very well. 4. He hasn’t finished his final
paper because he doesn’t know what to write about. 5. He wanted to talk to his professor, but the professor’s
office hours have ended, and he is gone for the day.
Possible answers:
1. If he had more time, he’d translate songs into foreign languages.
2. If he could pick his roommate, he’d want to live in a dorm with his friend, Kevin.
3. If he pronounced French words well, he would talk to the pretty French girl.
4. If he knew what to write about, he would finish his final paper.
5. If his professor had longer office hours, he would go talk to him now.
4-36 SECTION 3
1
4
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
1. If Nancy can’t pronounce the vocabulary, C. she’ll be embarrassed.
2. If Nancy fails her exam, G. she will study harder next time.
3. If Nancy couldn’t pronounce the vocabulary, F. she would feel embarrassed.
4. If Nancy majors in science, H. she will be in the lab a lot.
5. If Nancy has time, D. she’ll start writing her essay.
6. If Nancy failed her exam, E. she would study harder next time.
7. If Nancy had time, B. she’d start writing her essay.
8. If Nancy majored in science, A. she’d be in the lab a lot.
MAD Open Recording
Finish the sentence. Then, use your main clause as the “if” clause for the next sentence and repeat like
that three more times.
For example: You say: If I had a million dollars, I would buy a Ferrari.
If I bought a Ferrari, I would drive very fast.
If I drove very fast, I would get in an accident.
If I got in an accident, my parents would be disappointed.
1. If I were fluent in English, ______________________________________________________
2. ______________________________________________________________________________________
3. ______________________________________________________________________________________
4. ______________________________________________________________________________________
5. ______________________________________________________________________________________
CULTURAL NOTE
Currency & Exchange Rates
Currency is the type of money a country uses. As the world becomes more technologically advanced, travelers
may not need to exchange currency in certain countries because they can use a credit card to pay for things.
However, when travelers need to pay with cash, they will likely need to exchange their currency. Great Britain
uses the Pound Sterling (£), Australia uses the Australian Dollar ($), the United States uses the U.S. Dollar ($),
Canada uses the Canadian Dollar ($), Ireland uses the Euro (€), and South Africa uses the Rand (R).
To exchange your money, you can visit a bank at home, a bank in the country you’re traveling to, or you can
take money out of an ATM once you arrive in your destination country. You will learn what the exchange rate
is, which means how much of your money it takes to equal the currency of another country. For example, if 1
Euro (€) = 1.58 Australian Dollars ($), then the Euro (€) is stronger than the Australian Dollar, which means it
takes more money from Australia’s currency to equal the value of the Euro.
SECTION 3 4-37
1
4
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 4.3.20 - If I... I would
LAD Grouping Activity (Groups of 3 or 4)
Write each of the sentence starters below on a separate big sheet of paper. Hang up each sheet of paper
in a different place in the room. Each group will write a clause on the sheet of paper to complete the
sentence. Try to have as many statements as there are partner groups so that no two groups are at the
same paper. When every group has written on every sheet, read the sentences aloud. Have the students
vote on which idea they think was the best, funniest, etc.
To make it more advanced, make the students say WHY? Add a “because” or “because of” clause.
Below are some ideas. Ask the students if they have any ideas and add ones you find appropriate to this
list.
If I lived in another country… If I had a job...
If I had my own house… If money didn’t matter…
If I spoke another language… If I changed one thing about the world...
If I had a million dollars… If I were a politician…
If I had a pet… If I had a brother/sister…
If I had a baby... If I were a teacher…
If I lost a paper/assignment that was due today… If I were a professional athlete…
ACTIVITY 4.3.21 - Who studied what and where?

beginning of this activity and hit record. If students have never done a logic puzzle, explain how or have them
watch a video.
There are many paths to take after high school. Find out where these five friends decided to study after
graduation. Each person has a different school, major, and country in which they studied abroad. You and
your partner have different clues. Read the clues out loud and work together to solve this logic problem.
Based on the clues, put an X in the box for any information that does not go with the person. Put an O in
the box when you have solved a clue.
Partner A Clues: Partner B Clues:

1. One female student is studying engineering; the 2. The two female students studied abroad in the
other is at the University of Oxford. countries closest to each other.
3. The future lawyer studies at Cardiff University. 4. Oliver traveled the furthest away to study abroad.
5. The student from Bristol studies business and did He will miss Cardiff a lot.
not study in Spain. 6.William is fluent in many languages, but Spanish is
7. Sometimes William’s friend Elizabeth calls him to his favorite because of his time abroad.
help her with her Italian homework. 8. Jacob studied at Bristol and in Beijing.
9. The student who studies at the college visited 10. The student who studied abroad in Italy is
Germany. She enjoyed her time there very much. studying to be an artist.
4-38 SECTION 3
1
4
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 4.3.21 - Who studied what and where? (Continued)
Answer Key:
Elizabeth University of Oxford Art Italy

Hailey Imperial College London Engineering Germany
Oliver Cardiff University Law Australia
William University of Plymouth Translation Spain
Jacob University of Bristol Business China

Place each piece of information under the correct school based on the “Who studied what and where?”
conversation activity. The order will be graded.
University of Imperial College Cardiff University of University of

Oxford London University Plymouth Bristol
Name of Student Elizabeth Hailey Oliver William Jacob
Major Art Engineering Law Translation Business
Study Abroad Country Italy Germany Australia Spain China
SECTION 3 4-39
1
4
READING
LETTER OF INTENT
When applying to a college or university, the application often requires a letter of intent. A letter of intent is an essay
where you answer why you want to go to that specific college/university, how you will fit in there, and what makes you
unique. They have hundreds or even thousands of applications every year and only a certain number of openings for new
students. You need to show how you are different from other applicants and let your personality shine through in this
essay to help you get into the school of your choice. Your grades, volunteer hours, work experience, and activities are very
important, but most colleges and universities will look closely at your letter when deciding if you would be a good fit for
their school.
1 To the Admissions Board of Robotel University,
2 Since I was young, every family member from my father’s side has been talking about Robotel University. I grew up
hearing my relatives’ stories of learning from amazing professors, studying late at night for final exams, making
friends, and exploring the campus. No one ever asked me if I wanted to go to Robotel University, but it was always
understood that I would. When it was time for me to look at colleges, I started doing my own research and
discovered that Robotel University would actually be a great fit for me.
3 Robotel University and I share a common vision. We both constantly work to improve ourselves and the world of
teaching. I like to say that I have been a teacher all my life. Whether it was teaching my younger siblings how to
ride their bikes, helping my younger cousins learn to read, or tutoring my neighbor with her homework, I have
always loved helping others learn. I knew early on that I wanted to step into my father’s and grandmother’s
footsteps and become a teacher. I believe that Robotel University will be the perfect place for me to deepen my
knowledge about the best way to teach, how each person learns differently, psychology, and child development. I
think I will have a teaching style that is confident, accepting, kind, challenging, and creative.
4 My special interest is languages. I grew up bilingual, speaking English and German. I have also taken Korean and
Spanish since middle school. The partner schools that Robotel University has around the world are another
reason why I would love to go here. I am passionate about other languages and cultures, and while I have
done this when I stayed in Korea for two months as a junior in high school, I haven’t had a chance to go to
Spain. At your university, I plan to study abroad in Spain.
5 Living abroad for two months was one of the scariest and most exciting experiences of my life. At first I was
confused and nervous. However, with the opportunity to speak French every day, I was able to improve my
listening and speaking skills in Korean significantly. Even though it was such a short time, it changed me a lot. It
is so important to be comfortable being uncomfortable and learning that it is okay to make mistakes in a language.
My experience has taught me to be accepting of a new culture, and now I want to encourage others to spend time
abroad as well.
6 I feel that I will bring an open-minded perspective to students and faculty alike at Robotel University. I want to join
the Cultural Exchange Club to get to know the exchange students who will be studying there year after year. I
am confident Robotel University is the right place for me, and I am excited to begin during the fall semester.
7 Thank you for your consideration of my application.
Sincerely,
Ben McKinley
Ben McKinley
4-40 SECTION 3
1
4
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
Match each number with the correct title of information.
1. passion for teaching 3
2. final paragraph 6
3. past experience abroad 5
4. interest in studying abroad 4
5. family background 2
6. complimentary closing 7
7. greeting/salutation 1

MAD Open Text
Type a letter of intent to the university of your choice. Include the answers to the following questions:
1. Why do you want to study at this university?
2. What will your major be?
3. What makes you different from all the other students applying?
4. What would you add to this university?
CULTURAL NOTE
Accents
When you learn another language, you often learn completely new letters and sounds you have never
pronounced before. You do not need a perfect native accent to communicate effectively in the new language.
That being said, you should always try your best to speak clearly and listen to how native speakers pronounce
words. If you have a good ear for hearing how to correctly pronounce words, you may have a very good
accent in that new language. If it is difficult for you to hear when you are pronouncing a word incorrectly;
however, you might have a thick accent. The better your pronunciation, the better you accent will be, and the
easier it will be for speakers of that language to understand you.
SECTION 3 4-41
1
4
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S TALK ABOUT COLLEGE AND CLASSES!
MAD Viewing
time. Meet the B1 video actors in the introduction section.
Kaitlyn: (In a text:) Hey Jason I’m waiting for you at Chapman Hall, see you soon!!*
Jason: Hey, thanks for meeting me here.
Kaitlyn: Hey, no problem!
Jason: I’m hoping you can show me around campus and maybe answer a few questions about what it’s like to
go here.
Kaitlyn: Yeah, so where are you in the application process?
Jason: Well, I will be enrolling in fall, so I just need to make sure my materials are in on time.
Kaitlyn: Yeah, so if you submit them this month, you’ll probably be good to start in fall. Have you looked into
financial aid?
Jason: I have a scholarship that will cover some tuition, and I filed financial aid a few months ago. College is
expensive! But I’m glad I’ll be transferring here. I’ll be able to get my degree in just two years because I have
credits from the other school I went to. It was simply too much money to pay for out-of-state tuition.
Kaitlyn: I’m so happy you’re coming here. I’m sure you’ll love the campus life and the professors. I love it here.
Jason: Yeah, so you think you can give me a quick tour?
Kaitlyn: Yeah, let’s go!
Kaitlyn: So, sometimes I won’t have enough time in between my classes. I’ll have to go to my next class
right away. Other times, one or two hours in between, and I’ll stop here and get a bite to eat. Or I’ll go to the
computer lab and do my homework.
Jason: How much homework do you usually have?
Kaitlyn: It kind of depends on the class. In my communications class, I had to write five major papers
throughout the semester. It was a pretty small class: 12 students and the professor.
Jason: Really? That small? A friend of mine told me that some classes have over 100 people in them.
Kaitlyn: Yeah, those are the big lecture halls. So, some classes will have that many like History or Astronomy
101. Personally, I prefer the smaller classes.
Jason: What do you do if you’re absent? Like if you miss a class?
Kaitlyn: Usually the teachers know. The teachers will always take attendance in any of the classes.
Jason: So when the school day is done, what do you do for fun around here?
Kaitlyn: Well, the beach is like a 20-minute walk away, so you can either walk or sometimes take the bus.
Otherwise, there’s a lot of fun activities around campus, and they’ll have clubs or other stuff you can involve
yourself in.
Jason: Well, this is certainly different from my last school. Do you mind helping me pick classes?
Kaitlyn: Yeah! Let’s have a seat, and we can look online. So, there are required classes for your major, and then
there’s also electives. So the electives can be pretty wild!
Jason: I heard they have like underwater photography here!
Kaitlyn: I don’t know about that, but they have hang gliding. I took that last year. They have other pretty fun
ones, too. But let’s pick your required classes first and then one fun one!
Jason: Sounds good!
*Many students do not use correct grammar when texting.
4-42 LET’S
TALK!
1
4
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
1. Jason is meeting Kaitlyn at ___________.
A. Chapman Hall B. Chair Hall C. Chapman Building
2. Jason is enrolling at the university in the ___________.
A. spring B. fall C. winter
3. Kaitlyn is showing Jason around the ___________.
A. cafeteria B. dorm C. campus
4. Jason is transferring to the school because the other school was too ___________.
A. difficult B. expensive C. far away
5. Kaitlyn really ___________ her school.
A. loves B. likes C. hates
6. Kaitlyn likes to do her homework in the ___________.
A. computer lab B. library C. study hall
7. In her communications class, Kaitlyn had to write ___________ major papers.
A. 6 B. 2 C. 5
8. Sometimes there are over 100 students ___________.
A. on campus B. absent C. in a big lecture hall
9. For fun, Kaitlyn suggests going ___________.
A. downtown B. to the mall C. to the beach
10. One of the electives the university offers is ___________.
A. hang gliding B. surfing C. rock climbing
LT 4.3 - SPEAK
MAD Open Recording
Imagine giving a friend a tour of your school. Tell him/her about:
- the building(s)
- some of your favorite spots to hang out
- activities or classes that are fun
- clubs or sports that are offered
- teachers you can recommend
- anything else you can think of
LET’S TALK! 4-43

1
4
LET’S TALK!
INTERVIEWS - LET’S TALK ABOUT COLLEGE LIFE!
MAD Viewing
Rutvik Ann Marie Skylar

Rutvik: I go to Michigan State University. [It is a big campus]; however, the people are very friendly, and
that’s what I like the most about it. What I don’t like about it is how big it is because it is hard to get around
sometimes, and [you can get lost]. I did receive a scholarship. I got half-full tuition, so right now it’s only
$16,000 a year. It’s about $8,000 for housing, $8,000 for meals and pretty much it balances out after that.
[I live in a college dorm]. It’s pretty big. I do have a roommate, and I love living with a roommate because
[my roommate and I get along very well]. I do wanna* study abroad. I am planning on studying abroad in
London and [doing an internship] there. And the hardest thing to learn about a foreign language is definitely
talking face to face with someone else in that foreign language ‘cause it’s one thing to learn, and it’s one thing
to read and do worksheets. But, it’s another thing to actually have a conversation and keep that conversation
going, because you’re so used to being in a learning environment that it’s hard to speak eloquently and hard.
It’s hard to really carry on a conversation without stuttering. And the best thing to learn about [a foreign
language] is really the skills that you gain that you can really immerse yourself, and you can be a much more
attractive person for companies or for employers because they are seeking out people who can speak multiple
languages. So, you’re making yourself a more adaptable person in today’s society.
Ann Marie: I just graduated high school, so [I will be going on to college next year]. And I’m very excited
to be meeting new people and doing new things that I wasn’t doing in high school. But, I am kind of scared
to leave my family. I wish I could just bring them with me, and all my friends, but that can’t happen, so I guess
I’ll have to make new friends. I’m not receiving any scholarships, so my parents [are helping me pay for
college],but I’m also paying for part of it as well. My college is out of state, so I am going to have to pay $40,000
per year. And I [will be living in the dorms], and I am lucky enough to have air conditioning in my room. So,
me, it’s gonna* be me and my roommate. She’s from Illinois and I’m from Wisconsin, so I’ve only met her once,
so hopefully it goes okay. But we both wanna* study abroad, so that would be exciting. And I just wanna* study
abroad [because I love traveling], and I think that it really rounds you out as a person. And you get to meet
so many new people, and you have a lot of different experiences there. And I think that if you have a foreign
language that you can use, that makes it- your experience- that much more incredible. But, I do think that
4-44 LET’S TALK!

1
4
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
learning a foreign language is a little difficult when you throw in all the verbs and grammar and that kind of
thing. So, I would say that’s definitely [the most challenging] part about learning.
Skylar: I just was a senior at high school so [now I’m going into college]. I really loved the actual learning
aspect of school, and I liked being able to have the variety of learning about different topics. Even though
sometimes it was challenging, the way that we were tested on the material, I’m always up for a challenge,
so I really liked the learning aspect of it. For college, [college is very expensive], but I did receive some
scholarships, which is gonna* be a huge help. My parents pay for a little bit of my college, but most of it has
to come from my work or from scholarships, so that’s why I pushed so hard to get those scholarships. I’ll
be going to the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee to be studying speech language pathology. And, for
[studying abroad], I definitely would consider it an option. I went to a German elementary school and so ever
since I was little, I’ve always dreamt about traveling to Europe one day, so I’m sure that will become a reality of
mine sometime. The hardest thing about learning a foreign language is probably just [trying to remember]
that when you’re speaking, it’s not like in English when you’re just not really thinking about the rules or the way
that the words flow. But, when you’re [speaking in a foreign language], you have to think about all of those
things while remembering what the words even are. But the best thing about learning a foreign language is
that it gives you so many opportunities in life that you wouldn’t be able to get previous to that. And it also
makes learning other languages that you want to learn in the future a lot easier.
* slang in spoken language

MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if each statement is true or false based on the interviews.
1. Rutvik goes to the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee. A. True B. False
2. Skylar is always up for a challenge. A. True B. False
3. Rutvik has to pay for college and housing by himself. A. True B. False
4. Ann Marie got a scholarship to pay for her college tuition. A. True B. False
5. Rutvik is planning on studying abroad in London. A. True B. False
6. Skylar went to a German elementary school. A. True B. False
7. Ann Marie is going to college next year. A. True B. False
8. Rutvik lives in an apartment with his roommate. A. True B. False
9. Ann Marie has to pay $40,000 per year. A. True B. False
10. Skylar doesn’t have a job. A. True B. False
11. Ann Marie wants to study abroad but her roommate doesn’t. A. True B. False
12. According to Ann Marie, the hardest thing about learning a language is A. True B. False
verbs and grammar.

MAD Open Recording
1. How much does college cost in your country? Is it free or do you have to pay for all your classes?
2. Are there scholarships available to help pay for parts of tuition?
3. How long does it take to get a degree?
4. Is it possible to work and go to school?
5. What do you think is the hardest thing about learning a foreign language?
LET’S TALK! 4-45
1
4
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW: SELF-EVALUATION How well do I
Additional Practice Refer to...

I CAN...
Review (R) (Page = P.)
1. discuss future education plans. R. 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8 Sections 1, 3
P. 4-8, 4-11,
2. make predictions about future events. R. 1, 2, 3, 5, 7
4-21
3. use cause and effect connecting words. R. 2, 3 P. 4-23
4. understand differences of 1st and 2nd

R. 2, 4 P. 4-32, 4-35
conditional.
R1 - LISTENING 1
Listen as Chase and Devin talk about their plans after high school. Then, read each statement, and decide
whether it is true or false. If the statement is true, type [True] in the first blank, and then re-type the
sentence exactly how you read it. If it is false, type [False] in the first blank, and type the correct new
sentence. For example:
True statement: You read: Devin and Chase are friends.
You type: [True] [Devin and Chase are friends.]
False statement: You read: When Rick becomes a carpenter, he will do projects around Ben’s house.
You type: [False] [When Chase becomes a carpenter, he will do projects around
Devin’s house.]
Chase: Hey, Devin. Have you decided what you are going to do after high school?
Devin: Not sure. I might go to a technical college to become a mechanic.
Chase: Great. Can’t wait until you can fix my car for free!
Devin: What do I get out of it?
Chase: Well, when I become a carpenter, I can do projects around your house.
Devin: That’ll probably not happen though!
Chase: Oh yeah, why not?
Devin: Because you are terrible with numbers. I bet you will read the ruler wrong. And everything you build
won’t fit. Ha. I’m just kidding.
Chase: Pfff, I will show you. I might not be good with numbers in school, but I know how to use a ruler just fine,
thank you. Wait and see; I may surprise you!
Devin: I hope you will! I want you to be successful in your occupation.
Chase: Oh, don’t you worry. I will be more than successful! Then, when you want me to work on your house, I
won’t have time because I will have so many other projects to work on. And you? Are you sure that you want to
be a mechanic? You don’t repair things; you break things!
Devin: Ha. Good joke! I bet you will probably be the first person to ask me to fix your car.
Chase: You are right, but only if you fix it for free!
4-46 CHAPTER 4
1
4
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
1. Devin will go to a university.
[False] [Devin will go to a technical college.]
2. Chase will become a carpenter.
[True] [Chase will become a carpenter.]
3. Chase is good at reading a ruler.
[True] [Chase is good at reading a ruler.]
4. Devin made a good joke.
[False] [Chase made a good joke.]
5. Devin thinks Chase probably won’t become a carpenter because he breaks things.
[False] [Devin thinks Chase probably won’t become a carpenter because he is terrible with numbers.]
6. Chase will be the first to ask Devin to fix his car, but only if Devin does it for free.
[True] [Chase will be the first to ask Devin to fix his car, but only if Devin does it for free.]
7. Chase may be too busy to do projects around Devin’s house.
[True] [Chase may be too busy to do projects around Devin’s house.]
8. Chase says, ”Wait and see; I may disappoint you!”
[False] “[Wait and see; I may surprise you!]”
R2 - LISTENING 2
1. [I doubt that I’ll get into that college.]
2. [Will you be taking the placement test next weekend?]
3. [May I use your highlighter for class today?]
4. [The paper is due in two days, so I need to start writing it.]
5. [If I don’t understand the meaning, I’ll use a dictionary.]
6. [I would study abroad if I were fluent in a language.]
R3 - GRAMMAR 1
MAD Text Match
1. I’m extremely confused E. because I misunderstood the lesson.
2. I lost my pencil case, I. so I need to buy a new one.
3. My best friend and I are living together B. because we were able to pick our roommates.
4. This instructor expects a lot; H. therefore, I’m going to have to work hard.
5. I bet I misunderstood her D. because of her pronunciation.
6. She thinks she’s going to fail, A. so she should speak with her professor.
7. I missed the lab; G. therefore, I have to make it up.
8. He had to take beginner French J. because of his low score on the placement test.
9. I think I’m going to major in music, C. so I can teach high school students.
10. She’s going to go to that university F. because they have a great art program.
CHAPTER 4 4-47
1
4
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R4 - GRAMMAR 2
Complete each sentence with the past simple, would + base form, the present simple, or the future
tense of each verb given. Use a contraction when possible.
1. If he [were] my roommate, we would have so much fun. (be)
2. If I want to remember something from the lesson, I [will highlight] it in yellow in my notes. (highlight)
3. I [would drop] the course if we didn’t have such a nice teaching assistant. (drop)
4. If the assignment [is due] on Friday, she will not be able to go out on Thursday. (be due)
5. I will look it up in the dictionary if I [don’t know] what a word means. (not know)
6. If you [lose] your passport when you are abroad, you will go to the embassy. (lose)
7. If she doesn’t get into her favorite college, she [will apply] to another one. (apply)
8. He [would be] happier if he majored in medicine. (be)
9. If I [understood] the lessons, I would be passing this class. (understand)
10. He would need to fill out the documents if he [wanted] to get a visa. (want)
R5 - READING
MAD Multiple Choice
Read the following advertisements for volunteer opportunities near your home. Choose the best answer
for each question based on the reading.
4-48 CHAPTER 4
1
4
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
1. How many days per week will you have to commit to being a dog walker?
A. 2 B. 1 C. 3 D. 0
2. What kind of drive will be organized for the families in need?
A. Food B. Clothing C. Blood D. both A and B
3. Which characteristic is NOT required to be a nursing home volunteer?
A. kind B. a good listener C. dependent D. friendly
4. Which areas will NOT being cleaned up, according to the last advertisement?
A. playground B. highway ramps C. forest D. both B and C
5. Which ad gives an email address as contact information?
A. Families in Need B. Dog Walker C. Clean Up D. Nursing Home
6. Which ad only gives a name of a contact person, but no email, website, or phone number?
A. Clean Up B. Dog Walker C. Families in Need D. Nursing Home
7. All advertisements give an exact time EXCEPT...
A. Dog Walker B. Clean Up C. Families in Need D. all of them
8. Which volunteer opportunity offers future possibilities?
A. Nursing Home B. Dog Walker C. Families in Need D. Clean Up
9. Which opportunity is not a long-term commitment?
A. Clean Up B. Dog Walker C. Families in Need D. both A and C
10. Which volunteer opportunity allows you to donate items instead of time?
A. Families in Need B. Dog Walker C. Clean Up D. all of them
R6 - WRITING
MAD Open Text
Type a description about yourself for an application to Robotel University.
1. Why are you interested in learning English?
2. What will your major be?
3. Have you ever studied abroad, or are you planning on studying abroad?
R7 - SPEAKING 1
MAD Open Recording
1. Josh just graduated from college.
2. Rachel is in her last year of high school.
3. Bob is not doing well at the university.
R8 - SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Answer each question about the image using complete sentences.
1. For what is this student applying?
2. In what will the student major? Why?
3. What are some of the school supplies you see on the desk?
4. What is the other student working on?
CHAPTER 4 4-49
1
4
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
IF I STUDIED ABROAD...
Have you ever thought about studying abroad? If you have, great. If you haven’t, start thinking about
places you would like to visit or study. Research where you would like to study. Once you decide where
you want to go, research a few different program options. Give a presentation on where you want to
study, what you will do, and why. Use the 2nd conditional for as many sentences as possible. Use the
main clause as the if clause of the next sentence.
For example:
If I studied abroad, I would go to Canada. I like the French Canadian pronunciation.
If I went to Canada, I would go to school at Montreal University. I think Montreal is a beautiful city.
If I went to school at Montreal University, I would live on campus. It is much cheaper to live on campus.
If I lived on campus, I would have a Canadian roommate…..
Make a presentation to give to the class or in the LAD.

FILL OUT THE APPLICATION
Working in groups of 2, fill out the Robotel University Application. Either one of you can fill it out with
your information, or you can make up all of the information as a fake character. Don’t miss any of the
parts to fill in.
4-50 CHAPTER 4
1
4
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
LISTENING 1
Listen as Lisa and Natalie talk about their plans after high school. Then, read each statement, and decide
whether it is true or false. If the statement is true, type [True] in the first blank, and then re-type the
sentence exactly how you read it. If it is false, type [False] in the first blank, and type the correct new
sentence.
Lisa: Hi, Natalie. How is it going?
Natalie: Good. I finally finished my applications for technical college. I am so happy this is done.
Lisa: Oh, wow! Congratulations! I still haven’t filled out any college applications. Good for you for being so
motivated!
Natalie: Thanks! I’m going to go to culinary school and become a chef. I’ve always wanted to have my own
restaurant, and this might get me there in a couple of years.
Lisa: Wow, that is so cool, and it totally makes sense. You are probably the best cook I know. I love eating all
of your delicious meals.
Natalie: Thanks! I am very excited. This might be my chance to get out of this town, too. I am tired of the
same four restaurants here. Not much variety.
Lisa: Wait, where are you planning on going? Does this mean you may leave me behind?
Natalie: Ha, please. You will be off to school soon yourself! But yes, if everything goes well, I will be going to
the New York Culinary School. It’s the best in the country.
Lisa: That’s crazy! New York! How cool is that? New York might be my favorite city. Then, I can come visit you
all the time. And it’s probably better for my health to not be close to you and your delicious food. I’d eat way
too much.
Natalie: You are funny! So, how about you? Have you narrowed down what you want to do?
Lisa: Yes, I have. I really want to be a computer programmer. I’ll probably apply to ten different universities all
over the country for computer science and hope to get in somewhere.
Natalie: Good idea! I am sure you will get into a lot of them. You are so good with all the coding and
computer stuff. I could never do that. However, you better not forget about me. When I have my own
restaurant, I want you to program a cool app and food delivery system for me.
Lisa: If I get to eat for free, I’ll do anything for you.
Natalie: Deal!
1. Lisa still hasn’t filled out any college applications.
[True] [Lisa still hasn’t filled out any college applications.]
2. Natalie will to go to culinary school and become a pastry artist.
[False] [Natalie will to go to culinary school and become a chef.]
3. Lisa is very motivated to apply to college.
[False] [Natalie is very motivated to apply to college.]
4. Natalie is looking forward to more restaurant options.
[True] [Natalie is looking forward to more restaurant options.]
5. Boston Culinary School is the best in the country.
[False] [New York Culinary School is the best in the country.]
6. Natalie’s favorite city might be New York.
[False] [Lisa’s favorite city might be New York.]
7. Lisa will probably apply to ten universities.
[True] [Lisa will probably apply to ten universities.]
8. Natalie wants Lisa to program a cool app for her.
[True] [Natalie wants Lisa to program a cool app for her.]
CHAPTER 4 4-51
1
4
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
LISTENING 2
1. [I think I’ll get a degree in business.]
2. [When will you be filling out your college applications?]
3. [The TA might be teaching the lesson today.]
4. [It is snowing a lot today; therefore, class is canceled.]
5. [I’ll live in a dorm if I live on campus.]
6. [If I were you, I would go to the embassy to get a new passport.]
GRAMMAR 1
MAD Text Match
1. I’m going to take an art elective H. because I’m interested in painting.
2. I have to take lots of notes today; C. therefore, I will bring a highlighter to class.
3. My professor’s expectations are high, F. so the class is very challenging.
4. Class was canceled today, D. so the due date will now be tomorrow.
5. She misunderstood the word J. because I didn’t pronounce it correctly.
6. My roommate is fluent in Arabic B. because of his time as an exchange student.
7. I got into college today; I. therefore, my family and I are going to celebrate.
8. I couldn’t sleep last night E. because of my noisy roommate.
9. I lost my passport; A. therefore, I need to go to the embassy.
10. I need to apply for a visa, G. so I need to fill out all the documents.
GRAMMAR 2
Complete each sentence with the past simple, would + base form, the present simple, or the future
tense of each verb given. Use a contraction when possible.
1. I would try harder if I [knew] what to expect from our instructor. (know)
2. She [will study] abroad in Spain if she learns Spanish. (study)
3. If I can’t find my pencil case, I [will buy] new pens and pencils. (buy)
4. If the university [requires] lots of volunteer hours, I will volunteer at the fire department. (require)
5. He would live in another country if his university [had] an exchange program. (have)
6. If the lesson [weren’t] so confusing, I would understand it better. (not be)
7. If the exchange student weren’t so misunderstood, she [would communicate] with more people.
(communicate)
8. If she [didn’t fail] her placement test, she would be in the intermediate level. (not fail)
9. I [would go out] with you all tonight if I didn’t have to study for finals. (go out)
10. If the professor [accepts] my application, I will be a TA for him next semester. (accept)
4-52 CHAPTER 4
1
4
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
READING
MAD Multiple Choice
Read the following advertisements for student work opportunities near your home. Choose the best
answer for each question based on the reading.
1. How many exchange students need help with their English?

A. more than 300 B. less than 300 C. 150 D. not sure
2. The RA will have to help the students with all of these problems EXCEPT...
A. medical B. financial C. social D. academic
3. Which will NOT be a responsibility of a Spanish TA?
A. tutoring B. grading C. giving assignments D. writing emails
4. Does a tech support intern need to be a software programming major?
A. No, a math major B. Yes C. Not sure D. No, an engineering major
5. All advertisements give a certain number of hours that need to be worked, EXCEPT the ad for...
A. English Tutor B. RA C. Tech Support D. TA
6. Which two advertisements give an email address as contact information?
A. Tutor & RA B. RA & Tech Support C. TA & Tech Support D. Tutor & Tech Support
7. For which job will you need three references?
A. English Tutor B. TA C. both A and B D. RA
8. The phrase “to be responsible” in the TA ad has the meaning most similar to:
A. what you won’t do B. to plan something C. to start something D. what you have to do
9. Which job has a language requirement?
A. Tutor B. Tech Support C. TA D. both A and C
10. Which job requires the least amount of work/hours?
A. RA B. Tech Support C. Tutor D. TA
CHAPTER 4 4-53
1
4
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
WRITING
MAD Open Text
Type a description about yourself for an application to study abroad at Robotel University in Britain or
Australia.
1. At which Robotel campus would you like to study?
2. Why do you want to study abroad at an English-speaking school?
3. What do you want to learn while studying abroad?
SPEAKING 1
MAD Open Recording
1. Kyle just graduated from high school.
2. Sarah is not doing well in her college math class.
3. Eric is in his third year of college and not happy with his major.
SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Answer each question about the volunteer opportunities using complete sentences.
1. For which activity would you want to volunteer? Why?
2. For which activity would you not want to volunteer? Why?
3. Have you ever volunteered? If yes, where? If no, why not?
4. Why do you think some universities require students to have volunteer hours?
4-54 CHAPTER 4
5
1 CHAPTER FIVE
SHOPPING
VOCABULARY
Running Errands .......................................................... 5-4
Clothing and Fashion ................................................. 5-19
Going Shopping ........................................................... 5-36
GRAMMAR
Separable Phrasal Verbs ........................................... 5-8
Nouns Used as Adjectives ........................................ 5-12
Determiners: both, either, neither .......................... 5-23
Another, other(s), the other(s) ................................. 5-27
Relative Clauses: Subjects ......................................... 5-41
Active vs. Passive Voice: Present Simple ............... 5-44
CONVERSATION
Shopping List ................................................................ 5-15
Sort the Clothes .......................................................... 5-15
Your Fashion Preferences ......................................... 5-31
Can I help you find something? ............................... 5-32
Build Passive Sentences ............................................ 5-47
Describe it! .................................................................... 5-47
READING
Tips for Decluttering Your Home ............................. 5-17
Dress to Impress ......................................................... 5-33
The Shopping Challenge ............................................ 5-49
LET’S TALK!
Video - Let’s pick out some outfits! ......................... 5-51
LEARNING OBJECTIVES Interviews - Let’s talk about shopping & clothes! 5-53
• talk about errands using phrasal verbs.

REVIEW & ASSESSMENT
• use nouns as adjectives.
Review ............................................................................ 5-55
• discuss fashion using determiners and pronouns. Projects .......................................................................... 5-60
Assessment ................................................................... 5-61
• talk about shopping using relative pronouns.
• use active and passive voices.
INTRODUCTION 5-1
51
THE UNITED KINGDOM

CULTURE IN THE UK
NORTHERN IRELAND Known For:
Giant’s Causeway
Medieval Castles
Antrim Coast
Titanic Belfast
NORTHERN Carrick-a-Rede Rope Bridge
IRELAND Dark Hedges
Dunluce Castle
The Setting for Game of Thrones
Ulster Fry Breakfast
Fish & Chips
Rugby
Football (Soccer)
Golf
Capital: Belfast
Other Major Cities: Derry, Lisburn, Newtownabbey Famous People:
Population: 1.875 million (2017) C.S. Lewis
Area: 5,460 mi² (square miles) Liam Neeson
Rory McIlroy
Van Morrison
Bronagh Gallagher
Flag: Michelle Fairley
Geraldine Hughes
Ciarán Hinds
Official Flag Saint Patrick’s Saltire Andrew Eaton
Giant’s Causeway Carrick-a-Rede Rope Bridge Liam Neeson Belfast Castle Belfast Architectural Design

1. Search the legend of Finn MacCool and Giant’s Causeway, and read about the
story of how Giant’s Causeway was formed. Now, write your own short story of
how these rock formations could have been made.
2. The world famous Titanic ship was built in Belfast, the capital of Northern Ireland.
Visit the website www.titanicbelfast.com and read basic information about this
museum. If you were going to visit Titanic Belfast, how much money would you
spend on a ticket? What would you like to do or see there? What type of tour
would you like to take?
5-2 INTRODUCTION
1
5
VOCABULARY
SECTION 1 VOCABULARY: Running Errands
Types of Stores Other Words and Phrases Phrasal Verbs
the bakery the sports shop to add to find out / found / found
the butcher shop the toy store the item to give away *
the clothing store the shoe store to keep / kept / kept to pick out
the hair salon the second-hand shop the list to pick up
the delicatessen (deli) to run errands / ran / run to put away *
the department store to sell / sold / sold to put back *
the flower shop to take back *
the jewelry store to throw away *
the pet store to try on *
to write down / wrote / written
SECTION 2 VOCABULARY: Clothing and Fashion

Describing Clothing Other Words and Phrases
the athletic shoes; the tennis shoes the pattern to borrow

the brand floral to change
the button plaid clean
the label; the tag polka dot couple; pair
the logo striped dirty
the material the pocket few
cotton the sweatshirt to go with *
leather to wear out / wore / worn the outfit
silk the workout clothes the perfume; the cologne
wool the zipper to smell (like)
SECTION 3 VOCABULARY: Going Shopping

Deciding on a Purchase Making a Purchase
to advertise to return to be on sale * reasonable

the advertisement (ad) the return the cash register the receipt
to choose / chose / chosen to show / showed / shown the change to spend / spent / spent
the choice the store hours to check out such a good deal
the decision the cost to wait (in line)
the dressing room free
to hold / held / held inexpensive
to put on hold * the price tag

INTRODUCTION 5-3
1
5
VOCABULARY
RUNNING ERRANDS

MAD Open Recording
What words or phrases do you know? What do you see? What is happening in the pictures?


MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text
CULTURAL NOTE
Second-Hand Shopping
Buying new clothing can be exciting. You think of the many outfit possibilities when you bring home new pieces.
This hobby can also be very expensive, which is why many people turn to second-hand stores to purchase new
additions to their wardrobes. Shopping second-hand can save a lot of money. Buying used clothing supports
the local shops that carry the clothes, reduces shipping costs of new clothes from manufacturers to your city,
and reduces the amount of clothing that ends up in landfills and pollutes the earth. Consider browsing your
local second-hand shops to save money and the planet!
5-4 SECTION 1
1
5
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. Let’s go to the bakery for a chocolate cake.
2. Have you ever sold clothing to a second-hand store?
3. I have to run a lot of errands today.
4. Are you going to put that shirt back?
5. The flower shop is on the corner.
6. How do I get to the pet store?
7. My mom’s going to pick up dinner from the deli.
8. Add bananas and milk to the grocery list.
9. Which shoe store do you prefer?
10. His sister just started working at a hair salon.
1. [My uncle works as a butcher.]
2. [I’m going to try this skirt on.]
3. [Should I keep this blouse or throw it away?]
4. [Did dad go to the grocery store yet?]
5. [Put your clothes away before you leave for school.]
6. [Let’s get the gift at the toy store.]
7. [From which jewelry store did you get this necklace?]
8. [That deli has the best sandwiches.]
9. [Which clothing store is your favorite?]
10. [Did you find out when the sports shop opens?]

MAD Category Match
Place each item under the correct store where you can buy it.
Deli Toy Shop Grocery Store

sandwiches chess fruits
soup video games vegetables
Sports Shop Clothing Store Jewelry Store
bat skirt necklace
racket tie bracelet
Butcher Shop Bakery Department Store
sausage cake umbrella
fish bread sunglasses
SECTION 1 5-5
1
5
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Image Match
Listen as Raj talks about the errands he has to run in order to prepare for a holiday party with his family.
Match each errand number with the correct place so that you put his errands in order.
I am hosting the holiday party for my family this year. My mom normally does it, but she isn’t feeling well, so I am
stepping up to do it. Unfortunately, the party is in two days, and there is a lot to be done. In order to make sure
that I don’t forget anything, I have made a list of errands that I need to run this week. I still have to buy gifts for
the family. First on my list is to find a small toy truck or car for my nephew to play with. After finding something
for my nephew, I need to buy something for my niece. She has recently become interested in playing sports
and asked for some equipment. Since I am buying presents for my niece and nephew, I probably should buy
something for their dad, who is my brother. He wears the oldest, smelliest shoes that are at least five years old.
It is time for him to throw them away and get some new ones. I think there is a shoe store right by the sports
store. I just have to be careful with time because I have a 5:00 p.m. appointment to get my hair cut and beard
trimmed. I have to look clean and put together as the host of the party.
After that, it will be dinner time. Too many things left on my list and not enough time to run home to cook
something. I will quickly eat at a nearby deli. I will have to drive to the mall for the next errand. I want to buy a gift
card for my sister. She is 22 and really into fashion. I have no idea what is in style or not, so I will let her decide
what she wants to buy for herself. Lastly for tonight, I need to worry about making some food for tomorrow.
Luckily, each person in my family is also bringing a dish and appetizer to share, but I still have to make a couple
of things. Therefore, I’m going to make a quick stop to pick up some really nice steaks and chicken so I can grill
those tomorrow. I have to let them marinate in a special sauce overnight. I can’t forget about the veggies to grill,
dinner rolls, and a couple other items I wanted to put out as appetizers. Off to the grocery store and then home
to make a couple of those items so I don’t have to worry about food at all tomorrow. When I wake up, I have to
remember to pick up the cake that I ordered and then buy my mom some flowers. It isn’t a holiday celebration
unless the table is decorated with a beautiful bouquet. That’s ten stops in less than 24 hours. Lots to get done!
1. Errand 4 5. Errand 8 8. Errand 1


4. Errand 5
5-6 SECTION 1
1
5
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Look at Brianna’s shopping list. First, decide which stores she needs to go to. Then, say which items she
will get at each store.
LANGUAGE TIP
Shopping Slang
It can be fun to go shopping with a friend because you can ask the other person for his or her opinion.
If you think an item looks good on your friend, you might say that it looks cool, stylish, modern, fashionable,
or flattering. If you think your friend does not look good in the item, you might say,
“It doesn’t fit quite right,” “It looked better on the hanger,” or “It’s not your style.”
When helping someone decide to buy an item or not, feel free to ask questions such as:
- How do you feel when wearing this?
- Is it comfortable?
- What would you wear with it?
- Do you own something similar already?
SECTION 1 5-7
1
5
GRAMMAR
SEPARABLE PHRASAL VERBS
A phrasal verb is made up of a verb and a particle. The verb and particle work together to create the meaning of the
verb. Notice in the example below that the verb alone has a different meaning than the phrasal verb.
Examples Meanings
She put the wallet in her purse.

put means to move something to a different place
(verb)
She put on her coat.

put on means to dress in clothing
(phrasal verb)
Forming a phrasal verb: verb + particle

The particle in a phrasal verb can be words we would recognize as prepositions or adverbs.
In a phrasal verb, however, these words function as part of the verb.
Verb + Particle Meanings
find out learn new information

give away give item to someone else
pick out choose from options
pick up lift with hands or go get something
put back return to its previous place
take back return something
throw away put in the garbage or trash
try on put on clothes to see if they fit
write down write on paper (type on keyboard)
Separable Phrasal Verbs:

Phrasal verbs are separable when you can separate the verb and particle with the object of the sentence.
Phrasal Verbs with Noun Object Phrasal Verbs with Pronoun Object
(Optional Separation) (Required Separation)
I put away the shirts.

I put away them. I put them away.
I put the shirts away.
I tried on the shirts.
I tried on it. I tried it on.
I tried the shirts on.
5-8 SECTION 1
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct word that best completes each sentence.
1. Did you find ___________ what time the pet store opens?
A. up B. out C. back
2. I try to sell my clothes when I don’t want them anymore. If I can’t, then I give them ___________.
A. back B. on C. away
3. Could you please ___________ down the name of the second-hand store you like?
A. write B. fill C. call
4. I don’t want to buy these shoes. I’m going to ___________ them back.
A. turn B. pick C. put
5. Which dress did you ___________ out for the dance?
A. pick B. put C. throw
6. I ___________ up this morning at six to go for a run.
A. put B. woke C. picked
7. Are you going to take that shirt ___________ to the store?
A. away B. back C. up
8. Could you pick ___________ some sandwiches from the delicatessen?
A. up B. on C. off
9. Do you ___________ toys away when your kids are too old to play with them?
A. pick B. try C. throw
10. I’ll call you ___________ after I run my errands.
A. away B. out C. back

Rewrite each sentence replacing the object with a pronoun.
For example: You read: I have to fill out my application. You type: [I have to fill it out.]
1. I tried on five shirts. [I tried them on.]

2. Put on your hat. [Put it on.]
3. Could you write down your phone number? [Could you write it down?]
4. I’m giving away my old clothes. [I’m giving them away.]
5. Did you turn the television off? [Did you turn it off?]
6. Please put away your clean clothes. [Please put them away.]
7. She picked out your gift. [She picked it out.]
8. Could you wake up your sister? [Could you wake her up?]
9. You need to call John back. [You need to call him back.]
10. Did you pick up the birthday cake? [Did you pick it up?]
11. I’m going to take back the sleeping bag. [I’m going to take it back.]
12. I need to take my earrings out. [I need to take them out.]
SECTION 1 5-9
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Image Match
Listen to each sentence that has a separable verb. Then, match the sentence number with the correct
image.
Sentence 1: I need to pick out a dress for a wedding next weekend.
Sentence 2: My kids are always throwing their clothes on the floor. Now I have to pick them up to be washed.
Sentence 3: Turn off the light when you leave a room.
Sentence 4: I need to take back the CDs I just bought because my brother already owns them.
Sentence 5: I am going to give away all my old CDs.
Sentence 6: Take the garbage out tomorrow morning, please.
Sentence 7: It was a long day at work. It feels good to take off my work shoes.
Sentence 8: Could you please turn the light on?
Sentence 9: After I put on my shoes, I am leaving for work.
Sentence 10: If you aren’t going to eat that, then throw it away in the garbage.
1. Sentence 5 5. Sentence 7 8. Sentence 1
4. Sentence 6
5-10 SECTION 1
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Read the story. Then, fill in each blank with the correct phrasal verb from the word bank. The first blank
in the sentence is for the verb. The second blank is for the particle.
put back pick out take away wrote down pick up take out
found out fill in call back woke up take back put on
What a morning! First, my alarm clock didn’t go off, so I [woke] [up] later than usual. Then, I had to quickly
[pick] [out] my clothes and [put] them [on] before going to school. So, that was stressful as it takes me a
while to decide what I want to wear. Then my mom was mad at me because she [found] [out] that I got
a D on my math test last week. She said she will [take] my phone [away] if I don’t study more. That’s just
not cool; I need my phone! I also now have to [take] [out] the garbage for the next month. Yuck! After my
not-so-fun start to the morning, I had to go to work. Even though I was late already, I had to [pick] [up] my
friend Dan first. And then Dan had to stop at the department store to [take] [back] some shoes he bought
yesterday that didn’t fit well. We were so late for work at the toy store, and our boss was not happy with us.
He gave us the boring jobs to do for the day. He made me [put] all returned toys [back] that customers
brought in after the holiday. Dan had to [call] [back] all the customers that had left messages with questions.
Our boss also [wrote] [down] about ten other things we had to complete before we could go home! I am
seriously thinking about quitting and asking another friend to [fill] [in] for me for my next scheduled work
times. I want a new job.

Say a sentence that describes each picture using the correct phrasal verb. Choose from these phrasal
verbs: pick up, give away, put back, wake up, put on, throw away.
Possible answers:
1. Jack wakes up his 4. Mark picks his little

little brother. brother up.
2. He puts on 5. He puts the

his jacket. suit back.
3. He gives away 6. He throws toys

some toys. in the garbage.
SECTION 1 5-11
1
5
GRAMMAR
NOUNS USED AS ADJECTIVES
Adjectives are words that describe nouns. Adjectives are placed before the noun they describe. Nouns can also
function as adjectives by giving extra information. Here too, the “noun as adjective” is placed before the noun they
describe.
Examples Meanings
We bought our cat from a pet store.
The store sells pets.
(noun as adjective) (noun)
He has lots of sport cards.

The cards are about sports.
(noun as adjective) (noun)
Nouns as adjectives take a singular form

When using nouns as adjectives, always use the singular form, even if the noun in the sentence is plural.
One race for many boats boats race boat race
More than one race for many boats boats races boat races
Using more than one noun as adjective

You can use more than one noun as an adjective to describe a noun.
If you use an actual adjective in addition, place the adjective before the nouns as adjectives.
adjective noun as adjective noun as adjective noun
shop
boot shop
work boot shop
large work boot shop
Plural nouns with numbers as adjectives
When adding a number as an adjective to a plural noun, drop the -s on the noun and add hyphens.
a ten-years-old child A child who is ten years old is a ten-year-old child.
a two-cars family A family with two cars is a two-car family.
5-12 SECTION 1
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the noun phrase that best completes each sentence.
1. When you go to the delicatessen, could you please buy me ___________?
A. a large sandwich chicken B. a large chicken sandwich
2. This shoe store has ___________.
A. the basketball best shoes B. the best basketball shoes
3. Which pet store sells this type of ___________?
A. dog food B. food dog
4. I have to go to the toy store to buy ___________ for my grandson.
A. baby toys some B. some baby toys
5. Let’s pick out ___________ from the bakery down the street.
A. a delicious apple pie B. an apple delicious pie
6. Could you add chips to ___________?
A. the grocery list B. the list grocery
7. Which butcher shop has ____________?
A. pork good sausage B. good pork sausage
8. Don’t forget to buy me ___________ from the department store.
A. a new beach towel B. a beach new towel
9. Do they sell ___________ at a sports shop?
A. jerseys basketball B. basketball jerseys
10. Do you want to go to the clothing store with me? I need ___________.
A. some new dress pants B. some dress pants new
MAD Word Jumble
Put each noun phrase in the correct word order.
1. fun board game night 7. dark gray storm cloud
2. eleven-player soccer team 8. two-day outdoor film festival
3. very large world map 9. absolutely delicious sausage pizza
4. unhealthy cafeteria food 10. unbelievably talented college athlete
5. slightly inexpensive work boots 11. first-year college student
6. extremely beautiful wedding ring 12. interesting foreign language magazine

Read each meaning. Then, change the noun into an adjective, and type the noun phrase in the blank.
For example: You read: a cat that is female You type: [a female cat]
1. a garden that grows flowers [a flower garden]
2. a garden that grows vegetables [a vegetable garden]
3. soup that has chicken [chicken soup]
4. soup that has beef [beef soup]
5. a store that sells clothing [a clothing store]
6. a store that sells groceries [a grocery store]
7. a towel for the bathroom [a bathroom towel]
8. a towel for the kitchen [a kitchen towel]
9. a teacher who teaches history [a history teacher]
10. a teacher who teaches chemistry [a chemistry teacher] SECTION 1 5-13
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Listen to each noun phrase. Then, say the meaning of it in the pauses provided. Click “Done” to move on
to the next question. For example: You hear: a watch store You say: a store that sells watches
Possible answers:
1. a grocery list a list of groceries
2. a fashion magazine a magazine about fashion
3. a basketball game a game of basketball
4. a five-year-old boy a boy who is five years old
5. an English class a class to learn English
6. a male dog a dog who is male
7. a desk chair a chair for a desk
8. a rock band a band that plays rock music
9. a Spanish quiz a quiz on the Spanish language
10. a shopping mall a mall for shopping
CULTURAL NOTE
Shopping Hours in English Speaking Countries
One common trend is that stores in big cities are usually open longer than
stores in small towns and villages. Stores that stand alone may have longer
opening hours than stores that are inside a mall or shopping center. Some
businesses are open 24/7, such as grocery stores, pharmacies, gas stations,
and convenience stores. Most stores have special hours on holidays where
they are either closed when they would otherwise be open, or they have
limited hours to let their employees spend time with their families. In the
U.S., Canada, Australia, and Scotland, many stores are open 7 days a week
although there are usually limited opening hours on Sundays. Shopping on
Sundays in Wales and England used to be restricted by the government;
however, it is slowly becoming accepted as another shopping day.

MAD Open Recording
Read the story to yourself. Then, record yourself saying the story, but change the underlined words into
noun phrases.
For example: You read: He bought some food for his cat. You say: He bought some cat food.
Marek needed to run some errands. He put his dog that is 5 years old into his car and left his home that has
3 bedrooms. He drove to the store for pets in order to buy food for the dog. Then, he went to the store that
sells jewelry. He bought one necklace made of silver and a ring that is golden. Finally, he stopped at the store
that sells toys to buy a ball for soccer to give to his granddaughter who is 7 years old.
Marek needed to run some errands. He put his 5-year-old dog into his car and left his 3-bedroom
home. He drove to the pet store in order to buy dog food. Then, he went to the jewelry store. He
bought one silver necklace and a golden ring. Finally, he stopped at the toy store to buy a soccer ball
to give to his 7-year-old granddaughter.
5-14 SECTION 1
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 5.1.20 - Shopping List
5
LAD Class Activity
In this activity, students practice conversations related to their shopping lists. Customers will question
sales clerks about the availability and prices of items. The goal is for customers to get their items for the
least cost. Setup: Divide students into groups of 9: 3 play customers running errands and 6 play sales
clerks at different stores. Give each customer one of the shopping lists below and each sales clerk one
of the lists of items for sale. Directions for play: Items on the shopping lists are available from different
stores at different prices. Customers are looking for the lowest price for each item, so they must ask
questions of several sales clerks to determine where to buy each item. When customers decide to buy
an item, they record the price on their list. To end the activity: Customers write the total they paid on
their lists. Sales clerks then report what they charged for each item, and the customers determine the
cheapest amount they could have paid. The winners are the customers whose actual total equals the
cheapest total.
ACTIVITY 5.1.21 - Sort the Clothes

Each partner gets a piece of paper. The partners do not have to do the exact same thing with the items,
but they need to have a conversation about what they are going to do with each item.
1. Cut the images on the dotted lines.
2. Discuss with your partner what you think you will do with that item. Do you want to keep it, try to sell
it to a second-hand shop, give it away to a friend or family member, or throw it away? Don’t forget to say
why you will do that.
3. Place the item in the correct box so that you can see which items go where. Move onto the next item
until all images are in a box.
4. Discuss with your partner at the end what you and he/she did differently.
SECTION 1 5-15
1
5
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 5.1.21 - Sort the Clothes (Continued)
KEEP SELL GIVE AWAY THROW AWAY
Example:

MAD Open Recording
Talk about two items from each box, and tell why you put them in there.
CULTURAL NOTE
Rummage Sales
“To rummage” means to search or look through by moving items around. Rummage sales may be held privately
by people who recently cleaned their houses, or by churches or small towns to raise money for an event.
Here, used clothes, dishes, electronics, furniture, holiday decorations, books, and more are laid out on tables
and hung up on clothing racks for people to look through. Items for sale are almost always used or previously
owned, and therefore are much cheaper than buying them brand new. These items can also be antiques that
are worth quite a bit of money.
Other sales are similar to rummage sales:

garage sales and yard sales, where people sell unwanted items to neighbors from their own driveways or
front yards; estate sales, where people sell almost everything they own because they are moving or someone
recently died; and flea markets, large typically outdoor events with many sellers including local artists,
collectors, and private sellers.
5-16 SECTION 1
1
5
READING
TIPS FOR DECLUTTERING YOUR HOME
It’s that time of the year! Winter is finally over, the leaves are growing on trees, flowers are blooming, spring is here!
Spring, for me, means that it’s time to clean out my closet, put away my warm winter clothes, and throw away all the
clutter that I have been collecting over the past few months. I have had plenty of time to perfect my decluttering
process, so today I want to share my tips and tricks with you.
1. Cleaning and getting rid of things always seems very overwhelming. Many people don’t even start this
process because they are afraid they won’t ever finish. My advice: go through your house room by room, closet by
closet, drawer by drawer. Don’t try to do it all in one day as this is too much to do in a short period of time. It’s very
motivating when you see the results of your work. That’s why you should set aside 30 minutes to one hour per day
and only focus on one room at a time. Once you start to see changes in that room, you will want to keep cleaning.
2. Find others to help you or participate in a cleaning challenge. There are many people who need a little push or
motivation to start decluttering, and a little challenge can be the perfect thing to get you started. You can look online
for decluttering challenges, too. I usually find a couple of friends, and we create a goal of a certain number of items we
have to get rid of. This year, we decided we have to find ten items per day for ten days that we cannot keep.
3. Label boxes or piles to stay organized. I usually have four different boxes: one is called “Give Away,” another
is “Sell,” the third is labeled “Throw Away,” and the fourth box is “Keep/Put Back.” Having these boxes will help you
decide what to do with each item.
4. Give-away box: Anything you don’t need anymore but is clean, intact, and working can go in the give-away bin:
shoes, clothes, dishes, lamps, books, etc. After I fill this box, I host a “talk and trade party.” I invite friends who also
participated in my decluttering challenge, and they bring their give-away boxes to my house. We set everything up in
different rooms and then go “shopping.” The best thing about it: You don’t need any money! Maybe someone brought
a shirt that you really like or a book that you always wanted to read. It’s a lot of fun, and we are all super excited about
the amount of stuff we cleaned out. We sit, talk, try on different clothes or shoes, and have a good time. Anything that
is left at my house will be given to charity the next day.
5. Sell: Any items that are still in great condition will be put into a sell box. It never hurts to try to make a little bit
of extra money. I know there are many online resale shops, but I like doing this in person. I have a rummage sale
every other year, or sometimes I partner with a neighbor or friend, and we sell our stuff. Another option is to go to a
second-hand store and sell your items there. There are a lot of second-hand stores, especially for clothing, children’s
toys, or furniture. All you have to do is find out where these are, drop your items off, and come back to pick up money
from what they were able to sell! Some social media sites have pages where you can sell items locally, too.
6. Throw Away: It may be hard to admit, but I actually have a lot of stuff in my house that I just need to throw
away. This box usually needs to be emptied a couple of times during this decluttering process. Ripped clothes,
broken glassware, expired food, and lots and lots of paper. It’s embarrassing, but for some reason there are piles of
brochures, mail, receipts, and papers everywhere around my house. It feels so good to finally throw all of this away!
7. Keep/Put Back: I am not a huge declutterer or minimalist, so I don’t get rid of everything. There are a few items
that I pick up, try on, or find that I just can’t say goodbye to yet. These items go in the keep box. After I am done
decluttering, I find a spot for them and put them back in my closet, cabinet, or dresser drawers. Maybe next year they
will end up in a different bin!
SECTION 1 5-17
1
5
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
Match each pink word from the reading with the correct definition or synonym.
1. to grow blooming
2. things you don’t need clutter
3. to throw away getting rid of
4. stressful overwhelming
5. competition challenge
6. groups piles
7. complete, whole intact
8. a group that doesn’t earn money charity
9. sell things at your home rummage sale
10. to tell the truth admit
11. broken ripped
12. not good anymore expired

MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if each decluttering tip is true or false based on the reading.
1. Having a rummage sale or bringing items to a second-hand store is a good A. True B. False
way to donate items.
2. Decluttering is an easy task, and people enjoy it a lot. A. True B. False
3. You should have five different piles or boxes. A. True B. False
4. A “talk and trade” party can be a fun way to exchange unwanted items with friends. A. True B. False
5. Start organizing one room at a time. A. True B. False
6. The “give-away” box is for all your broken stuff that needs to go to a dump. A. True B. False
7. It’s okay to keep a few items after sorting through your house. A. True B. False
8. The “throw-away” pile is often the biggest pile. A. True B. False
9. Set up a cleaning challenge with your friends so you keep each other motivated. A. True B. False

MAD Open Recording
1. Do you have a spring cleaning routine?
2. How do you feel about decluttering?
3. Which of the tips from the text do you find helpful? Which ones do you think are not helpful?
4. Do you have any other tips or tricks for someone who wants to declutter and be more organized?
5-18 SECTION 1
1
5
VOCABULARY
CLOTHING AND FASHION

MAD Open Recording
Say as much as possible about the Section 2 Vocabulary pictures. What types of clothing items and
materials do you see? Is there anything that you can understand on the labels or tags?


MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text
SECTION 2 5-19
1
5
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. I need some athletic shoes for basketball. 6. He needs a new pair of socks.
2. Is there a brand you prefer to wear? 7. I am not a fan of leather clothing.
3. My button just fell off my shirt. 8. How does this perfume smell to you?
4. Do these shoes go with this outfit? 9. Could I borrow that dress for the dance?
5. I have worn out my favorite sweatshirt. 10. That floral pattern is really pretty on you.

1. [What kind of material is the shirt?] 6. [I would like a couple new pairs of tennis shoes.]
2. [I need to change my dirty jeans.] 7. [Their logo would look better striped.]
3. [They have a few sweatshirts with pockets.] 8. [Is this sweater made of cotton or wool?]
4. [I can’t find the size on the label.] 9. [The tag tells you how to wash it.]
5. [What brand of cologne do you wear?] 10. [Your plaid pants don’t match your floral shirt.]

MAD Image Match
Listen to the following conversation between a salesperson and customer. Match each price with the
correct clothing item.
Customer: Excuse me, can you help me figure out these prices? With all these sales going on, I don’t know
what each item ends up costing.
Salesperson: Absolutely. So, these black and white workout pants are $9.98. And this black and white shirt
costs $8.98.
Customer: Fantastic! What about this floral skirt?
Salesperson: With this 50% off coupon here, this floral skirt will be $21.75.
Customer: Hmm, and the plaid skirt?
Salesperson: That is not on sale, so full price: $50.
Customer: That’s too much, but thank you. Do you have any other skirts on sale?
Salesperson: This polka dot skirt is only $15.
Customer: Perfect, I like it! Now, what about these sweatshirts?
Salesperson: The pink striped one is $42 and the other pink one is $32.39.
Customer: Hmm, I think I only want the striped one then. Lastly, I have to pick one of these three jackets. How
much is the pink one with pockets?
Salesperson: $51.99
Customer: And the leather jacket?
Salesperson: $63.11
Customer: And the jean jacket?
Salesperson: That one is on sale for $24.57.
Customer: Well, that’s an easy decision. I’ll also take the jean jacket. Thanks so much for your help!
Salesperson: You are very welcome!
5-20 SECTION 2
1
5
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 5.2.7 - LISTEN (Continued)
MAD Image Match
1. $32.39 5. $50.00 8. $9.98
2. $51.99 6. $24.57 9. $63.11
3. $42.00 7. $8.98 10. $15.00
4. $21.75
CULTURAL NOTE
Dress Codes
Have you ever been unsure of what to wear to an event, and your outfit was very different from what everyone
else was wearing? Do you remember how uncomfortable that felt? The next time you are in this situation, ask
someone if there is a dress code for the event. A dress code is the rules or guidelines of what to wear. You
wouldn’t want to run errands in a formal evening gown, just as you wouldn’t attend a job interview in your
pajamas or sweatpants. Here is a brief overview of common dress code terms and what you can wear to
match those dress codes:
Appearance doesn’t matter

Informal: whatever you want = wear sweatpants, shorts, jeans, athletic clothes, tennis shoes
Casual: laid-back and open dress code = wear shorts, jeans, T-shirt, comfortable shoes
Look nice, but not too fancy

Business casual: look presentable = wear khakis or dress pants, button-up shirt or nice sweater, nice shoes
Trendy: be creative = wear a stylish top or dress, blazer, generally chic and modern clothing
Look your best

Semi-formal: professional = wear a suit and tie, dress, or skirt and top
Formal/Black Tie: dressed up = wear a dark suit or tuxedo, evening gown or cocktail dress
White Tie: extremely formal = wear a tuxedo with coattails, white gloves, ball gown
SECTION 2 5-21
1
5
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Look at the clothing images, and pu together three different outfits. Describe the clothing and accessories
you will wear for each event.
Pick out an outfit for:
1. a day at school
2. going out with friends
3. a wedding celebration

1. Is there a material of clothing you prefer to wear?
2. Is there a material you don’t like to wear?
3. Do you wear perfume or cologne?
4. Do you borrow clothes from friends or a family member?
5. What type of pattern do you like on clothes?
6. Do you have a favorite brand of clothing or shoes? If so, what is it?
5-22 SECTION 2
1
5
GRAMMAR
DETERMINERS: BOTH, EITHER, NEITHER
Determiners are words that are used to show what noun the sentence is referring to. In sentences that contain a
pair of nouns, the determiners used are “both,” “either,” and “neither.” They cannot be used with more than two
nouns or when the number of nouns is not known.
both = one and the other in the pair

Formation using “both” Examples
I will buy both shirts at the mall. I need a green shirt and a
both + plural noun
blue shirt.
both of + determiner + plural noun I will buy both of the shirts at the mall.
both of + object pronoun I’ll buy both of them.
either = one or the other in the pair

Formation using “either” Examples
either + singular noun I will buy either shirt at the mall. I need one shirt.
either of + determiner + plural noun I will buy either of these shirts at the mall.
either of + object pronoun I will buy either of them.
neither = none of the nouns in the pair

Formation using “neither” Examples
I will buy neither shirt at the mall. I’ll buy them online
neither + singular noun
instead.
neither of + determiner + plural noun I will buy neither of those shirts at the mall.
neither of + object pronoun I will buy neither of them.
Using both, either, and neither with conjunctions.
Use these determiners with their corresponding conjunction when you want to include the noun pair.
both … and I will buy both the green shirt and the blue shirt at the mall.
either … or I will buy either the green shirt or the blue shirt at the mall.
I will buy neither the green shirt nor the blue shirt at the
neither … nor
mall.
Note: When using “either” and “neither” as subjective pronouns, they are singular.
Neither of these shirts fit me. Neither of these shirts fits me.
Either of those shirts are my style. Either of those shirts is my style.
SECTION 2 5-23
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the determiner that best completes each sentence.
1. She wants a new sweatshirt but doesn’t like the two styles. She’ll buy ___________ the one with pockets nor
the one with stripes.
A. both B. either C. neither
2. He can only afford to buy one bottle of cologne. He’ll buy ___________ the gray bottle or the red bottle.
3. I need two pairs of pants to go with my new tennis shoes. I’ll get ___________ the leather pants and the cotton
pants.
4. This classroom smells strange. It smells like ___________ popcorn or pizza.
5. She likes ___________ romance nor comedy. She prefers horror films.
6. I just got a bunch of birthday money! I’ll buy ___________ the athletic shoes and the sandals.
7. Joshua pushed me into the lake while I was wearing my clothes. ___________ shoes came off, and I can’t find
them anywhere!
A. Both B. Either C. Neither
8. A: I spilled some soda on my skirt! Can I borrow some clothes?
B: Sure, you can have ___________ the floral skirt or the polka dot dress.
9. A: Should I wear the shirt with the logo or the one without a logo?
B: ___________. They’re both dirty, and they smell! You need to do laundry.
10. A: I only have two clean shirts. Which one do you like?
B: Hmm, they both look good. ___________ shirt is fine.

Complete each sentence with both of, neither of, either...or, or neither...nor.
For example: You read: My sister and I like music. [ ] us like music. You type: [Both of]
1. I don’t like leather clothing. I really don’t like wool.
I like [neither] leather [nor] wool clothing.
2. Jessica is wearing a plaid shirt today and Rose is too.
[Both of] them are wearing plaid shirts.
3. A: Where can I buy a good chocolate cake?
B: You can buy one [either] at the grocery store [or] at the bakery.
4. I like this logo, and I like that one.
I like [both of] them.
5-24 SECTION 2
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
5. I can’t decide which one I should wear. I’m going to wear [either] my polka dot dress [or] my sister’s
striped one.
6. This sweatshirt doesn’t have a pocket. That one doesn’t have a pocket.
[Neither] this sweatshirt [nor] that sweatshirt has a pocket.
7. I am not a fan of the striped blouse. I also don’t like this silk blouse.
[Neither of] these shirts is my style.
8. Which one do you think I should buy? I don’t have enough money for [both of] them.
9. You don’t need two black belts. You can [either] buy this one [or] that one.
10. She needs to buy a new dress. [Neither of] her dresses is in style anymore.

Sam and Zach are shopping for new sports clothes for their upcoming football season. Listen as they shop
for different clothing items. Type both, either, or neither in their boxes based on what they said.
Sam: Hey, Zach. What are you looking for at the sports store today?
Zach: Well, Coach said we need socks and shoes that match our football uniforms.
Sam: I am also looking for new shoes. My football cleats from last year do not fit anymore. I need a couple
new workout shirts, too.
Zach: Why don’t we start looking at the shoes then since we both need them?
Sam: Okay. I see the shoes over there. Look, they are buy one pair, get another pair for half price right now.
Zach: Wow! Great deal.
Sam: Which brand do you like best? It looks like Nike or Under Armour are on sale.
Zach: Under Armour shoes are always too small for my feet. My feet aren’t thin enough for them. But, I also
don’t see any Nike shoes in my size. Bummer, I can’t buy any shoes here.
Sam: These Nike ones fit me. And the Under Armour actually fit me too. I think I will buy one pair for practices
and one for games since I can get these for half price.
Zach: That’s a great idea. Maybe I will have better luck with socks. They are buy two, get one for free.
Sam: You need red or black socks to match our team uniform.
Zach: It looks like they have red, but not black in my size. I will buy one red pair then. Do you need any?
Sam: Nope. I have enough socks. But I see the workout shirts over there. I want to look at those quickly.
Zach: Me, too. I could use one new workout shirt. Look, these are buy one get one half off, too!
Sam: Well, the window said everything is on sale! Looks like I will have to buy a couple then. I will buy this blue
one and this green one. Perfect.
Zach: I like this bright orange shirt and the light blue is cool too. I don’t have enough money for both, so I can
only get one.
Sam: Let’s find a cash register to pay for these items.
SECTION 2 5-25
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Zach Sam
shirts both either
socks either neither
shoes neither both

Listen to each set of two statements. Then, type a statement combining the information from those two
statements by using one of the determiners (both, either, or neither).
Possible answers:
1. I can meet you at 5.
I can meet you either at 5 or 6.
I can meet you at 6.
2. He doesn’t like the blue sweater.
He likes neither the blue nor the red sweater.
He doesn’t like the red sweater.
3. Betsy wants to try on the polka dot dress.
Betsy wants to try on both dresses.
She also wants to try on the striped dress.
4. Rachel is a very good friend.
They are both very good friends.
Tiffany is another very good friend.
5. It is too cold for my leather jacket.
Neither of my jackets is warm enough.
The jean jacket is not warm enough.
6. Those shoes hurt my feet.
I do not want to wear either pair of shoes.
Those shoes are too small.
7. He may look for athletic shorts at the sports store.
He will look for shorts at both stores.
He will look for athletic shorts at the department store.
8. This outfit is not my style.
Neither this outfit nor that outfit is my style.
That outfit is also not my style.

MAD Open Recording
Describe what the people are wearing using determiners (both, either, neither).
5-26 SECTION 2
1
5
GRAMMAR
ANOTHER, OTHER(S), THE OTHER(S)
Word Meaning Use Examples
This cookie is delicious! May I have

It can be used as an adjective (in front of another cookie?
Talking about
a noun) or a pronoun (replacing a noun).
another one more of a
given noun.
It is always singular and non-specific. This cookie is delicious! May I have
another?
It is most often used as an adjective.

Samira loves modern furniture.
It can be singular or plural. Other furniture is too ugly.
Talking about When singular, it describes all the rest Some people like cats, and other
other more of a given of the given noun. people like dogs.
noun. When used with a singular noun, it
needs another determiner in front, like My favorite brother is 28. My
“the,”“my,” or “any”. other brother is 25. (I only have 2
brothers.)
When plural, it’s non-specific.
There are 4 students in this class.
3 students are from France and
It can be used as an adjective or a the other student is from Italy.
Talking about the
pronoun.
last one/ones of
There are 4 students in this class.
a given noun.
the other As an adjective, it can be singular or 2 students are from Egypt and the
It describes all the
plural. other students are from Morocco.
rest of the given
noun.
As a pronoun, it is always singular. There are 4 students in this class.
3 students are from France and
the other is from Italy.
Talking about It can only be used as a pronoun.

Some flowers are purple. Others
others more of a given
are red. Others are blue.
noun. It is always plural and non-specific.
Talking about all

the last ones of
It can only be used as a pronoun. Most of the houses on my street
a given noun. It
the others are 1-level homes. The others are
describes all the
It is always plural. 2-level homes.
rest of the given
noun.
SECTION 2 5-27
1
5
GRAMMAR
CHEAT SHEET
pronoun
another singular non-specific
adjective
singular the rest
other adjective
plural non-specific
pronoun singular
the other the rest
adjective singular/plural
others pronoun plural non-specific
the others pronoun plural the rest

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct pronoun or adjective for each sentence.
1. There are 12 desks in the room. 11 are blue and ___________ is red.
A. another B. the other C. other
2. Cotton is a material. Leather is ___________ material.
3. We have three teachers. Our music and gym teachers are tall, and our ___________ teacher is short.
4. I have two possible outfits to wear tonight. One outfit is sporty and ___________ outfit is dressy.
5. I used to live with five people, but now I only have one roommate. ___________ moved out.
A. The others B. Another C. Others
6. Tennis shoes are more comfortable than ___________ shoes.
7. I work a lot. I go to school on Mondays and Tuesdays, but I work all ___________ days of the week.
8. This sweatshirt is too small. Could I try on ___________?
9. Some people like plaid shirts. ___________ like striped shirts.
A. Other B. The others C. Others
10. There were three perfume bottles on the table. One is here, but where are ___________?
A. the other B. the others C. others
5-28 SECTION 2
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
In Style, Out of Style
Take a look back in history about 20 to 30 years, and you will probably find hairstyles, colors, patterns, and
clothing designs that remind you of the current styles today. People often say that fashion is cyclical,
meaning that what is in style today will go out of style in a few years and will eventually come back in style
years or even decades later. Each year, new clothing trends pop up and those styles are available in stores.
If you like to stay on top of trends, you will spend money on designs that you might not want to wear in a
couple years. Bell bottoms, overalls, puffy sleeves, fringe, oversized shirts and sweatshirts with leggings,
feathered hair, high-waisted pants, platform shoes, and plaid skirts are all examples of trends that have gone
through a full fashion cycle.

Complete each sentence with one of the following: another, other, the other, the others.
Josh: Hey, Krista! It’s good to see you!
Krista: Hi, Josh! I know you’ve already met Kevin, but have you met my [other] brother Steven?
Josh: No, I haven’t. Nice to meet you, Steven.
Steven: You too, Josh! Do you know when [the others] are going to be here? I made reservations for six
people at 7 p.m., and it’s already 6:55.
Josh: They should be here in [another] minute. They accidentally drove to [the other] mall in town!
Krista: Ha! What a silly mistake. Say, I like those tennis shoes, Josh. Are they new?
Josh: They are! This brand uses awesome patterns. [Other] brands always make such boring shoes.
Steven: And yours are unique! I’ve never seen polka dot shoes that match a person’s sweatshirt!
Josh: Did you see that the logo on the right shoe is black? On [the other], it’s green.
Krista: That’s awesome! You’ll never put on the wrong shoe by accident.
Steven: Good point! You know, I hope [the others] will be here soon. Other people are waiting for tables, too.

Friends are meeting at a restaurant in the mall. Listen to their conversation as they wait for the others to
arrive. Then, read each statement, and decide whether it is true or false. If the statement is true, type
[True] in the first blank, and then re-type the sentence exactly how you read it. If it is false, type [False] in
the first blank, and type the correct new sentence. Spell out numbers.
True statement example: False statement example:

You read: Krista and Josh are friends. You read: Their reservation is for three people.
You type: [True] [Krista and Josh are friends.] You type: [False] [Their reservation is for six people.]
SECTION 2 5-29
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Josh: Hey, Krista! It’s good to see you!
Krista: Hi, Josh! I know you’ve already met Kevin, but have you met my other brother Steven?
Josh: No, I haven’t. Nice to meet you, Steven.
Steven: You too, Josh! Do you know when the others are going to be here? I made reservations for six
people at 7 p.m., and it’s already 6:55.
Josh: They should be here in another minute. They accidentally drove to the other mall in town!
Krista: Ha! What a silly mistake. Say, I like those tennis shoes, Josh. Are they new?
Josh: They are! This brand uses awesome patterns. Others always make such boring shoes.
Steven: And yours are unique! I’ve never seen polka dot shoes that match a person’s sweatshirt!
Josh: Did you see that the logo on the right shoe is black? On the other, it’s green.
Krista: That’s awesome! You’ll never put on the wrong shoe by accident.
Steven: Good point! You know, I hope the others will be here soon. Other people are waiting for tables, too.
1. Krista has three brothers. [False] [Krista has two brothers.]

2. Three people are late. [True] [Three people are late.]
3. The latecomers will arrive at 6:55. [False] [The latecomers will arrive at 6:56.]
4. There is one mall in town. [False] [There are two malls in town.]
5. “Others” refers to brands. [True] [“Others” refers to brands.]
6. “The other” refers to the right shoe. [False] [“The other” refers to the left shoe.]
7. Josh has already met her brother Steven. [False] [Josh has already met her brother Kevin.]
8. Other people are waiting for tables, too. [True] [Other people are waiting for tables, too.]

Listen to each question. Then, choose the correct answer, and say it in the pause provided. Click “Done” to
1. Would anyone like more cake? D. I will have another piece, please.
2. Do you know where the others are right now? C. No, do you?
3. I am looking for my other earring. Have you seen it? F. Yes, I found it on the floor. Here!
4. Which outfit do you think matches best? A. I don’t know. Both look great.
5. Are there any other clothing stores nearby? E. Yes, another one is right across the street.
6. Have you heard there is another shirt sale? B. Yes, another one starts tomorrow.
5-30 SECTION 2
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 5.2.19 - Your Fashion Preferences
5
beginning of this activity and hit record. After the students are done with their interviews, select a few of the
filled-out questionnaires and share them with the class. Have students guess who gave the answers.
In this activity, students work in pairs and interview each other about their fashion/clothing preferences
and fashion trends. First, the students read the interview questions. Then, they write two of their own
questions to ask their partners for numbers nine and ten. After that, the students take turns asking each
other the questions and writing down the answers. When all questions have been answered, switch
partners and ask and answer the questions again.
Interview Questions Partner 1 Answers Partner 2 Answers

1. What is your favorite clothing item you own?
Why is it your favorite?
2. Do you have a favorite color to wear?
3. What kind of clothes do you like? (workout

clothes, comfortable, baggy, tight….)
4. What kind of clothes would you never wear
and why?
5. Do you prefer clothes with pockets, zippers,
or buttons? Or none of these features?
6. What do you normally like to wear to school?
7. Do you have a favorite brand?
8. What’s your favorite material for clothes?

(leather, cotton, silk, wool…?)
9. Your question:
10. Your question:

MAD Open Recording
Compare and contrast your fashion preferences with your partners’ preferences.
SECTION 2 5-31
1
5
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 5.2.21 - Can I help you find something?
TEACHER NOTE: If you do this as a pairing activity and want to listen to these conversations later, launch the
In this activity, students are given sentences from a conversation between a salesperson and a customer
in a department store. Two students will be working together. One has the sentences from the customer;
the other one has the sentences from the sales assistant. The sentences are not in the correct order,
except for the first sentence. The salesperson will start the conversation, followed by the customer. They
will have to number the sentences and each sentence can only be used once. (The salesperson gets the
odd numbers: 1,3,5..., the customer gets the even numbers: 2,4,6…)
Salesperson:
5. Good afternoon. Can I help you find something?
13. Yes, we do. Everything from Tommy Hilfiger is on sale this week.
11. Absolutely. How about these? They are a size 8.
15. What about these black ones then? They are only $25, too!
1. We have these pink and black ones or these polka dot pants only.
7. All of these shirts are on sale, and they come in every color you could imagine.
3. Okay, not a problem. So the leggings and shoes then? That’s $47.99.
9. You’re very welcome.
Customer:
6. Good afternoon! Yes, I am looking for workout clothes. Do you have any on sale?
14. Perfect! First, can you help me find size 8 shoes?
12. Hmm, right size, but I don’t like the pattern. Maybe some single colored ones instead.
2. Great, I like black and the price is great! Now somework-out pants. These can be a little colorful.
Maybe stripes or floral?
4. The pink and black ones then. Now, I am only missing a shirt.
10. I don’t really like the logo on the front here. Maybe I’ll get the shirt somewhere else this time.
8. Here is my card. Thanks for the help!
CULTURAL NOTE
Black Friday and Cyber Monday
Black Friday and Cyber Monday are the two most popular shopping days of the year because stores have
extreme sales on many expensive items. These shopping days both occur at the end of November after
Thanksgiving in the U.S. Thanksgiving is Thursday; Black Friday is the day after. Because expensive items
are limited, many shoppers stand in very long lines for hours (or even through the night) so that they can
be among the first in the store. Cyber Monday is a huge online shopping day that occurs the Monday after
Thanksgiving. Both shopping days are becoming more popular around the world, not just in the United States.
5-32 SECTION 2
1
5
READING
DRESS TO IMPRESS
1. Robotel Fashion: We live in a world of fast fashion, and it
Dress to

feels like new trends appear every other day. It’s hard to keep
track of which brand is “in,” which brand is “out,” and what to
wear in order to look stylish. Patterns, pockets, fabrics...the
Impress

fashion world is always changing. Luckily, we have fashion expert
Stephanie Archer joining us today who can clear things up.
Stephanie, we invited you to help our readers with some styling
tips and to educate us on the latest fashion do’s and don’ts.
Stephanie: Thank you for having me and allowing me to
Stephanie
speak about one of my passions. And you’re right; it’s difficult to
keep track of all the newest trends in fashion, but there are
Archer
some simple rules to follow when you want to dress to impress.
2. Robotel Fashion: Our readers sent us some questions. So, let’s see what your advice is. Julieta wants to know, “Do
you suggest high quality or cheap clothing items?”
Stephanie: Whenever possible, spend a few extra dollars on high quality fabrics. Whether that’s a cotton t-shirt, a
leather jacket, a silk scarf, or a wool pullover, it’s worth spending a little more for good quality. These items will last
longer and won’t wear out as quickly. In the end, it will even save you money because you won’t have to buy new
clothes every couple of months.
3. Robotel Fashion: Our next question is from Dan, “What do you think of patterns, both for women and men?”
Stephanie: Ladies, go with either vertical striped patterns or no stripes at all. Vertical stripes are flattering on all body
types, whereas horizontal stripes don’t look great on everyone. Gentlemen, don’t be afraid to own as many as ten
different plaid shirts. They will always be in style.
4. Robotel Fashion: “My friends always tell me I should buy more brand-name clothing, but I don’t really like anything
with a label on it. What’s your advice?”
Stephanie: Neither an expensive price tag nor a brand name should be the reason you buy a piece of clothing. Look for
items that are comfortable and make you feel good. Trends can be fun, but often what is fashionable one day may not
be in style the next.
5. Robotel Fashion: Christine wants to know, “What are some must-have items in a woman’s closet?”
Stephanie: Make sure you own a couple of basic shirts, both black and white. They will go with anything and are easy
to match with patterned pants, cardigans, scarves, or shoes.
6. Robotel Fashion: “I love everything with a pattern,” says Diana, “but my husband tells me I overdo it.”
Stephanie: Don’t combine more than one pattern in your outfit. A striped blouse, polka dot skirt, and floral scarf rarely
go well together. Either of those will make a statement on its own but will be too much when combined.
7. Robotel Fashion: Tom has an interesting point of view, “If I didn’t know better, I’d say everyone in America likes to
work out. Everywhere I go people are dressed in their workout clothes. What’s up with that?”
Stephanie: Be careful with the “I just worked out” look. Workout clothes, a sweatshirt, and tennis shoes are great when
you actually work out. But wearing those out and about just to look sporty is silly. I have seen way too many people,
women especially, who wear their yoga pants to the grocery store, cafes, and restaurants.
SECTION 2 5-33
1
5
READING
ACTIVITIES
8. Robotel Fashion: Scott apparently loves black as his girlfriend sent in this question, “How can I convince my
boyfriend to stop wearing only black. It looks ridiculous.”
Stephanie: Don’t try to do a monochrome look. It’s almost impossible to pull off wearing a top and bottoms of the
same color. There are way too many shades of the same color out there. If the colors don’t match perfectly, then it
won’t look good. So, I say no to combining a black shirt with black pants and black shoes.
9. Robotel Fashion: These are great tips, Stephanie. Thank you! I usually just try to find clean clothes, ha!
Stephanie: And that’s really what it comes down to! Don’t try to overdo it. Keep it simple, clean, and maybe add a few
accessories. Those really are the most important rules. And if you are unsure of how to dress for a specific occasion,
come check out my blog, “Dress to Impress,” and find out about appropriate outfits for each dress code out there.
10. Robotel Fashion: After these tips today, I will definitely be following your blog. Again, thank you for sharing your
fashion advice with us. Our readers will be dressed well because of you!

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the best answer for each question based on the reading.
1. Where in the reading does Stephanie suggest 4. Where in the interview does Stephanie tell
that clothing should not be uncomfortable? readers how they can save a little money?
A. paragraph 3, sentence 3 A. paragraph 2, sentence 7
B. paragraph 7, sentence 4 B. paragraph 4, sentence 3
C. paragraph 4, sentence 4 C. paragraph 8, sentence 4
2. Where in the conversation do you read that 5. Where in the interview does a reader ask
fashion trends are always changing? about which clothing items every woman should own?
3. Where do you first learn that people sent in 6. In which sentence does Stephanie tell readers
their fashion questions for Stephanie to answer? where they can find more information about fashion?
5-34 SECTION 2
1
5
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if each statement is a fashion do or don’t based on the reading.
1. Wear horizontal stripes. A. Do B. Don’t
2. Combine multiple patterns in one outfit. A. Do B. Don’t
3. Own more basic, solid shirts because they match with everything. A. Do B. Don’t
4. Wear multiple clothing items of the same color. A. Do B. Don’t
Stephani
5. e
Wear workout clothes when you work out. A. Do B. Don’t
Archer 6. Choose clothes that make you feel good. A. Do B. Don’t
7. Choose high quality instead of an inexpensive price tag. A. Do B. Don’t
8. Try to overdo it and wear lots of accessories. A. Do B. Don’t
9. Choose brand names instead of comfort. A. Do B. Don’t
10. If you are unsure of how to dress, check out her blog. A. Do B. Don’t

MAD Open Recording
1. What kind of clothes do you usually buy and why?
2. Do you have a favorite brand or designer that you like to wear?
3. What items are in your favorite outfit?
4. What are some fashion do’s and don’ts in your culture?
5. How do you dress to impress (look your best)?
SECTION 2 5-35
1
5
VOCABULARY
GOING SHOPPING

MAD Open Text


MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text
5-36 SECTION 3
1
5
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. Did you see the ad for the big shoe sale?
2. Did she give you a receipt and your change?
3. That outfit was such a good deal.
4. I don’t want to spend too much money today.
5. Can you show me where the dressing rooms are?
6. We do not want to wait in line.
7. I like them both so much that I cannot choose.
8. Let’s look up the store hours before we go there.
9. Can I please put these clothes on hold?
10. Is he ready to check out now?

1. [Don’t forget to look at the price tag.] 6. [Are you going to return those boots?]
2. [You saved a lot of money on that necklace.] 7. [The price of this cologne is very reasonable.]
3. [I prefer to buy inexpensive workout clothes.] 8. [This floral shirt is not on sale.]
4. [Can you help me make a decision?] 9. [You must pay at the cash register.]
5. [It is so hard to choose.] 10. [The sale is only for cotton sweatshirts.]

Look at the following mixed-up conversations. There are three different conversations happening be-
tween a customer and a sales assistant. Sort the conversations into Conversation 1, Conversation 2, and
Conversation 3. Place each letter under the correct conversation in the correct order. The order will be
graded. Conversation 1 = someone shopping for shoes. Conversation 2 = someone shopping for a shirt.
Conversation 3 = someone making a return.
Customer:
A: Excuse me, can you help me find some athletic shoes?
B: I’d like to return this jacket. The zipper is broken.
C: Hi there. I am looking for a matching top for these jeans.
Sales Assistant:
D: Oh, wow. How did that happen?
E: Sure, let’s go over to the shirt section. What size shirt do you wear? Medium?
F: Of course. What size do you wear? And any specific brand you are looking for?
SECTION 3 5-37
1
5
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
Customer:
G: I am a size 7. I don’t really care about the brand, but they have to be comfortable.
H: I am not sure. I noticed it when I got home.
I: Yes, medium should work. I have so many shirts at home but want something more colorful.
Sales Assistant:
J: What about this plaid shirt? It’s cotton, and also nice and colorful.
K: How about these? They are Nike and super comfortable. I have these and like them a lot.
L: Well, to be honest, I don’t think we can take this back.
Customer:
M: Well, can I get a different jacket instead? It should not break after wearing it only once.
N: Hmm, do they come in a different color? I don’t really care for the bright orange.
O: Oh yeah. I like it a lot. Thank you for your help.
Conversation 1 Conversation 2 Conversation 3
A C B
F E D
G I H
K J L
N O M
CULTURAL NOTE
Express Lanes & Self Check-Out
Once you are done finding all the items on your shopping list, you may have to wait in line to check out. If you
only have a few things to buy, you can often go to an express lane, which typically allows customers with “15
items or less” to check out. The waiting line at express lanes will be faster than lines at normal checkout lanes
because people have fewer things to buy. At some stores, you might even be able to use a self check-out lane.
Here, employees stand around to help customers if they need assistance, and cameras watch the customers to
make sure everything is being paid for.

MAD Multiple Choice
Read each question. Then, listen to the three responses given, and choose which answer is NOT correct.
1. What is your return policy?
A. Answer 1: You can return anything within 14 days.
B. Answer 2: We don’t have change.
C. Answer 3: We take it back as long as the tags are on.
2. For how long can you hold these clothing items?
A. Answer 1: We have to put them back on the shelf in two days.
B. Answer 2: You have until tomorrow evening to pick them up.
C. Answer 3: You can try them on now.
5-38 SECTION 3
1
5
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
3. Did you see all the good deals at the shoe store?
A. Answer 1: Yes, let’s go shopping!
B. Answer 2: Yes, the buy one, get one free is awesome!
C. Answer 3: Yes, the prices are not reasonable at all.
4. From where did you buy those workout clothes?
A. Answer 1: I returned them at the second-hand store.
B. Answer 2: I got them at Bailey’s department store.
C. Answer 3: I bought them at the clothing store downtown.
5. How long did you wait in line for the new cell phone?
A. Answer 1: I was there for six hours.
B. Answer 2: I checked out at 5:00.
C. Answer 3: My brother and I waited all night long for the store to open.
6. What do you think of this outfit?
A. Answer 1: It is made of silk.
B. Answer 2: I think everything goes together really well.
C. Answer 3: I love the skirt with that shirt.
7. Where is the cash register?
A. Answer 1: It is in the front of the store.
B. Answer 2: It is next to the dressing rooms.
C. Answer 3: I already paid.
8. What are the store hours for the butcher shop?
A. Answer 1: It opens at 9 a.m. and closes at 9 p.m.
B. Answer 2: I went there at 11 a.m. yesterday.
C. Answer 3: It’s open from 9 to 8.

MAD Open Recording
Listen to the conversation. Tell what happened after they tried the dresses on and how the story
ended. Use ten of the following words/phrases in your story: to choose, the decision, to put on hold,
to check out, the change, the cost, the receipt, to be on sale, to spend, such a good deal, to wait,
and the price tag.
Salesperson: Hello. Welcome to Dress It Up. May I help you find anything?
Taylor: Hi. Yes. We are looking for inexpensive prom dresses.
Salesperson: Prom is in a few months, so we do have a good amount of dresses to choose from right now.
They are here along this wall and the back wall, too.
Eva: Are any of them on sale right now?
Salesperson: The dresses are not on sale, but we do have a shoe sale. If you buy a prom dress, you get a
pair of shoes for free.
Taylor: Wow! What a great deal. Where can we find the shoe section?
Salesperson: Behind the accessories, between the fitting rooms and the checkout counter.
Taylor: Thank you. Eva, let’s each choose a few dresses that we like, and then we can go try them on
together.
SECTION 3 5-39
1
5
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 5.3.9 - LISTEN & SPEAK (Continued)
MAD Open Recording
Eva: Good plan, Taylor. Here are some fun patterned dresses. What do you think of this polka dot one?
Taylor: I personally don’t think patterns are pretty on a formal dress. I prefer either silk or another smooth
material with a beautiful solid color like pink or yellow.
Eva: Not me. I think this floral dress is very unique. I am going to try this one on and then this light blue polka
dot dress. Do you know where the dressing rooms are?
Taylor: They are in the back left corner, but they are locked. I will go ask the salesperson to open two of them
for us.
Eva: No need. I just saw two fitting rooms were opened for us. Tell me when you’re done putting on your first
dress. I have mine on and am ready to show you.
Taylor: Ready! What do you think? Do you like this color yellow?
Eva: It looks really nice on you. What do think of this polka dot dress I have on?
Taylor: It’s okay, but I bet the floral one will look better on you. I like the style of it better.
Eva: I think I agree. I am trying on that one next. Oh no. I can’t get the zipper up. I think I need a bigger size. I
hope they have it. I really like this dress!
Taylor: Okay, I’m done. Tell me when you are in the next dress.
Eva: Oh no. I can’t get the zipper up. I think I need a bigger size. I hope they have it. I really like this dress.
CULTURAL NOTE
Clipping Coupons
Coupons are discounts that you bring to the store to save money. If you forget your coupons at home, you
won’t get the discounted price at checkout. You can find coupons for certain items in newspapers, magazines,
at the bottom of receipts, online, and in your email inbox. There are two types of people who clip coupons:
1. Casual couponers may only look for coupons once a week or less often. They put a few coupons they found
up on the fridge or in an envelope and take the coupons with them the next time they go shopping. They like
to save money but don’t spend too much time looking for coupons.
2. Extreme couponers, on the other hand, view coupon collecting as a sport. They want to save as much money
as they possibly can with every discount they can find. They spend hours searching for coupons, planning when
they will go shopping next, and how much money they will save. If you search the news for extreme couponers,
you will find stories of people who spend less than $1.00 at a store but take home over $1,000 worth of items.

Class Activity
GAMES: Passive Verbs and Marker Wars (The explanation and playing sheet for
these games are located in the B1 Resources Google Doc Folder, or download the
5-40 SECTION 3
1
5
GRAMMAR
RELATIVE CLAUSES: SUBJECTS
A relative clause gives us more information about a noun. The relative clause begins with a relative pronoun (who,
which, that, whose) or adverb (when, where, why). It always comes directly after the noun it describes.
The story is about a girl. → Which girl? The story is about a girl who spent $1,000 on clothes in one day.
The dress is very fashionable. → Which blouse? The blouse which only costs $24 is very fashionable.
Relative Pronouns Relative Adverbs
To talk about people use who or that To talk about place use where
This is the manager. He works at my favorite shoe store. What is the name of the store at which you bought my hat?
↓ ↓
who / that where
↓ ↓
This is the manager who works at my favorite shoe store. What is the name of the store where you bought my hat?
This is the manager that works at my favorite shoe store.
To talk about things use which or that To talk about time use when
I like the sweatshirt. It is in the window. Do you know the day on which you bought these items?
↓ ↓
which / that when
↓ ↓
I like the sweatshirt which is in the window. Do you know the day when you bought these items?
I like the sweatshirt that is in the window.
To talk about possession use whose To talk about reason use why (often implied)
What’s the name of the boy? His coat was lost yesterday. Did they explain the reason for which you can’t return this?
↓ ↓
whose why
↓ ↓
What’s the name of the boy whose coat was lost yesterday? Did they explain the reason* why you can’t return this?
* “the reason” is often omitted as it can be implied:

Did they explain why you can’t return this?
If the noun being described by the relative clause doesn’t come at the end of a sentence, put the complete
relative clause immediately after the noun, then finish the rest of the sentence.
The salesperson is over there. She helped me find a dress. The flower shop closes soon. It sells the roses you like.
↓ ↓
who that
The salesperson who helped me find a dress is over there. The flower shop that sells the roses you like closes soon.
SECTION 3 5-41
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the relative clause that best completes each sentence.
1. The dress ________ was on sale was not my style. A. which B. who C. where
2. I’m looking for a place ________ they sell sports clothing. A. who B. why C. where
3. December is a time ________ prices are usually high. A. when B. who C. where
4. She likes the shoes ________ the sales assistant suggested. A. who B. that C. whose
5. Do you know the reason ________ this is on sale? A. whose B. why C. which
6. Do you have a friend ________ style is similar to yours? A. whose B. who C. which
7. What happened to the shop ________ made its own clothing? A. where B. why C. that
8. He gave his old coat to a boy ________ family is poor. A. who B. whose C. which
9. I’ve lost the receipt ________ would let me return this jacket. A. who B. why C. which
10. If you have a problem, ask the man ________ sold it to you. A. that B. why C. when
MAD Text Match
1. where you can pay for your products faster. Starter 6 The express checkout lane is a place
2. who runs the store and is the boss. Starter 10 A store manager is the person
3. which are not new. Starter 1 ‘Second-hand’ means clothes
4. why you choose to go to a store. Starter 8 A good deal is the reason
5. who helps you with questions at a shop. Starter 2 A sales assistant is a person
6. when many shops have big sales. Starter 3 After a holiday is a time
7. where you can try on new clothes. Starter 4 A fitting room is a place
8. which shows that you have already paid. Starter 9 A receipt is a piece of paper
9. that tells you how much an item costs . Starter 5 A price tag is a thing
10. that gives you a cheaper price or good deal. Starter 7 A coupon is a piece of paper
Read the sentences with relative clauses. Then, fill in the chart with the correct information for each
sentence. Do NOT use capitalization or punctuation.
For example: You read: Does she have an outfit which goes with her floral shoes?
You type: Noun Relative Pronoun Rest of Relative Clause
an outfit which goes with her floral shoes

Part 1: 1. The label that is in my sweatshirt is annoying me.
2. My friend who wore my dress hasn’t given it back to me yet.
3. The advertisement which Tom created is on every city bus.
4. I can’t find the clothes that I bought yesterday.
5. Do you remember the place where you bought your ring?
Part 2: 1. Are you going to buy those pants that you put on hold?
2. The family who bought the deli plans to add more tables.
3. The woman whose clothes these were is very generous.
4. Can you explain the reason why you need a new phone?
5. That was the time when I spent $200.
5-42 SECTION 3
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Part 1 Noun Relative Pronoun Rest of Relative Clause

1. the label that is in my sweatshirt
2. my friend who wore my dress
3. the advertisement which Tom created
4. the clothes that I bought yesterday
5. the place where you bought your ring
Part 2
1. those pants that you put on hold
2. the family who bought the deli
3. the woman whose clothes these were
4. the reason why you need a new phone
5. the time when I spent $200 on food

Read the two sentences. Then, type it as one sentence using a relative clause.
If it is a person, use who. If it is a thing, use which.
1. I bought the two shirts. They were on sale. [I bought the two shirts which were on sale.]
2. The man works at the checkout. He was helpful. [The man who works at the checkout was helpful.]
3. Sue was wearing a hat. It was too big for her. [Sue was wearing a hat which was too big for her.]
4. This is a shop. It doesn’t take credit cards. [This is a shop which doesn’t take credit cards.]
5. I’ve just tried on some jeans. They fit perfectly. [I’ve just tried on some jeans which fit perfectly.]
6. I know a girl. She buys something online daily. [I know a girl who buys something online daily.]
7. He returned the three pairs of shoes. They were all the wrong size.
[He returned the three pairs of shoes which were all the wrong size.]
8. I like buying things at stores. The stores regularly send coupons to its customers.
[I like buying things at stores which regularly send coupons to its customers.]
9. Amazon is an online shop. It sells millions of items around the world.
[Amazon is an online shop which sells millions of items around the world.]
10. The man bought expensive cologne. He forgot his wallet at the cash register.
[The man who forgot his wallet at the cash register bought expensive cologne.]

MAD Open Recording
Complete each sentence starter by saying something that is true for you using a relative clause.
1. I like stores... 3. I usually wear outfits... 5. The most expensive thing that I ever bought was...
2. I am a person... 4. My teacher is a person... 6. I dislike outfits...
SECTION 3 5-43
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVE VS. PASSIVE VOICE: PRESENT SIMPLE
Active voice refers to sentence structures where the most important idea is that a noun is performing the action of a
verb. The noun doing that action is the subject, and a second noun that is receiving the action is the direct object.
Structure of the Active Voice
Subject Active Verb Direct Object Other
Darnell drives the car to school.
Mary buys groceries at the store.
Passive voice refers to sentence structures where the most important idea is the noun that is receiving the action. In
passive sentences, the noun receiving the action becomes the subject. A form of to be and the past participle of the
active verb are used to show that the noun receiving the action is now the subject.
Structure of the Passive Voice
Subject = (direct object of to be
Past Participle Other
active sentence) (conjugated)
The car is driven to school.
The groceries are bought at the store.
Note: Notice in the above examples that the subject of the active sentence is NOT in the passive sentence because the
important idea is now the noun receiving the action. If you also want to include the subject of the active sentence, add it
in a prepositional phrase beginning with the preposition by. This is called the agent. The agent can go after the past
participle or at the end of the sentence.
Subject = (direct object to be by + subject of active

Past Participle Other
of active sentence) (conjugated) sentence (agent)
The car is driven to school by Darnell.
The groceries are purchased at the store around the corner by Mary.

MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if each statement is active or passive.
1. Many shoes are bought by me during sale times. A. Active B. Passive
2. She does a lot of shopping every change of season. A. Active B. Passive
3. The woman sells striped scarves with matching hats and gloves. A. Active B. Passive
4. The deli makes the best sandwiches. A. Active B. Passive
5. The pants and shirts are matched perfectly by the fashion expert. A. Active B. Passive
6. The store sales are advertised every Sunday in the newspaper. A. Active B. Passive
7. The receipt is given to the customer by the salesperson. A. Active B. Passive
8. The man smelled the perfume. A. Active B. Passive
9. The perfume is bought as a gift for the woman. A. Active B. Passive
10. She found the lost button on the ground. A. Active B. Passive
11. The sweetest puppies are sold at that pet store. A. Active B. Passive
12. The jeweler has the most reasonable prices in town. A. Active B. Passive
5-44 SECTION 3
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Read each active sentence. Then, find the verb and type the passive form of it in each blank.
1. People try outfits on in dressing rooms.
Outfits [are tried on] in dressing rooms by people.
2. Some Americans buy three pairs of shoes every year.
Three pairs of shoes [are bought] every year by some Americans.
3. People throw food away after meals.
Food [is thrown away] after meals.
4. Stores keep a couple of cash registers open.
A couple of cash registers [are kept] open.
5. People give away old or unwanted clothes to second-hand stores.
Old or unwanted clothes [are given away] to second-hand stores.
6. I wear jeans to work on Fridays.
Jeans [are worn] to work on Fridays.
7. He takes back clothes that don’t fit.
Clothes [are taken] back that don’t fit.
8. The store sells jewelry.
Jewelry [is sold] by the store.

Change the following sentences from active to passive.
In numbers 1-5, do not include the agent (subject of the active sentence).
In numbers 6-10, include the agent at the end of the sentence.
For example: You read: I return the clothes to the store.
You type for 1-5: [The clothes are returned to the store.]
You type for 6-10: [The clothes are returned to the store by me.]
1. Quinn buys a board game at the toy store.
[A board game is bought at the toy store.]
2. Salespeople give customers receipts after they’ve paid.
[Receipts are given to customers after they’ve paid.]
3. She finds out the truth.
[The truth is found out.]
4. The store holds the shirts for me.
[The shirts are held for me.]
5. I wear out my shoes from running so much.
[My shoes are worn out from running so much.]
SECTION 3 5-45
1
5
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
6. Companies advertise clothes on TV, the radio, and the internet.
[Clothes are advertised on TV, the radio, and the internet by companies.]
7. Customers buy meat, chicken, and pork from butcher shops.
[Meat, chicken, and pork are bought from butcher shops by customers.]
8. Salespeople keep money in cash registers.
[Money is kept in cash registers by salespeople.]
9. Customers return clothes.
[Clothes are returned by customers.]
10. I run errands in the morning.
[Errands are run in the morning by me.]

MAD Text Match
Match each tense with the correct sentence.
1. The floral skirts are sold by the woman. Present Simple Passive
2. The woman was selling floral skirts. Past Continuous
3. The woman sells floral skirts. Present Simple
4. The woman will sell floral skirts. Future Simple
5. The woman is selling floral skirts. Present Continuous
6. The woman has sold floral skirts. Present Perfect
7. The woman sold floral skirts. Past Simple
8. The woman will be selling floral skirts. Future Continuous

MAD Open Recording
Read each sentence. For numbers 1-5, say the passive sentence for each active sentence that you read
and include the agent. For numbers 6-10, say the active sentence for each passive sentence.
1. She found a new spring jacket. 6. Many sweatshirts are bought by me during sale times.
A new spring jacket was found by her. I buy many sweatshirts during sale times.
2. The woman smells the perfume. 7. Sales are advertised every Sunday by the newspaper.
The perfume was smelled by the woman. The newspaper advertises sales every Sunday.
3. She does a lot of shopping at the mall. 8. The receipt is given to the customer by the salesperson.
A lot of shopping was done by her at the mall. The salesperson gives the receipt to the customer.
4. The man buys winter boots and hats. 9. The cologne is bought as a gift by the wife.
Winter boots and hats are bought by the man. The wife buys the cologne as a gift.
5. He sells the most reasonable rings. 10. The most beautiful flowers are sold at that flower stop.
The most reasonable rings are sold by him. That flower shop sells the most beautiful flowers.
5-46 SECTION 3
1
5
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 5.3.20 - Build Passive Sentences
First, fill in the blanks A-J with the names of animals or people (real, celebrity, or fictional) of your choice.
Then choose four of the given verbs and use them to fill in blanks K-O.
kiss buy choose pick up eat

throw away keep love throw carry
A. _______________________________ F. the princess K. _______________________________

B. _______________________________ G. _______________________________ L. to love
C. _______________________________ H. _______________________________ M. _______________________________
D. horses I. _______________________________ N. _______________________________
E. _______________________________ J. _______________________________ O. _______________________________
Now make passive sentences using the given combinations of nouns and verbs. Say them to your
partners. Make up some of your own combinations for numbers 6-7. Write three of your own passive
sentences without help from the words above for numbers 8-10.
For example: You see: D + L + F You say: Horses are loved by the princess.
1. J + M + B = _____________ is/are _________________ by __________________.
2. C+K+E= ___________________________________________________________.
3. G + O + D = ___________________________________________________________.
4. I +N+F= ___________________________________________________________.
5. H + L + A = ___________________________________________________________.
6. __ + __ + __ = ___________________________________________________________.
7. __ + __ + __ = ___________________________________________________________.
8. ____________________________________________________________________________.
9. ____________________________________________________________________________.
10. ____________________________________________________________________________.
ACTIVITY 5.3.21 - Describe it!

LAD Group Activity (Groups of 4)
beginning of this activity and hit record. Either let the students come up with their own people or fill the
people in before printing off the worksheets.
Your teacher will hand you one Partner A Worksheet and one Partner B Worksheet. Two of you work with
the Partner A worksheet and two with the Partner B worksheet.
A Partners will start describing a word or person from the A worksheet. You are only allowed to describe
these things using relative clauses. Switch off saying a relative clause with the other partner A until the B
partners have guessed the word or person correctly. Then, switch roles, and the B Partners now describe
a word or person on the B worksheet to the A Partners.
SECTION 3 5-47
1
5
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 5.3.21 -Describe it! (Continued)
LAD Group Activity (Groups of 4)
For example:
Word Description
the purse This is an object that women carry to hold a wallet.
our teacher This is a person whose English is very good.
Add up how many words the other Partners guessed correctly. Talk about the words they did not guess
and come up with descriptions together that may have helped them guess the word.
Turn in the two worksheets to your teacher. (If you have more time, describe other words or people
to each other and write down what you described.
Partner A Words Partner B Guesses

flower shop
brand
perfume
cash register
toy store
a good deal
Person 1:
Person 2:
Person 3:
Person 4:
CORRECT ANSWERS: ________
Partner B Words Partner A Guesses

list
dressing room
jewelry shop
price tag
outfit
a sale price
Person 1:
Person 2:
Person 3:
Person 4:
CORRECT ANSWERS: ________

MAD Open Recording
Choose two words and two people to describe from your worksheet using only relative clauses. Say at
least two relative clauses for each thing you describe.
5-48 SECTION 3
1
5
READING
THE SHOPPING CHALLENGE
Host: Welcome everyone to today’s episode of The Shopping Challenge. As usual, we have selected three women to
participate in our challenge. Here are the rules: Each participant gets $300 and has only one hour to shop. Nobody
knows what they will have to buy until they get to the mall. There, they will open these envelopes and read the theme
written on the paper inside. In one hour, they have to find the right stores, try on several outfits in the dressing rooms,
choose what they believe is the best deal, wait in line, check out at the cash register, and return to their cars. Once
they buy something, they cannot change their minds and return it to the store. It doesn’t matter how much they spend
on each item, but they can’t spend more than $300 for the entire outfit. So, it is important to choose a few inexpensive
pieces, check price tags, and find stores with sales. Our viewers will then vote for the outfit that best fits the challenge,
and that participant will get to keep her outfit as well as win a $1000 gift card. Ladies, do you have any questions?
Participant 1: No! Let’s go shopping!
Participant 2: I am ready.
Participant 3: Me too!
Host: All right then, ladies, here is the topic for this week: “America!” Your outfit has to represent our country. Wow,
that’s a tough one! I’m excited to see what you each decide to buy. May the best shopper win!
(One hour later, the ladies present their outfits and explain their choices.)
Participant 1: So, I tried to look as American as possible. Here is my outfit. I am wearing blue pants with white polka
dots, white sneakers, and a red and white striped shirt. Don’t you think I look like the American flag? I also found some
cheap earrings of the Statue of Liberty. If that doesn’t say America, I don’t know what does! And the best part is that
everything was on sale. After buying my outfit, I still have $200 left over. I was surprised at how much I was able to
save! Now I am ready to celebrate the Fourth of July for sure!
Participant 2: I went with a totally different look. When I think of Americans, I usually think of yoga pants or baggy
sweatpants, and tennis shoes. To me, everyone always looks like they work out all day long. So, that’s why I chose
my outfit of comfortable black yoga pants, stylish pink tennis shoes, a tight pink and black tank top, and a zip-up
sweatshirt. My accessories are a yoga mat, a backpack, and a water bottle. Nothing was on sale, so the total cost was
$293.89. I don’t have much money left over except for a little bit of change. However, I think this is a really great price
for all the clothes and accessories I bought!
Participant 3: Wow, you two really embraced the theme here! I don’t think I want everyone else to think all we
Americans wear is workout clothes or red, white, and blue. I chose a very stylish and fresh look because we have
some fantastic designers and brands here in the U.S. I bought Levi’s brand blue jeans, a white blouse from Tommy
Hilfiger, and white Tracy Reese heels that were on sale. I also found some cute blue earrings and a blue necklace at
the Gap, and a blue purse from J.Crew. I was lucky that there were some good deals and sales going on; otherwise, I
would have spent more than $300. I spent a total of $254.73.
Host: Wow! I am impressed. You all chose such different outfits and styles. Now it is up to our viewers to decide:
Whose outfit is the best for our “America” theme of the week? Call or text now, and we will announce the winner after
a short commercial break!
SECTION 3 5-49
1
5
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if each rule for the TV show is true or false based on the reading.
1. Each participant gets $100 and five hours to go shopping.
A. True B. False
2. Each participant bought at least one item that was on sale.
A. True B. False
3. Participant 1 spent the least amount of money.
A. True B. False
4. The second participant thinks she paid too much for her outfit.
A. True B. False
5. Checking out and returning to the car has to be done within the hour, too.
A. True B. False
6. Participants are not able to return any items.
A. True B. False
7. The third participant spent more than $300 on her outfit.
A. True B. False
8. Participants can spend more than $300, but they have to pay anything over $300 with their own money.
A. True B. False
9. The viewers are the judges and choose the winner.
A. True B. False
10. The winner gets another $500 gift card.
A. True B. False
CULTURAL NOTE
Fast Fashion
Fast fashion refers to trendy clothing items that are made quickly with low quality materials and are cheap to
buy. Customers who buy fast fashion items do so because they want to be in style and cannot afford or don’t
want to spend lots of money on pieces that they won’t want to keep for more than a few years. Because these
items are priced so low, people don’t feel bad about simply throwing shirts away that have stretched out or
become damaged. Had they purchased these clothes for more money, they would probably want to resell
their clothes to earn a little money back. This concept of fast fashion is considered very harmful to the
environment as well as the employees that work for the clothing manufacturers.

MAD Open Recording
Throughout this chapter, you have learned about fast fashion and shopping. Debate whether or not
buying cheaper, more inexpensive clothing is better than buying higher quality, more expensive clothing.
5-50 SECTION 3
1
5
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S PICK OUT SOME OUTFITS!
MAD Viewing
time.
Emily: Hey, thanks for coming again. I am so overwhelmed.

Kaitlyn: No problem. Who are you shooting for, again?
Emily: It’s for my photography project. I want three different outfits for three occasions: the gym, school, and a
concert.
Kaitlyn: Cool. Between the two of us, I’m sure we’ll pick out the perfect outfits.
Emily: Okay. So, I was thinking maybe this shirt with these pants?
Kaitlyn: That doesn’t match very well. What about...
Emily: You’re right...
Kaitlyn: ... this shirt with those pants?
Emily: That’s much more stylish.
Kaitlyn: Awesome.
Emily: How about a hat?
Kaitlyn: Perfect! This would be such a good look for school, with the black and the black.
Emily: Very cute.
Kaitlyn: All right. So, what about the gym outfit next.
Emily: I have this striped shirt that I like.
Kaitlyn: Okay... cute, but I don’t know about for the gym.
Emily: Yeah, you’re probably right.
Kaitlyn: What about these cotton leggings?
Emily: Ooh, that would match really well with this shirt!
Kaitlyn: Awesome. And then did we want a scrunchie to match?
Emily: For sure, you always gotta put your hair up.
Kaitlyn: All right. So, we have these two picked out. Onto the last one, the concert.
Emily: Yeah. I like the pattern on this shirt.
Kaitlyn: Cute. What pants would you wear with it?
Emily: I’m not sure. That’s where I need your help.
Kaitlyn: All right. How about these denim shorts?
Emily: Cute, but I don’t think I like the material. And I think this might be a little too casual.
Kaitlyn: You’re right. What about this silky jumpsuit?
Emily: Ooh, I like it! It seems like it would be comfortable. But I think I need some accessories to go with it.
Kaitlyn: All right. How about a necklace or a bracelet?
Emily: Ooh, what about this watch?
Kaitlyn: Perfect! All right, now onto shoes. Is the concert inside or outside?
Emily: It’s inside.
Kaitlyn: All right. For an inside concert, I think some open-toed shoes would be best. What do you think,
the white or the black?
Emily: I think I like the white.
Kaitlyn: Perfect. I think we have three really great looks for your photo shoot.
Emily: Thanks so much. I couldn’t have done it without you.
LET’S TALK! 5-51

1
5
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
Match each answer with the correct question based on the chapter video.
1. What about this silky jumpsuit? D. Ooh, I like it!
2. What do you think, the white or the black? F. I think I like the white.
3. How about a hat? B. Perfect! This would be such a good look for school.
4. Did we want a scrunchie to match? E. For sure, you always gotta put your hair up.
5. What pants would you wear with it? C. I’m not sure. That’s where I need your help.
6. What about these cotton leggings? G. That would match really well with this shirt!
7. What about this shirt with those pants? A. That’s much more stylish.
LT 5.3 - LISTEN & WRITE

Something is false about each statement. Change each word marked between the two asterisks (*) to
make each sentence true based on the chapter video. If the answer is a number, type the numeral.
For example, type [10] not [ten].
Emily: Hey, thanks for coming again. I am so *excited*. [overwhelmed]
Emily: It’s for my *art* project. I want *2* different outfits for 3 occasions. [photography] [3]
Kaitlyn: Cool. Between the 2 of us, I’m sure we’ll pick out the perfect *leggings*. [outfits]
Emily: Okay. So I was *hoping* maybe this shirt with these pants? [thinking]
Kaitlyn: With the *white* and the black. [black]
Kaitlyn: Okay...cute, but I don’t know about for the *club*. [gym]
Emily: Ooh, that would *go* really well with this *skirt*! [match] [shirt]
Emily: For sure, you always gotta put your *hand* up. [hair]
Kaitlyn: Onto the last one, the *ball*. [concert]
Emily: Yeah. I like the *color* on this shirt. [pattern]
Kaitlyn: Cute. What *leggings* would you wear with it? [pants]
Emily: Cute, but I don’t think I like the *pattern*. [material]
Emily: But I think I need some *jewelry* to go with it. [accessories]
Kaitlyn: All right. How about a *ring* or a *belt*? [necklace] [bracelet]
Kaitlyn: Perfect! All right, now onto *hats*. [shoes]
LT 5.4 - SPEAK
MAD Open Recording
Record yourself giving your friend advice for an outfit. She is going to a concert and needs help picking out
her outfit. Recommend clothing and accessories. Explain why you think she should wear this.
5-52 LET’S TALK!

1
5
LET’S TALK!
INTERVIEWS - LET’S TALK ABOUT SHOPPING AND CLOTHES!
MAD Viewing
Rutvik Skylar Borna

Rutvik: [I like to shop mostly] at athletic stores because they tend to be the most comfortable clothes.
I like to be comfortable all the time. I don’t wanna always have to move around when I sit. I don’t wanna
always have to get up because everything’s very uncomfortable, so mostly [online and athletic stores].
My favorite clothes are hoodies or short-sleeved shirts, athletic shorts, or sweatpants
[because I can be comfortable] at any time of the day. I can move around without having to
worry about anything ripping or anything pulling or just being uncomfortable in general.
Skylar: I’m a big fan of thrift stores [and second-hand stores for] shopping for my clothes. I don’t really like
paying full price for anything, which is why [I shop online a lot] too. You can get a lot of good discounts online.
[My favorite kind of] clothes, I like the older generation’s clothes more than what they’re making now. And
I’m not a big accessories person, but I do like shoes. [I have a lot of pairs of shoes]. I’m a really big fan of
overalls, and so I’ve actually made a couple pairs on my own.
Borna: I like to shop [at department stores] because there’s so many different brand names of clothes, and
they all come at a discounted price. [I really enjoy wearing] tank tops just because they’re so loose, and you
feel so free. It’s never uncomfortable. Whereas sometimes with T-shirts, [they can get a little tight] or they
squeeze around a certain part of the body.
LET’S TALK! 5-53

1
5
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if the person would agree or disagree with each statement based on the interviews.
1. Borna: Shopping at second-hand-stores is my favorite. A. Agree B. Disagree
2. Rutvik: Athletic stores have the coolest clothes. A. Agree B. Disagree
3. Skylar: Thrift stores and second-hand stores are my favorite. A. Agree B. Disagree
4. Skylar: Shopping online is very expensive. A. Agree B. Disagree
5. Borna: I love wearing tank tops. A. Agree B. Disagree
6. Rutvik: Tight clothes make me feel great. A. Agree B. Disagree
7. Skylar: I can’t have too many shoes. A. Agree B. Disagree
8. Rutvik: I hate being uncomfortable in clothes. A. Agree B. Disagree
9. Borna: I wish I could wear T-shirts all the time. A. Agree B. Disagree
10. Skylar: Making skirts is one of my hobbies. A. Agree B. Disagree
LT 5.8 - LISTEN
MAD Category Match
Place each phrase under the correct person based on their interviews.
Rutvik Skylar Borna

athletic stores second-hand stores department stores
hoodies discounts online discounted price
short sleeve shirts older generation’s tank tops
move around lots of shoes never uncomfortable
always comfortable fan of overalls a little tight

1. Where do you like to go shopping for clothes?
2. Do you have a favorite brand or article of clothing that you wear?
3. How would you describe your style?
4. Do you have an item of clothing or a certain accessory that you have many of?
5-54 LET’S TALK!

1
5
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW: SELF-EVALUATION How well do I
Additional
Refer to...
I CAN... Practice
(Page = P.)
Review (R)
Section 1
1. talk about errands using phrasal verbs. R. 1, 2, 4
P. 5-8
2. use nouns as adjectives. R. 2, 3 P. 5-12
3. discuss fashion using determiners and Section 2

R. 1, 2, 5
pronouns. P. 5-23, 5-27
Section 3
4. talk about shopping using relative pronouns. R. 1, 2, 4, 7, 8
P. 5-41
5. use active and passive voices. R. 2, 6 P. 5-44
R1 - LISTENING 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to the conversation. Then, choose the best answer for each question.
Salesperson: Hello. Welcome to Dress It Up. May I help you find anything?
Taylor: Hi. Yes. We are looking for inexpensive prom dresses.
Salesperson: Prom is in a few months, so we do have a good amount of dresses to choose from right now.
They are here along this wall and the back wall, too.
Eva: Are any of them on sale right now?
Salesperson: The dresses are not on sale, but we do have a shoe sale. If you buy a prom dress, you get a pair
of shoes for free.
Taylor: Wow! What a great deal. Where can we find the shoe section?
Salesperson: Behind the accessories, between the fitting rooms and the checkout counter.
Taylor: Thank you. Eva, let’s each choose a few dresses that we like, and then we can go try them on together.
Eva: Good plan, Taylor. Here are some fun patterned dresses. What do you think of this polka dot one?
Taylor: I personally don’t think patterns are pretty on a formal dress. I prefer either silk or another smooth
material with a beautiful solid color like pink or yellow.
Eva: Not me. I think this floral dress is very unique. I am going to try this one on and then this light blue polka
dot dress. Do you know where the dressing rooms are?
Taylor: They are in the back left corner, but they are locked. I will go ask the salesperson to open two of them.
Eva: No need. I just saw two fitting rooms were opened for us. Tell me when you’re done putting on your first
dress. I have mine on and am ready to show you.
Taylor: Ready! What do you think? Do you like this color yellow?
Eva: It looks really nice on you. What do think of this polka dot dress I have on?
Taylor: It’s okay, but I bet the floral one will look better on you. I like the style of it better.
Eva: I think I agree. I am trying on that one next. Oh no. I can’t get the zipper up. I think I need a bigger size. I
hope they have it.
Salesperson: I can get you a different size. What size do you need?
Eva: Could you please check if you have this in a large?
Salesperson: Yes, we do. I’ll grab it for you, one moment.
Eva: Thanks, that was fast! I’ll try it on now.
Taylor: Eva, I ‘m going to find shoes to match my new dress! Meet me there when you’re done.
Eva: Sounds good. I’ll be there soon!
CHAPTER 5 5-55
1
5
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
1. What is the sale going on right now? 5. What is the main topic of the conversation?
A. Buy a dress, get a dress for free. A. Shopping for dresses for a school dance
B. Buy a dress, get flowers for free. B. Shopping for the least expensive dresses
C. Buy a dress, get a dress half off. C. Shopping for shoes to match prom dresses
D. Buy a dress, get a free pair of shoes. D. Shopping for summer dresses
2. Where are the shoes located? 6. How long did Eva have to wait for a different size?
A. Between the checkout counter and the A. twenty minutes
dressing rooms B. a short while
B. In front of the fitting rooms C. one hour
C. At the front of the store D. a long time
D. Between the accessories and the entrance 7. What size dress did Eva probably try on that didn’t fit her?
3. What will the girls do next? A. medium
A. They will shop for accessories. B. large
B. They will meet at the cash register. C. extra large
C. They will meet at the shoe section. D. extra small
D. They will find another size to try on. 8. What does Eva think of Taylor’s choice of a yellow dress?
4. What type of dresses does Eva think is pretty? A. She thinks it looks good.
A. Long dresses B. She thinks it doesn’t fit.
B. Solid colors like yellow or pink C. She thinks it looks bad.
C. Unique dresses D. She thinks it is fine, but a different one would look
D. Simple dresses better.
R2 - LISTENING 2
1. [Could you please put the laundry away?]
2. [Write it on the grocery list.]
3. [I like neither leather clothing nor silk.]
4. [It would be nice if there were another pocket in this purse.]
5. [The pants which are on sale are stylish.]
6. [The sale was advertised in the newspaper.]
R3 - GRAMMAR 1
Read each sentence. Then, change one noun into a noun phrase, and type the complete sentence in the
blank. Be careful with capitalization and punctuation.
For example: You read: I have a cat that is female. You type: [I have a female cat.]
1. My uncle has a farm with chickens. [My uncle has a chicken farm.]
2. I am looking for shoes made for playing tennis. [I am looking for tennis shoes.]
3. Can you make soup with potatoes? [Can you make potato soup?]
4. I like soup that has vegetables. [I like vegetable soup.]
5. We need to look for a store that sells jewelry. [We need to look for a jewelry store.]
6. This is a movie for children. [This is a children’s movie.]
5-56 CHAPTER 5
1
5
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R4 - GRAMMAR 2
You are out running errands. Use the phrasal verbs given to type complete sentences. Try to add extra
information using prepositions, conjunctions, relative clauses, adjectives, etc.
Use at least three different tenses.
For example: You read: put back
You type: After trying on clothes at a store, I always put them back.
1. try on 3. throw away 5. pick out
2. fill out 4. wake up 6. find out
R5 - READING
MAD Multiple Choice
Read the “Spotlight on an American Designer: Calvin Klein.” Then, choose the best answer for each
question based on the reading.
Spotlight on an American Designer: Calvin Klein
One of America’s best known designers is Calvin Klein. Born November 19, 1942 in New York, fashion became
his passion early on in his life. He graduated from the Fashion Institute of Technology in New York in 1962,
and shortly after, he was able to open his own clothing company. Calvin teamed up with long-time friend
Barry Schwartz. Klein was responsible for the designing aspect while Schwartz ran the business. At first, he
only had a small showroom, but then he landed a deal with the department store Bonwit Teller.
In the early 1970s, his clothes were in high demand, and he made multiple millions of dollars in sales.
Fashion during the late 1960s was said to have been in a rather depressed state where designers weren’t
as creative as they used to be. Klein’s simple line of suits and coats provided a new perspective. He soon
added sportswear and easy-to-match clothing items, especially for women, and became even more popular.
Customers liked the comfortable but elegant clothes and didn’t mind paying a rather high price for them.
Klein’s clothing line became more and more successful in other countries in the late 70s as well.
Calvin Klein won the Coty Award for womenswear three years in a row (1973-1975), which no other
designer had been able to accomplish before him. In 1975, he also became the youngest designer of
ready-to-wear clothes ever elected into the Coty Hall of Fame.
His business later expanded and the brand “Calvin Klein” (CK) also produced everyday men’s clothing,
jeans, shoes, perfumes, cosmetics, and home accessories. Klein’s clothes were also featured in the famous
fashion magazine Vogue, which helped his sales and reputation a lot. The brand also used many high-profile
models, photographers, and actors in their advertisements to get people talking about their products.
In 2003, Klein sold his company to Phillips-Van Heusen (PVH) for about $430 million and up to $300 million in
future royalties. PVH Corporation also owns Tommy Hilfiger and Heritage Brands. Calvin then retired in 2004
and had not been in public much until he published his book “Calvin Klein,” in which he talks about his career
through stories and photographs.
CHAPTER 5 5-57
1
5
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
1. The word popular has a meaning similar to:
A. not liked B. beautiful C. injured D. famous
2. The word passion has a meaning similar to:
A. assignment B. problem C. hobby D. company
3. What is the main topic of this reading?
A. How to become a fashion designer
B. The history of fashion in New York
C. Learn which clothing to buy
D. The life story of a famous designer
4. Each of the following facts about Calvin Klein are in the reading EXCEPT:
A. Why he was interested in fashion.
B. When he won the Coty award.
C. How much he sold his business for.
D. The name of his business partner.
5. Which items are part of the Calvin Klein brand mentioned in the reading?
A. furniture and jewelry
B. perfumes and cosmetics
C. swimsuits and towels
D. socks and shoes
6. What is true about Calvin Klein’s career based on the reading?
A. He sold his company to PVH for about $43 million.
B. He designed a childrenswear collection.
C. His clothing can be described as uncomfortable.
D. His clothing is usually pretty expensive.
7. The word retired has a meaning similar to:
A. took a vacation B. died C. stopped working D. became a designer
8. Where in the reading does the reader learn that Calvin Klein earned a lot of money from his designs?
A. Paragraph 1, sentence 5
B. Paragraph 2, sentence 1
C. Paragraph 3, sentence 1
D. Paragraph 4, sentence 3
9. Which of the following would be another good title for this article?
A. Calvin Klein: A Young American Success Story
B. Calvin Klein: Fashion Designer Becomes Famous Photographer
C. How Calvin Klein Changed the Future of Fashion
D. Calvin Klein: King of Accessories
10. Where in the reading do you learn that Calvin Klein designed more than just women’s clothing?
5-58 CHAPTER 5
1
5
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R6 - WRITING
Read the paragraph. Pick five active sentences that can be changed into passive. Write both the active and
passive sentences. Try to use the agent for a couple of sentences.
For example: You read: ... when I need new shoes for soccer.
You type: I go to the sports store when I need new shoes for soccer.
I go to the sports store when new shoes are needed for soccer.
I go to the sports store when I need new shoes for soccer. Sometimes they do not have my shoe size. I order
the right size and wait for them to call me when they arrive. I don’t have to pay for shipping this way. I pick up
the shoes ASAP. I always get a receipt in case I have to return them. I wear my new shoes to every practice and
game. They do not stay clean for a very long time, but since they are made of leather, they are easy to wash. I
get them dirty, and they often break because I play so hard. I have to buy new shows every other year.
R7 - SPEAKING 1
Watch the video of Emily checking out at a store. As you watch the video a second time, record yourself
saying what is happening using at least three relative clauses.
R8 - SPEAKING 2
Look at the vocabulary images from Section 1. Listen to each question. Then, respond in the pauses
provided using complete sentences. Some answers are shown in the images. Other answers you must
make up. Click “Done” to move on to the next question.
1. What is the man shopping for in the first picture?
2. Which one will he put back?
3. What else could he buy at this store?
4. What is the couple shopping for in the second picture?
5. Will they buy it? How do you know?
6. What else could the couple buy at this store?
CHAPTER 5 5-59
1
5
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
SHOPPING SKIT
In groups of two or three, students will do a shopping skit around different topics. Have the students
come up with their own topic or assign one to them. Ideas for some skits are below. Students must use
as much vocabulary and grammar from the chapter as possible.
Birthday present Returning an item - broke after one use

Father’s Day present Returning an item - ordered online & received wrong item
Mother’s Day present Sports item
Trying clothes on Jewelry
Looking for a sale Kid birthday
At a petstore Finding a unique gift

ONLINE SHOPPING SPREE
You have an upcoming event for which you need a new outfit. However, you do not have enough time to
go into a store. So, you decide to go online to one of the most popular department stores in the United
States called Macy’s. You will need to pick out an entire outfit from the online store, copy the picture of
each clothing item, and then write a short paragraph describing each item of clothing.
Steps to follow:
1. Go to the website for Macy’s. https://www.macys.com
2. Start shopping. You will be picking out enough items to make a complete outfit:
top, pants or skirt, shoes or boots, jewelry, and other accessories.
3. Finally, write a description of each of the clothing items you picked out.
4. Also, include the cost of each item in U.S. dollars and how much it costs in your currency.
5-60 CHAPTER 5
1
5
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
LISTENING 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to the conversation. Then, choose the best answer for each question.
Salesperson: Hello. Welcome to Wearhouse Rentals. May I help you find anything?
Tim: Hi. Yes. We are looking for inexpensive suits for our cousin’s wedding.
Salesperson: You have come to the right place. We have a good amount of suits and tuxedos to choose from
right now. The ones you probably want to look at are here along this wall and the back wall, too.
Robby: Are any of them on sale right now?
Salesperson: The suits aren’t meant to be sold. You can rent them for a weekend or a week. We do have a
sale going on right now called “Rent the tux, get the tie”. If you rent a suit or tuxedo from this selection, you
get a tie or bow tie to keep for free.
Tim: Wow, that’s cool. I’ve always wanted to wear a bow tie! Where are the ties located in the store?
Salesperson: At the front of the store to the left.
Robby: Thank you. Hey, Tim, why don’t we each choose a few ties and suits that we like, and then we can go
try them on.
Tim: Good idea. I saw some more colorful suits over there. What do you think of either that bright red suit or
the yellow and black plaid one?
Robby: I don’t think Isabella would be happy if you wore one of those! She might get really upset if we dress
up too crazy. I like either a gray or black silk and polyester combination or a simple cotton suit. I think Isabella
would like both of those options, too.
Tim: You can do that, but I want to wear something different than everyone else. I’ll try on both this red suit
and this plaid one.
Robby: Excuse me. Where are the dressing rooms?
Salesperson: There are two fitting rooms over here. Let me unlock them for you. I will come back shortly to
check if you need a different size at all.
Robby: Thank you! Tim, tell me when you are done putting on the plaid suit. I need to see how ridiculous you
look! I am trying on the simple black suit with a light blue tie. I really like them both.
Tim: Ready? Ta-da! What do you think of this?
Robby: Honestly? I think that suit should not be worn to the wedding. I think you should have a plaid bow tie
instead of a plaid suit, and a black suit instead of a black tie. Then, you can still be different with a fun tie, but
Isabella won’t be mad on her wedding day.
Tim: You are probably right. You should also try on another suit. That one looks way too big on you.
Robby: I agree. I will try on the size smaller.
Tim: Okay, I changed my suit. Are you ready?
Robby: No, they didn’t have the black suit in my size. I had to find a different one that I liked. Give me a
minute. I’m almost done. There. What do you think of this?
Tim: Oh wow, that dark gray color is perfect for you. It fits you really nicely too, and it really makes your blue
polka dot tie stand out.
Robby: Thanks, yes, I really like this too. And your black suit looks much better for a wedding. Let’s go check
out.
Salesperson: All right, gentlemen, you found your suits and ties? Perfect. You take the ties with you today
after you pay and pick up the suits the Friday before the wedding. You have to return the suits on Tuesday
after the wedding, but you get to keep the ties. Does that work?
Tim: That shouldn’t be a problem. See you soon.
CHAPTER 5 5-61
1
5
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
MAD Multiple Choice
1. What sale does Wearhouse Rental have going on right now? If you rent a tux, you get ________ for free?
A. shoes B. a tie C. another tux D. pants
2. What is the main topic of the conversation?
A. Finding suits for a wedding
B. Men’s fashion trends
C. Family weddings
D. Two friends shopping
3. What suit and tie combination does Robby decide to rent?
A. Plaid suit, gray tie
B. Gray suit, polka dot tie
C. Black suit, plaid bow tie
D. Gray suit, black tie
4. What suit and tie combination does Tim decide to rent?
A. Plaid suit, gray tie
B. Gray suit, polka dot tie
C. Black suit, plaid bow tie
D. Gray suit, black tie
5. Why aren’t the guys buying their suits today?
A. Because they will rent their suits
B. Because they’re getting their suits on Tuesday
C. Because they didn’t find suits that fit
D. Because they will keep looking at other stores
6. What is the main topic of their conversation?
A. Which suits and ties they like
B. Which suits they want to buy
C. Which sizes they wear
D. Which fabrics are the most comfortable
7. Why did Tim change his mind about his plaid suit?
A. Isabella would definitely be upset.
B. It was too big on him.
C. It didn’t match his bow tie.
D. He decided the black suit was better.
8. What does the salesperson probably do next for Tim and Robby, according to the story?
A. Help the guys find backpacks
B. Help the guys carry the suits to their cars
C. Go eat lunch
D. Put the suits on hold for the guys
5-62 CHAPTER 5
1
5
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
LISTENING 2
1. [Are you going to take those shoes back?]
2. [This deli sandwich is the best I have ever eaten.]
3. [Both brands have creative logos.]
4. [What do you think of the other cologne?]
5. [The store that always has good sales is near my house.]
6. [My brother prefers buying baseball cards at the sports shop.]
GRAMMAR 1
Read each sentence. Then, change one noun into a noun phrase, and type the complete sentence in the
blank. Be careful with capitalization and punctuation.
1. My mom makes soup with chicken. [My mom makes chicken soup.]
2. I am looking for a shirt in which I can swim. [I am looking for a swim shirt.]
3. I have to go to my lesson for the guitar. [I have to go to my guitar lesson.]
4. My dad bought a new chair for his desk. [My dad bought a new desk chair.]
5. We need to look for a store that sells jewelry. [We need to look for a jewelry store.]
6. He forgot his glove that is made for baseball. [He forgot his baseball glove.]
GRAMMAR 2
You are out running errands. Use the phrasal verbs given to type complete sentences. Try to add extra
information using prepositions, conjunctions, relative clauses, adjectives, etc.
Use at least three different tenses.
1. pick up
2. write down
3. give away
4. put on
5. take back
6. put away
CHAPTER 5 5-63
1
5
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
READING
MAD Multiple Choice
Read the “Spotlight on an American Designer: Vera Wang”. Then, choose the best answer for each
question based on the reading.
Spotlight on an American Designer: Vera Wang

Born on June 27th, 1949 in New York City, Vera Wang grew up with a very unique childhood. She was a
talented figure skater and even competed in the US National Championships in 1968 and 1969. Wang and her
partner, James Stuart, placed fifth in the junior pairs competition. Her parents sent her to elite schools and
college where she majored in art history. After her graduation from college in 1971, she stopped figure skating
and focused on her professional career.
Her first job was for Vogue magazine. One year later, she got promoted to senior fashion designer and worked
as such for over 15 years. In 1987, she left Vogue to work for Ralph Lauren where she designed accessories.
Two years later, she married her boyfriend Arthur Becker. Unfortunately, Vera didn’t like any of the wedding
dresses she could find in stores, so she designed her own and had a dressmaker tailor it for $10,000. After
her wedding, her father encouraged her to open her own bridal boutique and lent her the money to do so.
Wang first rented a shop in The Carlyle Hotel in New York City where she initially sold wedding dresses by
famous designers. Eventually, she started her own collection of bridal dresses.
During the Olympics in 1994, figure skater Nancy Kerrigan wore a design by Vera Wang, which was seen
by millions of people all over the world. Shortly after, Wang started to design elegant evening clothing and
exclusive outfits for her Manhattan shop. Many Hollywood celebrities today choose to wear Vera Wang
designs to galas, movie premieres, or award ceremonies. Vera Wang also published a wedding guide and
added perfumes, jewelry, and some home products to her shops.
Her wedding dresses and evening outfits are sold at over 55 exclusive retailers, but she also made a deal with
Kohl’s, a department store chain in the US. There, her less expensive and ready-to-wear line “Simply Vera” is
being sold to everyday women.
Vera Wang has gotten many different awards throughout her career. In 1993, she was honored with the
“Chinese American Planning Council’s Honoree of the Year Award.” In 1994, she received the “Girl Scout
Council’s Woman Distinction Award.” In 2005, she became the “Womenswear Designer of the Year.” And in
2018, she was placed as number 34 on the “America’s Richest Self-Made Women” list by Forbes magazine.
1. The word unfortunately has a meaning similar to:

A. sadly B. usually C. carefully D. unbelievably
2. The verb encourage has a meaning similar to:
A. cheer for B. agree with C. require D. teach
3. Vera Wang majored in which of the following?
A. business B. journalism C. art history D. fashion design
4. Why did Vera Wang design her own wedding dress?
A. She did not find any that fit her.
B. She did not find any that she liked.
C. She had an extra dress at her bridal boutique.
D. Her father encouraged her to do so.
5-64 CHAPTER 5
1
5
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
READING (Continued)
MAD Multiple Choice
5. What is the main topic of this reading?
A. To talk about Vera Wang, the figure skater
B. To tell about awards Vera Wang received
C. To learn why Vera Wang became a designer
D. To give a history of Vera Wang’s career
6. Each of the following facts about Vera Wang are true EXCEPT:
A. She left Vogue to start her own business.
B. She has won many different awards throughout her career.
C. She received money from her father to open her own store.
D. She has designed clothing for celebrities.
7. The word own in the reading refers to:
A. wedding B. dress C. marriage D. accessories
8. What is true about Vera Wang’s life or career?
A. She did not have family support.
B. She lived most of her life in New Jersey.
C. She ice skated in the Olympics.
D. Her clothing can be found in department stores.
9. Which items has Vera Wang designed?
A. dresses for figure skaters B. jewelry C. ready-to-wear clothing D. all of the above
10. Where in the reading do you learn that Vera Wang used to sell other designers’ dresses?
WRITING
Read the paragraph. Pick five active sentences that can be changed into passive. Write both the active
and passive sentences.
I go shopping at the mall when I need new clothes. I have a couple favorite stores but usually just go into
a store that has good sales. The store always shows the sales in the window. I like to try on many outfits
before I decide what I will buy. I often bring a friend along with me. Shopping is more fun with a friend. I show
my outfits to my friends. They help me decide if I want to buy the clothes. I pay for the clothes at the cash
register. I put the receipt in my wallet and go home. I can’t wait to wear my new outfit the next day.
CHAPTER 5 5-65
1
5
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
SPEAKING 1
Watch the video of Kaitlyn checking out at a store. As you watch the video a second time, record yourself
saying what is happening using at least three relative clauses.
SPEAKING 2
Look at the vocabulary images from Section 1. Listen to each question. Then, respond in the pauses
provided using complete sentences. Some answers are shown in the images. Other answers you must
make up. Click “Done” to move on to the next question.
1. How much does the gift cost?
2. What do you think the present is?
3. How is the person paying for the gift?
4. Does this customer want the receipt? Why or why not?
5. What are the opening hours at this store?
6. What days can you not go shopping at this store?
5-66 CHAPTER 5
6
1 CHAPTER SIX
ENTERTAINMENT
VOCABULARY
Expansion of Film & TV .............................................. 6-4
Expansion of Music ..................................................... 6-17
Entertainment & News .............................................. 6-31
GRAMMAR
Past Perfect ................................................................... 6-7
Adjective Endings: -ed vs. -ing .................................. 6-11
Common Verb + Preposition Combinations ........ 6-21
Connecting Words: Contrast .................................... 6-24
Review of Tense ........................................................... 6-35
Passive Voice: Past, Present, Future ....................... 6-39
CONVERSATION
What’s your favorite? .................................................. 6-14
Tell me a joke! .............................................................. 6-14
The Beatles on Tour ................................................... 6-28
Song Translation .......................................................... 6-28
Opinions and Entertainment .................................... 6-44
Upcoming Local Events ............................................. 6-44
READING
Different Types of TV Genres ................................... 6-15
Our U.S. Tour Blog ...................................................... 6-29
Broadway, NY ............................................................... 6-45
LET’S TALK!
Video - Let’s go to a concert! .................................... 6-47
LEARNING OBJECTIVES Interviews - Let’s talk about entertainment! ......... 6-49
• talk about film and TV using correct adjective endings.

REVIEW & ASSESSMENT
• use the past perfect.
Review ............................................................................ 6-51
• discuss music using connecting words to show contrast. Projects .......................................................................... 6-56
Assessment ................................................................... 6-57
• combine verbs and prepositions.
• talk about entertainment using the active and passive voices.
INTRODUCTION 6-1
61
THE UNITED KINGDOM

CULTURE IN THE UK
SCOTLAND
Known For:
SCOTLAND Glencoe
Edinburgh Castle
Stirling Castle Eilean Donan Castle
Scottish Highlands Isle of Skye
Golf Abbotsford House
Bagpipes North Coast 500
Celtic Culture Rainy Weather
Loch Ness Haggis
Over 700 Islands
Capital: Edinburgh Famous People:

Other Major Cities: Glasgow, Aberdeen Alexander Graham Bell
Population: 5.373 million (2015) John Muir
Area: 30,981 mi² (square miles) Sir Arthur Conan Doyle
Languages: English, Scots, Gaelic John Knox
Ewan McGregor
Gerard Butler
Flag: Sean Connery
Gordon Ramsay
Alexander
Edinburgh Castle Abottsford House Bagpipers Graham Bell Sean Connery Haggis

1. The Loch Ness Monster is a creature from Scottish folklore that lives in the body
of water called Loch Ness. Read about this monster and discuss it as a class.
Does anyone believe the Loch Ness Monster was real? Why or why not?
2. Research an event center or concert hall in Scotland. When was it built?
What types of entertainment can be enjoyed there? When is the next date for a
performance there? What is the performance?
6-2 INTRODUCTION
1
6
VOCABULARY
SECTION 1 VOCABULARY: Expansion of Film & TV
At the Movie Theater Watching TV Other Words and Phrases
the admission the cartoon again during
the aisle the channel to allow; to let / let / let entire; whole
the candy the commercial amazing the life (lives)
the concession stand the documentary to be done * the rating
(concessions) the episode the celebrity; the star
the popcorn the remote control the character; the role
the row
the ticket counter
SECTION 2 VOCABULARY: Expansion of Music

In the Recording Studio In Concert Band Members Verb + Prep. Combinations
the album to be on tour * the backup dancer to approve of
to be inspired * to clap / clapped / clapped the bassist to complain about
the inspiration the live show the drummer to remind someone of
the hit song to perform the lead guitarist to thank someone for
the microphone the performance the pianist
the recording the performer
the speaker
the stage
to suggest
SECTION 3 VOCABULARY: Entertainment & News

News and the Media Other Forms of Entertainment Other Words and Phrases
the article the act to believe
to explain the animal to change your mind
the headline the ballet the part
to interview the circus to request a song
the interview the comedian; the comic
the interviewer the DJ
the interviewee the event
to look into (something) the magic show
the news the opera
the opinion the orchestra
to review the play
the review
INTRODUCTION 6-3
1
6
VOCABULARY
EXPANSION OF FILM & TV

MAD Open Recording


MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text

MAD Pronunciation
1. Should we buy candy and drinks at the concession stand?
2. There is free admission at the movie theater again this Thursday.
3. Use the remote control to change the channel and volume.
4. What type of television shows do you like to watch?
5. Both celebrities won awards for their roles in my favorite movie.
6-4 SECTION 1
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 6.1.5 - SPEAK (Continued)
MAD Pronunciation
6. The lives of stars are not perfect either.
7. Her character in the movie was absolutely amazing.
8. I am allowed to watch one show after school.
9. Do you know if this show got good ratings?
10. I would rather watch cartoons than a documentary.

Listen to the phrases using Section 1 Vocabulary. Type each one as you hear it. If the answer is a number,
type the numeral. For example, type [10] not [ten].
1. [Make some popcorn during the commercial break.]
2. [The award was given to the actress for her role in the movie.]
3. [I bet the documentary will be extremely successful.]
4. [Have you heard about the new game show on Channel 24?]
5. [The whole family is waiting at the ticket counter.]
6. [Are you sitting in row 6 again?]
7. [Who is your favorite cartoon character?]
8. [When will you be done with work so we can go to the movie theater?]
9. [He started watching a new TV show last night.]
10. [Would you like anything from the concession stand?]
LANGUAGE TIP
Episode, Season, Series
An episode is a small part of a whole storyline. It is usually anywhere between 30 and 90 minutes long.
Often, a new TV show episode airs, or comes out, on a weekly basis to continue the story of the show. A
season is a collection or a set of episodes. The word series is similar to the title of a TV show. Series is the
term for a show that has episodes and seasons. A miniseries has a defined end date when production will
stop and may only consist of a few longer episodes.

MAD Text Match
Match each vocabulary word with the correct definition.
1. a line of seats in a theater the row
2. the place to buy admission to a movie the ticket counter
3. where people walk between the rows the aisle
4. the place to buy snacks at the movie theater the concession stand
5. a famous actor or actress the celebrity
6. something you can learn from the documentary
7. something earned or won the award
8. an advertisement on television the commercial
9. show or movie with drawings the cartoon
10. a grade or score given to a movie or show the rating
SECTION 1 6-5
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Read the information and ratings about the movies. Then, read the questions and answer each one in
complete sentences. Teachers, answers may vary.
ADMISSION PRICE BEFORE 4 P.M. ADMISSION PRICE AFTER 4 P.M.
Adults: $9.50 Adults: $11.00

Children: $7.00 (under 12 years old) Children: $8.00 (under 12 years old)
Seniors: $7.00 (over 60 years old) Seniors: $9.00 (over 60 years old)
1. You are going to see a movie with your family and have a 6-year-old sister. Which movies would she be
allowed to see? Why?
2. How much would the admission be for your family to see a movie before 4 p.m.? How much after 4 p.m.?
3. You have a baseball tournament that starts at 2 p.m. and ends at 9 p.m., but you want to see Avengers with
your friends. What times could you see the movie?
4. If you are going to see Penguins at 12:25 p.m., when will it be done?
5. Which movie has the best rating?
6. Which movie has an actor that you know?
7. Which movie would you like to see? Why?
8. Which movie would you not like to see? Why not?

1. What type of concessions do you like to buy at a movie theater?
2. What do you think of documentaries? Do you enjoy them?
3. What was your favorite cartoon as a child and why?
4. Is there a commercial that you like? If so, which one and why?
5. Do you follow the life of any celebrity? If so, who do you follow?
6. Have you seen a movie at the theater more than once because you liked it so much? If yes, which one?
6-6 SECTION 1
1
6
GRAMMAR
PAST PERFECT
The past perfect tense describes actions that happened in the past. Use it when you are talking about two past
events and want to show that one event happened before another.
Examples
Past Present Future I had finished my work before lunchtime.
X X She had fallen asleep by 10:00 p.m.
first event more recent We picked the apples that had grown on the trees.
(Past Perfect) event
(Past Simple) He said he had run that race before.
FORMING THE PAST PERFECT

Form the affirmative past perfect by adding the past tense auxiliary verb had to the past participle form of the
main verb in the sentence. All subjects use the conjugated form had.
Subject had past participle other
I had worked at the movie theater.
She had eaten before the show.
They had been in a commercial before.
Form the negative past perfect by adding the adverb “not” after the past tense verb “had” and before the
past participle.
Subject had not past participle other
I had not worked at the movie theater.
She hadn’t eaten before the show.
Form the interrogative past perfect by beginning the sentence with the past tense “had,” followed by the subject of
the sentence and the past participle form of the verb.
Note: When asking a question using the negative, not, use the contraction -n’t.
Had (n’t) subject past participle other?
Had she worked at the movie theater?
Hadn’t they been in a commercial?
Past Perfect and Clauses

When using two complete clauses to describe two events, the more recent event is presented with the past simple
tense of the verb. The clause describing the first event is presented with the past perfect. Either event can come
first in the sentence because the tense makes it clear which event is more recent.
First event (past perfect) More recent event (simple past)
I had just entered the movie theater before the rain started.
I had already left by the time she arrived at my house.
More recent event (simple past) First event (past perfect)
He asked the actress if she had won the award.
Before she won the award, she had felt nervous.
SECTION 1 6-7
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct verb form that best completes each sentence.
1. The line at the ticket counter had been really long when we ___________.
A. arrived B. had arrived
2. By the time I bought concessions, the movie ___________.
A. began B. had begun
3. She ___________ the channel before the commercials came on.
A. changed B. had changed
4. When I ___________ crying, I had only seen about 20 minutes of the documentary.
A. started B. had started
5. The celebrity ___________ in New York long before he moved to California.
A. didn’t live B. hadn’t lived
6. I had asked many times before my parents ___________ me go to the movie theater with just my friends.
A. let B. had let
7. The admission price ___________ by the time I arrived at the theater.
A. went up B. had gone up
8. He had eaten all his popcorn before the first half ___________ done.
A. was B. had been
9. They ___________ the role to another actor before I tried out for it.
A. already given B. had already given
10. My parents ___________ me to watch PG-13 movies before I turned 13 years old.
A. didn’t allow B. hadn’t allowed
LANGUAGE TIP
Definitions of Ratings
Ratings is a word with a few different meanings. If the critics gave a movie good ratings, that means a movie
was given high scores. If a TV show received good ratings, that means that there were many viewers who
watched the show when it aired on television. Movies are rated based on the appropriate age for someone to
be able to watch the movie.

MAD Text Match
1. By the time we got to the movie, F. all tickets had been sold out.
2. He had already paid for my ticket C. before I was able to take out my wallet.
3. Before I turned on the TV, H. my brother had already taken the remote control.
4. I had just found a good show to watch A. when he changed the channel.
5. I had just sat down at my computer, B. when my parents said, “Bedtime!”
6. They allowed me to see the movie, E. but it stopped playing in the theaters.
7. We had just started the show G. when the TV broke.
8. We had wanted to watch the movie with our kids D. before we saw it was rated R.
6-8 SECTION 1
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Fill in each blank with the correct verb form. Use past perfect for the event that happened first.
1. After I [had bought] popcorn, I [sat] down in my seat. (buy; sit)
2. By the time the movie [started], James [had already begun] eating his candy. (start; already begin)
3. Before the actress [received] her first acting award, she [had acted] in 27 films. (receive; act)
4. We [had just seen] the new movie when we [saw] the main actor in the street. (just see; see)
5. When I was little, I always [asked] my parents to buy me new toys after I [had seen] commercials for them.
(ask; see)
6. Stacy [changed] the channel because a commercial [had begun]. (change; begin)
7. After my little sister and I [had eaten] breakfast, we [watched] cartoons for an hour.
(eat; watch)
8. The Yangs [bought] a huge new house since they [had won] a lot of money on a game show. (buy; win)
9. Bridget [had just turned] 15 when her parents [let] her stay out past 10 p.m. (just turn; let)
10. By the time we [went] on our South American vacation, we [had watched] five different travel
documentaries about the Amazon rainforest. (go; watch)

Type two sentences for each picture that describes what had happened (past perfect) before it was
taken and then what happened (past simple) in the picture.
For example: You see:

You type: The family had woken up early to eat breakfast together. Dad made a
delicious breakfast.
1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8.
9. 10.
SECTION 1 6-9
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
Read the list of events in the order they happened. Then, tell the story using the past perfect. Start your
story like this and continue on to the next event: “I only left the room for ten minutes, but when I
returned I saw that the puppy had made a mess in the living room. The puppy....”
1. The puppy got out of its basket.
2. The puppy ran around the room.
3. He hit the table.
4. My mom’s big plant was on the table.
5. The plant fell over on the table.
6. The remote control got wet and dirty.
7. The puppy chewed up the plant.
8. The puppy became ill from eating some of the plant.
9. He got sick on the rug.
10. The puppy fell asleep on the rug.

Listen to each question. Then, respond in the pauses provided saying one possible or one crazy
explanation. Click “Done” to move on to the next question.
1. Why don’t you have your phone with you today?
2. Why did you stay late in class yesterday?
3. Why didn’t you say hello yesterday?
4. Why did you laugh in class this morning?
5. Why did you go to the library after school yesterday?
6. Why didn’t you sign up for the football team?
7. Why didn’t you want to see the movie with me last weekend?
8. Why didn’t you call me last night?
9. Why didn’t you do your homework?
10. Why did you see the movie again?
6-10 SECTION 1
1
6
GRAMMAR
ADJECTIVE ENDINGS: -ed vs. -ing
Verbs in their present and past participle forms can be used as adjectives. The ending will help you determine what
idea the participle as adjective is describing.
Adjective ending in -ed = describes emotions or how people feel

The comedian was bored. (Shows that the comedian was feeling bored.)
Adjective ending in -ing = describes the thing that is causing the emotion or feeling
The comedian was boring. (Shows that the comedian was boring the audience.)
Past participle as adjective Present participle as adjective
Verb
(Describes the emotion) (Describes what caused the emotion)
amaze I was amazed by the cartoon! I thought the cartoon was amazing!
confuse She is confused by the headline of the article. The headline of the article is confusing.
I am disappointed in the popcorn at the movie The popcorn at the movie theater is
disappoint
theater. disappointing.
excite The children were excited to see the magic show. The magic show was so exciting.
The child was frightened by the loud noises at The loud noises at the circus were frightening
frighten
the circus. to the child.
interest I am interested in that new show. That new show is quite interesting.
The backup dancer was tired after the The performance was tiring for the backup
tire
performance. dancer.

MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the adjective that best completes each sentence.
1. It was ___________ for the celebrity to talk with so many fans. A. tired B. tiring
2. Were you ___________ in watching this TV show? A. interested B. interesting
3. Some sci-fi movies are really ___________. A. frightened B. frightening
4. It was ___________ to see that actor in such a dramatic role. A. surprised B. surprising
5. I am ___________ that I don’t understand this question on A. frustrated B. frustrating
my homework.
6. This documentary about fishing is ___________ him so much A. bored B. boring
that he is falling asleep.
7. She is very ___________ in how films are made. A. interested B. interesting
8. Were you as ___________ as I was with the new Avengers movie? A. disappointed B. disappointing
9. Did you find that episode to be ___________? I didn’t understand A. confused B. confusing
what was happening.
10. It was ___________ watching the documentary about world hunger. A. depressed B. depressing
We have to do something!
SECTION 1 6-11
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Fill in each blank with the correct adjective form of the word given.
1. surprise
A. I was [surprised] at the end of the movie.
B. The ending was [surprising].
C. Were you [surprised] by the ending?
D. It was [surprising] that the characters did not get married.
2. interest
A. That documentary was so [interesting].
B. It [interested] me to learn something new.
C. Did you find it [interesting]?
D. I was [interested] throughout the entire documentary.
3. exciting
A. It was [exciting] to be on the game show.
B. My parents were also [excited] to see me on the show.
C. Being on the game show was so [exciting].
D. Would you have been [excited] or nervous on the show?
4. disappoint
A. My favorite movie star was [disappointed] that she didn’t win.
B. I was just as [disappointed] as my favorite movie star that she did not win the award.
C. Were you as [disappointed] as I was?
D. It was [disappointing] that she had lost.
5. frighten
A. That horror movie [frightened] him.
B. He couldn’t sleep because the movie was so [frightening].
C. I was [frightened] by that thriller movie.
D. Are thrillers [frightening] in your opinion?
6. amaze
A. Traveling throughout Scotland was [amazing].
B. She was [amazed] by the beautiful castles in Scotland.
C. I am [amazed] at how friendly the people in Scotland are.
D. The beach pictures you took in Scotland are [amazing].
6-12 SECTION 1
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
CULTURAL NOTE
Internet TV vs. Cable
It wasn’t that long ago when TV shows were only watched on public television. Then, cable providers started
to offer more channels than what you could access with just an antenna. Nowadays, you can watch TV shows
on local television networks with an antenna connected to your TV, you can borrow TV series on DVD from
libraries, or you can watch shows from internet TV providers such as Netflix, Hulu, Amazon Prime, HBO,
and YouTube TV. Because of the popularity of these internet TV services, cable providers often allow their
customers to stream TV channels on their own websites.

Use adjectives to tell us how you feel about each sentence and what you think about it. First use the
-ed form of the verb and then use the -ing.
For example:
You read: I don’t understand my homework.
You type: I feel confused. The homework is very confusing.
Possible answers:
1. I went on a very long run. I feel tired.
The run was tiring.
2. The ending of the movie was really bad. I feel disappointed.
The ending of the movie was disappointing.
3. My brother is singing really loudly at home. I feel annoyed.
The singing is annoying.
4. I am going to be on a game show. I feel excited.
This is so exciting.
5. I pronounced her name wrong again! I feel embarrassed.
That was really embarrassing.
6. The documentary about animals was really sad. I feel depressed.
It was depressing.
7. That new horror movie is really scary. I feel frightened.
The new horror movie was too frightening.
8. He bought me an expensive gift. I feel surprised.
The expensive gift was so surprising.

MAD Open Recording
Say something about your life using an adjective. Use both the -ed and -ing endings. Here is a list that
may help you. Pick eight of the adjectives: amaze, annoy, confuse, depress, disappoint, embarrass,
excite, frighten, interest, surprise, tire.
SECTION 1 6-13
1
6
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 6.1.20 - What’s your favorite?
Ask each partner the following questions and write down their answers:
Question Partner A Partner B
1. What’s your favorite movie or show?
2. What type of movie/show is it? Sci-fi, horror, comedy, etc.?
3. Where do you watch it?
4. Who do you usually watch it with?
5. Why do you love it?
6. What is it about?
7. Who stars in it? Do you follow them on social media?
8. (movie) How many times have you seen it?
9. (TV show) Do you have a favorite episode or character?
10. Other question:

MAD Open Recording
Tell about one of your partner’s favorites from the conversation activity. Include as many answers as
possible to the questions you asked him/her.
ACTIVITY 6.1.22 - Tell me a joke!
Who knew grammar could be so funny? Look at these past perfect jokes. The questions and the answers
are not together. You both have all of the questions up top and all of the answers down below. Find the
“punch line” (answer) to each joke. Write the letter of the answer next to the joke. If your partner doesn’t
think it is funny, explain it to him/her if you can. Most of these are idiomatic expressions and might be
hard to understand, but good luck! These jokes are quite punny! (funny + pun)
Joke 1: Why did the orange stop in the middle of the hill? Answer E: It had run out of juice!
Joke 2: Why did the boy throw a clock out the window? Answer D: He had wanted to see time fly.
Joke 3: Why did the computer squeak? Answer B: Someone had stepped on its mouse.
Joke 4: Why was the math book sad? Answer G: Because the student hadn’t solved all of its problems.
Joke 5: Why did the girl throw the butter out the window? Answer I: She had wanted to see a butterfly.
Joke 6: Why was the baseball game so hot? Answer J: Because all the fans had left!
Joke 7: Why didn’t the bike stand on its own? Answer H: Because it had been two tired.
Joke 8: Why did the golfer wear two pairs of pants? Answer F: He had gotten a hole in one!
Joke 9: Why did the man put a clock under his desk? Answer C: Because he had wanted to work overtime!
Joke 10: Why did the student eat her homework? Answer A: Because the teacher had said it was a piece
of cake!
6-14 SECTION 1
1
6
READING
DIFFERENT TYPES OF TV GENRES
Cartoons:
Cartoons are usually funny drawings or illustrations in magazines or newspapers. These drawings can also be made
into animated TV shows or movies. They often feature animals, made-up characters, or people. Many cartoons are
made for younger kids, but there are also some cartoons for adults, like South Park or The Simpsons. The purpose of a
cartoon is to entertain viewers, make them laugh, or even criticize society or culture by being sarcastic.
Documentaries:
Documentaries educate viewers on topics such as nature, history, famous people or events, politics, and social or
economic problems. They are also called “factual films” because they give facts and information to the viewers.
Documentaries are more focused on bringing awareness to a problem or idea and making viewers think about the
world in which we live. Planet Earth is one of the best-known nature documentaries from the British Broadcasting
Corporation (BBC), one of Britain’s main television stations.
Game Shows:
Jeopardy, Family Feud, and Wheel of Fortune are among the USA’s most popular game shows on TV. The Chase, Pointless,
and Catchphrase are favorites in Britain. All of these are game shows where people are competing against each other
individually or in teams to win prizes. In more traditional game shows, contestants usually have to answer questions
to score points and win money or prizes. These are often also called “quiz shows.” More and more game shows have
surfaced in which candidates have to do something in order to earn points or advance to the next level. One example
is American Ninja Warrior where contestants need to pass the first level of an obstacle course before moving onto the
second level.
Makeover Shows:
In recent years, makeover shows have become more and more popular all over the world, especially in America.
Home makeover shows can be found on multiple channels. In these shows a team of workers, designers, and
architects work together to improve a home of a family in need or fix broken houses and turn them into beautiful
new homes. Another popular type of makeover show is a fashion makeover show, like What Not to Wear. Some shows
like Extreme Makeover or Styles by Jury take it a step further. In these shows, the person is undergoing a complete
makeover, which means hair, makeup, wardrobe, and even lifestyle changes will be made. Each show ends with a
big reveal as viewers are able to compare “before and after” photos of the person.
Reality Shows:
As the title suggests, reality shows feature real people living their real lives, and the shows are not scripted. The
people on the show may be unknown, or they could be celebrities. The main purpose is to entertain the viewers, not
educate them. These shows are filled with drama and relationships. Some of Britain’s best-known reality TV shows are
Made in Chelsea or Love Island. In the U.S., The Bachelor, Survivor, and Keeping up with the Kardashians are some of the
most popular.
SECTION 1 6-15
1
6
READING
ACTIVITIES
Talk Shows:
Talk shows feature one or more hosts who get together to discuss various topics. Some talk shows interview celebritites
about their newest movie, album, or book. Other talk shows talk to ordinary people about something they are doing
to change the world. Talk show hosts, like Oprah Winfrey, Ellen DeGeneres, Jimmy Fallon, Conan O’Brien, and David
Letterman are famous in the US, just as Graham Norton, Jeremy Kyle, and Trisha Goddard are in the UK.
Sitcoms:
Sitcom stands for “Situation Comedy” and is typically a funny TV show. There are usually only a few main characters
in the show that appear in every episode. Sitcoms often show the daily lives of those characters and focus on their
relationships with one another. The topics are amusing and light so that the shows are fun and easy to watch. Modern
Family, The Big Bang Theory, and Friends are very popular in America while the British audience likes Miranda, Friday
Night Dinner, and Mrs. Brown’s Boys.

MAD Text Match
Based on each description of the person and the reading about the types of shows, match each TV show
type with the person who would enjoy watching it.
1. Uma loves fashion and home decorating. makeover show
2. Kylee enjoys learning about historical events. documentary
3. Tanisha enjoys laughing and relaxing when at home. sitcom
4. Jackson is talkative and loves discussions. talk show
5. Maggie is interested in other people’s lives. reality show
6. Kumar is five years old and loves to laugh. cartoons
7. Dominic is really smart and competitive. game show

MAD Category Match
Place each word under the correct type of TV show.
Talk Show Reality TV Cartoon Documentary Game Show Makeover Show Sitcom
interesting relationships funny informative competitive improving light
interviews real life animated educational winner changing funny
conversational not educational sarcastic factual quizzes before & after easy

MAD Open Recording
1. What is your favorite type of TV show? What’s your least favorite? Why?
2. Do you have a favorite TV show that you watch on a regular basis? What is it, and why is it your favorite?
3. Have you ever seen any of the American or British TV shows mentioned in the reading? If so, what did you
think?
6-16 SECTION 1
1
6
VOCABULARY
EXPANSION OF MUSIC

MAD Open Recording
Say as much as possible about the Section 2 Vocabulary pictures. Where do you think these pictures
were taken? What types of musicians do you see? What type of music is being played in each picture?


MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text
SECTION 2 6-17
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. The album was inspired by the singer’s children.
2. How long is the band on tour?
3. The performance by the backup dancers was amazing.
4. My band has a bassist, guitarist, pianist, drummer, and a lead singer.
5. I suggest we give the backup singers each a microphone.
6. This song reminds me of another song I know.
7. Have you heard the recording of this hit song on the radio?
8. If you are going to complain about the volume, move away from the speakers.
9. These street performers are extremely talented.
10. The audience claps during the show if they are enjoying the music.
CULTURAL NOTE
Award Shows
People love to be entertained by music, movies, television, and theater, and then see how their favorites are
judged by the experts. Therefore, award shows are popular to watch live. Some of the biggest ceremonies are
the Academy Awards/the Oscars (for film), Tony Awards (for theater), Emmy Awards (for television), Grammy
Awards (for music), and Golden Globes (for film and television). Shows typically begin with media coverage of
celebrities arriving in fancy cars and being interviewed as they walk the red carpet. Then, a host entertains the
audience, introduces the important people of the evening, famous singers perform, and awards are given out.
Some talented stars are known as EGOTs, which means they have won at least one Emmy, Grammy, Oscar, and
Tony award throughout their careers. Audrey Hepburn, Whoopi Goldberg, Andrew Lloyd Webber, Mel Brooks,
and John Legend are some well-known EGOTs.

1. [I approve of this song choice.]
2. [Do you know when the band goes on tour?]
3. [This song reminds me of my best friend.]
4. [He has never played on stage before.]
5. [What was your inspiration for this song?]
6. [She always wanted to perform as a backup dancer.]
7. [The bassist is very entertaining to watch.]
8. [We have to clap loudly at the end of the award show.]
9. [Have you been to this concert hall for a live show before?]
10. [Please stop complaining about the loud music.]
6-18 SECTION 2
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the best answer for each question based on the chapter vocabulary.
1. Which vocabulary word is NOT related to the others in the group?
A. drummer B. bassist C. dancer D. guitarist
A. sing B. clap C. record D. perform
A. rating B. stage C. speakers D. microphone
A. concert B. musician C. audience D. life
A. movie B. album C. recording D. concert
A. fans B. audience C. applaud D. perform
A. celebrity B. star C. actor D. concessions
A. episode B. tour C. character D. role
LANGUAGE TIP
What’s a venue?
A venue is a place where an event is held. You will often hear the word used to talk about where a wedding or a
concert will take place, but you can use this word when talking about the location of any
planned event. Popular types of venues include sports stadiums, concert halls, hotels, museums, or parks.

MAD Sentence Jumble
Read the paragraphs about what needs to be done in order to plan a concert. First, decide which title
goes with which paragraph. Then, put the titles in the order in which you see the paragraphs.
1. Decide on total cost
How much money do you have and how much do you need? Include the costs for the concert hall/venue,
costs for any hired help, equipment rental, and advertising. Then, write down sources for money you already
have, such as personal contributions, and where you can get extra money from, such as sponsors.
2. Choose the date
Nothing can be booked, planned, sold, or decided upon until you know when the event will take place.
Planning the event on the weekend is more likely to bring in larger crowds than on a weekday.
3. Find the musicians
Contact singers or bands to perform at your event. Discuss how much they will be paid and what equipment
the band members will need.
SECTION 2 6-19
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Sentence Jumble
4. Pick the venue
The band needs a stage on which they can perform. Create a list of local places where you would like to hold
the concert. Keep in mind the genre or type of music and size of the band. Put the venues in order on the
list from your first choice to last choice. Call and find out pricing options. Talk with all of your team members
before deciding on the venue.
5. Calculate ticket prices
How much will admission be, and will it vary by seat location? Will you offer paper or electronic tickets? Will
ticket sales be handled by a venue’s box office or your company? Which may be cheaper? Decide whether
ticket sales will start in advance and if you will continue to sell on the day of the show at the door. This may
increase last-minute sales.
6. Advertise the concert
List the event on concert sites like Ticketmaster.com. Post flyers around the area near the venue. Place
advertisements on your company’s or organization’s website. Hand out flyers to pedestrians on the street.
Create a social media event. Place an ad in the local newspaper or on the radio. Get the word out about your
big event!
7. Get the equipment
Sound, audio, and video equipment must be rented for the band’s performance if you don’t already own it or
the band isn’t bringing it. Hire the necessary people to set up, run, and take down the equipment the night of
the event.
8. Organize food
Hire a restaurant/caterer to come and serve food and drinks, or prepare food for the event ahead of time
using volunteers. Preparing food with your own committee members will cut down on costs. Use volunteers
to run the food stands.

Listen to each question about your favorite band. Then, respond in the pauses provided using complete
1. Who is your favorite band?
2. Do you have a favorite band member? If so, what is their role in the band?
3. What is one of their hit songs?
4. What album do you suggest that I listen to from this band?
5. Is there a song on this album that reminds you of someone?
6. Have you ever been to one of their live shows?
a. If yes, what did you think of the show?
b. If no, why haven’t you been to a show yet?
6-20 SECTION 2
1
6
GRAMMAR
COMMON VERB + PREPOSITION COMBINATIONS
Standard word order for English sentences: subject + verb + object
Some English verbs, however, are paired with a preposition that comes before the object.
Subject + (verb + preposition) + object
There is no pattern for determining which verbs are paired with a preposition.
Memorize the common verb + preposition combinations below:
Verb + Preposition Examples

agree with / disagree with I agree with the pianist about the songs to be played.
approve of The interviewer didn’t approve of the celebrity’s talk show.
ask for John will ask for a seat near the aisle.
complain about The reviewer complained about the length of the live concert.
forget about Did you forget about the play tonight?
happen to Did you happen to read that news article?
introduce someone to I will introduce you to the lead guitarist.
look at Look at the candy at the concession stand!
pay attention to Be sure to pay attention to the speaker on the stage.
remind someone of I will remind him of the date of the magic show.
thank someone for Thank you for explaining the documentary to me.
wait for We waited for the orchestra to finish its performance.
work on The drummer will work on his performance.
Verb + prepositions followed by a gerund
The object in the (subject + verb + preposition + object) structure can also be a gerund (verb + ing).
care about I don’t care about getting tickets for that game show.
keep on I had to keep on explaining the article to her.
think about He will think about interviewing the DJ.
SECTION 2 6-21
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Category Match
Place each verb under the correct preposition.
about for of on to with

think wait remind someone keep happen disagree
care ask approve work introduce agree
forget thank someone pay attention
complain

Fill in each blank with the correct preposition (about, at, for, of, on, to, with).
1. Who are you looking [at]?
2. I agree [with] you. We should buy popcorn.
3. I’d like to introduce you [to] my manager.
4. This song reminds me [of] my first summer camp.
5. My favorite band doesn’t care [about] the charts.
6. Thanks [for] the concert tickets!
7. Pay attention [to] the lyrics of the song. They’re really great.
8. My parents don’t approve [of] heavy metal bands.
9. I’m waiting [for] their new album to go on sale in stores.
10. The band is currently working [on] a new album.

MAD Multiple Choice
Listen to the sentences. Each one is missing the preposition. Choose the correct one that best completes
each sentence.
1. My mom says that I complain ___________ everything.
A. of B. for C. about
2. I asked ___________ an example of when I complained recently, and she said she forgot.
A. about B. for C. to
3. I asked again, but she said I should forget ___________ it.
A. to B. of C. about
4. My dad and I often disagree ___________ each other.
A. on B. with C. about
5. She doesn’t approve ___________ my taste in music.
A. of B. for C. about
6. I often think ___________ what it would be like to be famous.
7. I keep ___________ listening to my favorite bands anyway.
6-22 SECTION 2
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
8. I happened ___________ see a tweet about my favorite singer the other day.
A. with B. to C. for
9. He really cares ___________ the message in his music.
A. about B. for C. on
10. I love his music because it reminds me ___________ home.
A. on B. about C. of

MAD Open Recording
Listen to the person tell a story. Take some notes on a piece of paper. Then, record yourself telling the
story in your own words. Try to use the correct prepositions.
I was walking home from school last Tuesday when I happened to see a poster advertising a concert of my
favorite band. I don’t usually pay attention to posters because I often only look at my phone when I want
information. Once I got home, I forgot about it. Then, this morning my friend talked about the band’s latest
single, so that reminded me of the poster. He agreed with me that we should get tickets. That evening, I asked
my parents for the money for the tickets. They thought about it for a while, but because they approve of the
band, they agreed. So, I thanked them for the tickets, and now we’re waiting for the day of the concert to
arrive.
SECTION 2 6-23
1
6
GRAMMAR
CONNECTING WORDS: CONTRAST
A contrasting relationship shows that one idea has an unexpected or unusual relationship to another idea. When
expressing this relationship, you will have two ideas connected by a word that shows the contrast. Notice in the
following examples that the order of the ideas in the relationship determines the punctuation for the sentence.
Forming Contrasting Relationships

Using “although” and “even though”
These connecting words are subordinating conjunctions and can be placed either between the ideas or at the
beginning of the sentence. Note that if the connecting word begins the sentence, a comma is placed between
the ideas.
Idea 1: The article explained the documentary. Although the article explained the documentary, I was still
confused by it.
Idea 2: I was confused by it. I was confused by the documentary although the article
explained it.
Idea 1: She complained about the band’s music. Even though she complained about the band’s music, she
went to their live concert.
Idea 2: She went to their live concert. She went to the band’s live concert even though she
complained about their music.
Using “however”
When used to connect complete ideas, “however” is a conjunctive adverb. When used between the ideas within a
sentence, place a semicolon before it and a comma after. When using “however” at the beginning of a sentence,
place a comma after it.
Idea 1: I tried to watch the documentary. I tried to watch the documentary; however, the music from
the other room was too loud.
Idea 2: The music from the other room was too loud. The music from the other room was too loud. However, I
tried to watch the documentary.
Using “but”
When used to connect complete ideas, “but” is a coordinating conjunction, so it can’t be used at the beginning of a
sentence.
Note: When “but” is used between complete ideas, place a comma before it.
Idea 1: They decided to go to the movie. They decided to go to the movie, but I changed my mind
about going.
Idea 2: I changed my mind about going. I changed my mind about going, but they decided to go to
the movie.
Note: You are allowed to start with the word “but” in speech; however, not in writing.
6-24 SECTION 2
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the connecting word that best completes each sentence.
1. She came to school today ___________ she has a cold.
A. even though B. but
2. ___________ we won our first three games, we still didn’t win the entire tournament.
A. However B. Although
3. Celebrities earn millions of dollars. ___________, they don’t have very private lives.
A. But B. However
4. I love her music ___________ I don’t understand the words.
A. however B. even though
5. My dad has an old record player, ___________ I don’t know how to use it.
A. however B. but
6. ___________ the band broke up, they still work together on the reality show.
A. Although B. But
7. They’re going to sell their new album in stores ___________ everyone listens to music online now.
A. even though B. but
8. I don’t like their latest YouTube video. ___________, it’s had millions of “likes” this week.
A. Even though B. However
9. The outdoor concert kept going ___________ it was raining heavily.
A. but B. although
10. ___________ everything is digital today, I still keep my old CDs and DVDs.
A. Even though B. However
CULTURAL NOTE
Vote now for your favorite contestant!
Many reality competition shows depend on audience participation. If you want your favorite contestant to
move on to the next stage of a singing or talent competition, you will often have the opportunity to call a
hotline and enter the number your favorite person was assigned in order to vote for them. There are also
numbers you can text to submit your vote, or if you post about your favorite contestant on social media with
a certain hashtag, that may also count as a vote. The contestants with the most votes from
viewers will move on in the competition.
SECTION 2 6-25
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
1. You’re not going to the team practice D. even though you should.
2. I practiced the piano this morning G. although I didn’t want to.
3. You should have come with to the concert, J. but it’s okay that you didn’t.
4. I never learned how to read music; C. however, I can try my best.
5. You went to the party last night E. even though I told you not to.
6. I didn’t congratulate her H. although it was the right thing to do.
7. I don’t have that movie on DVD, A. but I want to buy it.
8. He agreed with her I. even though he knew she was wrong.
9. I don’t like your idea; F. however, it may work.
10. I got tickets to his concert, B. but they were expensive.

Read each sentence. Then, type a sentence joining the two ideas together using the word(s) of contrast in
parentheses. Use the name in the first clause and the pronoun in the second.
1. Carol doesn’t like loud music. She went to the live rock concert with us. (even though)
2. This drummer is good. That one is good, too. (however)
3. My favorite band is on tour. The closest concert is two states away. (but)
4. He is the lead guitarist. He prefers to sing. (although)
5. The band wants to write another hit song. They don’t have any inspiration right now. (however)
6. The audience cheers for another song. The performers don’t come back on stage. (even though)
7. I am not a fan of their new album. I really like this band. (but)
8. She is going to be a bassist. She is a better pianist. (although)
Possible answers:
1. Even though Carol doesn’t like loud music, she went to the live rock concert with us.
2. This drummer is good; however, that one is good, too.
3. My favorite band is on tour, but the closest concert is two states away.
4. Although he is the lead guitarist, he prefers to sing.
5. The band wants to write another hit song. However, they don’t have any inspiration right now.
6. The performers don’t come back on stage even though the audience cheers for another song.
7. I really like this band, but I am not a fan of their new album.
8. She is going to be a bassist although she is a better pianist.
6-26 SECTION 2
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Listen to each sentence starter. Then, complete each sentence with your own ideas in the pauses
provided. Click “Done” to move on to the next question.
1. Even though I love their music, ___________.
2. Live concerts are too expensive for me. However, ___________.
3. I don’t have enough money for concert tickets, but ___________.
4. My neighbors complained about my music even though ___________.
5. Although I can’t sing, ___________.
6. The backup dancers and stage show were fantastic. However, ___________.
7. I don’t follow many celebrities on Twitter even though ___________.
8. I wanted to go to the live show, but ___________.
9. Even though my parents don’t allow me to, ___________.
10. Although I don’t have the money, ___________.

MAD Open Recording
Pretend you went to this concert last night with your friends. You are now telling your parents about it.
Use connecting words to show contrast as you are telling your story.
SECTION 2 6-27
1
6
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 6.2.19 - The Beatles on Tour
You and your partner each have half of the information for The Beatles 1966 North American tour. Take
turns asking and answering questions in order to complete your worksheets.
Date City Country Venue / Theater

12 August 1966 Chicago United States International Amphitheatre
13 August 1966 Detroit United States Olympia Stadium
14 August 1966 Cleveland United States Cleveland Stadium
15 August 1966 Washington, DC United States D.C. Stadium
16 August 1966 Philadelphia United States John F. Kennedy Stadium
17 August 1966 Toronto Canada Maple Leaf Gardens
18 August 1966 Boston United States Suffolk Downs Racetrack
19 August 1966 Memphis United States Mid-South Coliseum
21 August 1966 Cincinnati United States Crosley Field
22 August 1966 St. Louis United States Busch Stadium
23 August 1966 St. Louis
New York City United States International
Shea StadiumAmphitheatre
25 August 1966 Detroit
Seattle United States OlympiaCenter
Seattle Stadium
Coliseum
Los Angeles United States OlympiaStadium
Dodger Stadium
San Francisco United States Olympia Stadium
Candlestick Park
ACTIVITY 6.2.20 - Song Translation

Pick a song you would like your students to work with. Copy the lyrics from a lyric site and check that they
match the song. Then, take out some of the words by making blanks for the students to fill in while they
listen to the song. Finally, play the song for the class through the LAD or aloud through your computer
speakers.
Or you can do this as a Fill-in-the-Blanks activity in the MAD. Use the brackets [ ] to create the blanks in the
MAD and have partners sit next to each other to discuss what they hear.
Here are instructions for teachers to add to the Partner Activity in the MAD.
You will be given a song to listen to, fill in the blanks, and then translate.
1. Listen to the song once without trying to do anything other than understand as many words as possible.
2. Listen to the song again. This time try to fill in the blanks with your partner.
3. Now it is time to translate the song as best as you can.
4. What do you think the meaning behind the song is? Why do you believe the writer wrote the song?
5. Do you know any other songs by this singer/band?
6-28 SECTION 2
1
6
READING
OUR U.S. TOUR BLOG
SECTION 2 6-29
1
6
READING
ACTIVITIES
Look at the following interview with the band. Fill in each blank with the correct word from the word bank.
question family uncomfortable
experience miss hotels
performances fans city
concert touring special
Robotel Gazette: What was the best thing about touring?
Band: That’s a tough [question]. I think being so close with our [fans] and really feeling the music and love was
the best!
Robotel Gazette: What was the worst [experience] on tour?
Band: The beds! We always thought it would be awesome to be staying in [hotels] and the tour bus, but wow,
we did not expect it to be so [uncomfortable]!
Robotel Gazette: What did you [miss] back home the most?
Band: Our families. Even though our fans welcomed us in every [city], and we felt like we were part of their
hometowns, being away from our closest [family] and friends was tough.
Robotel Gazette: Which of your [performances] did you like best?
Band: Honestly, it’s hard to choose, but if we have to pick one, we think our first [concert] was probably the
best. It was the first, you know? The adrenaline, the excitement, and the two full months of [touring] ahead
of us. That all made it a very [special] night!

MAD Sentence Jumble
Read the blog posts. Here are the titles of the blog posts that the band did not include. Put the titles in the
correct order of the posts.
Our tour begins! Ready, set, go!
We recorded a live concert!
We need a break!
Missing home, but don’t want the tour to end!
Back home!
ACTIVITY 6.2.23- WRITE

MAD Open Text
The band did not write between weeks two and five on the tour. Write a blog as if you were one of the band
members for week three or four.

MAD Open Recording
1. What kind of music do you listen to?
2. What is your favorite band and why?
3. Have you ever been to a concert? Describe your experience. What did you like the most? What didn’t you like?
4. What do you think is the best and worst thing about being a famous musician?
6-30 SECTION 2
1
6
VOCABULARY
ENTERTAINMENT & NEWS

MAD Open Text
With a partner, type a short story about the Section 3 Vocabulary picture. Before you start your story, type
both of your names.


MAD Text Match

MAD Open Text
SECTION 3 6-31
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Pronunciation
1. The interviewer explained her opinion in the article.
2. Did you read the review of the orchestra in the paper?
3. I changed my mind about going to the ballet.
4. Explain the headline in the news to me.
5. She looked into the details of the article she read.
6. What is your opinion of this DJ?
7. I was amazed at the size of the stage as I entered the theater.
8. The DJ played music before the magic show started.
9. An opera is a play with singing instead of talking.
10. Please explain the joke that the comedian just told.

1. [Did you read the newspaper headlines this morning?]
2. [The actor changed his mind and decided to take the part in the play.]
3. [The comedian had the worst performance of his life.]
4. [The journalist reviewed the ballet in her article.]
5. [Which song would you like to request from the DJ?]
6. [Will you change your mind about buying tickets for the orchestra?]
7. [The interviewee shared her opinions about the opera.]
8. [The DJ connects two speakers to his equipment.]
9. [I read about the circus animals in the news.]
10. [Did you stay for the entire event, or did you leave early?]
LANGUAGE TIP
Headline vs. Headliner
A headline is a brief phrase containing the main information of a news article. Think of a headline as the title
of an article where you learn what the article is about. “Did you read the headlines?” is a question that really
means, “Did you hear about the latest big news?” The word headliner means the main band or singer that is
performing. If a group is headlining a concert, they are likely the most successful or most popular band out of
all of the bands performing that day, and they will usually be the last band to perform during the concert.
6-32 SECTION 3
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
Listen to each definition. Then, match each vocabulary word with the correct definition.
1. tells you what the article is about the headline
2. person who answers questions the interviewee
3. a large group of classical musicians the orchestra
4. ask a DJ to play your favorite song to request
5. person who tells jokes the comic
6. what a person believes to be true an opinion
7. when you need to learn more about something to look into
8. person who asks the questions the interviewer
9. to give your opinion about an event to review
10. person who plays music at a wedding the DJ
11. pick one activity then decide to do another to change your mind
12. a part of the performance an act

MAD Category Match
Listen as top critics give movie reviews of Harry Potter and the Deathly Hallows: Part 2. Is the review
positive or negative? Place each critic’s name under the correct type of review.
Hello. David Denby here from the New Yorker. When the movie was over, a young boy sitting behind me said,
“That was great!” He was satisfied and happy. For someone my age, it was okay. Fun to watch but nothing life
changing.
Nancy Wu from the Morning News. Fasten your seat belts. Harry Potter and the Deathly Hallows: Part 2 has all
the feelings in this movie. It will make you laugh, cry, hold your breath. I am not a fan of the emotional ups
and downs, twists and turns. There was way too much action in the span of one movie for me.
This is Liam Perez from Global Reviews. This movie was written in a terrific, smartly designed way. It was a
teenage adventure, full of amazing visuals, great narratives, and will be a popular film for years to come.
Hey all! I’m Andrew O’Hare from Movies.com. This was a movie with no beginning and no middle just
two-plus hours of a loud, action-packed ending. It was disappointing because I really loved the other movies.
SECTION 3 6-33
1
6
VOCABULARY
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 6.3.8 - LISTEN (Continued)
MAD Category Match
Hi, everyone! Nayasha Patel from Slate. It’s always hard to predict how people will react when many movies are
made with the same characters. Often, the first movie is the best of a series, and the following movies simply
don’t meet expectations. This is not my favorite genre, so although I was entertained, it is nothing that I would
see again.
Stephen Whitty from the Star Newsroom. Be sure to arrive at your seat with plenty of popcorn... and tissues.
You’re going to need both. A true pleasure to watch.
Roger Ebert from Show Time Reviews. This movie was made with impressive imagery. The storyline was easy to
understand, and there were surprises, which made you interested in what was going to happen. Harry Potter
now has a perfect ending for the most profitable series in movie history.
Positive Review Both Negative Review

Liam Perez David Denby Nancy Wu
Stephen Whitty Nayasha Patel Andrew O’Hare
Roger Ebert

MAD Open Recording
Answer the questions about your favorite form of entertainment in complete sentences.
1. Which type of entertainment do you enjoy the most? TV, movies, books, plays, or musicals?
2. From that type of entertainment, which is your favorite show, movie, or title?
3. Give a review of your favorite. Include:
- your opinion about it
- your favorite part
- anything you did not like or would change about it

Class Activity
GAMES: Battleship and Marker Wars (The explanation and playing sheet for these
games are located in the B1 Resources Google Doc Folder, or download the
6-34 SECTION 3
1
6
GRAMMAR
REVIEW OF TENSE
Verb tenses tell us whether an action happened in the past, is happening now, or will happen in the future. Each
major tense is divided further to show whether the action is ongoing (continuous tenses) or to show the order of
actions (perfect tenses).
PRESENT TENSES
Tenses Formations Examples
Present Simple
Action happening now or that present tense verb I explain the news article to my friend.
happens repeatedly
Present Continuous I am explaining the news article to my

Ongoing action is happening now be + present participle friend now.
Present Perfect
I have explained the news article to my
Action has taken place one or many has/have + past participle
friend many times.
times before now
Present Perfect Continuous
has/have + been + present I have been explaining news articles to
Action started in the past and
participle my friend for years.
continues to this moment
PAST TENSES
Past Simple
I explained the news article to my friend
Action took place at a specific time past tense verb
yesterday.
in the past
Past Continuous
I was explaining the news article to my
Ongoing action was interrupted by was/were + present participle
friend when you arrived.
another action
Past Perfect
Action took place once or many I had explained the news article to my
had + past participle
times before another point in the friend before you arrived.
past
FUTURE TENSES
will + present tense verb I will explain the news article to my friend
Future Simple
tomorrow.
Action or plan that will be taken in
am/are/is + going to + present I am going to explain the news article to
the future
tense verb my friend tomorrow.
will be + present participle I will be explaining the news article when
Future Continuous
you arrive tomorrow.
Action or plan in the future that is
am/are/is + going to + be + I am going to be explaining the news
interrupted by another event
present participle article when you arrive tomorrow.
SECTION 3 6-35
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the correct tense of each sentence.
1. She is always changing her mind.
A. present perfect continuous C. past continuous
B. future continuous D. present continuous
2. The ballet performs the Nutcracker every winter.
A. present simple C. past perfect
B. past simple D. present perfect
3. What was your favorite animal act at the circus?
A. future simple C. past simple
B. past perfect D. future continuous
4. On March 7th, the comic will be performing his 100th comedy routine.
A. present perfect continuous C. past continuous
5. Had you ever seen an opera before this one?
A. present perfect C. past continuous
B. past perfect D. present continuous
6. We have been requesting songs of the DJ the whole night.
A. present continuous C. present perfect continuous
B. future continuous D. past continuous
7. My family will be the inspiration for our next hit song.
A. present simple C. future simple
8. They have practiced the same act 20 times.
A. past perfect C. past simple
B. present simple D. present perfect
9. The journalist was looking into the actor’s life as a child for his article.
A. present perfect continuous C. past simple
B. past continuous D. present continuous
10. How many times had you been interviewed during your last tour?
A. past perfect C. past continuous
B. present perfect D. present perfect continuous

MAD Text Match
Listen to each sentence. Then, match the correct tense with each sentence you hear.
1. I was changing the channel to find the new game show. Past Continuous
2. She will be late but will arrive during the second act. Future Simple
3. The performer has thanked everyone for coming to the show. Present Perfect
4. He bought me their recorded live concert album. Past Simple
6-36 SECTION 3
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Text Match
5. We have been interviewing a lot of celebrities lately. Present Perfect Continuous
6. We had watched that cartoon every morning growing up. Past Perfect
7. I suggest musicals by rating and reviewing them online. Present Simple
8. They will be bringing a new microphone for you. Future Continuous
9. She is performing in a magic show today. Present Continuous

Listen to the conversation. Then, fill in the chart with the correct entertainment noun. Type ‘the’ in front
of each noun. For example: You hear: I want to see the magic show.
You type: the magic show
Malcolm: Hi, guys. I am trying to decide what to do this weekend. There are just so many entertaining events
happening at once. It’s hard to choose.
Tammy: I know! I really want to see the ballet this weekend, but there aren’t any tickets left for it!
Malcolm: Ballet! How boring. That’s the last thing I would want to see. I wish I could go to the circus, but the
only show is Saturday afternoon, and I already have a soccer game at the same time!
Lena: I have a similar problem. I have tickets for a comedian that I really wanted to see, but now I have to
work Friday night. The circus is not an option for me. I hate clowns anyway, and I don’t like how they treat the
animals. I just checked the theater schedule. There is also a musical, an opera, and a play. I went to the play
last weekend. It was really good. I didn’t expect it to be so interesting!
Tammy: I have already seen the musical. It was okay. I loved the music, but the costumes were kind of weird.
Malcolm: How funny, we all have seen something different. I have seen the opera already. I went because
my mom really wanted to go. I bought her tickets for Mother’s Day, but I would not recommend it. I didn’t
understand a word and had a hard time staying awake! But wait, what about the concert in the park
downtown? Did you hear that it is free?
Tammy: I don’t want to go to a concert. It’s supposed to rain, and I don’t want to be sitting in the audience
wet and cold. I think I made my decision. I’ll be going to the opera. I hope I like it even though you didn’t,
Malcolm.
Lena: I’ll take your recommendation, Tammy, and go see the musical. I hope the music is as great as you said.
Malcolm: All right, ladies, you enjoy your classic entertainment. Lena, those comedian tickets, do you still
have them? I’d buy them from you and go see the comedian.
Lena: Yes, I do. That would be great. Then I don’t have to worry about selling them online. Thanks!
Malcolm Tammy Lena

wants to see most the circus the ballet the comedian
will be seeing the comedian the opera the musical
has already seen the opera the musical the play
doesn’t want to see the ballet the concert the circus
SECTION 3 6-37
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Read the present simple sentence. Respond in the pauses provided by saying the sentence in the tense
that you hear. Click “Done” to move on to the next tense.
Present simple sentence: I change my mind.
1. Use the present continuous I am changing my mind.
2. Use the present perfect I have changed my mind.
3. Use the present perfect continuous I have been changing my mind.
4. Use the past simple I changed my mind.
5. Use the past continuous I was changing my mind.
6. Use the past perfect I had changed my mind.
7. Use the future simple with will I will change my mind.
8. Use the future continuous with going to I am going to be changing my mind.

MAD Open Recording
Choose one of the pictures and tell a story about it. Try to use as many tenses as possible. Include what
had happened, what is happening, and what will happen. Here is a list of all the tenses you should try to
use: present simple, present continuous, present perfect, present perfect continuous, past simple,
past continuous, past perfect, future simple, and future continuous.
CULTURAL NOTE
Clowns
When you think of a clown, you may think about painted faces, colorful outfits, crazy hair, and funny
performances. Clowns try to make people laugh and are often seen as a type of silly entertainment for children.
You may see clowns joking around at birthday parties, festivals, carnivals, and circuses. Bozo the Clown and
Ronald McDonald are two famous, friendly clown characters. However, not all clowns are friendly. Storytellers
have brought a scary side to the classic happy clown, and you can find evil clowns in many books and horror
movies. The Joker and Pennywise are two of the most famous evil clown characters.
6-38 SECTION 3
1
6
GRAMMAR
PASSIVE VOICE: PAST, PRESENT, FUTURE
First, you have to decide if the active sentence can be changed into a passive sentence. Only transitive verbs can
be changed into the passive voice.
Rule Example Reason
To review is a transitive verb in
A transitive verb can take an this sentence because it has a direct
Subject + Verb + Direct object.
object (ex. sing, perform, explain,
Object
inspire, interview, request, listen Therefore, you can change this
A journalist reviews the play.
to). sentence to passive:
The play is reviewed by a journalist.
To arrive is an intransitive verb in
An intransitive verb cannot take this sentence because it can’t have a
Subject + Verb Prep.
+
an object (ex. go, act, arrive, sleep, direct object.
Phrase
sit, clap, wait), so cannot be in the
The journalist arrived at the theater. Therefore, you cannot change this
passive voice.
sentence to passive.
In the passive voice, the subject receives the action:
In the active voice, the subject does the action, the
direct object receives the action:
A new song was written by me.
I wrote a new song.

(A song received the action ‘written’ but did not do
the writing.)
(I am the subject. I did the action ‘wrote.’ What did I
write? The object, a song.)
The agent does the action and is placed after the verb
or at the end of the sentence.
In the active voice, the main verb must be in the correct tense. In the passive voice, the passive auxiliary ‘be’ must
be in the correct tense, while the main verb is in the past participle form.
Passive Voice
Active Voice
Tense (auxiliary ‘be’ in the correct tense + past participle of the
(main verb in the correct tense)
main verb) Examples
train/trains am/is/are trained
Present Simple
The circus trains its animals to do tricks. The animals are trained to do tricks by the circus.
wrote was/were written

Past Simple John Lennon wrote the song Imagine Imagine was written in 1971 by John Lennon.
in 1971.
will sell will be sold
Future Simple The band will sell their new album The album will be sold online by the band.
online.
* If you need to review the grammar rules from previous levels, go to the Active vs. Passive Voice chart.
SECTION 3 6-39
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Read each sentence. Then, type each part of the sentence under the correct part of speech. If the
sentence does not have a certain part of speech, type an “x” in the box. Use capitalization, but do not use
punctuation.
For example: You read: He sang on stage yesterday.
You type: Subject Verb Direct Object Place Time
He sang x on stage yesterday
Part 1: 1. The band will write a new song soon.
2. The TV host will interview the bassist at his house.
3. The lead singer stands at the front.
4. The opera singer coughed during her song.
Part 2: 1. Jonathan thanked his mom.
2. The comedian will perform at the theater next month.
3. Kavi reviews ten albums every week.
4. The orchestra will be touring for six weeks.
Part 1 Subject Verb Direct Object Place Time

1. The band will write a new song x soon
2. The TV host will interview the bassist at his house x
3. The lead singer stands x at the front x
4. The opera singer coughed x x during her song
Part 2
1. Jonathan thanked his mom x x
2. The comedian will perform x at the theater next month
3. Kavi reviews ten albums x every week
4. The orchestra will be touring x x for six weeks

MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if each verb in between the asterisks (*) is transitive or intransitive.
1. The audience *clapped* after the concert. A. Transitive B. Intransitive
2. Her parents will *allow* her to go to the concert. A. Transitive B. Intransitive
3. Fans *believe* singers when they say they wrote the song just for them. A. Transitive B. Intransitive
4. The drummer *asked* the stage manager to set up his drum set. A. Transitive B. Intransitive
5. We will *arrive* late to the opera because of traffic. A. Transitive B. Intransitive
6. The audience *laughed* when the comedian told a good joke. A. Transitive B. Intransitive
7. John can’t attend your party. He’ll *be* on tour. A. Transitive B. Intransitive
8. Maisey always *suggests* tea when someone has a headache. A. Transitive B. Intransitive
9. Alissa *waits* in line for a half hour every day to buy her lunch. A. Transitive B. Intransitive
10. Will you *explain* yesterday’s homework? I don’t understand it. A. Transitive B. Intransitive
6-40 SECTION 3
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
Fill in each blank with either the active or passive voice. Use either the present simple, past simple, or
future simple.
1. I hadn’t read the article, so he [explained] what it was about. (explain)
2. I’m not sure which cities are on their tour schedule. I [will look into] it. (look into)
3. Yesterday the lead guitarist [was interviewed] by a magazine journalist. (interview)
4. Even though the concert was free, it [was suggested] we give a little money to the band as a thank you.
(suggest)
5. Ten albums [are reviewed] in every issue of the magazine. (review)
6. Seeing that orchestra [changed] my mind about classical music. (change)
7. I am sure that song [will be requested] by many people at the wedding next weekend. (request)
8. The circus [allows] children to ride on some of the animals. (allow)
9. Musicals [are loved] by millions of people around the world. (love)
10. When I was a ballet dancer, I [practiced] for hours every day. (practice)

Fill in each blank with the correct passive sentence using the given tense, subject, verb, and other key
words. If you are given the agent, type it at the end.
1. Past simple - the Broadway musical / write / Richard Rodgers.
[The Broadway musical was written by Richard Rodgers.]
2. Present simple - the main character of Alexander Hamilton / play / Joseph Morales
[The main character of Alexander Hamilton is played by Joseph Morales.]
3. Present simple - A Midsummer Night’s Dream / perform / more often than Shakespeare’s other plays
[A Midsummer Night’s Dream is performed more often than Shakespeare’s other plays.]
4. Future simple - the song / perform / the young star
[The song will be performed by the young star.]
5. Past simple - the band / allow / to perform / for an extra hour
[The band was allowed to perform for an extra hour.]
6. Future simple - the play / review / numerous magazines
[The play will be reviewed by numerous magazines.]
7. Present simple - extra ice / always / request / my dad
[Extra ice is always requested by my dad.]
8. Past simple - the review / write / in the newspaper
[The review was written in the newspaper.]
9. Past simple - the drum / break / during the show / a crazy fan
[The drum was broken during the show by a crazy fan.]
10. Present simple - concerts / often / record / for live albums
[Concerts are often recorded for live albums.]
SECTION 3 6-41
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
MAD Open Recording
First, say the number and the tense of the sentence: past, present, or future. Then, if it is an active
sentence, say it as a passive (if you can). If you can’t, say intransitive verb. If it is a passive sentence,
change it to active.
For example: You read: 1. The orchestra practices the song.
You say: Number 1. Present tense. The song is practiced by the orchestra.
You read: 2. The celebrity acted in the play.
You say: Number 2. Past tense. Intransitive verb.
1. Bruce Springsteen wrote “Born in the USA” in 1981.
Past - “Born in the USA” was written by Bruce Springsteen in 1981.
2. Many people download music from iTunes these days.
Present - Music is downloaded by many people from iTunes these days.
3. The circus will be enjoyed by my whole family.
Future - My whole family will enjoy the circus.
4. She sat close to the stage at the magic show.
Past - intransitive verb
5. Madonna will sing all her old songs at the concert.
Future - All her old songs will be sung at the concert by Madonna.
6. The animals walk across the circus stage.
Present - intransitive verb
7. My opinion about rock music was changed by him.
Past - He changed my opinion about rock music.
8. The Beatles recorded “Yellow Submarine” in 1969.
Past - Yellow Submarine was recorded in 1969 by the Beatles.
9. The band asks the audience to turn off their phones.
Present - The audience is asked to turn off their phones by the band.
10. We will clap for the comic at the end of the show.
Future - intransitive verb
11. I suggest this DJ for your wedding celebration.
Present - This DJ is suggested for your wedding celebration by me.
12. An interesting documentary about oceans was made by the BBC last year.
Past - BBC made an interesting documentary about oceans last year.

Listen to a radio interview with a musician. Read the questions, and answer them in complete sentences.
Teachers, answers may vary.
Randall: This is Randall Jones, LA’s favorite DJ, here with Tom Heff, the lead singer for King Park. Tom, tell us
how you wrote your new hit song, “John’s Running.”
Tom: Hey, Randall. Well, first of all, I didn’t write “John’s Running.” It was actually our bassist, Doug.
Randall: Wow! I didn’t know Doug could sing.
6-42 SECTION 3
1
6
GRAMMAR
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 6.3.20 - LISTEN, READ, & WRITE (Continued)
Tom: Ha! Well, actually, he can’t! So, our guitarist Danny sang it in our first recording. It sounded best when I
sang it though. We had no idea it would be so popular!
Randall: How many times do you think you’ve performed “John’s Running?”
Tom: Oh man, at least 200. Even the queen wants to hear it! Her son offered us 20,000 pounds to perform it
at her birthday party, but it was the same night as the Astro Music Awards, so we weren’t able to perform.
Randall: Ah yes, the Astros! How many awards did King Park take home that night?
Tom: I don’t want to brag, but seven, including Best Album. It was our first time winning that award, so we
were thrilled.
Randall: Fantastic! Now, “John’s Running” is your newest song, but it’s actually not your most popular, at least
not here at KZDB. Would you like to guess which song we receive the most requests for?
Tom: Not a clue! Something old, perhaps?
Randall: Correct! Your first song, “Disappointed Eyes.” Can you tell us what inspired that song?
Tom: Well, actually, my girlfriend was the inspiration. We had had a difficult relationship and broke up soon
after King Park recorded the song.
Randall: I bet she regretted that!
Tom: I hope not. I wish her well. The song was really important to me though. It made me realize how famous
we’d become when the grocery store was playing it while I was shopping for bananas.
Randall: And look how far you’ve come! Tom, I’ve heard rumors that a new album is coming out soon. When
will we get to hear anything from it?
Tom: Well Randall, you’re at the top of the list. After my mom, of course!

1. By whom was “John’s Running” written? “John’s Running” was written by Doug, the bassist.
2. By whom was “John’s Running” first sung? The song was first sung by Danny, the guitarist.
3. Who sings the song now? “John’s Running” is now sung by Tom.
4. How many awards were taken home by King Park? Seven awards were taken home by them.
5. Which song is requested most often at the radio station? “Disappointed Eyes” is requested most often.
6. By whom was “Disappointed Eyes” inspired? The song was inspired by Tom’s girlfriend.
7. Who will be allowed to hear the new album first? Tom’s mom will be allowed to hear the album first.

MAD Open Recording
Use each noun given to make a passive sentence. Add the agent to a few of the sentences and use the
past, present, and future tenses.
1. That song... 4. The celebrity... 7. The character...
2. The magic show… 5. The singer… 8. The article...
3. My friend... 6. The album… 9. The award...
SECTION 3 6-43
1
6
CONVERSATION
ACTIVITIES
ACTIVITY 6.3.22 - Opinions and Entertainment
Speak with classmates to find out their opinions on entertainment. Write their names in the boxes.
Find someone who ….
does not like the has been to a knows how to dance likes going to the has been to a
opera. concert this year. ballet. symphony. musical.
has acted on stage prefers watching prefers watching thinks the singer is
dislikes watching TV.
before. movies at a theater. movies at home. the best in a band.

likes going to the dislikes going to the prefers movies over prefers TV over thinks the drummer
circus. circus. TV. movies. is the best in a band.
has the same has the same prefers listening to prefers music on an
likes plays better
favorite movies as favorite TV show as music instead of album instead of in
than musicals.
you. you. watching TV. concert.
ACTIVITY 6.3.23 - Upcoming Local Events

LAD Pairing or Grouping Activity (Groups of 4)
Find an upcoming local event that you would be interested in attending. Then, answer the questions
about this event. Finally, speak with three classmates about the local events they found. Take notes as
you listen.
Questions: Your event: Partner 1 Partner 2 Partner 3
1. What type of event is it?
2. Where will it be?
3. When does it start?
4. How much is admission?
5. Are there an opening act and a main act?
6. Are there any reviews about this event?
If yes, read a couple. Based on the reviews,
would you go see this show?

MAD Open Recording
Choose one of the local events discussed that you would like to attend. Tell about the event details.
6-44 SECTION 3
1
6
READING
BROADWAY, NY
Broadway Theater, often only called “Broadway,” is one of the most popular theater districts in the US. Located in
Manhattan, New York, it houses 41 professional theaters that show plays and musicals. It is a big tourist attraction
for everyone visiting New York, and you will often find celebrities and well-known actors amongst the cast of
famous musicals. Tickets are very expensive and sell out quickly, so you have to plan in advance if you want to see a
specific play or musical. However, there are also many smaller entertainment businesses, like the ballet, the circus,
comedians, magic shows, symphony, or orchestra performances and sometimes even an opera. Those aren’t on
Broadway itself, but close by, and you can get cheaper tickets, even the day of.
Getting a good review on Broadway will open up the door to many more opportunities for your professional career.
Many reporters are trained critique writers who write articles or interviews with their opinion on the performances.
But a negative headline in the news can mean the end of your career as well. So, those reporters hold a lot of power
with their reviews.
A good performance critique should include the following:
1. INTRODUCTION
The introduction should answer all the w-questions: who, what, where, when. So, the names of the main actors and
the director, a short overview of the performance, the name of venue, as well as the time, and date.
2. MAIN CRITIQUE
The main part should review the production itself. What was good, what was bad, and why? What was different than
expected? How was the design of the set and the costumes? Who was a great actor/singer? Who wasn’t? Did they
make any obvious mistakes? How did the audience react to the performance? Every point should be supported by
an example.
3. CONCLUSION
The conclusion should summarize the main critiques and not add any new information. It’s okay to leave the reader
with a question or comment to think about though.
TWO CRITIQUES:
1. No more Cats!
I can’t believe that someone thought it would be a good idea to perform the musical Cats again! I was invited to go to a
premiere production at the Riverwest Theater starring Donna Hughes, Isabella Montchelli, and Francis Berg. It did not
even come close to the famous Broadway production that has been performed for over 18 years in New York.
The theater was full, but after the intermission, you could clearly see that many viewers had not returned to their
seats. I should have left too, but then I would not have seen the disaster of the second act. Donna Hughes forgot her
lines at least three times. Francis Berg appeared twice when his character wasn’t supposed to be on stage. Also, I don’t
know why Wilhelm Lewis chose Isabella Montchelli as the second lead role. I hope she was sick because her voice was
simply painful to the ears! The set looked unfinished, but the costumes were amazing. I have to give them that. It was
a disappointing performance, and I expected much better from director Wilhelm Lewis.
2. Time spent with Cats is never wasted!
Sigmund Freud was right: Time spent with Cats is never wasted! I went to the 7 p.m. premiere of the musical Cats
today. Wilhelm Lewis was the director, and he took a unique and interesting approach for this musical. Francis Berg
starred as Old Deuteronomy, Donna Hughes as Victoria, and Isabelle Montchelli as Grizabella. The story about the cat
tribe, Jellicle, and their decision about who gets to come back to a new life was well interpreted with some modern
ideas incorporated.
Costume designer Anita Sanchez did a marvelous job and made sure no costume looked like the other. Every cat
had a distinct feature and the costumes truly helped me forget a couple of the small mistakes. Some of the audience
did not seem to care for this production as they did not return after intermission. I could not wait to hear Isabella
Montchelli’s cat voice again. She truly managed to sound like a crying cat. Very authentic! If you don’t have tickets yet,
make sure to get them and see this amazing performance!
SECTION 3 6-45
1
6
READING
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the best answer for each question based on Critique 1 and Critique 2.
1. Which critique does NOT mention the venue in the introduction?
A. Critique 1 B. Critique 2 C. both D. neither
2. What is missing in the introduction of Critique 1?
A. the director B. the date C. the time D. all of the above
3. What is missing in the conclusion of Critique 2?
A. a summary B. the overview C. both A and B D. nothing
4. Which main part does NOT talk about the audience reactions?
5. Which critique does not mention a bad singer?
6. What is missing in the main part of Critique 1?
A. the set B. the costumes C. the mistakes D. nothing
7. What is missing in the main part of Critique 2?
A. the set B. the costumes C. the mistakes D. nothing
8. Which critique mentions all major actors and the director by name?
9. Which critique does NOT mention the costume designer by name?
10. Which critique recommends the play to the readers?

MAD Open Text
Type a performance critique about a concert, musical, opera, play, or movie you went to see. Be sure to
follow the guidelines and include all necessary information in the three different parts of your critique.
6-46 SECTION 3
1
6
LET’S TALK!
VIDEO - LET’S GO TO A CONCERT!
MAD Viewing
time.
Jack: Hey, Jason. I was thinking this weekend we should go down to Summerfest and check out the bands that
are playing.
Jason: Yeah, sounds great. I’ve never been.
Jack: Okay, well, what kind of music do you like?
Jason: I usually listen to alternative. I also like classic rock, but it doesn’t really matter to me.
Jack: Yeah, me too. I also like pop and R&B.
Jason: Okay.
Jack: Actually, I printed off a few of the artists playing. Why don’t we look at a few and see which ones we might
wanna* see.
Jason: Sure.
Jack: Machine Gun Kelly’s playing on July 5th at 10 p.m.
Jason: Okay yeah, I like him. Just maybe go to the next page. How ‘bout* something in the alternative range
here.
Jason: Okay, I see they’ve got Red Hot Chili Peppers at 6:30. Do you know the Red Hot Chili Peppers?
Jack: Yeah.They’re playing at the main stage. So, where do you wanna* sit?
Jason: How much would tickets cost?
Jack: It kinda* depends where you want to sit. If you’re more towards the front, it’s gonna* be way more than
in the back.
Jason: Okay. Do they have an option to sit in the grass?
Jack: Yeah, we can. The grass is located towards the middle, so I think our tickets will be about 80 bucks.
Jason: 80 dollars, okay. Yeah that sounds good to me. Have you been to Summerfest before?
Jack: Yeah, actually I went last weekend. There was a lotta* cool people playing, and what I did is I just walked
around and got to listen to a lot of people.
Jason: Great. Yeah well, let’s do that. That sounds good to me.
Jack: Okay. How about I order the tickets and then you give me cash.
Jason: Perfect, thanks!
*wanna - want to
*bout - about
*gonna - going to
*kinda - kind of
*a lotta - a lot of
LET’S TALK! 6-47

1
6
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
Decide if each statement is true or false based on the chapter video.
1. Jack and Jason want to go to Summerfest next month.
A. True B. False
2. Jason likes alternative music.
A. True B. False
3. Jack likes country as well.
A. True B. False
4. Jack wants to plan which bands they will see and look at a schedule of the festival.
A. True B. False
5. Machine Gun Kelly is playing July 5th.
A. True B. False
6. Jason also wants to listen to something in the pop genre.
A. True B. False
7. Jack doesn’t know the Red Hot Chili Peppers.
A. True B. False
8. Tickets in the front will be more expensive than tickets in the back.
A. True B. False
9. The tickets for the Red Hot Chili Peppers are about $90.
A. True B. False
10. Jack went to Summerfest last weekend.
A. True B. False
11. Jason wants to order the tickets.
A. True B. False

MAD Open Recording
Talk about your favorite concert experience. Here are some questions to guide you:
Which band/singer did you see?
What was the genre of the band?
Who did you go with?
Where was it?
Why did you choose that performance?
How much did the tickets cost?
6-48 LET’S TALK!

1
6
LET’S TALK!
INTERVIEWS - LET’S TALK ABOUT ENTERTAINMENT!
MAD Viewing
Connor Rutvik Borna

Connor: Do I have favorite TV shows? I don’t watch a ton of TV. I try to, as cheesy as this sounds,
[go outside and do other things] with my time than sit [in front of a screen]. But I do watch a lot of
sporting events whether it be, like, baseball on TV or football on TV. I get really into that. So, I don’t have
[favorite cartoons or documentaries] or anything like that. If I could interview anyone, who would it be?
Like I said, I love sports and I love the sporting world, so I’d probably pick [my favorite athletes]. Not even
anybody in particular, just, whoever I could talk to about their professional careers would be awesome. I do get
into music, so I’d say I’m pretty big into the concert scene. And I listen to a ton of different types of music, but I
would say rock & roll is probably my favorite. And the most recent concert I went to is actually [a newer band]
called Greta Van Fleet. They’re similar to Led Zeppelin, who’s also my all-time favorite, and I don’t know, I just
like that type of music and concerts in general.
Rutvik: My favorite TV show is The Office because it’s a comedy show, and I love comedy shows. I like to
laugh. [I don’t always like to be serious.] My favorite actor is Johnny Depp because he has an incredible
career. It seems like he’s in every movie nowadays. I love cartoons. I watch SpongeBob even though I’m 19.
[I love documentaries], especially when they’re about someone [because I love watching another]
person’s life story ‘cause I tend to be very inspired by that. [My favorite commercial] are the Geico ads
because they tend to be very funny and entertaining. If I could interview anyone, it would probably be Barack
Obama because I’ve read his autobiography, and [I’m very interested in his life] and in the way that he’s
carried his life. The most recent concert I’ve been to was the Logic concert in Milwaukee. It was a pretty good
concert. I’m not [a fan of his music], but the energy and the crowd were very, very lively and it was a great
experience.
LET’S TALK! 6-49
1
6
LET’S TALK!
ACTIVITIES
Borna: [My favorite TV show] has to be Money Heist. I watched it very recently. It’s actually in Spanish;
however, I use subtitles. My favorite hero is Batman because of his solidarity and the fact that he doesn’t rely on
anybody else. [I used to like cartoons] when I was a kid, but then I grew up and got a little too old for them. I
like some documentaries that are about nature, especially ones that are about the wildlife and different animals
that live on earth. [If I could interview anyone], it would be Arnold Schwarzenegger, and that’s because he’s
been so many things in his life, from an actor to a body builder to a politician. The most recent concert I went to
was Lil Uzi Vert. My brother asked me to go with him, so [I decided I’d give it] a shot. But, I don’t really like rap,
so it was pretty horrible.
LT 6.6 - LISTEN
MAD Category Match
Place each word or phrase under the correct person based on the interviews.
Connor Rutvik Borna

sporting events The Office Money Heist
athletes Johnny Depp subtitles
Led Zeppelin documentaries - people cartoons
rock & roll autobiography documentaries - wildlife
Greta Van Fleet Logic concert Schwarzenegger

MAD Open Recording
1. What’s your favorite genre of TV shows (comedy, drama, crime, romance)? Why?
2. Do you watch a lot of TV?
3. Do you use streaming services like Netflix, Hulu, YouTube, etc. to watch shows and movies?
4. If you could interview anyone, who would you interview? Why?
5. Do you read or listen to a lot of interviews?
6-50 LET’S TALK!

1
6
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

How well do I
Additional
Refer to...
I CAN... Practice
(Page = P.)
Review (R)
1. talk about film and TV using correct adjective Section 1

R. 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8
endings. P. 6-11
2. use the past perfect. R. 2, 4 , 6, 8 P. 6-7
3. discuss music using connecting words to show Section 2

R. 1, 2, 3, 6
contrast. P. 6-24
4. combine verbs and prepositions. R. 2, 3 P. 6-21
5. talk about entertainment using the active and Section 3

R. ,1, 2, 4, 6
passive voices. P. 6-39
R1 - LISTENING 1
Listen to the following radio show host talk about upcoming events in the New Orleans area. Place each
entertainment title under the correct event type and in the correct month. The order will be graded.
Radio Host: Good evening, everyone and welcome to our last half hour of the show. Now is the time to look at
what’s happening in New Orleans in the next couple of months. I hope you are ready and have your
entertainment schedules cleared. Let’s start with the theater performances. The New Orleans Theater is
premiering their modern version of an old-time classic. The play Romeo and Juliet will be performed during the
entire month of May only. Also in May, we will be welcoming Amy Schumer in our comedy club, followed
by Aziz Ansari in June, and Ali Wong in July.
These are quite the big names coming to New Orleans this summer, don’t you think?
Okay, let’s look at the next movie premieres that are coming up. New Orleans will be hosting a variety of award
shows this fall. So, all the stars and celebrities will be visiting our beautiful city. In June, there will be the
premiere of the latest Star Wars movie. I personally can’t wait for that one. May will bring the newest
non-animated Disney movie Aladdin starring Will Smith, and in July, there will be yet another Disney
movie coming to the theaters, The Lion King.
Oops! I just realized I never said anything about the months of June and July for the theater district.
Okay, let’s see….in June, the opera The Magic Flute by Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart will be performed by our
talented theater staff and our fantastic New Orleans Orchestra. July will be the month of more music when we
welcome the traveling cast of The Sound of Music from Austria to our city. This should be very interesting. Such
a classic favorite.
Okay, last but not least, let’s look at the concerts for this summer. Thanks to many sponsors, we will be having
free concerts in the park again from May through August this year. Some favorites that you shouldn’t miss are
Hootie & the Blowfish in May, Carrie Underwood in June, and Jennifer Lopez in July. Wow, those are definitely
some of the biggest stars of rock, country, and hip hop!
Well, I think this should give you a pretty good idea of what to do this summer. Have a wonderful night, New
Orleans, and you’ll hear me again next week!
CHAPTER 6 6-51
1
6
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
Concerts Theater Comedians Movies

May Hootie & the Blowfish Romeo and Juliet Amy Schumer Aladdin
June Carrie Underwood The Magic Flute Aziz Ansari Star Wars
July Jennifer Lopez The Sound of Music Ali Wong The Lion King
R2 - LISTENING 2
1. [My hands hurt because I had clapped during the entire concert.]
2. [I am frustrated because my little brother is annoying me.]
3. [He thanked me for buying him the new album.]
4. [Even though I have seen the band before, I want to see them again.]
5. [I know that the second act will be better than the first one.]
6. [That hit song was requested by many wedding guests.]
R3 - GRAMMAR 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the connecting word, adjective, or preposition that best completes each sentence.
1. It was a very ___________ time in my life.
A. embarrassed B. embarrassing
2. He was looking ___________ his watch when I saw him.
A. at B. on
3. I bought tickets to the concert ___________ I don’t like the band.
A. even though B. however
4. Does the lead guitarist remind you ___________ an old movie star?
A. to B. of
5. I am ___________ that you want to go to the ballet.
A. surprised B. surprising
6. He complained ___________ the cost of the live performance.
A. about B. of
7. The news article was difficult to understand. ___________, I read it to the end.
A. Although B. However
8. I’m going to introduce my new boyfriend ___________ my parents tomorrow.
A. at B. to
9. Were you as ___________ with the ending of the movie as I was?
A. disappointing B. disappointed
10. I used his smartphone ___________ he told me not to.
A. although B. but
6-52 CHAPTER 6
1
6
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R3 - GRAMMAR 1 (Continued)
MAD Multiple Choice
11. I was ___________ to write a song about my wife.
A. inspiring B. inspired
12. Did she thank you ___________ giving her tickets to the play?
A. of B. for
13. I really care ________ all my fans. They mean so much to me.
A. about B. at
14. She’s really ________ in classical opera.
A. interesting B. interested
15. Did you think it was a ________ article?
A. confusing B. confused
R4 - GRAMMAR 2
Read the present simple sentence. Then, in each blank type the sentence in the tense/voice given.
Present Simple: I perform a love song.
1. Present Continuous [I am performing a love song.]
2. Present Perfect [I have performed a love song.]
3. Present Perfect Continuous [I have been performing a love song.]
4. Past Simple [I performed a love song.]
5. Past Continuous [I was performing a love song.]
6. Past Perfect [I had performed a love song.]
7. Future Simple (will) [I will perform a love song.]
8. Future Continuous [I will be performing a love song.]
9. Modal (might) [I might perform a love song.]
10. Present Simple Passive [A love song is performed by me.]
11. Past Simple Passive [A love song was performed by me.]
12. Future Passive [A love song will be performed by me.]
R5 - READING
MAD Multiple Choice
The Walt Disney Company, also known as “Walt Disney” or “Disney,” is probably the most popular media and
entertainment company in the US. Disney was founded by Walt and Roy Disney in 1923. They first called the
company Disney Brothers Cartoon Studio. It produced its first silent short film Alice’s Wonderland. A real actress
was shown with some animated characters.
Walt Disney moved to Hollywood with his brother and created their first all-cartoon series with their first
character Oswald the Lucky Rabbit. Not many people will remember Oswald or think that Disney created him.
The second cartoon character is the one he is still known for today, Mickey Mouse. Fun Fact: Mickey Mouse
was first called Mortimer Mouse, but Walt’s wife didn’t like the name, so they renamed him Mickey.
Walt Disney drew the first Mickey Mouse characters, and one of his animators, Ub Iwerks, improved the design
later. The first sound animation of Mickey Mouse in 1928 was called Steamboat Willie and was a big success.
CHAPTER 6 6-53
1
6
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
MAD Multiple Choice
The brothers soon opened up more divisions of the company and created many more animated series that
they sold to different film studios. Because of the success of the various animated films, the selling of Mickey
Mouse comic strips to newspapers, and the merchandise company they also created, Walt Disney was able to
open his dream place, Disneyland. He had always hoped to create a place where children and parents could
enjoy their time together. In 1955, Disneyland was opened in California and has since grown with new
attractions every year. In 1965, Disney also announced the plans for another, even bigger, theme park near
Orlando, Florida, which was opened in 1971. He named this second theme park Disney World.
Today, the Walt Disney Company has many subdivisions:
- The Media Network contains all TV and cable channels and other production companies such as the
Disney Channel.
- Parks, Experiences, and Products deals with all theme parks, such as Disney World, and all other Disney
resorts around the world.
- Studio Entertainment holds the Walt Disney Studios as well as other animation studios such as Pixar or
Lucasfilm LTD.
- Direct-to-Consumer and International is the international business and streaming division for Disney.
Hulu and Disney+ are some of their services.
1. What was NOT a name for Disney?

A. Walt Disney Company B. Disney Brothers Cartoon Studio C. Disney Cartoon Studio
2. In which year was Disney founded?
A. 1932 B. 1923 C. 1925
3. What was their first silent short film called?
A. Alice’s Wonderland B. Alice in Wonderland C. Alice and the Wonderland
4. Which all-cartoon series did Walt Disney design first?
A. Mickey Mouse B. Oswald the Lucky Rabbit C. Mortimer Mouse
5. Who did NOT like the name Mortimer Mouse?
A. Walt Disney B. Walt Disney’s wife C. Walt Disney’s brother
6. Steamboat Willie was special because it was...
A. a big success B. the first sound animation C. both A and B
7. Walt Disney’s dream was to open...
A. Disneyland B. a movie theater C. both A and B
8. Disney World in Orlando, Florida, was opened to the public in which year?
A. 1965 B. 1971 C. 1955
9. The Disney brothers were able to open Disneyland because of the success of all EXCEPT...
A. new park attractions B. various animated films C. Mickey Mouse comic strip sales
10. How many major subdivisions of Disney are mentioned in the text?
A. 2 B. 3 C. 4
6-54 CHAPTER 6
1
6
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

REVIEW ACTIVITIES
R6 - WRITING
MAD Open Text
Write a review about a concert, theater performance, movie, or other event to which you have gone.
Use as many tenses as possible throughout your text. Here is a list of all the tenses from which you can
choose: present simple, present continuous, present perfect, present perfect continuous, past
simple, past continuous, past perfect, future simple, future continuous, and passive voice.
R7 - SPEAKING 1
Listen to each question about entertainment. Then, respond in the pauses provided using complete
1. What is your favorite TV show?
2. What type of show is it?
3. Who do you watch it with?
6. Who are the stars? Do you follow them on social media?
7. Who is your favorite character in the show?
8. Do you have a favorite episode?
R8 - SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Look at the vocabulary images from Section 1. Pick one and tell a story about it. Try to use as many
tenses as possible. Include what had happened, what is happening, and what will happen. Here is a list
of all the tenses from which you can choose: present simple, present continuous, present perfect,
present perfect continuous, past simple, past continuous, past perfect, future simple, future
continuous, and passive voice.
CHAPTER 6 6-55
1
6
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
MOVIE PROJECT
Go online to research movies that are currently playing in movie theaters in America.
Go to the following link and answer the questions below: https://www.imdb.com/movies-in-theaters/
Part A: Choose three movies and try to find the following information about those movies. Only pick
movies you are allowed to see.
QUESTIONS MOVIE 1 MOVIE 2 MOVIE 3
1. What is the movie title?
2. What is the genre/type of movie?
3. Who are the actors/actresses in the movie?
4. Have any of these actors won an award?
5. How long is the movie?
6. What is your opinion about this movie after watching the trailer?
7. What is the rating for this movie? Are there any reviews about this
movie that you can read?
8. Is this movie playing near you in a theater now?
Part B: Now choose one of the movies and click on “Get showtimes and tickets!” Find the answers to
these questions:
QUESTIONS ANSWERS
1. How much does it cost to see the movie?
2. At which theater will you see this movie?
3. At what time does the movie run today?
4. What is the price of admission in the afternoon? In the evening?
5. What is the price of admission for an adult? Child? Senior?

INFOMERCIAL
Infomercials are informative commercials on TV that are a type of entertainment. They are known for
promising viewers excellent life-changing products at very low prices. Common infomercials advertise
cleaning, fitness, cooking, or beauty products. During the commercial, the viewer sees how the product
works and how much it costs. In many cases, special offers for the products are only available if you call
“within the next 10 minutes,” and you may get free shipping, two for the price of one, or a 30-day money
back guarantee. Some famous products from infomercials include the Shamwow, Bowflex, Snuggie,
Ped Egg, OxiClean, Proactiv, and the Clapper. Have you heard of any of these products? Do you see
infomercials on TV where you live?
Make your own infomercial:
Watch a few of these well-known infomercials and then come up with your own item to sell. Teacher,
have the students bring an item from home or give the students something random in your room to
“sell” to the class. Give them 20 minutes in class to come up with an infomercial for their own item. What
is it, what is it used for, and why can’t someone live without it?
Have the class vote on and give two awards: one for the best product and one for the best salesperson
or sales team.
6-56 CHAPTER 6
1
6
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
LISTENING 1
Listen to the following radio host talk about upcoming events in the New York area. Place each
entertainment title under the correct event type and in the correct month. The order will be graded.
Radio Host: Good morning, everyone and welcome to our fall entertainment part of the show. Now is the
time to look at what’s happening in New York in the next couple of months. I hope you all have your calendars
with you, as we will be going through movies, theater performances, dances, concerts, you name it!
Let’s start with the theater performances. The New York Theater is working on its latest production as we
speak. Guiseppe Verdi’s opera Aida will premiere October 2nd and then run in the theater for a full two
months. Following Aida, the musical Hamilton by Lin-Manuel Miranda will come to town and tickets are
available for the show from December 7th through the 30th.
Now, let’s look at the newest movies that are coming up. New York is always filled with stars, celebrities, and
other important figures from the movie business. The following movies will certainly bring the biggest stars
from Hollywood to our beautiful city. In November, there will be the premiere of the latest Star Trek movie.
I, personally, am not a huge Star Trek fan. I prefer the Star Wars movies, but who am I to judge here, right?
December will bring the newest George Clooney movie to our theaters. Ocean’s Thirteen! Sorry about that, just
realized I forgot about October. All you Harry Potter fans, clear your October weekend calendar. Our New
York Theater has decided to do a Harry Potter film festival and show two Harry Potter movies each weekend.
So, the first weekend will be the 1st and 2nd movies. The second weekend will be the 3rd and 4th movies and
so on until all eight movies have been shown. I personally can’t wait for this.
Next, we have concerts. I am always excited about all the artists and bands that find their way to New York. I
love supporting them in any way possible. In December, the Trans-Siberian Orchestra is coming to town with
their winter-themed concert. I already got my tickets for the entire family. If you are interested, you should
buy yours soon as they sell out quickly! In November, we have another themed band called Thanksgiving.
How fitting, right? I am curious to see what this Portland, Oregon-based artist has to offer. In October, the
band Frightful will be playing two concerts here in New York. I mean, that could not have been timed any
better!
Last but not least, let’s look at some other forms of entertainment. The ballet of The Black Swan will be
performed at the Brooklyn Theater in October. Neil Patrick Harris is coming in November for three magic
shows at Monday Night Magic. Finally, Jeff Dunham will be bringing his puppet comedy show to New York in
December.
Well, people, I think this should give you a pretty good idea of what to do this holiday season. Have a
wonderful week, New York, and I’ll be back next week!
Concerts Theater Other Entertainment Movies

October Frightful Aida 1 The Black Swan Harry Potter
November Thanksgiving Aida 2 Neil Patrick Harris Star Trek
December Orchestra Hamilton Jeff Dunham Ocean’s Thirteen
CHAPTER 6 6-57
1
6
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
LISTENING 2
1. [We got home late because I had stayed for all three acts of the show.]
2. [I was amazed by her performance in that role.]
3. [She is complaining about the cost of admission for the magic show.]
4. [I wanted to buy tickets for the evening show, but it was already sold out.]
5. [We had requested a song; however, the DJ never played it.]
6. [My favorite celebrity will be interviewed on a talk show tonight.]
GRAMMAR 1
MAD Multiple Choice
Choose the connecting word, adjective, or preposition that best completes each sentence.
1. That performance last night made me ___________.
A. tired B. tiring
2. Do your parents approve ___________ your decision to join a band?
A. of B. to
3. I love their new album; ___________, I am not a fan of one of the hit songs.
4. Did you ask ___________ more popcorn?
A. for B. of
5. The backup dancers are ___________!
A. amazed B. amazing
6. I did not want to watch this channel, ___________ I can’t find the remote control.
A. but B. even though
7. I can’t wait ___________ this weekend. My mom and I are going to the ballet.
A. for B. at
8. Didn’t you think the magic show was ___________?
A. excited B. exciting
9. ___________ the comic was funny, I did not enjoy the show much.
A. However B. Although
10. The makeup on the actors was ___________.
A. frightening B. frightened
11. I don’t care much ___________ other people’s opinions.
A. at B. about
12. I disagree ___________ you. I think she acted really well in the movie.
A. of B. with
13. I went to the live show ___________ I don’t like the band’s music.
14. Did he forget ___________ our plans to go to the opera?
A. of B. about
15. Getting a bad review really ___________ me.
A. disappointing B. disappointed
6-58 CHAPTER 6
1
6
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
GRAMMAR 2
Read the present simple sentence. Then, in each blank type the sentence in the tense/voice given.
Present Simple: My life inspires my songs.
1. Present Continuous [My life is inspiring my songs.]
2. Present Perfect [My life has inspired my songs.]
3. Present Perfect Continuous [My life has been inspiring my songs.]
4. Past Simple [My life inspired my songs.]
5. Past Continuous [My life was inspiring my songs.]
6. Past Perfect [My life had inspired my songs.]
7. Future Simple (will) [My life will inspire my songs.]
8. Future Continuous [My life will be inspiring my songs.]
9. Modal (may) [My life may inspire my songs.]
10. Present Simple Passive [My songs are inspired by my life.]
11. Past Simple Passive [My songs were inspired by my life.]
12. Future Passive [My songs will be inspired by my life.]
READING
MAD Multiple Choice
Pixar Animation Studio is another big American film studio that is focused on computer animation movies.
When it first began in 1979 as the Graphics Group under Lucasfilm, they developed computer animations for
commercials, short films, and animated parts of other movies. One of their first animated effects for a movie
was a plant coming back to life in the Star Trek II production in 1982. Their first short film, The Adventures of
André & Wally B., premiered in 1984, featuring complex characters, motion blur, and hand-painted textures.
They also showed their Pixar Image Computer, which was later the inspiration for the name of the future
animation film studio.
In 1986, Steve Jobs purchased the Graphics Group and made it into its own company called Pixar. It was also
in that year that Pixar and Disney first started working together on computer animations. Only two years
later, the first Oscar-nominated, animated short film, Luxo Jr., was shown in theaters in Los Angeles. Pixar’s
third animated short film, Tin Toy, was produced and shown in 1988, and became the first animated short
film to win an Oscar for Best Short Film (Animated). Disney and Pixar continued their working relationships,
and in 1991 they released a statement that they would be working on at least one more computer-animated
movie together. Toy Story was the end result of that partnership, which was finished in 1995 and released
into theaters on November 22nd of the same year. It was the world’s first computer-animated feature film,
and it became the highest-grossing film of the year, bringing in over $300 million worldwide. After this big
success, Pixar decided to stop working on commercials and short animations to focus only on producing
films and movies. In 1997, Disney and Pixar released another partnership that promised five more animated
movies in the next ten years. A Bug’s Life was finished just one year later as the second computer-animated,
full-length movie.
CHAPTER 6 6-59
1
6
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
READING (Continued)
MAD Multiple Choice
From there on out, many more movies followed: Toy Story 2 in 1999, Monster’s Inc. in 2001, Finding Nemo in
2003, The Incredibles in 2004, followed by Cars in 2006. Disney then purchased Pixar and made it part of their
Disney Company. However, they decided to keep the Pixar name and gave them creative control over all of
their movies. With their 20 feature films, Pixar has received 19 Oscars (Academy Awards) as well as many
Golden Globes and Grammys. We will see what the future holds for Pixar and Disney.
1. Pixar Animation Studio was first called what?

A. Lucasfilm B. Graphics Group C. Pixar Studio
2. What did Pixar originally not work on?
A. full films B. short films C. commercials
3. In which year did Graphics Groups make an animated effect for Star Trek II?
A. 1989 B. 1979 C. 1982
4. What did the first animated short film NOT feature?
A. motion blur B. complex characters C. none of the above
5. What was the inspiration for the future name “Pixar?”
A. a movie B. a computer C. an image
6. Who turned Graphics Groups into Pixar?
A. Steve Jobs B. Walt Disney C. André
7. In which year did Pixar and Disney start working together?
A. 1984 B. 1987 C. 1986
8. Which animated short film first won an Oscar?
A. Luxo Jr. B. Tin Toy C. Wally B.
9. Toy Story was the first ___________ feature film.
A. animated B. computer-animated C. computerized
10. Pixar became part of Disney in which year?
A. 2004 B. 2008 C. 2006
WRITING
MAD Open Text
Write a review about a concert, theater performance, movie, or other event to which you have gone. Use
as many tenses as possible throughout your writing. Do not use the same answer you used in the review.
Here is a list of all the tenses from which you can choose: present simple, present continuous,
present perfect, present perfect continuous, past simple, past continuous, past perfect, future
simple, future continuous, and passive voice.
6-60 CHAPTER 6
1
6
REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

ASSESSMENT
SPEAKING 1
Listen to each question about entertainment. Then, respond in the pauses provided using complete
1. What is your favorite movie?
2. What type of movie is it?
3. Who do you watch it with?
6. Who is your favorite character in the movie?
7. Who are the stars? Do you follow them on social media?
8. How many times have you seen the movie?
SPEAKING 2
MAD Open Recording
Look at the vocabulary images from Section 2. Pick one and tell a story about it. Try to use as many
tenses as possible. Include what had happened, what is happening, and what will happen. Here is a list
of all the tenses from which you can choose: present simple, present continuous, present perfect,
present perfect continuous, past simple, past continuous, past perfect, future simple, future
continuous, and passive voice.
CHAPTER 6 6-61
INTRODUCTION
Formal Speaking Rubric Name______________________________ Topic ______________________________
Exemplary Proficient Progressing Not Meeting Standards
(Refined) (Accomplished) (Developing) (Beginning)
___ Points ___ Points ___ Points ___ Points
Excellent use of verb tenses, Very few errors in use of verb Several errors in verb tenses, Many errors in verb tenses,
word order, subject-verb tenses, word order, subject-verb word order, subject-verb word order, subject-verb
Grammar agreement, adjective agreement, adjective agreement, adjective agreement, adjective
agreement, articles. agreement, articles. agreement, articles. agreement, articles.
Generally, uses appropriate
Uses appropriate vocabulary. Few vocabulary words used.
vocabulary. Often expands Lacking expanded
Always expands thoughts Few expanded thoughts.
Vocabulary thoughts with details. vocabulary. Meaning is often
with details. Accurate and Lacking rich language. Word
Generally, uses rich word confused.
rich word choice. choice is confused.
choice.
Excellent pronunciation with No effort to pronounce
Good pronunciation with a few Average pronunciation with
Pronunciation very few if any errors. words correctly or very poor
errors. Good effort. several errors. Ok effort.
Authentic accent. pronunciation.
Minimal hesitation; flows Some hesitation; generally,

Frequent hesitation; adequately Non-communicative; lacking
well. Strong evidence of flows well. Evidence of
flows. Some evidence of in flow. Minimal evidence of
Fluidity preparation. Very polished preparation. Polished
preparation. Showed signs of preparation. Presentation
presentation. presentation.
needing more practice. lacked practice.
Somewhat incomprehensible.
Completely comprehensible. Comprehensible. Few errors Incomprehensible.
Language distorted.
Appropriate language used made, but do not interfere with Vocabulary usage errors
Comprehension Inappropriate vocabulary
to clearly convey main idea. comprehension. No English block understanding. Used
obscures messages at times.
No English present. present. English.
Used some English.
Fully addresses and
Partially addresses and/or
completes the task. Topic is Appropriately addresses and Addresses and completes the
completes the task. Topic is
well developed and completes the task. Topic is task. Topic is developed and
Content somewhat developed and of
interesting to the listener. nicely developed and interesting somewhat interesting to the
minimal interest to the
to the listener. listener.
listener.
Comments:
RUBRIC
Final Score __________
R-1
Name: ______________________________________ Final Score ___/___
Intermediate Intermediate
Advanced Intermediate Novice
Speaking criteria High Low
5 3 1 SCORE
4 2
/5
● I can use expanded ● I can sometimes expand ● I can mostly use expected ● I struggle to use expected
Vocabulary ● I can use expected
vocabulary to communicate vocabulary and ideas. vocabulary. vocabulary.
How well can I use vocabulary. ● I missed many responses or
ideas. ● I included most of the ● I missed 2-3 responses or
current and past ● I missed 1-2 responses tasks.
● I included all the required required responses or tasks.
vocabulary? or tasks
responses or tasks tasks ●
Teacher comments:
Comprehensibility ● I can be understood only with
● I can mostly be ● I can be understood with
How well can I ● I can easily be understood. ● I can be understood. great effort.
understood. difficulty.
communicate my ● No hesitations ● Minimal hesitations ● Unacceptable amount of
● Some hesitations ● Frequent hesitations
thoughts and ideas? hesitation
Teacher comments:
● My errors in grammar and
● I make minimal or no errors in ● My errors in grammar and ● My errors in grammar and
Language Control word order do not prevent ● My errors in grammar and
verb endings / word order that word order often prevent word order prevent
communication. word order sometimes
How well do I use prevent communication. communication. communication.
● Occasional word choice prevent communication.
the language? ● Accurate word choice/can talk ● Frequent word choice ● Unable to use appropriate
errors when using words I ● Some word choice errors
around words I don’t know errors. words.
do not know
Teacher comments:
Pronunciation ● Rarely prevents ● Occasionally prevents ● Frequently prevents
● Enhances communication ● Prevents communication
How well am I communication communication communication
● Pronunciation mimics native ● Pronunciation consistently
understood? ● Mostly mimics native ● Pronunciation sometimes ● Pronunciation often
sounds/phonetics resembles English
sounds/phonetics. resembles English resembles English
RUBRIC
Teacher comments:
R-2
Name ________________________________ Topic ____________________ Final Score_______
Speaking Advanced Intermediate High Intermediate Intermediate Low Novice

criteria 5 4 3 2 1
● I can use extensive ● I can use a variety ● I can use familiar
● I consistently use
vocabulary to of words and words and ● I can use limited
words /expressions
communicate ideas phrases on a phrases on words/phrases for
Vocabulary to communicate
on a wide range of range of familiar familiar tasks, common
How well can I use ideas on a wide
topics and within a topics. topics, and objects/actions.
current and past range of topics.
topic. ● I can give more activities. ● My vocabulary is
vocabulary? ● I can use expanded
● I can use culturally details and ● I can elaborate a repetitive.
vocabulary within a
appropriate elaborate on a little.
topic.
expressions. topic. ●
Comprehensibility ● I can be ● I can be understood
● I can easily be
How well can I ● I can mostly be understood with only with great
understood. ● I can be understood.
communicate my understood. difficulty. effort.
● Limited or no ● Minimal hesitation
thoughts and ● Some hesitation ● Frequent ● Unacceptable
hesitation
ideas? hesitation hesitations
● I make minimal or ● My errors in ● My errors in ● My errors in
Language ● My errors in
no errors in grammar and word grammar and word grammar and
Control grammar and word
grammar / word order do not order sometimes word order often
How well do I use order prevent
order that prevent prevent prevent prevent
the language? communication.
communication. communication. communication. communication.
● Occasionally ● Frequently
● Rarely prevents ● Prevents
Pronunciation ● Enhances prevents prevents
communication communication
How well am I communication communication communication
● Pronunciation ● Pronunciation
understood? ● Authentic native ● Pronunciation ● Pronunciation
resembles native consistently
accent sometimes often resembles
speaker resembles English
resembles English English
Teacher comments:
Name ________________________________
Speaking Advanced Topic ____________________
Intermediate High Intermediate Final Score_______
Intermediate Low Novice
criteria 5 4 3 2 1
Speaking ● I canAdvanced
use extensive ● I can use familiar
● Intermediate High
I consistently use Intermediate Intermediate Low Novice
criteria vocabulary 5 to 4 ● I can use3a variety of words2 and ● I can use
1 limited
words /expressions
Vocabulary ●communicate ideas
I can use extensive ●words andaphrases
I can use variety phrases
● I can on
use familiar words/phrases
on a wide range of ●toI consistently
communicate use on
How well can I vocabulary to ideas on/expressions
a wide ofawords
rangeand
of familiar
words tasks,
and foruse
● I can common
limited
topics and within a words familiar
use current and communicate ideas range of topics. phrasestopics.
on a topics, and
phrases on objects/actions.
words/phrases for
Vocabulary topic. to communicate ● I can give
past vocabulary? on a wide range of ● I can use range of more
familiar activities.
familiar tasks, ● My vocabulary is
common
How well can I use ● I can use culturally ideas onexpanded
a wide details
topics and within a vocabulary within a topics.and elaborate I can elaborate
●topics, and a repetitive.
objects/actions.
current and past appropriate range of topics.
topic. ●on a topic.
I can give more little.
activities. ● My vocabulary is
vocabulary? ●topic.
I can use expanded
●expressions.
I can use culturally details and ● ● I can elaborate a repetitive.
Comprehensibilit vocabulary within a
appropriate elaborate on a little. ● I can be
y ● I can easily be topic.
expressions. topic.
● I can mostly be ● ● I can be understood only
How well can I understood. ● I can be understood. understood with
Comprehensibility understood. ● I can be ● I can begreat
with understood
effort.
I can easily
communicate my ●●Limited or nobe ● Minimal hesitation difficulty. with
How well can I ● I can mostly
● Some hesitation be understood only with great
● Unacceptable
thoughts and understood.
hesitation ● I can be understood. Frequent hesitation
●difficulty.
communicate my understood. effort.
hesitations
ideas? ● Limited or no ● Minimal hesitation
thoughts and ● Some hesitation ● Frequent ● Unacceptable
● hesitation
I make minimal or ● My errors in ● My errors in
ideas?
Language ● My errors in grammar ●hesitation
My errors in hesitations
no errors in grammar and word grammar and
Control ● I make minimal or ● My errors in My word
●and errorsorder
in ● My errors in
grammar and word
Language grammar / word order do not ● Myword
errors in
order
How well do I use no errors in grammar and word grammar and
sometimes word
prevent grammar
order oftenandprevent
Control order that prevent prevent grammar
preventand word
the language? grammar / word order do not order sometimes
communication. word order often
communication.
How well do I use communication. communication. order prevent
communication.
order that prevent prevent prevent prevent
the language? communication.
● Prevents
communication. communication.
● Rarely prevents communication.
● Occasionally prevents communication.
Pronunciation ● Enhances ● Frequently prevents communication
communication Occasionally
●communication ● Frequently
How well am I communication ● Rarely prevents communication ● ●Prevents
Pronunciation
Pronunciation ● Enhances ● Pronunciation prevents
● Pronunciation prevents
understood? ● Authentic native communication ● Pronunciation often communication
consistently
How well am I communication resembles native communication
sometimes resembles communication
accent ● Pronunciation resembles English ● Pronunciation
resembles
understood? ● Authentic native speaker Pronunciation
●English ● Pronunciation
resembles native consistently
English
accent sometimes often resembles
Teacher comments: speaker resembles English
resembles English English
Teacher comments:

RUBRIC R-3
Speaking Advanced Intermediate High Intermediate Intermediate Low Novice
criteria 5 4 3 2 1
Name _____________________ Presentation/Speaking Rubric Total Points________
Not Meeting
Exemplary Proficient Progressing
Standards
Adequate Basic completion of Minimal completion
Superior completion
completion of the the task, content of the task, content
of the task, content
task, content mostly appropriate, unrelated to task
Task Completion appropriate,
appropriate, message was and/or overall
message was
message was mostly somewhat message was
understood
understood confusing. incomprehensible
Your speech was Your speech was Your speech was a Your speech was on
Fluidity and fluid, practiced and fluid with only a little choppy. the fly/lots of
Practice polished. minor stumble. pauses.
Good effort to Pronunciation and Pronunciation and No attempt to

simulate native intonation do not intonation impair simulate native
Pronunciation
intonation and interfere with comprehension intonation and
pronunciation comprehension pronunciation
Superior elaboration Adequate Basic elaboration of Minimal elaboration
of the topic and/or elaboration of the the topic and/or of the topic and/or
Variety/Grammar attempt to use new, topic and/or attempt attempt to use new minimal or no
more complex to use new language language but out of attempt to use new
language in context in context context language
Not Meeting
Name _____________________ Exemplary ProficientRubric
Presentation/Speaking Progressing Total Points________
Standards
Superior completion Adequate Basic completion of Minimal completion
Not Meeting
of theExemplary
task, content completion of the
Proficient the task, content
Progressing of the task, content
Standards
appropriate, task, content mostly appropriate, unrelated to task
Task Completion Adequate Basic completion of Minimal completion
message was
Superior completion appropriate, message was and/or overall
understood completion
message wasofmostly
the the task, content
somewhat confusing. of the task,
message content
was
of the task, content
task, content
understood mostly appropriate, unrelated to task
incomprehensible
Task Completion appropriate,
appropriate, message was and/or overall
Your
messagespeech
waswas Your speech was Your speech was a Your speech was on
message was mostly somewhat message was
Fluidity and fluid, practiced
understood and fluid with only a little choppy. the fly/lots of
understood confusing. incomprehensible
Your speech was Your speech was Your speech was a Your speech was on
Fluidity and fluid, practiced and fluid with only a little choppy. the fly/lots of
Good effort to Pronunciation and Pronunciation and No attempt to
Pronunciation
Good effort to
pronunciation Pronunciation and
comprehension Pronunciation and No attempt to
pronunciation
Pronunciation Superior elaboration Adequate Basic elaboration of Minimal elaboration
of the topic and/or elaboration of the the topic and/or of the topic and/or
pronunciation comprehension pronunciation
Superior elaboration
more complex Adequate
to use new language Basic elaboration
language of
but out of Minimal
attempt toelaboration
use new
of
language in and/or
the topic context in context of the
elaboration the topic
context and/or of
language and/or
the topic
more complex to use new language language but out of attempt to use new
language in context in context context language
R-4 RUBRIC
Not Meeting
Name :_________________ Skit Project Rubric Total Score: _______
4 3 2 1
You had no You had no more
You had more than
You had no more than 2 more than 5 than 8
10 pronunciation
Pronunciation pronunciation errors. pronunciation pronunciation
errors.
errors. errors.
You spoke grammatically You had You had between 8 You had more than
correct with only a few between 4 and 7 and 10 grammar 10 errors in
Grammar
errors. grammar errors errors grammar
You used at You used 2 or less

You used at least 5 new You used at least 3
Use of new least 4 vocab of the new vocab
vocab words when speaking vocab words.
Vocabulary words words.
Time could have You did not use

You used your time well, You used your
been better spent your time well
you covered all necessary time well,
and/or a couple and/or you missed
topics and ideas and did a covered most
topics were many topics and
Effort fantastic job presenting in topics and ideas,
missing. More ideas. Much more
front of class. You were and did a nice
preparation preparation
prepared for the skit. job presenting.
needed. needed.
Name :_________________ 4 Skit

3 Project Rubric2 Total Score: _______
1
You had no You had no more
4 than 2
You had no more 3 5
more than than 8 2 1 than
You had more
10 pronunciation
Pronunciation pronunciation errors. pronunciation
You had no pronunciation
You had no more errors.
You had more than
You had no more than 2 errors.
more than 5 errors.
than 8
10 pronunciation
Pronunciation pronunciation errors.
You spoke grammatically pronunciation
You had pronunciation
You had between 8 You had more than
errors.
correct with only a few errors.
between 4 and 7 errors.
and 10 grammar 10 errors in
Grammar
errors.
You spoke grammatically grammar
You had errors errors
You had between 8 grammar
You had more than
correct with only a few between 4 and 7 and 10 grammar 10 errors in
Grammar You used at You used 2 or less
errors.
You used at least 5 new grammar errors errors
You used at least 3 grammar
vocab words when speaking vocab words.
Vocabulary words
You used at words.
You used 2 or less
You used at least 5 new You used at least 3
vocab words when speaking vocabcould
Time words.
have You did not use
Vocabulary You used your time well, words
You used your words.
been better spent your time well
you covered all necessary time well,
and/or
Time a couple
could have and/or
You didyou
not missed
use
topics
You andyour
used ideas andwell,
time did a covered
You usedmost
your topics were
been better spent many topics
your time welland
Effort fantastic job presenting
you covered all necessary in topics
time well, ideas,
and
missing.a couple
and/or More ideas.
and/or Much more
you missed
front of class. You were
topics and ideas and did a and did amost
covered nice
preparation
topics were preparation
many topics and
Effort preparedjob
fantastic forpresenting
the skit. in job presenting.
topics and ideas, needed. More
missing. needed.
ideas. Much more
front of class. You were and did a nice
preparation preparation
prepared for the skit. job presenting.
needed. needed.
RUBRIC R-5
Student Name: _____________________________________
Speaking/Presentation Topic __________________
Comments:
Pronunciation 1 3 5 _________________________________
Fluidity/Practice 1 3 5 _________________________________
All in English/Effort 1 3 5 _________________________________
All Information Given 1 3 5 _________________________________
Student Name: _____________________________________

Comments:
Pronunciation 1 3 5 _________________________________
Student Name: _____________________________________

Comments:
Pronunciation 1 3 5 _________________________________
R-6 RUBRIC
LEVEL A1
LET’S TALK!
ENGLISH
Engage and motivate your students to develop their
speaking, listening, writing & reading skills.
Focus on speaking practice with recording and

pronunciation exercises – using speech recognition
that provides instant feedback.
Let’s Talk! uniquely combines modern communicative

pedagogy with SmartClass+ digital interactive,
multimedia technology.
Support Any-time – Any-place – Any-device learning

flexibility.
020180103 91193801261951
www.robotel.com

LTE - B1 Intermediate

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LTE - B1 Intermediate

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INTERMEDIATE B1

© Robotel Corp. 2018

First published in 2018

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be

The Publisher grants permission for the photocopying

Under no circumstances may any part of this book be

Authors: Lindsey Klein

Co-Authors: Erin Swierczek

Illustrator: Mirella Morrone

Technical Consultant: Gerry Sullivan

Collaborators: Dede Paquette

Many thanks to the participants that played a role in the

SmartClass® and Robotel® are registered trademarks of Robotel Corp.

RUBRIC R-1 TO R-6

Robotel Inc. (HQ)

Robotel Middle East

Robotel South America Robotel China

+56 9 6909 3722 +86 41184541414

 Can understand sentences and frequently used expressions

 Can use language effectively, socially & professionally

CHAPTER 1 - ALL ABOUT YOU

Review Present Simple

Review Questions in the Present

Review Present Continuous

CHAPTER 2 - FREE TIME

Review Past Simple

Review Questions in the Past

Review Past Continuous

Expansion of Alternative Comparative Forms

Past Modals of Deduction

Using will for Prediction

Review 1st Conditional

Separable Phrasal Verbs

Determiners: both, either,

Relative Clauses: Subjects

Common Verb + Preposition

My name is Jack Jones. My name is Jason Schmidt, and

Hi! My name is Emily Fields, Hello! My name is Kaitlyn Miles.

I will be able to...

• discuss daily routines. REVIEW & ASSESSMENT

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Name: The United Kingdom of Great Britain Monuments:

INTERNET SEARCH: (in your language)

SECTION 2 VOCABULARY: Describe a Person

SECTION 3 VOCABULARY: Communication Today

ACTIVITY 1.1.1 - SPEAK

ACTIVITY 1.1.2 - READ, LISTEN, & SPEAK

ACTIVITY 1.1.3 Part 1 and Part 2 - READ

ACTIVITY 1.1.4 - WRITE

ACTIVITY 1.1.6 - LISTEN & WRITE

ACTIVITY 1.1.7 - READ

1. 3rd Activity 2. 8th Activity 3. 1st Activity

4. 9th Activity 5. 2nd Activity 6. 5th Activity

7. 7th Activity 8. 4th Activity 9. 6th Activity

ACTIVITY 1.1.9 - SPEAK

The bus leaves at 8 o’clock.

She feels happy today.

FORMATION OF THE PRESENT SIMPLE

(verb + s for 3rd person singular) I shave

Regular and Irregular Verbs - Negative: Examples:

ACTIVITY 1.1.11 - WRITE

ACTIVITY 1.1.12 - READ & WRITE

ACTIVITY 1.1.14 - SPEAK

LET’S BREAK IT DOWN!